JP7160166B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to enhance the interest of the game.

JP-A-2003-325886

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result. and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means; a second effect executing means for executing a second effect including at least a predetermined specific aspect in a predetermined first effect period included in the performance execution period; A first specific effect execution means for executing a first specific effect during execution of the second effect based on the establishment of the condition, and an effect of the first specific effect executed by the first specific effect executing means. A first performance mode for determining one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode capable of suggesting that the player is more advantageous than the first performance mode. and a second production period that is included in the execution period of the first production and is later than the first production period. a third effect execution means for executing three effects; a second specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect during execution of the third effect based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition; A second effect mode for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode as the effect mode of the second specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means. an effect mode determination means, wherein the third effect execution means, when the first specific effect executed during the execution period of one of the first effects is the first effect mode, The third effect can be executed in the second effect period included in the one execution period of the first effect, and the gaming machine executes the first effect for indicating the specific determination result. a first situation in which the second performance is executed but the third performance is not executed until the first performance is completed, and the second performance is performed before the first performance is completed. a second situation in which both the third effect and the third effect are executed; The rate at which the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means in the first effect in which the first situation is established is The ratio is higher than the rate at which the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means in the first effect that is the first effect for indicating the specific determination result and in which the second situation is established. The first effect in which both the second effect and the third effect are executed is preferred over the first effect in which the second effect is executed but the third effect is not executed. This is a configuration in which the degree of expectation that the specific determination result is indicated is higher .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determining condition, and the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the performance, and a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and during the execution period of the first effect A second effect executing means for executing a second effect including at least a predetermined specific mode in a predetermined first effect period included, and a predetermined first condition being established. Based on, the first specific effect executing means for executing the first specific effect during execution of the second effect, and the effect mode of the first specific effect executed by the first specific effect executing means, the first a first effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least a effect mode and a second effect mode that can suggest that the player is more advantageous than the first effect mode; During a second performance period, which is a period included in the execution period of the first performance and is a period after the first performance period, a third performance including at least the specific mode is executed. A third performance executing means, a second specific performance executing means for executing a second specific performance during execution of the third performance based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, and the second specific performance. a second effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode as the effect mode of the second specific effect to be executed by the execution means; , wherein the third effect executing means, when the first specific effect executed during the execution period of the one first effect is the first effect mode, the one of the first effects The third effect can be executed in the second effect period included in the execution period of one effect, and the gaming machine, when the first effect for indicating the specific determination result is executed, A first situation in which the second performance is executed but the third performance is not executed until the first performance is completed, and the second performance and the third performance are performed before the first performance is completed. and a second situation in which both are executed, and one of a plurality of situations including at least the first effect for indicating the specific determination result and the first situation The ratio of the second effect mode determined by the first effect mode determination means in the first effect in which is established is the specific determination result The second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determination means in the first effect that is the first effect for showing and the second situation is established, and is higher than the ratio of the second effect mode is determined , The first effect in which both the second effect and the third effect are executed is more suitable than the first effect in which the second effect is executed but the third effect is not executed. This is a configuration in which the degree of expectation that the determination result is shown is high .

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening/closing door closed, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening/closing door opened. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is the main control in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) defines the big hit variation pattern table in the first embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (d) is the first embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table in a form; It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. 2A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. . 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows jackpot start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; 4 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot starting process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 13 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing standby state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the variable probability state in the third embodiment, (b) is a small It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in a winning state. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of the first hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the third embodiment 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed the small hit control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd execution form. 14 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the standby state effect while the left-operated winning hole is in a state where a ball can be entered in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a fourth embodiment. In the form, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the standby state effect while the right-acting winning hole is in a state where the ball can be entered. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the period length selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing interval setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the fifth embodiment. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in 6th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set as the effect mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set as the effect mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set in the sixth embodiment, and (b) ) is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode when the special symbol lottery is lost and the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is set in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment; be. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 6 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing notification start determination processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 6 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode selection process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode when the left trigger big win. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the opening effect of the left trigger jackpot in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a view showing an example of the display mode after the opening effect of the left trigger jackpot is finished. It is a diagram. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 7 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pseudo-normal state presentation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing standby state command processing 7 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the variable probability state in the first control example, and (b) is a display when a music selection menu screen is displayed during the variable probability state in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an initial layout of a music selection menu screen displayed when shifting to the music selection mode in the first control example; 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when an operation on an operation button is detected; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an item layout storage area set in the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the audio ramp control in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a song selection frequency storage area set in the RAM of the device; 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio output device in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of an audio file storage area set in the ROM of the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a music data group in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the transition of the state of a big hit in a 2nd control example, and the transition of a sound mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between transitions in the state of the jackpot and transitions in the parts of the music when it is determined that the reproduction order is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 set for the jackpot in the second control example. . FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between transitions in the jackpot state and transitions in music parts when it is determined that the playback order is to be rearranged at rearrangement determination timing 2 set for the jackpot in the second control example. . FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when it is determined that the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in the jackpot in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; . FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a rearrangement determination table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example; It is the figure which showed typically the content of the ending production|presentation selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the second control example; 9 is a flow chart showing main processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending effect start determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 9 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing music selection period setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing interval command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing music command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing main processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot music related process performed by MPU in the audio|voice output device in a 2nd control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing 9 executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a music selection menu screen in the third control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of a big win with a simulated small round effect set in the third control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example. . FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a random music selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 10 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing song determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing a pseudo small round lottery process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flow chart showing round number command processing 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flow chart showing interval command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 10 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a pseudo-small round lottery table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice ramp control device in the fourth control example. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a priority rule table set in a ROM of the . FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a chorus loop determination table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the fourth control example; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing music piece determination processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a chorus part loop process executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 11 executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a pseudo small round lottery process 11 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing round number command processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing music selection period setting processing 11 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing history area setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing interval command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing selected music setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; 14 is a flow chart showing provisional music selection command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing processing during a provisional music selection period, which is executed by the MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a number-of-plays-in-effects storage area set in the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing history area setting processing 12 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 12 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a case where a game ball reaches the closed gate valve in the eighth embodiment from above, and (b) is a view of the gate valve in the eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing a case where the gate induction valve is opened in a state in which the game ball is parked on the upper surface, (c) shows that the game ball that has been parked with the gate induction valve opened in the eighth embodiment falls. It is the figure which showed the case where the gate guide valve was closed immediately after doing. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball in the eighth embodiment is rolling on the inner wall of the 3-hole croon, and (b) is a game ball entering the MAX operation winning opening It is a diagram showing a state in which the non-electric accessory is released in conjunction with. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending effect when the jackpot ends with the special MAX operation winning port opened in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (waiting state effect) during the jackpot standby state when the jackpot is won during the MAX zone in the form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when the number of times of time saving ends during the MAX zone in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a MAX zone in the eighth embodiment It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the MAX zone ends by entering the ball into the special MAX operation winning opening in . It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to an eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 12 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 12 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start processing 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 12 executed by an MPU in an audio ramp control device in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning hole type command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of a lottery device in a ninth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device with both the ball discharge door and the ball stop portion closed in the ninth embodiment, and (b). [Fig. 10] is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door is opened while the game ball entered inside the lottery device in the ninth embodiment is stopped. (a), (b) is a top view of the distribution rotary body in 9th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement pattern of each part of a lottery apparatus when it becomes a small hit by lottery of the 2nd special design in 9th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the special small winning effect for the low expectation in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a special small winning effect for the high expectation in the ninth embodiment is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment, (b) is the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment, (b) is the main control in the ninth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the content of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the device. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment. a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an expectation selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a ninth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing 13 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing V passage detection processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 13 executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing expectation level suggestion setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing V winning opening command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing V passage detection processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the modified example of the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the lottery apparatus periphery in 10th Embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view of the guide channel and its surroundings in a state in which both the upper opening/closing door and the lower opening/closing door are closed in the tenth embodiment; (b) is an enlarged front view of the upper opening/closing door in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 12C is an enlarged front view of the guide flow passage in a state where the door is open and the lower door is closed; FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view of the periphery of the guide channel in the state; It is a top view of the distribution rotary body in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement pattern of each part in the lottery apparatus during execution of the small winning game in 10th Embodiment. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an open pattern set for a small hit attacker when the first special symbol lottery in the tenth embodiment results in a small hit. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an open pattern set for a small winning attacker when a small winning is achieved in the second special symbol lottery in the tenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection production|presentation performed when it becomes a small hit by the lottery of the 1st special design in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when the V challenge small win is won in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an effect when the normal small win is won in the tenth embodiment It is the figure which showed the temporal change of the aspect. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the tenth embodiment It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the special-figure 1 small hit table set to ROM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the special figure 2 small per table set to ROM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is an enlarged front view of the guide channel and its surroundings of the lottery device in the first modified example of the tenth embodiment; It is the figure which showed the special opening pattern set when the special small hit of the 2nd special design in the 1st modification of 10th Embodiment is elected. (a) and (b) are top views showing a portion on the right side of the ball discharge door in the guide channel of the lottery device in the second modification of the tenth embodiment. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the operation support production|presentation in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a character image in a character mode with a low degree of expectation is displayed during execution of an operation support effect in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a character image in a character mode with a high degree of development expectation is displayed during execution of an operation support effect in the embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing an effect period when the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of super reach. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the first action of the mini-character preview effect is executed in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second action of the mini-character forewarning effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an action is executed; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode of the mini-character preview effect in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini-character when the mini-character advance notice effect is set for the variation pattern that is too long in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 11C is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character when a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect is set for the variation pattern out of normal reach in the eleventh embodiment; 20 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between variation times and action timings of mini characters in the eleventh embodiment when a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect is set for variation patterns of winning normal reach; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment, when a mini character announcement effect with medium expectations is set for the variation pattern out of normal reach, (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment when a mini character announcement effect with a medium expectation level is set for the variation pattern of the hit normal reach; (c) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment, when a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect is set for the variation pattern out of normal reach, (d) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the action timing of the mini character in the eleventh embodiment when a high-expectation mini character announcement effect is set for the variation pattern of the winning normal reach. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state of the normal symbol in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. . (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a character mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 20C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for (before completion), and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for hit (after completion of development) of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment. is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a table for deviation (before completion of development) of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing the deviation of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a table for (after completion of development); (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a mini character effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a win table; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a normal small winning table of the mini character effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a non-small winning table of the mini character effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hit time effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment, (b) is a small hit time effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for small hits H14 to J14, and (c) schematically shows the defined contents of the table for small hits K14 to M14 of the small hit production selection table in the eleventh embodiment. is a diagram shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start process 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing 14 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing operation support effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing development determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing character mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing mini-character setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a limit period setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 14 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting classification command process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing operation content command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 14 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing cheering effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing action timing determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing action command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a top view of a guiding channel of a lottery device in a twelfth embodiment; (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the operation support production|presentation in 12th Embodiment. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of selecting the item of volume setting during execution of the operation support production|presentation in 12th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement pattern of each part in the lottery apparatus during execution of the small winning game in 12th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a twelfth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twelfth embodiment; . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a button mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; (b) is a diagram of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the hit (non-operation) table, and FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the hit (operation) table of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment; is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for deviation (non-operation) of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a deviation ( operation) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for operation. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing 15 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing 15 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing processing when up and down buttons are pressed, which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing left and right button depression processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the light amount setting in 12th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing game balls to flow down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that shoots game balls to the front area of the game board 13 and guides the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing game balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or when a predetermined reach is reached, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are operated in accordance with the operation. will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player is arranged to hit the game ball onto the front surface of the game board 13. Inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for controlling the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of game balls during a period of pressing operation, and a variable switch for detecting the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation. A game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the player, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stopping switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball shooting unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball shooting unit 112a. may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Also, the number of game balls detected may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving game balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a 1 ball entrance 64 , second ball entrance 640 , variable winning device 65 , operating winning port 660 , variable display device unit 80 , etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of inner frame 12 . The general prize winning port 63, the first ball inlet 64, the second ball inlet 640, the variable prize winning device 65, the operating prize winning port 660, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear parts of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front surface of the game board 13. A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of the ball. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and a game ball is is flowing down). Also, the game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the prize winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper left part in FIG. 2), there is provided an operating winning hole 660 into which a game ball can enter. This operation winning hole 660 shifts to a jackpot state (special game state) which is an advantageous state for the player when a game ball enters. More specifically, when a special symbol (first symbol) lottery determines a big win, a state (big win standby state) is set in which entry of a ball into the operation winning opening 660 is validated. In addition, even if a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 in normal times, it does not affect the game at all. In the jackpot standby state, when the player shoots the game ball toward the operating winning port 660, the game ball enters (wins) the operating winning port 660 to start the jackpot. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotational speed is arranged on the left side of the operation winning opening 660 in front view. Since this rotating member 670a can take an arrangement that prevents the game ball shot toward the operating winning opening 660 from moving in the direction of the operating winning opening 660, and an arrangement that does not prevent it, the rotating member 670a can be rotated. The game ball cannot be entered into the operation winning opening 660 (starting the jackpot) unless the game ball is launched aiming at the timing at which the moving member 670a is arranged so as not to interfere with the game ball. Therefore, when the lottery for the special symbols is determined to be a big hit, the game ball can be shot in consideration of the arrangement of the rotating member 670a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the operation winning opening 660 is provided at the end of a flow path (operation winning opening flow path) having a width wider than one game ball and narrower than two game balls. A game ball launched with a predetermined range of launch intensity (for example, a range of launch intensity of 95% to 100%) including at least the maximum momentum (shooting intensity) reaches (flows into) the operating winning port flow path. is configured as Therefore, when it is judged as a big win in the lottery of the special symbols and the big win waiting state is entered, when aiming at the operation winning opening 660, it is possible to easily rotate the handle 51 to the maximum movable range. A game ball can be entered into the operation winning hole 660 .

A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 . A game ball shot with a predetermined shooting intensity (for example, shooting intensity in the range of 90% to 95%) hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the central portion while its momentum is attenuated. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, and the game ball enters normally. When passing through the ball opening 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a normally closed is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or a predetermined number of game balls are won. until), and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, since a large amount of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot types of special symbols, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided. (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "jackets A to C" are the jackpot types that can be determined when a special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 results in a jackpot. , and the three types of "jackets D to F" are jackpots that can be determined when a special pattern lottery executed when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win. It is a type. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the lottery for the first special symbol, and the game ball will be called the lottery for the first special symbol. The special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is called a second special symbol lottery.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined by the type of the entrance. , and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern hits, the second ball entrance 640 is opened by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). be released. It should be noted that normally, the second ball entrance 640 is closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, the ball flowing down toward the second ball entrance 640 from above in the front view becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 640 because it is blocked by the electric accessory 640a. . On the other hand, in the case of winning the normal pattern, the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the ball flowing down toward the second ball entrance 640 easily enters the second ball entrance 640. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is facilitated.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is changed to the first pattern display device 37. , and is also shown in the second symbol reserve lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols.

When the "jackpot A" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8-round jackpot). On the other hand, when it becomes "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 5 rounds (5 rounds jackpot), and when it becomes "jackpot D", the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 16 rounds (16 rounds When it becomes "jackpot E" and "jackpot F", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 10 rounds (10 round jackpot). Further, when ``jackpot A'', ``jackpot B'', ``jackpot D'', and ``jackpot E'' are obtained, the state is shifted to a special pattern high probability state (during the probability change of the special pattern) after the jackpot is finished. In addition, when the high probability state of the special design is given, the hit probability of the normal design is also increased (the time saving state of the normal design is given). The high-probability state of the special design and the time-saving state of the normal design continue after the end of the big win until the next big win. On the other hand, when the "jackpot C" or "jackpot F" is reached, the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided after the completion of the jackpot, but the high-probability state of special symbols is not provided. The time-saving state of the normal symbols provided after the end of the "big win C" or "big win F" ends when the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called "special symbol high probability state" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state It is a game state that easily shifts to (jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbols). In addition, the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' (high-probability state of normal symbols) refers to a gaming state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (low probability state of normal design), which means that the probability of winning normal design is normal, that is, during time saving Indicates a low probability of winning.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 5 rounds) for all jackpot types. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "probability variable state of the special symbol" provided after the big win is configured to continue until the next big win, but it is not limited to this. For example, the period during which the "probability variable state of special symbols" continues may be limited until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of times of lottery to be "probability variable state of special symbols" and the number of times of lottery to be "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be different. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the lottery frequency according to the classification of a jackpot.

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power supply, etc., it is always set to "low probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols". Then, when any of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", and "jackpot E" is obtained, the "special pattern low probability state" is shifted to the "special pattern variable state". , "Normal pattern normal state" to "normal pattern time saving state". In this case, the set "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the "jackpot C" or the "jackpot F" is achieved, the game shifts to the "low-probability state of special symbols" and the "short-time state of normal symbols". After that, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the jackpot (“jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “special pattern variable state” and “ordinary pattern time saving state”) The "jackpot E") is referred to as a "variable probability jackpot". On the other hand, the jackpot (“jackpot C”, “jackpot F”) in which only the “ordinary pattern time-saving state” is given 100 times after the jackpot ends is called “normal jackpot”.

A plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). A pattern display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The lighting state indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of game balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls.

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, The number of balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed, but also indicates that the jackpot type (special symbol corresponding to the jackpot AF) (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 6(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.6(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 9 types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is configured to imitate the numbers "1" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "1" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. that cover almost the entire front of the wooden box. An even number is attached to the lower right side of , in green, small, and displayed in front of the attached symbols.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a probability variable jackpot (any one of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, and “jackpot E”), add one of “1” to “9” A variable display is performed in which the displayed main symbols are aligned. Also, in the case of a normal jackpot (“jackpot C” or “jackpot F”), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added. That is, there is a possibility that the variation display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned, only in the probability variation jackpot. Even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, by configuring it so that there is a possibility of performing a variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, even when the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the probability variable jackpot It is possible to play a game during the jackpot with the expectation that the player will win the jackpot. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. In addition, in the probability variable jackpot, the rate at which the variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned is set to, for example, 60%. In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is started by the variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, it is notified that the probability variable jackpot was achieved during a predetermined period of the jackpot (for example, during the round period of 5 rounds). A production is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Further, when the combination of the big winning symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big winning is decided, and the standby state effect indicating the big winning waiting state is displayed. be. The details of this waiting state effect will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, by entering (winning) a game ball into the operation winning opening 660 during the jackpot standby state, the jackpot starts and a jackpot animation (opening effect) is displayed.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 even though the player continuously shoots the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the third symbol is stopped. Most of the cases where the displayed state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) are due to the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games because the player has quit the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball enters. executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is the number of held balls, which is the number of game balls (hold balls) that have not been changed among the game balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. The advance notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of ball entries is reserved up to four times for each type of ball inlet, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of held balls based on the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds2 displays the number of held balls. It is configured to display a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the number of balls entered into the 2-ball opening 640 . In the example of FIG. 6(b), the left half of the small area Ds1 displays four reserved ball numbers, while the right half does not display any reserved ball numbers. It shows a state in which there are four reserved balls of the symbol, but the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state, As a stop symbol after the end of variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" are displayed as the normal symbol (second symbol). A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up the symbols of . In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which game balls can easily enter the second ball inlet 640 . The number of passages of game balls passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, the maximum number of held balls passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, and is three times or less. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which game balls can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 draws a first special symbol, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display corresponding to the result of the lottery. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when game balls enter. In this first ball entrance 64, a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Nails and the like are arranged so that it is easier to enter a ball than a game ball hit to the right (a game ball hit to the right).

A second ball entrance 640 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. When a game ball enters the second ball inlet 640, a second ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 draws a second special symbol, and the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the result of the lottery. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, so basically only game balls that flow down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 enters the ball.

A right variable prize winning device 65 is arranged in the lower left direction of the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a laterally elongated rectangular right specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In addition, a left variable winning device 650 is arranged in the lower left direction of the right variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front. The left variable prize winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate covering the left specific prize winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. I have it. The opening/closing plate is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes. In the closed state of the opening/closing plate, since the opening/closing plate and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, the game ball can pass through the front side of the opening/closing plate. In addition, the opening/closing plate tilts to the lower side of the front surface, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the game ball easily enters the left specific winning hole 650a. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the big win has been confirmed (that the right to the big win has been obtained). Then, in the jackpot standby state that has shifted due to the confirmation of the jackpot, the game state is transitioned to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out by entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660. do. In this special game state, the right specific prize winning port 65a and the left specific prize winning port 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until a predetermined number of game balls have been won). be. That is, the opening/closing door 65f1, which normally closes the right specific winning hole 65a, is opened by the first round of the big win (special game state), and the ball can enter the right specific winning hole 65a. Become. Ten prize balls are awarded each time one game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a. In addition, in each round after the second round of the jackpot (special game state), the left specific winning hole 650a is opened and the ball can be entered. As with the right specific winning opening 65a, the left specific winning opening 650a also gives 10 winning balls each time one gaming ball enters.

Note that the right specific winning hole 65a, the left specific winning hole 650a, and the above-described second ball entry hole 640 enter the game balls that have flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (game balls that have been hit to the right). It is placed in a position where the ball is possible (easy to enter). In other words, the game ball that has flowed down the left channel of the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position where it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of prize balls (gain a profit) during the big win, the player should hit the game ball to the right. Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the right variable winning device 65 is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined downward in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. As a result, when the player hits to the right with the opening/closing door 65f1 closed and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65, the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 65 is tilted. The ball can be made to flow down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and the ball can be entered into the out hole 66 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball shot by hitting to the right from staying on the upper part of the right variable winning device 65 (the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the left variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the right variable winning device 65, so when the left specific winning port 650a is opened, the right variable winning device 65 A game ball that has flowed down in the lower left direction in a front view along the slope enters the left specific winning hole 650a.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the conditions for ending each round of the jackpot (reclosing the opened right specific prize winning port 65a or the left specific prize winning port 650a) are the conditions for the jackpot round (open It is made different according to the type of specific winning opening). Specifically, in the first round (the round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), 30 seconds have passed since the open/close door 65f1 was opened, or two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning opening. When the player wins (enters the ball) in 65a, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the first round ends. On the other hand, in each round after the second round of the jackpot (the round in which the left specific winning hole 650a is opened), 30 seconds have passed since the left specific winning hole 650a was opened, or 10 or more games have been played. When the ball enters the left specific winning hole 650a, the left specific winning hole 650a is closed and the round ends.

In addition, in the right variable winning device 65, a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right specific winning hole 65a is provided inside the right variable winning device 65. FIG. Therefore, there is a time lag between when the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a and when the ball is detected. More specifically, it takes about 0.5 second from when the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a to when the number of entering balls is actually counted. In other words, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the number of game balls that satisfies the end condition of the round enters the right specific winning hole 65a until the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed. Therefore, if game balls can be additionally entered during this 0.5 seconds, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than usual (when only the number of winning balls that satisfies the upper limit of the end of the round is won). . In the first embodiment, in one round (the round in which the right specific winning hole 65a is opened), the player intentionally enters more than the number of game balls that are the conditions for ending the round into the right specific winning hole 65a. It is configured to be able to sphere. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the fact that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of winning prizes (number of winning balls) specified in each round wins (wins) the specific winning port 65a is called "over winning". called.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, but in the first embodiment, in order to make it easier to generate over-winning, after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the opening and closing door The upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so that the period until it completely passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is long. With this configuration, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, it becomes easier to add a plurality of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball is entered into the operating winning prize opening 660 to start the jackpot (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). ), all game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be entered into the opened right specific winning hole 65a. As described above, the first round of the jackpot ends when two or more winnings (balls) are detected in the specific winning hole 65a. However, if the first round of the jackpot can be started in a state in which three or more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 before the start of the jackpot, three or more game balls enter the right specific winning port 65a. By winning (entering a prize), more prize balls than originally (prize balls for two winning prizes) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that affects the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot according to the timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660, so that the jackpot standby can be provided. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable during the state. In order for the game ball to reach the open/close door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, the game ball should not enter the operating winning opening 660 (the game ball should not enter the operating winning opening flow path (see FIG. 2)). It is sufficient to hit to the right with a firing intensity (less than 95% firing intensity) that does not flow in).

Next, referring to FIGS. 4 and 5, the structure of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 will be described. First, FIG. 4(a) is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening/closing door 65f1 closed, and FIG. 4(b) is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening/closing door 65f1 opened. It is a front perspective view.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is provided with projections 65f1a to 65f1c provided to prevent game balls from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is prevented from flowing down by the projections 65f1a to 65f1c, so it flows down on the opening/closing door 65f1 along the outer periphery of the projections 65f1a to 65f1c. That is, on the opening/closing door 65f1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the projections 65f1a to 65f1c. For this reason, compared to the case where the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are not provided (that is, the case where the game ball can flow down the opening/closing door 65f1 linearly from the right direction to the left direction in front view), the opening/closing door It is possible to lengthen the period required for the water to flow down the upper surface of 65f1. As a result, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, it becomes easier to add a plurality of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball is entered into the operating winning prize opening 660 to start the jackpot (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). ), it is possible to over-win more game balls.

FIG. 4(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4B, the opening/closing door 65f1 slides from the front side in front view toward the back side in front view, and moves inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. be stored. As a result, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball flowing down from the right direction of the right variable winning device 65 can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the height of the opening for housing the opening/closing door 65f1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is flowing down when the opening/closing door 65f1 starts to slide. It is possible to suppress the game ball from being stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 slides into the game board 13, the game ball on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be dropped into the specific winning hole 65a.

Here, in the first embodiment, the period required for one game ball to completely pass through the opening/closing door 65f1 is set to about 4 seconds. The shooting interval of the game balls (the interval from shooting one game ball to shooting the next game ball) is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. As a result, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, it is possible to additionally shoot about six game balls. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, about 7 game balls are continuously shot toward the variable winning device 65, and then about 7 games are played by entering the game balls into the operation winning hole 660. The first round can be started while the ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. That is, the opening/closing door 65f1 can be opened and all game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to acquire more prize balls than originally (prize balls for two prizes), so in the jackpot standby state, the operating prize opening is operated in a state in which more game balls reach the open/close door 65f1. The player can be devised to enter the game ball into 660 . Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be improved. As a result, in the jackpot standby state, the game ball is entered into the operation winning port 660 while the game ball is flowing down the opening/closing door 65f1, thereby providing a game property capable of intentionally generating over winning. can provide.

In the first embodiment, three protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, so that the game balls pass through the opening/closing door 65f1. Although it is configured so that the passage period is long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, or in addition, the material of the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 has a higher coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, etc.). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body, etc.), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, providing an uneven surface, etc.).

In the first embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when two or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed, the first round It was configured to terminate. That is, the end condition was set so that if the player hits right, the upper limit number (two) of game balls are almost certainly entered into the specific winning hole 65a to end the first round. It is not limited to this. For example, even if a right-handed shot is aimed at the right specific winning hole 65a after the start of the first round, the first round may be completed in a period of time during which it is difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a before 0.5 seconds have passed, the first round may be configured to end. When configured in this way, if the game ball is not passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660, even one game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to provide a game property that increases the possibility that the first round will end without making a ball. Therefore, a player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round is made to launch a game ball toward the opening/closing door 65f1 before entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 in the jackpot standby state. It is possible to entertain the game property of aiming at the operation winning hole 660 later. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be improved.

FIG. 5 is a top view of the opening/closing door 65f1 viewed from the vertical top side. As shown in FIG. 5, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of game balls are embedded in the zigzagging path on which the game ball can (easily) roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. . These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other at a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f output H (high) when a game ball is placed above them, and output L (low) when there is nothing to obstruct the above. It consists of an optical sensor. In the first embodiment, the combination of the outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored by the audio lamp control device 113 side. During the jackpot standby state, an effect suggesting the approximate number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be executed according to the combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. . That is, it is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage when a game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 . As a result, more game balls are entered into the operation winning hole 660 at the timing when it is suggested that more game balls are flowing down on the opening/closing door 65f1 according to the content of the effect, thereby increasing the number of game balls. A game ball can be more easily awarded an over prize. Therefore, the player can more easily aim for over winning. The details of the waiting state effect executed during this jackpot waiting state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 7(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode during the standby state production executed in the jackpot standby state. As shown in FIG. 7(a), when the game enters the jackpot standby state, a display area HR1 in which characters "jackpot confirmed!" The display content of the display area HR1 makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the big win has been confirmed (the right to win the big win has been obtained). Further, below the display area HR1, a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbols finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the variable display effect executed before the big win standby state is displayed. . By displaying the final stop pattern even during the big win standby state, the player can easily confirm at any timing whether the current big win is a variable probability big win or a normal big win.

On the right side of the final stop symbol when viewed from the front, a vertically elongated chance meter CM divided into six small areas in the vertical direction is displayed. Each area constituting the chance meter CM is configured to be variable between a mode of appearing to be unlit and a mode of appearing to emit light, and the number of small areas appearing to appear to emit light determines the operation prize. It is configured to suggest the degree of advantage when a game ball is entered into the mouth 660. - 特許庁More specifically, the number of small regions is determined in order (preferentially) from the lower small region according to the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. It is configured to be set to look like it emits light (lighting mode). That is, in the chance meter CM, game balls corresponding to the number of small areas that appear to emit light (lighting mode) are passing through at least the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). It is suggested that it is possible to win a prize to the right specific prize winning port 65a). Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the small areas that appear to emit light in the chance meter CM will be referred to as a "gauge", and the number of small areas that appear to emit light will be referred to as a "gauge number". The change in the appearance of the emitted light will be referred to as "accumulating the gauge".

At the bottom of the final stop pattern, "Aim for 'GO!' to charge the meter! ! ”, the characters “Aim right at the right timing!!”, and an image suggesting to aim at the operation winning opening 660 are displayed in the display area HR2. According to the display contents of the display area HR2, the player can aim at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) marked with "GO!" It can be easily understood that the gauge number of the displayed chance meter CM can be increased. As described above, the chance meter CM has a variable number of gauges in conjunction with the detection contents of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f arranged on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. By shooting a game ball with a shooting intensity (shooting speed) to the extent that the ball enters a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the game ball also reaches a variable winning device 65 arranged downstream thereof. can be made Therefore, by continuously shooting game balls in the direction in which the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is arranged, the game balls continuously reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. do. In this state, by shooting a game ball aiming at the operation winning hole 660 according to the display contents of the display area HR2 (that is, with a shooting intensity of 95% to 100%), a big win is started and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. be. As a result, the game ball flowing down the opening/closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning hole 65a. As described above, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotational speed is provided on the left side of the operation winning port 660 in front view. Since this rotating member 670a can prevent a game ball from entering the operation winning hole 660 according to its rotating position, it is possible for the player to not only check the gauge number of the chance meter CM, but also rotate it. The game ball can be shot at the shooting timing considering the rotational position of the member 670a. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

FIG. 7(b) is a diagram showing a state in which three gauges of the chance meter CM are accumulated. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the game ball is passing above the three passage detection sensors 228c to 228e, the outputs of these three sensors become H (high). The audio lamp control device 113 detects the number of sensors with H output and reflects it in the mode of the chance meter CM. In the example of FIG. 7(b), since the outputs of the three sensors (passage detection sensors 228c to 228e) are H, the chance meter CM is displayed in a state in which three gauges are accumulated. In this way, the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is detected by the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the gauge number of the chance meter CM is calculated according to the detection result. , it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand when to aim at the operation winning hole 660 . Therefore, even a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning hole 660.例文帳に追加As a result, even a player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, by suggesting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, the game balls are sent to the operation winning opening 660. Although it was configured to suggest the degree of advantage when entering the ball, it is not limited to this. For example, the gauge number of the chance meter CM may be used to indicate the degree of advantage of the big win. Specifically, for example, by suggesting the type of jackpot based on the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, it may be configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage when the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 . Further, for example, the number of rounds for the big win may be set to be unfixed when the big win is confirmed, and the number of rounds for the big win may be drawn by lottery at the timing of passing through the operation winning opening 660.例文帳に追加Then, by suggesting the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 according to the number of gauges, the number of rounds when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 is suggested. It may be configured to suggest the degree of advantage to the player.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. At the lower right corner of the game board 13, an affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided. The certificate stamp or the like pasted on the pasting space K1 can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . A game ball that has not won any winning hole is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out game balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). I have. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbols are used. , a stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. and are used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. Also, the RAM 203 is provided with an execution area 203c, which stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, which are targets for the lottery. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter When the value of C1 coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 9(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the The value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is It will be the one at the time of the special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. display mode.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are two random numbers that become a jackpot with special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in the table (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 2 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/200". It should be noted that the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit is common to the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 20 random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the values "0 to 19" are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( See 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)). In this way, when the probability of special symbols is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big win is 20 out of 400 random numbers, so the probability of a special symbol being a big win is "1/20".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win and the value of the first win type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the big win type is "jackpot A" ( 8 round definite variable jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "5 to 64" is "jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "65 to 99" is "jackpot C". (5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (16 round probability variable jackpot) when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "5 to 64" is "jackpot E" (10 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "65 to 99" is "jackpot F". (10 rounds normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that six types of winning (jackpots A to F) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. It is

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (execution area 203c when special symbol lottery is not being executed). In addition, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). be.

It should be noted that, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A table for time is selected, and "completely out" is less likely to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11(a) to 11(d). As shown in FIG. 11(a), this variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d1 for big hits (see FIG. 11(b)). , At least a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11(c)) and a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(d)) are defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 11(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is a large winning. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Selection is made from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for failure. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the low probability state of the special symbol. . When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for the outlier reach, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" Normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range, "150 to 197" out of range Super reach (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 11(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , and in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach reach) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is stored in the RAM 203 as a normal symbol. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203d.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 10(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for normal design low probability (period in which normal design is normal state), and for high probability of normal design hit than low probability (normal design) It is divided into two types, one for a time saving state) and the other, and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each is set differently (see FIG. 10(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the values are "5 to 28". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained and the second pattern display device is obtained. At 83, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second As a symbol), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and the second pattern display device is obtained. At 83, variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lighted and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a buffer for the counter shown in FIG. 12, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O memory. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 9(a). FIG. 9(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the above fixed value data. ing.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery results. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0, 1" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a1 in FIG. 9(b)), and the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state), "0 to 19" is defined as the range of the judgment value judged to be a big hit (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big winning defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(b)) , is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 determines A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per one is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" in association with "jackpot A". (See 202b1 in FIG. 10(a)). This "jackpot A" has 8 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable special pattern state" and a "ordinary pattern short-time state" are given until the next big win. . Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value of "jackpot A" is five, so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds among the first special pattern jackpots, and is given an advantageous "special pattern variable state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" after the jackpot. , is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 64" in association with "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 10(a)). . This "jackpot B" has five rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable special pattern state" and a "ordinary pattern short-time state" that continue until the next big win are given. . Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are "jackpot B", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B" is determined. ratio is 60% (60/100). Although this "jackpot B" has a small number of rounds, as with the "jackpot A", an advantageous "variable special pattern state" and a "normal pattern time-saving state" are given after the end of the jackpot, so the game can be played. It is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous for people.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "65 to 99" in association with "jackpot C" (see 202b3 in FIG. 10(a)). . This "jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot to which a "time-saving state of normal patterns" is given, which continues until the lottery of special patterns is completed 100 times after the completion of the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values are the "jackpot C". ratio is 35% (35/100). This "jackpot C" has a smaller number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is also disadvantageous compared to the "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", so it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" for the second special symbol in association with "jackpot D". (See 202b4 in FIG. 10(a)). This "jackpot D" has 16 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable state of special symbols" and a "reduced working hours state of normal symbols" are given until the next big win. . Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become "jackpot D" is 5, so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 64" in association with "jackpot E" (see 202b5 in Fig. 10(a)). . This "jackpot E" has 10 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is a jackpot to which a "variable special pattern state" and a "ordinary pattern short-time state" are given until the next big win. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are the "jackpot E", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 60% (60/100). Although this "jackpot E" has a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot D", the game state after the jackpot ends is an advantageous game state similar to the "jackpot A", "jackpot B" and "jackpot D". is set, it is a kind of jackpot type that is advantageous for the player.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "65 to 99" in association with "jackpot F" (see 202b6 in Fig. 10(a)). . This "jackpot F" has 10 rounds, and after the jackpot is finished, a "time-saving state of normal patterns" is given, which continues until the lottery of special patterns is completed 100 times. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values become the "jackpot F", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 35% (35/100). This "jackpot F" has more rounds than the first special symbol jackpots ("jackpot A" to "jackpot C"), but the game state after the jackpot ends is disadvantageous, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is a jackpot type.

In this way, when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, the lottery of the second special pattern is more popular than the lottery of the first special pattern because the jackpot type has a larger number of rounds than the lottery of the first special pattern. is advantageous for the player. The ratio between the probability variable big win and the normal big win is set to be the same (65% for the probability variable big win and 35% for the normal big win) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10(b)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c1 in FIG. 10(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit.

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, so the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number counter. 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, variable probability flag 203h, time saving medium counter 203i, ball waiting flag 203j, jackpot start flag 203k, jackpot medium flag 203m, and other memory area 203z at least have.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area 203c. (Refer to FIG. 12) is shifted (moved), and based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a special symbol is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area 203c, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The execution area 203c is a storage area in which the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are stored for use in executing the special symbol lottery. The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c are compared with the above-described first winning random number table 202a, first winning type selection table 202b, etc., and a special symbol lottery is executed.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). In other words, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

If the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, so it is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to shift the prize winning data stored in other reserve areas into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol (first symbol) variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero. 1 is added up to 4 (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 22).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24 S405 reference). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the change display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is suspended from the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of pitches, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. 1 is added up to 4 (see S410 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number ( This is a counter that counts the number of standby times up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 26).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d (S705 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d (S703 in FIG. 27: No).

The variable probability flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the variable probability flag 203h is ON, it indicates that the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The probability variable flag 203h has an initial value set to off, and when a probability variable jackpot (one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", and "jackpot E") is achieved, the jackpot It is set to ON at the end (see S1215 in FIG. 32). Further, the variable probability flag 203h is reset to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 22).

This probability variation flag 203h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 23). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if it is ON, the first per random number table 202a for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)) Based on, A lottery for special designs will be held. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B).

In addition, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time-saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 26). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203h and the time saving counter 203i to be described later are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and the probability variation flag 203h is on, or if the value of the time saving counter 203i is 1 or more, It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)) (see S609 in FIG. 26). . On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state, and the second random number table 202c for low probability (FIG. 10 ( (See S610 in FIG. 26). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 26, S620).

The time saving medium counter 203i is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0 and the variable probability flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203i for reducing time is set to 0, and the special pattern lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and every time a normal big win is made, the value is set to 100 at the end of the normal big win. (See S1214 in FIG. 32). Also, regardless of the type of jackpot, when a jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, the value is set to 0 during setting of the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 22).

When the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203i and the state of the probability variation flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203h is on. For example, it is determined that it is during the time saving of the normal pattern. In this case, based on the second winning random number table for high probability, a lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S609 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is normally determined as a normal state of the design, and based on the second hit random number table for low probability, the normal design lottery is performed (see S610 in FIG. 26).

The ball entry standby flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a jackpot standby state in which the start of the jackpot is waited until a game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 or not. If this ball entry standby flag 203j is ON, it means that the game is in the big win standby state, and if it is OFF, it means that the game is not in the big win standby state. This entry standby flag 203j is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the big win has passed (see S220 in FIG. 22). Also, the ball entry standby flag 203j is set to OFF when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1104 in FIG. 31). While this ball entry standby flag 203j is on, the ball entry into the operation winning opening 660 is treated as valid (when the ball entry is detected, the jackpot is started).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203k is ON, it means that it is time to start a jackpot (the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 and the jackpot waiting state is finished), and if it is OFF, the jackpot. It means that it is not time to start This jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1103 in FIG. 31). Also, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1203 in FIG. 32).

The jackpot flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the big-hit flag 203m is on, it means that the big-hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the big-hit is not in progress. The jackpot medium flag 203m is set to ON as soon as the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1203 in FIG. 32) when a jackpot is won by a lottery of special symbols. Moreover, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1217 in FIG. 32). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), this big-hit flag 203m is referenced to determine whether or not a big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 22).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, an opening/closing door for closing or opening the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the 65f1 and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a rotating body motor 670c for rotating the rotating member 670a are connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them via the output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the game ball. be. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. - 特許庁

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable display effects ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound ramp control device 113 monitors the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and from the number of sensors whose output is H (high), roughly determines the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1. configured to be comprehensible. Then, in the jackpot standby state, the mode (gauge amount) of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is varied in accordance with the number of game balls grasped according to the number of sensors. As a result, the player can visually see the amount of prize balls obtained when the game balls are entered into the operation winning opening 660 (the number of game balls entered when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened). can be easily understood. Therefore, during the jackpot standby state, the ball is hit to the right with a firing intensity (less than 95% firing intensity) that does not reach the operation winning port 660 more positively, and more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. you can try. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot waiting state.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the performance contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and includes rough variation contents (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command, and more detailed variation. Used to determine content. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a fluctuation time counter 223f. , a standby state effect flag 223g, a level counter 223h, a game state storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected in the main controller 110, each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning Based on the value, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information. is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110, and the second special The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol reserved ball number The value of the counter 203f cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. A number of balls command is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command The value of the reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4308 in FIG. 36). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. Therefore, while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 and the second special The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of reserved ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c correspond to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. 203f, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. can be changed while synchronizing with Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4302 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S4502 in FIG. 38). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 34), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4305 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4507 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display. When a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in variation time counter 223f.

The standby state effect flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) is being executed. If this standby state effect flag 223g is ON, it means that the standby state effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, it means that the standby state effect is not being executed. This standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON when a standby state command indicating that the jackpot standby state has been received from the main control device 110 and the start of the standby state effect is set (FIG. 37). (see S4403 of ). Also, this standby state effect flag 223g is set to OFF when an opening command indicating the start of a big win is received from the main controller 110 (see S4406 in FIG. 37).

The level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number (level) of the chance meter CM displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). The value of the level counter 223h is updated in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f (see S4204 in FIG. 35). That is, the number of sensors whose output is H (high) is set as the counter value.

The game state storage area 223i is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. This game state storage area 223i is updated each time a state command output each time a change occurs in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is received from the main controller 110 (see S4310 in FIG. 36). The game state storage area 223i is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lower The 2 bits are "01B", and in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223i.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a time-lapse timer that measures the presentation time. is doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 39).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . FIG. 16 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 16C, on the display screen of the main image at the time of power-on, a variation image at the time of power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. 16(b) and 16(c), the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 17A and 17B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 17B shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 17, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sand beach stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", as shown in FIG. It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 15). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 6(b)) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. be. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

Further, image data corresponding to the main symbols with no numerals "1" to "9" are also resident in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "young man" and "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are permanently stored in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character data in the resident video RAM 235 is changed. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is jackpots A to F. In either case, a stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state and that the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a, which are normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. , and the round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display one of the back surfaces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from the back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 19).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 39). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7705 in FIG. 51(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 41B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 41(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6308 in FIG. 41(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 51A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 51(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 20) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing of V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed (FIG. 41(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 20), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (FIG. 41(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7307 in FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7813 in FIG. 52). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7814 in FIG. 52). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 53).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 41B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 to 32. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the game ball in the through gate 67 is executed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . The main controller 110 instructs the shooting control device 112 to shoot a game ball when the game ball shooting is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current state is the jackpot waiting state or the special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the entering ball waiting flag 203j and the jackpot flag 203m is ON. As a result of the determination, if it is in the jackpot waiting state or the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the jackpot standby state nor the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202). , If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) Acquire (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (first (S208), and determines whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209). .

In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207 (S212), and the processing proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S213), and this process is terminated. The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the variable time counter for measuring the variable time is updated (S214), and the updated variable time counter is updated. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to F is determined.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED. When the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. , the green LED is lit, and if the jackpot is D, the blue and green LEDs are lit; if the jackpot is E, the red and green LEDs are lit, and the jackpot is F. In this case, the blue LED, the red LED and the green LED are lit. If it is out, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the counter 203i during time saving is reset to 0 (S219). Then, the ball entry standby flag 203j is set to ON, and a standby state command indicating the start of the jackpot standby state is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S223. The standby state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the standby state command, it issues a display standby state command for starting the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is set as a command to be output to the display control device 114 . As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the standby state effect is started.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special design (S218: No), whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether it is a normal working time saving state of the design) ) is determined (S221), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223 do. On the other hand, in the processing of S221, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203i is 0 (S221: No), the processing of S222 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S223. In addition, although omitted for illustration, when the value of the time saving medium counter 203i after subtraction in the processing of S222 becomes 0, the game state has been changed from the time saving state of the normal design to the normal state of the normal design. A status command is set to indicate The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

In the process of S223, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the state command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (whether or not a special symbol big win) or a "special symbol omission" is made (determination of success or failure), and the first symbol is selected. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c is obtained (S301).

Next, the variable probability flag 203h is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols (S302). In the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203h is ON, it is determined that the special symbol is in the variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203h is OFF, it is determined as the low probability state (not the variable probability state) of the special symbol. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability time Based on the big hit random number table, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, 20 random numbers from "0 to 19" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number that becomes the winning. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with the winning random number value (that is, "0, 1"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(a)) to determine what the jackpot type is. do. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is a big hit A (8 round probability variable big hit). If it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot B (5 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is a jackpot C (5 rounds of normal jackpot). Determine (see FIG. 10(a)). On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined as a big win D (16 rounds of probability variable big win), If it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot E (10 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (10 rounds normal jackpot) ( See FIG. 10(a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to F). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to F) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( time).

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol is displayed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed in the device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-reach.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

After the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 30). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22).

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a start winning a prize, processing for executing the holding processing of the values indicated by the various counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S407). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S411, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is Stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and proceeds to the processing of S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S413, a pre-reading process is executed for pre-reading the win/loss from the various counter values acquired based on the start winning (S413), and the process ends. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this look-ahead processing (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current starting winning processing (see FIG. 24). (S501), if no new ball is detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit (S502: No), whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entering ball is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is obtained according to the current game state and the result of the read-ahead of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held ball does not include a jackpot, the current game state and the timing of starting the variable display based on the entered ball detected this time match, so the current game state is the probability variable state. It is determined that In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, there is a possibility that the game state is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the variable probability state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the hit ball detected this time is in the probability variation state.

In the processing of S503, if it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the entrance detected this time is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance where the entrance was detected and the high probability time Based on the first winning random number table (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start time is a low probability state of special symbols (S503: No), the type of entrance where the ball is detected and the first random number table for low probability (Fig. 9 202a1 in (b)), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

In the process of S506 that is executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of entrance where the current ball is detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this processing ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the audio ramp control device 113 stores the type of entrance notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the prize winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal design variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and the variation display of the normal design (second design) performed in the second design display device 83, the second entrance This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640, and the like.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times of suspension M of variable display in normal symbols) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608). Incidentally, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, whether the probability variation flag 203h is on, or if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol time saving state Then, if the variable probability flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the game is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607, the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)).

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the design is out of line (see 202c1 in FIG. 10(b)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S611: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. . On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (the normal symbol is out) (S611: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. .

In the process of S614 executed after the process of S612 or S613, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal symbol (probability variation flag 203h is ON, or the time saving counter 203i is 1 or more) (S614), normal If the symbol is in the time-saving state (S614: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a normal symbol time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0) (S614: No), the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is set to 30 seconds (S616), and this processing is terminated.

Also, in the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S617). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S615 or the process of S616 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the processing of S617, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or S613.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S619). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S619: Yes), then, whether it is in the time saving state of the normal design (that is, the probability variation flag 203h is ON, or the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more) (S620), and if it is not in the time saving state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" After setting (S621), the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the normal pattern is in the time saving mode (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times” (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time and the number of times of opening determined in the process of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and the process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and determines whether or not the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

The game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S916, S917).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S916, S917) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the process of S917 ends, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. After the processing of S910 is completed, the probability variation flag 203h, the time saving counter 203i, the entering ball standby flag 203j, and the big hit flag 203m are read (S911), and the read probability variation flag 203h, the time saving counter 203i, the entering ball standby flag 203j, sets a state command for notifying the game state indicated by the jackpot middle flag 203m (S912). After the processing of S912 is completed, the drive start of the rotating body motor 670c is set (S913), the interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later. The drive setting of the rotating body motor 670c set by the process of S913 is not changed until the power is turned off. As a result, while the gaming machine is powered on, the rotating member 670a can always be rotated at a constant speed. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, the game ball is placed aiming at the timing at which the rotation position of the rotating member 670a does not hinder the game ball from flowing down (flying) in the direction of the operation winning opening 660 with respect to the player. Since the ball can be shot, the player can enjoy shooting the game ball with good timing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue rotating at a constant speed while the game machine is powered on, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be changed between an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not interfere with it. Only the rotating member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is constant, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be variable. By configuring in this way, the degree of difficulty of entering the game ball into the operating winning hole 660 becomes higher, so when the game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. can please.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 24). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, when shooting a game ball, a ball shooting signal is transmitted to the shooting control device 112 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), then in the jackpot standby state, the entry of the ball into the operation winning opening 660 is monitored, A jackpot start process is executed for starting a jackpot when a ball entering the operation winning opening 660 is detected (S1004). The details of this jackpot start process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S1004 is completed, next, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, jackpot control for executing the jackpot effect and opening or closing the right specific prize winning port 65a and the left specific prize winning port 650a of the variable winning device 65 Processing is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the right specific prize winning port 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) or the left specific prize winning port 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have won. do. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1005 ends, next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of times set in the processing of S621 or S622 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 , the variable display is started. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "x" as normal symbols (second symbol) are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or S613 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time, that is, until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the initial setting processing (see S901 in FIG. 29) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this jackpot start process (S1004) is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening 660 and starting the jackpot when the ball is detected.

In this jackpot start process (see FIG. 31), first, it is determined whether the ball entry standby flag 203j is on (S1101), and when it is determined that the ball entry standby flag 203j is off (S1101: No) Since it means that the current state is not the jackpot waiting state, the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the entering ball standby flag 203j is ON (S1101: Yes), it means that the current jackpot standby state is in progress. It is determined whether or not an entering ball is detected (S1102). In the processing of S1102, if it is determined that the ball entering the operation winning opening 660 has not been detected (S1102: No), it is not the start timing of the jackpot, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if it is determined that the ball has entered the operation winning opening 660 (S1102: Yes), the start of the big win is set, and the big win start flag 203k is set to ON (S1103). ). Then, by setting the incoming ball standby flag 203j to OFF, the big win standby state is ended (S1104), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control processing (S1005) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30). 65a, and processing for opening or closing the left specific winning port 650a.

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (ie, whether the jackpot start is set) (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect. In addition, in the first embodiment, the opening period is 0.1 seconds, and one round is started with almost no time difference after detecting the entry of the game ball into the operation winning opening 660 (the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened). ) configuration. By configuring in this way, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be almost entered into the right specific winning hole 65a when the ball enters the operation winning hole 660. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily determine the timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 . After the process of S1202, while setting the flag 203m in a big hit to ON, the big-hit start flag 203k is set to OFF (S1203), and this process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203m is on (whether a special symbol is in the middle of a big hit) (S1204). . In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is off (the special symbol jackpot is not in progress) (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is ON (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205), and whether it is the start timing of a new round If (S1205: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1206). More specifically, if this time is the start timing of the first round, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened to set the right specific winning opening 65a to an open state, and if it is other than the first round, the left specific winning opening 650a is set. to be open. When the process of S1206 is finished, next, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1207), and this process is finished. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) are met. Determine (S1208). Specifically, if the current round period is one round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the right specific winning opening 65a, or the game is played after opening the right specific winning opening 65a. When it is detected that two or more balls have entered the right specific winning hole 65a, it is determined that the closing condition is established. Also, if the current is a round period other than the first round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the left specific winning opening 650a, or after opening the left specific winning opening 650a When it is detected that 10 or more game balls have entered the left specific winning hole 650a, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the processing of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is met (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening set in the open state (Right specific winning opening 65a or left specific winning opening 650a) is set to be closed (S1209), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1208 that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is not established (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1210). Specifically, when all the rounds in the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state are completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1210, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), an ending command is set (S1211), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the processing of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212), and it is determined that it is not the end time of the ending effect. If so (S1212: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1212, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212: Yes), it is determined whether the current big win is a probability variable big win (any of the big wins A, B, D, E). It is determined (S1213).

In the processing of S1213, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not (that is, the normal jackpot) (S1213: No), by overwriting the value of the counter 203i during time saving with 100, 100 times of normal symbols after the jackpot is completed. A time period is set to be given (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1216. On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1213: Yes), by turning on the probability variation flag 203h, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1216.

In the process of S1214, or in the process of S1216 that is executed after the process of S1215, the gaming state after the jackpot is completed (the variable state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol, or the low probability state of the special symbol, And set a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 (S1216), set the end of the jackpot (S1217), and end this process.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 33, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. 34) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 34), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

In the processing of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is ON (S4002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4117, It is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( S4006), and the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 34). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed. This is after a power failure has occurred, and when the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

After the processing of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) (S4011), and the game state storage area 223i is displayed according to the analysis result. data is updated (S4012). As a result, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After the process of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processing of S4010 to S4013 is executed, and the process proceeds to the main processing.

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed because S4102 to S4111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol pending ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the processing of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

When the processing of S4109 ends, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S4110 ends, next, effect update process is executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. In the effect update process (S4111), the effect mode (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)) of the effect during the standby state executed in the jackpot standby state is detected by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Control is executed to vary according to the detection result of . Details of this rendering update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4112). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4113). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S4114, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4116), and the power is turned off. Processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, details of the rendering update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode in the standby state effect.

In the effect update process (see FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201), and if it is determined to be off (S4201: No), the current standby state effect is executed. Since it is not in progress (there is no possibility of updating the effect mode), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is ON (S4201: Yes), the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is counted ( counting) (S4202).

When the process of S4202 is completed, it is determined whether the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 and the counter value of the level counter 223h match (S4203). As described above, the level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The number of gauges of the chance meter CM is varied in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Therefore, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the count value of the level counter 223h is different from the count value in the process of S4202 (S4203: No), the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 has changed. etc. means that the display mode of the chance meter CM and the number of sensors whose output is H (high) are out of alignment. By doing so, it is updated (S4204). Then, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated to the mode of the number of gauges corresponding to the value of the level counter 223g updated in the process of S4204 (S4205), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 and the value of the level counter 223g match (S4203: Yes), the current passage detection sensors 228a to 228f Since the output matches the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and there is no need to update the display mode of the chance meter CM (the presentation mode of the standby state presentation), the processing of S4204 and S4205 is skipped and left as it is. End this process.

By executing this effect update processing (see FIG. 35), the state of the chance meter CM can be updated in correspondence with the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, by referring to the mode of the chance meter CM, it is possible to play a game aiming at the game ball entering the operation winning hole 660 while the number of gauges is greater. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the player should aim at the operation winning opening 660 . Therefore, even a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning hole 660.例文帳に追加As a result, even a player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, during execution of the standby state effect, every time the effect update process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the output status of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f and the chance meter CM Although it is configured to determine whether there is any discrepancy with the gauge number (whether the aspect of the chance meter CM should be updated), the frequency of updating the aspect of the chance meter CM may be reduced. Specifically, for example, during execution of the standby state effect, the processing of S4203 may be executed only once every 0.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Next, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This process is for

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4301). In the process of S4301, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4302), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S4303), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4301: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4304). When the stop type command is received (S4304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4306). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4307). . Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4307: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 The value of (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special design holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the second special symbol N2) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4308). In addition, in the processing of S4308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the updated values of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4308 ends, this process ends.

Here, the number-of-holding-balls command is when the game ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the main controller 110 Since it is transmitted from, each time the starting winning prize is detected, or each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203e and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S4308 is executed, the values of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are displayed for notification to the display control device 114. Number commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S4307: No), then it is determined whether or not a state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S4309: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the received command (S4310). That is, based on the information corresponding to the game state notified by the state command, when the probability variable state of the special design and the time saving state of the normal design are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "11B". , and when the special symbol low probability state and normal symbol time saving state are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "01B", and the special symbol low probability state and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4309 that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4311). In the processing of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of entrance where the new start winning was detected, and the lottery result information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4312), and the process ends.

In the processing of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), then the winning-related command (any of the standby state command, opening command, number of rounds command, and ending command) is issued. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4313). Then, when it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), win-related processing for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command is executed (S4314), and this End the process. The details of this hit-related process (S4314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4313, when it is determined that the command related to the big win is not received (S4313: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4315), and this process ends. In the process of S4315, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the winning-related processing (S4314) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this win-related processing (S4314).

In the hit-related process, first, it is determined whether or not the standby state command is received (S4401), and if the standby state command is received (S4401: Yes), the display standby state for starting the standby state effect A command is set (S4402). The standby state command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display standby state command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a standby state effect for notifying that the game is in the jackpot standby state. When the processing of S4402 ends, next, the waiting state effect flag 223g is set to ON to indicate that the waiting state effect is being executed (S4403), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4401 that the standby state command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4404). If (S4404: Yes), the display opening command for starting the opening effect is set (S4405), and the end of the standby state effect is set by turning off the standby state effect flag 223g (S4406). End the process. The display opening command set in the process of S4405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the big win.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the opening command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4407). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4407: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S4408). ). The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing of S4408, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4407 that the round number command has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S4409). Then, when it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), a display ending command for starting the ending effect is set (S4410), and this processing ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4410 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S4409, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), this process ends. By executing this winning-related processing (see FIG. 37), appropriate control can be executed in response to various winning-related commands.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S4506. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4502), and then S4303 of the command judgment process (see FIG. 36). In the process of , the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4504). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the process of S4505, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area.

In the processing of S4506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4506). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4506: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. The setting process (see FIG. 38) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S4506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4507), and then the processing of S4306 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) , the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4508). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4508, a display stop type command is set (S4509), and this process ends. By receiving this stop type command for display, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to stop and display the third pattern in the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display. be done.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 53. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first data in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234 d 1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used as a processor, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, following the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is cancelled, , a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7602 in FIG. 51A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 41(a). FIG. 41(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 41(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the rear image after change is sent to the image controller 237 . A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 20, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the stop type command for display is detected, it corresponds to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to F, front and back reach, reach other than front and back, complete loss) Then, the stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 43(b). FIG.43(b) is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpot A to F, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display standby state command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), If there is a standby state command for display (S6408: Yes), the standby state command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the standby state command processing (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing standby state command processing. In this standby state command processing, processing corresponding to the standby state command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the standby state command process, first, the display data table for standby state effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for standby state effect is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set display data table for standby state effect, time data is set in the clock counter 233h. (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the standby state command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no standby state command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display opening command is determined (S6410). If there is a command (S6410: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the timer counter 233h (S6803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the If there is a round number command for use (S6412: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. 45(b). FIG. 45(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description continues. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is an ending command (S6414: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S7001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description is continued. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6416: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). . Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102. .

Further, in task processing (S6304), if it is specified to display either back face A or B depending on the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S7102 is determined. , the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no back image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). Otherwise (S6418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. 47(b). FIG. 47(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202. Processing is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the type.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7202 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 43(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7302), S7303-S7304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7401).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304), or if it is determined in the process of S7303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7303: No), then the process proceeds to S7305.

In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). Time data corresponding to the presentation time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), and the process proceeds to S7507.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the display data table is the standby state rendering display data table. (S7505), if it is the display data table for standby state effect (S7505: Yes), in the effect time of the display data table for standby state effect set in the display data table buffer 233d The corresponding time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S7506), and the process proceeds to S7507.

In the process of S7507, the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7507), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7505, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for waiting state effect (S7505: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by one. (S7508), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and for each sprite, Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S7310), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7602), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7601, that is, if it is turned off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7702). In the process of S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Also, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and this processing is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S7601: No in FIG. 51A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A and S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (see FIG. 48, S6303). The information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Also, in the processing of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the processing of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not ended (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the process of S7805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

In the processing of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S7813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7813 (S7813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal image transfer setting processing is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed every time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 41(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65, which pays out prize balls when a game ball enters the jackpot, is closed, and the right specific prize winning opening 65a is closed. In a state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so that a game ball can flow down. The upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so as to allow the number of game balls that exceeds the number of entering balls (that is, two), which is the condition for ending the first round, to flow down at the same time. In other words, after one game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, until it passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the number of entering balls (that is, two) that is the end condition of the first round is It is configured so that more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. As a result, at the timing when the first round is started (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened), the more game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the more game balls flowing down on the opening/closing door 65f1. , the ball can be entered from the opened opening/closing door 65f1 to the right specific winning hole 65a, and more prize balls can be won. Therefore, at the start timing of one round of the jackpot, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, so that the interest of the player at the start of the first round is improved. can be made

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured such that when a special pattern lottery results in a big win, the game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 as a trigger to start the big win. As a result, the player can adjust the timing of starting the first round of the big win by adjusting the timing of shooting the game ball toward the operation winning hole 660, which is more advantageous for the player. It is possible to realize a game property in which a game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 660 by targeting the timing (that is, the timing when more game balls are passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). Therefore, it is possible to vary the amount of prize balls (privileges) that the player can obtain during the predetermined period of the jackpot (until the end of one round) according to the skill of the player (the timing of aiming at the operation winning hole 660). The timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 can be determined more seriously. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot standby state from when the jackpot is confirmed until the jackpot is started, when the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660, the player can receive A possible benefit (the number of prize balls) is suggested to the player by an effect mode (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to understand the timing at which the operation winning opening 660 should be aimed. Therefore, even a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can realize easy-to-understand game characteristics, so that a game machine that is difficult for the player to shy away from can be provided. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, by providing three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the game ball is configured to detour around the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and the game ball moves around the opening and closing door. Although it is configured such that the transit period for passing through 65f1 is long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 is set to have a higher friction coefficient than other portions (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the right variable winning device 65, etc.). It may be made of a material with a high tensile strength (for example, an elastic body), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, providing unevenness on the surface).

In the first embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds have passed, the first round was configured to end the That is, the end condition was set such that if the player hits to the right, the upper limit number (two) of game balls are almost certainly entered into the right specific winning hole 65a to end the first round. , but not limited to these. For example, after the first round is started, even if the player hits rightward aiming at the right specific winning hole 65a, the first round may be finished in a period of time during which it is difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or 10 or more game balls have entered the right specific winning hole 65a before 0.5 seconds have passed, one round It is good also as a structure which ends an eye. When configured in this way, if the game ball is not passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660, even one game ball enters the right specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to provide a playability that increases the possibility that the first round will end without hitting the ball. Therefore, a player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round is made to launch a game ball toward the opening/closing door 65f1 before entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 in the jackpot standby state. It is possible to entertain the game property of aiming at the operation winning hole 660 later. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be improved.

In the first embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the operation winning opening 660. Although the configuration suggests the degree of advantage when the ball is thrown, it is not limited to this. For example, the gauge number of the chance meter CM may be used to indicate the degree of advantage of the big win. Specifically, for example, by suggesting the type of jackpot based on the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, it may be configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage when the game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 . Further, for example, the number of rounds for the big win may be set to be unfixed when the big win is confirmed, and the number of rounds for the big win may be drawn by lottery at the timing of passing through the operation winning opening 660.例文帳に追加Then, by suggesting the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 according to the number of gauges, the number of rounds when a game ball is entered into the operating winning hole 660 is suggested. It may be configured to suggest the degree of advantage to the player.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue rotating at a constant speed while the game machine is powered on, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be changed between an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not interfere with it. Only the rotating member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

In the first embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotating member 670a is constant, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured. By configuring in this way, the degree of difficulty of entering the game ball into the operating winning hole 660 becomes higher, so when the game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. can please.

In the first embodiment, the waiting state effect suggests the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) when the big win is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in place of or in addition to the degree of advantage when the big win is started, an effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the big win itself may be executed by a standby state effect. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the game state after the jackpot (whether or not it is a variable probability jackpot), the number of rounds, or the like. In addition, when executing an effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the big win itself, it does not have to be executed during the big win waiting state. For example, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the third symbol may suggest the degree of advantage of the big win itself during execution. Also, the degree of advantage of the big win itself may be suggested during the opening period, the round period, the ending period, or the like.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the type in which a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery and the jackpot starts when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 has been described as an example, but the specifications are different. may be applied to the pachinko machine 10. For example, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot is started when a game ball enters a specific area on the game board 13 . That is, the type of pachinko machine 10 (so-called two-type type) that is not equipped with the function itself for performing the special symbol lottery, or the function of performing the special symbol lottery is installed, but what is the special symbol lottery result? Regardless, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a jackpot is started when a game ball enters a specific area (so-called one type and two types mixed type). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the advantage of the first round of the big hit according to the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 when the game balls enter the specific area.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the state shifts to a big win standby state, and a game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 during the big win standby state. It was configured to start a jackpot when Also, the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be provided only at one place on the upper right side of the game board 13 . That is, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot starts unless the game ball is shot toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and entered into the operation winning hole 660. It was configured to not be.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 661, left operation winning opening 662) are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13 to trigger the start of the jackpot. is provided, and according to the type of jackpot, the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is changed. In addition, the left operation winning opening 662 is configured such that a game ball enters almost automatically in a relatively short time (approximately 0.5 seconds) when it is in a jackpot standby state. In other words, in the case of the jackpot type that triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. . In other words, it is configured to provide a jackpot type that makes it impossible for the player to aim for an over-winning in the first round. As a result, it is possible to set a jackpot type that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot type that cannot aim for over-winning. Differences can be made.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the process has changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 54, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, on the upper right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, a right operating winning opening 661 into which a game ball can enter is provided instead of the operating winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. This right operation winning port 661 is an operation winning that triggers the start of six types of jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2 among the eight types of jackpots (jackets A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. is the mouth. This right-operating winning port 661 is entered only during the jackpot standby state that is shifted when one of the six types of jackpots (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) is obtained in the special symbol lottery. configured to be determined to be valid.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, on the lower left side in front view with respect to the first ball entrance 64, a left operation winning opening 662 into which a game ball can enter is provided. This left operating winning port 662 is an operating winning port that triggers the start of two types of jackpots C2 and E2 among the eight types of jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. That is, in the jackpot waiting state that shifts when either jackpot C2 or E2 is obtained in the lottery of special symbols, it is an operation winning port where it is determined that the entry of the game ball is valid. As shown in FIG. 54, a storage device 675 is provided above the left operation winning port 662 in a front view. This storage device 675 is configured to be able to store only one game ball that has flowed down from vertically above. The storage device 675 can receive and store a game ball that has entered the storage device 675 (prevent the flow of the game ball) at the lower end of the flow path configured with a width that allows one game ball to flow down. A storage valve 675a is provided which can be changed between a closed position and an open position where the game ball is discharged downward from the storage device 675 without hindering the flow of the game ball entering the storage device 675. there is

The storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is changed to the open position when the big win standby state is set, and is changed to the closed position at the end of the big win. As shown in FIG. 54, the left operation winning port 662 is arranged directly below the storage device 675, so when the game balls are stored in the storage device 675 and the game balls are stored in the jackpot standby state, the storage valve 675a is opened. As a result of the accumulated game balls flowing downward due to the opening, the game balls enter the left operation winning opening 662 immediately after the big win standby state (after about 0.5 seconds). Here, in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened). Aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left is the most profitable game method for the player. When the game ball is shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64, the game ball also flows down in the direction of the storage device 675 arranged on the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁As a result, during normal times, the game balls are almost stored in the storage device 675 until the big win is achieved. Therefore, when either of the jackpots C2 and E2 occurs in the normal state, the jackpot is started almost immediately after the jackpot waiting state. Therefore, when the jackpots C2 and E2 are reached, the period of the jackpot waiting state is too short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, so that the over-winning is avoided. You can no longer aim. For this reason, the number of winning balls in the first round of the jackpot is likely to be the minimum (two), and as a result, compared to the first round of other jackpots, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Become.

Thus, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot types (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) in which the right operation winning port 661 is the trigger for the start of the jackpot, in the first round as in the first embodiment While it is possible to play a game with the game property of acquiring more prize balls aiming at over winning, in the jack winning types (jack C2, E2) in which the left operation winning opening 662 triggers the start of the jackpot, almost over winning. It was configured so that the jackpot will start soon after aiming. As a result, the degree of advantage in the first round of the big win can be differentiated according to the kind of big win, so that when the big win is won, the player can be made to pay more attention to the kind of big win. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved. In the following, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the type of jackpot that starts when the ball enters the right-acting winning port 661 will be referred to as a "right-motivated jackpot", and will be referred to as a "right-acting jackpot". A jackpot type that is triggered by a ball is referred to as a “left trigger jackpot”.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. In addition, the ROM 202 of the second embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, except that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b are partially changed. , are the same as those of the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as description of ROM202 in 2nd Embodiment, only the detail of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b is demonstrated.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table 202b defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment includes five types of jackpot types (jackets A2 to E2) that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. And three types of jackpots (jackpots F2 to H2) that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols are defined.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot A2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" (see 202b1 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become "jackpot A2" is five, so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A2" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot A2" has 8 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot A" in the first embodiment. It is a jackpot type. In addition, this "jackpot A2" is a kind of right trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right actuation winning hole 661 as a trigger. Therefore, if it is possible to enter the game ball into the right operation winning opening 660 with more game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, normally (1 round is started) Since a larger number of prize balls can be obtained than when the game ball is hit right from the start, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be advantageous compared to the left trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot B2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot B2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B2" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot B2" has five rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. In addition, this "jackpot B2" is a kind of right trigger jackpot that is started when a ball enters the right-actuated winning hole 661, similarly to the "jackpot A2". For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be more advantageous than the left trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot C2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are the "jackpot C2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C2" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C2" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot C2" is a kind of left trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 as a trigger. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be disadvantageous compared to the right trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot D2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 74" (see 202b4 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot D2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D2" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot D2" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. In addition, this "jackpot D2" is a kind of right trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right actuation winning hole 661 as a trigger. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be more advantageous than the left trigger jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot E2" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 55). Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values become "jackpot E2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot E2" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100). This "jackpot E2" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot E2" is a kind of left trigger jackpot that is started when the ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 as a trigger. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be disadvantageous compared to the right trigger jackpot.

Thus, in the second embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the right trigger jackpot (any of jackpots A2, B2, and D2) at a rate of 25%, and a rate of 75%. It is configured to be a left opportunity jackpot (either jackpot C2 or E2). That is, it is possible to play the game with the game property of aiming at the right operation winning opening 661 with good timing after making more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state. It is 25% of the case where the lottery results in a big hit. Most of them (75%) are jackpots in which the jackpot starts immediately (within about 0.5 seconds) after the jackpot standby state, so when the right trigger jackpot hits, the player is forced to win. can make you more happy.

Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the second special symbol jackpot consists only of the right trigger jackpot. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, the big win is started when the game ball enters the right-operating winning hole 661 without fail. In this way, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed basically during the "time-saving state of normal symbols", and the player hits the game ball continuously to the right. This is because there is a high possibility that the game ball is not stored in the storage device 675 at the start of the jackpot standby state because it is during the shooting. That is, even if the left trigger jackpot is provided in the jackpot of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that the jackpot cannot be started immediately after the jackpot waiting state, so the left trigger jackpot is not provided uselessly. It is configured to provide only the right opportunity jackpot. Thereby, since the jackpot types can be reduced, the storage capacity of the storage area for storing the data for each jackpot type can be reduced.

Each jackpot (jackpot F2 to H2) of the second special pattern in the second embodiment is each jackpot (jackpot D to F) of the second special pattern in the first embodiment, and the game state after the number of rounds and the jackpot are exactly the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is achieved, the right trigger jackpot is always achieved, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the second special symbol hits the jackpot, it may be configured such that the left timing hits the jackpot at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%). As described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the possibility that the game balls are stored in the storage device 675 is low, so even when the left trigger big hit, it will be in a big hit waiting state. The game ball does not immediately enter the left operation winning port 662 when the game ball is played. Therefore, when the left trigger jackpot hits, it is possible to provide the game property of measuring the timing of entering the game ball into the left actuation winning opening 662. - 特許庁That is, depending on whether the right-handed jackpot or the left-handed jackpot is achieved, it is possible to differentiate the operation winning opening to be aimed during the jackpot standby state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify game variations during the jackpot waiting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 56, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment differs from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a start trigger storage area 203n is added. there is Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start opportunity storage area 203n is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot. More specifically, when "01H" is stored as data in the start opportunity storage area 203n, the start opportunity of the jackpot is the right-actuated winning opening 661 (this jackpot is the right trigger jackpot). When "02H" is stored, it means that the start timing of the jackpot is the left actuation winning port 662 (this jackpot is the left trigger jackpot). The initial value of the start opportunity storage area 203n is set to "00H", and when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and the state shifts to a big win standby state, the data corresponding to this big win type is overwritten ( See S232 in FIG. 57). During the jackpot standby state, the ball entering the operation winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is monitored, and when the ball entering the monitored operating winning opening is detected, It is configured to set the start of the jackpot (see S1113 and S1114 in FIG. 59). As a result, according to the type of the jackpot, it is possible to start the jackpot with the ball entering a different operation winning hole as a trigger, so when the right trigger jackpot is achieved, the operation is performed with good timing, similar to the first embodiment. While the game property of aiming at the winning hole can be realized, the game property of starting the big win without aiming at the operation winning hole can be realized when the left trigger big win occurs. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability in the jackpot waiting state.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 57, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for setting the display in the symbol display device 37, setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Among the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S201 to S23, each processing of S201 to S223 of the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22) The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, when the process of S220 ends, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S231). By opening the storage valve 675a, when the game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the game ball can enter the left operation winning port 662 immediately after the start of the jackpot standby state. As a result, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the jackpot can be started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open door 65f1.

When the process of S231 is finished, the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is updated to the data corresponding to the type of the big hit (S232), and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S232, if the current jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (any of jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2), "01H" is stored as data, and left trigger jackpot (jackets C2, E2) is stored. Either), "02H" is stored as data.

Next, startup processing 2 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This start-up process 2 is a process that is executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, each process of S901-S914 is the same as each process of S901-S914 of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

Also, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S911 is completed, next, it is determined whether either the ball waiting flag 203j or the jackpot flag 203m is on ( S921), if it is determined that any of the flags is ON (S921: Yes), it means that the retention state of the retention device 675 should be canceled (during the jackpot standby state or during the jackpot). Therefore, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S922), and the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, in the process of S921, when it is determined that both the incoming ball waiting flag 203j and the jackpot flag 203m are off (S921: No), the period during which the storage device 675 should be set to the storage state Since it means that it is (during normal play), the retention valve 675a is set to be closed (S923), and the process proceeds to S912.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot start process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot start process 2 (S1021) is a process executed instead of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30), and is an operation corresponding to the jackpot type. This is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into a winning opening (right-operating winning opening 661 or left-operating winning opening 662) and starting a jackpot when a ball entering an operating winning opening is detected.

In each of S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the entering ball waiting flag 203j is ON (that is, the jackpot waiting state) in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes ), then, the data in the start opportunity storage area 203n is read out (S1111), and it is determined whether the read data is the data (ie, "01H") indicating the right operation winning opening 661 (S1112). In the processing of S1112, if it is determined that the data (that is, "01H") corresponding to the right-acting winning opening 661 is stored (S1112: Yes), then the ball entering the right-acting winning opening 661 is detected. (S1113), and if no ball entry is detected (S1113: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the jackpot standby state. On the other hand, in the process of S1113, when it is determined that the ball has been entered into the right-acting winning hole 661 (S1113: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 in order to end the jackpot standby state and start the jackpot. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1112, when it is determined that the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is the data (that is, "02H") indicating the left actuation winning opening 662 (S1112: No). , determines whether or not a ball entering the left-acting winning port 662 has been detected (S1114), and if not detecting a ball entering the left-acting winning port 662 (S1114: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1114, when it is determined that the ball has been entered into the left-acting winning opening 662 (S1114: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 in order to end the jackpot standby state and start the jackpot. do.

By executing this jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59), the type of operation winning opening that triggers the jackpot can be switched according to the jackpot type (whether it is a right trigger jackpot or a left trigger jackpot). can be done. Therefore, when the right trigger jackpot hits, the player can enjoy a variable profit (the number of prize balls) in one round of the jackpot according to the timing of aiming at the right-actuated winning hole 661, The game method can be switched to a game property that does not affect the profit (the number of prize balls).

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1022) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30). ), it is a process for executing a jackpot effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65 .

Of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, each process of S1201 to S1217 is the same as each process of S1201 to S1217 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, after the process of S1214 or S1215 is completed, the closing of the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is set (S1221), and the process is started. The process proceeds to S1216. Thereby, the period during which the storage state of the storage device 675 is released can be limited to during the big win standby state and during the big win.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 61, the winning-related process 2 (S4321) in the second embodiment will be described. This win-related process 2 (S4321) is a process that is executed instead of the win-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. It is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of.

Among the hit-related processes (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, S4401 and S4404 to S4410 of the hit-related processes in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) S4401 and S4404 to S4410, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Also, in the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that there is a standby state command in the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4401: Yes), A standby state command process for determining the content of the standby state effect is executed according to the received standby state command (S4421), and this process ends. Details of this standby state command processing (S4421) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing (S4421). In the standby state command process (S4421), first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is the right trigger jackpot (S4601), and if it is determined that it is the right trigger jackpot (S4601: Yes), Similarly, a display standby state command for executing the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) is set (S4602), the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON (S4603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the right trigger jackpot (the left trigger jackpot) (S4601: No), instead of executing the standby state production, fixed display was performed in the variable display production. A display standby state command for executing a standby state effect in which the third symbol is continued to be fixedly displayed (extended fixed display) is set (S4604), and this processing is terminated. In the case of the left trigger jackpot, the waiting state effect of simply extending the fixed display of the third symbol is because the jackpot waiting state in the case of the left trigger jackpot is extremely short (about 0.5 seconds). This is because it ends with and the jackpot starts. Therefore, when the left trigger jackpot is achieved, if the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) similar to the right trigger jackpot is executed, the standby state effect is displayed for a moment (about 0.5 seconds). Since the big win is started, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable with the displayed content or that the player will be confused. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the jackpot standby state set based on the left trigger jackpot, the jackpot is started in the display mode (final display of the third symbol) at the end of the variable display effect. It is configured to continue to be displayed as it is until. With this configuration, the player can feel as if the big win has just started after the end of the variable display, so that the player feels uncomfortable or confused. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that it will be done.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, two types of operation winning openings are arranged on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, and the start timing of the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. It is configured to have different operation winning openings. A right-acting winning hole 661 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered when the game ball is shot by striking to the right, while it is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13. The left actuation winning hole 662 is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered when the game ball is shot by hitting to the left. In addition, above the left operation winning opening 662, a storage device 675 that can store only one game ball is arranged, and the game state of hitting left (low probability state of special symbols, and , normal state of normal symbols), when the player plays a game in which a game ball is shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64, the storage device 675 is almost filled until the jackpot of the first special symbol is achieved. On the other hand, it is constructed so that game balls are stored. Since the storage state of the storage device 675 is canceled when the jackpot standby state is entered, the jackpot type (left trigger jackpot) is started when the ball enters the left-acting winning port 662. In this case, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 flow downward and enter the left operation winning opening 662, so that the big win is started immediately after the big win waiting state. As a result, the left trigger jackpot is more likely to start in the first round of the jackpot when the game ball has not reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The number of prize balls obtained is almost the same each time. On the other hand, when the right trigger jackpot hits, the jackpot does not start unless the game ball is shot aiming at the right-actuated prize-winning port 661, so the game ball enters the right-actuated prize-winning port 661 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. It is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot can be varied according to the timing of the game. Therefore, in the second embodiment, depending on whether the left trigger jackpot or the right trigger jackpot, the game characteristics in the jackpot waiting state and the first round of the jackpot can be changed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, according to the type of the jackpot, the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is different, but it is not limited to this. For example, in all the jackpot types, the jackpot is configured so that the jackpot is started when the game ball enters either the left or right operation winning port, and then the storage valve 675a is opened and the jackpot type is not opened. It is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot classification. That is, in the case of the left trigger jackpot, the storage valve 675a is opened from the start of the jackpot waiting state to the end of the jackpot, while in the case of the right trigger jackpot, the jackpot waiting state is started. The storage valve 675a may remain closed until the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, in the case of the left trigger jackpot, immediately after the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball stored by releasing the reservoir valve 675a enters the left operation winning port 662 (winning). Therefore, as in the above-described second embodiment, the big win can be started without waiting for the game balls to accumulate on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (about 0.5 seconds after the big win waiting state). On the other hand, since the storage valve 675a is not opened when the right trigger jackpot hits, the possibility of the game ball entering the left actuation winning hole 662 immediately even if the jackpot is confirmed and displayed is low. Therefore, since the possibility that the big win will be started immediately after the confirmation of the big win is displayed, the shooting speed (shooting intensity) of the game ball is varied as in the above-described first and second embodiments. By making the game ball enter the right operation winning port 661 in a state where more game balls have reached (ride on) the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the number of winning prizes (that is, It is possible to provide an epoch-making game property in which the number of game balls exceeding 2) can win in the right specific winning hole 65a. As a result, similar to the second embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the game property that the first round ends with a predetermined number of winning prizes, and the number of winning prizes exceeding the predetermined number depending on the skill of the player. Since it is possible to switch between a game feature in which a game ball can win a prize, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the second embodiment, two operating winning ports (right operating winning port 661 and left operating winning port 662) are provided, and the operating winning port that triggers the start of the jackpot is changed according to the type of jackpot. . That is, immediately after the combination of the third symbols indicating the big hit (that is, the grid) is confirmed and displayed, the game ball enters (wins) the left-operated winning hole 662 where the possibility of the game ball entering is high. After the combination of the jackpot type and the third symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball enters the right-actuated winning hole 661 where the possibility of the game ball entering is low unless the player aims. It was configured to provide a jackpot type that is started by entering a ball (winning a prize). On the other hand, only the right-operating winning opening 661 is provided, and even if the game ball does not enter (winning) the right-operating winning opening 661 (that is, the combination of the third symbols indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed. It is also possible to provide a jackpot type in which the jackpot is started only when the game is played and a jackpot type in which the jackpot is not started unless the game ball enters (wins) the right-acting winning port 661 . Since it becomes unnecessary to provide the left operation prize-winning mouth 662 and the storage device 670 by comprising in this way, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the ease with which a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is constant regardless of the state of the storage device 675. It is good also as a structure which makes it variable according to the state (whether or not the game ball is stored) of the storage device 675. Specifically, for example, the storage device 675 is configured to be provided on the upper left side of the first ball entrance 64, and when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the stored game balls The height of the storage device 675 is set so that the upper surface partially protrudes from the upper surface of the storage device 675 . Then, when the game ball fired by left-hand hitting collides with the game ball stored in the storage device 675, it is easily repelled in the direction in which the first ball entrance 64 is arranged. Set the location of the reservoir 675 . By configuring in this way, when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the game balls are easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, so that the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed. Become. That is, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 are more advantageous for the player, so that the player can actively store the game balls during normal times. Therefore, since the jackpot waiting state can be started in a state where the game balls are more reliably stored in the storage device 675, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 can be immediately released when the left trigger jackpot occurs. A ball can be entered into the left actuation winning hole 662 to start a left-moment jackpot.

In the second embodiment, by switching the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, the period from the jackpot standby state to the start of the jackpot is changed. is not limited to For example, the operation winning hole itself may be deleted (that is, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot standby state), and the opening period may be changed simply according to the jackpot type. With this configuration, in the case of a jackpot with a long opening period, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting right during the opening, whereas in the case of a jackpot with a short opening period. Since it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the advantage degree in the first round can be varied according to the type of jackpot without using the operation winning opening.

In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is switched according to the type of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot may be started regardless of which of the operation winning openings the game ball enters. And it is good also as a structure which changes the advantage degree of a big hit according to the classification of the operation|movement prize-winning opening which won. More specifically, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot tends to increase when the jackpot is started by entering the right-actuated prize-winning port 661 rather than by entering the left-actuated prize-winning port 662 and the jackpot is started. It may be configured as follows. By constructing in this way, if the game ball can be won (entered) into the right operation winning port 661 immediately when the big win standby state is reached, the result will be advantageous for the player. Whether or not it will be predicted from the execution of the variable display, and immediately after the big hit standby state (during about 0.5 seconds until the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662) the game ball A game can be played by devising a ball to enter the right-actuated winning hole 661.例文帳に追加Further, in this case, instead of switching the degree of advantage according to the type of the activated winning hole, it may be configured to switch the playability. Specifically, for example, when a ball enters the left-operating winning port 662 and a jackpot starts, a 10-round jackpot is always started, while a ball enters the right-operating winning port 661. When a big win is started with a ball, either 4 rounds or 16 rounds of big wins may be selected by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between the game property of stably giving a jackpot of 10 rounds and the unstable (highly gambling) game property in which the number of rounds may be large or small. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot is started when the game ball enters the operation winning hole corresponding to the jackpot type after the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, a jackpot (so-called one type win) that starts immediately when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery without including an operating winning port in the configuration, and a game ball is placed in a specific area provided on the game board 13 The right variable winning device 65 of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine) in which there is a jackpot (so-called 2-type win) that starts when a ball is entered. can achieve the same operation. That is, in the case of a one-type hit, the jackpot starts soon after the game ball is shot toward the right variable prize winning device 65, so it becomes impossible to aim for over prize winning, but the ball can enter the specific area. (a state where you can aim for two types), first shoot the game ball on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 and then shoot the game ball aiming at a specific area, thereby intentionally over winning. can be generated.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the state shifts to a big win standby state, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660. The more game balls there are, the more advantageous the player is (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round increases).

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a scene is provided in which the degree of advantage of the player is varied according to the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, even in cases other than the case of a big hit. More specifically, in some cases where the special symbol lottery is lost, a lottery result (small win) is provided in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds). . As a result, as the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing when the small winning starts increases, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small winning increases. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the process has changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 63, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and a second ball entrance 640 are arranged in a channel provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to In addition, as a result, the game ball can be entered into any of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the first ball entrance 64, and the second ball entrance 640 by shooting the game ball in a left-handed manner. can be balled. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game by hitting to the left regardless of the game state except during the big win standby state and during the big win. Then, when a big win or a small win occurs, game balls are shot to the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right, and more game balls are released at the timing when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. It is possible to entertain the amusement of winning a prize.

It should be noted that in the third embodiment, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) as a small hit in some cases where the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, but the first special In the lottery of the pattern, it is configured not to win a small hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the display effects executed in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 64(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol in the variable probability state (variable probability state of special symbols and short working time state of normal symbols). be. In the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the third symbol display device 81 displays "3", "4", and "1" as a combination of the third symbols (so-called "chance eye") indicating a small hit. A combination of numbered third symbols is displayed. FIG. 64(a) shows the moment when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed as a small win.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the variable probability state, an image prompting the player to hit left is displayed in the small area Ds3 until the symbol combination corresponding to the small win is confirmed and displayed. As a result, in the variable probability state, the second ball entrance 640 provided on the left side of the game board 13 can be aimed at and left-handed.

FIG. 64(b) is a diagram showing a display mode during the confirmation display of a small hit. While the small win is being displayed, a speech balloon is formed in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 with the text "From the right!" According to this display content, the game ball can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting to the right. Therefore, when the opening period of the small winning is started, the game ball arranged on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a. This confirmation display of the small win (see FIG. 64(b)) continues to be displayed after the fluctuation period of the fluctuation display corresponding to the small win has passed and until the small win ends. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the image which is displayed between small hits and which encourages hitting to the right (see FIG. 64(b)) will be referred to as a "shooting to the right notification image."

It should be noted that the small winning in the third embodiment is configured such that an opening period of 4 seconds is set. That is, after 4 seconds have passed since the display of the right hitting notification image (see FIG. 64(b)) started on the display screen, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds). there is As a result, more game balls are allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, thereby becoming an opening period for a small hit, and when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls are released. A ball can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a.

Further, as described above, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured so that a game ball can pass through in about 4 seconds. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 for a period substantially the same as the opening period of the small win. Therefore, if a right-handed shot is started after the right-handed informing image (see FIG. 64(b)) is displayed, the game ball will pass over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 before the opening period elapses. can be suppressed. In addition, after the small hit is confirmed and displayed, the earlier the game ball is hit to the right, the more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. And, in the time-saving state of normal symbols) and in the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols), the game can be performed by paying attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. can.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 65, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that the ROM 202 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, except that the contents of the first winning random number table 202a are partially changed. It is the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, only the details of the first winning random number table 202a will be described.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the first winning random number table 202a in the third embodiment, in addition to random numbers (counter values) determined to be big wins, random numbers (counter values) to be determined to be small wins ) are stipulated.

More specifically, regardless of whether it is a special symbol low probability state or a special symbol high probability state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "360" for the lottery of the second special symbol. ~ 399” is defined in association with a small win (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65(a)). On the other hand, no value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is associated with the first special symbol lottery (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65(a)). Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, there is no possibility of a small hit, but when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability is 1/10 (40/400). becomes. Therefore, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern is high, so that the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the prize ball becomes a small hit with a relatively high probability. is obtained, the game state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. In addition, a large difference can be provided in the degree of advantage of the player depending on whether or not the game is played aiming at the specific winning hole 65a when a small win is achieved. That is, in this embodiment, after a small hit is reported, a game ball is struck to the right during an opening period of 4 seconds, thereby causing a large amount (around 6) of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. be able to. In other words, when the opening period of the small win is started, about six game balls can be in a state of passing over the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1. Since 10 prize balls are provided each time one game ball wins in the specific winning hole 65a, right hit according to the right hit notification (see FIG. 64(b)) displayed in the small area Ds3. By doing so, it is possible to obtain around 60 prize balls for each small win. Therefore, depending on whether or not to hit to the right in accordance with the display contents (hitting to the right notification image) of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of a small hit, the degree of advantage between the variable probability state and the time saving state can be greatly changed. can. Therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and play the game.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). FIG. 65(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a flag 203p is added during a small hit. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress, and if it is on, it means that the small hit is in progress. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not during the small hit. Here, the middle of the small winning indicates the period from the start of the opening period of the small winning to the end of the ending period of the small winning. This small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON at the start of the opening period of the small hit (see S1303 in FIG. 67), and is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 67).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. First, main processing 3 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing main control of the game like the main process (see FIG. 30). be.

S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016 of the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment correspond to S1001 to S1005 and S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1016 is executed. In addition, in the main processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1005 is completed, next, small winning control processing for controlling the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a during execution of the small winning is executed (S1021), and the process proceeds to S1006. Details of this small winning control process (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the small winning control process (S1021). In this small hit control process (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit start timing (S1301). In addition, in the process of S1301, the variation pattern is executed based on the determination that the special symbol lottery result is a small hit in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit ends. When the timing comes, it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1301: Yes), the opening command for the small hit indicating the start of the opening period of the small hit is set (S1302), and the flag 203p during the small hit is set. It is set to ON (S1303), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the flag 203p during the small hit is on (that is, whether it is during the small hit) (S1304), when it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is off (S1304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is ON (S1304: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening period (3 seconds).

In the process of S1305, if it is determined that it is time to open the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305: Yes), the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1306), and this process ends. By setting the opening of the right specific winning hole 65a by the processing of S1306, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened and the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 wins (enters) the right specific winning hole 65a. . As a result, the more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the more prize balls the player can get. Therefore, since more game balls can be shot to the player during the opening period of the small win, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the processing of S1305, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (that is, it is not the end timing of the opening period) (S1305: No), then the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is established. (S1307). In the third embodiment, it is determined that the closing condition is established when 0.2 seconds have passed since the right specific winning hole 65a was opened, or when two game balls have won.

In the processing of S1307, when it is determined that the condition for closing the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the closing of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1308) to indicate the start of the ending period for the small winning. An ending command for a small hit is set (S1309), and this process is terminated. In addition, the ending period of the small hit is set to a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) sufficient to discharge all the game balls entered into the right specific winning hole 65a.

On the other hand, in the process of S1307, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is established (S1307: No), then whether it is the end timing of the small hit (that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1310), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1310: Yes), set the end of the small hit by turning off the flag 203p during the small hit (S1311 ), the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1310, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1310: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

By executing this small winning control process (see FIG. 66), the opening and closing operation of the same right specific winning opening 65a can be realized for each small winning.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 68, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the win-related process 3 (S4331) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The hit-related process 3 (S4331) in the third embodiment is a process executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to the win-related process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command.

Of the hit-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, each process of S4401 to S4410 is the same as each process of S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

Also, in the hit-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S4409 (S4409: No), then from the main controller 110 It is determined whether the opening command for the small hit is received (S4431), and when it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is received (S4431: Yes), the right hitting notification image (see FIG. 64 (b)) is displayed. A display command for this purpose is set for the display control device 114 (S4432), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4431, if it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is not received (S4431: No), then it is determined whether the ending command for the small hit is received from the main controller 110 (S4433 ), when it is determined that the ending command for a small hit has been received (S4433: Yes), the display for returning to the image (see FIG. 64 (a)) for canceling the right-handed notification image and reporting the normal left-handed hitting command is set (S4434), and this process ends. By canceling the right hitting notification image at the start of the ending period of the small winning instead of the end timing of the small winning, the right specific winning opening 65a is closed and the game ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to shoot the game ball by hitting it to the right despite the fact that it does not have a property. Therefore, it is possible to prevent loss for the player. On the other hand, in the process of S4433, when it is determined that the ending command for the small hit is not received (S4433: No), this process is terminated as it is.

By the processing of S4431 to S4434 in the hit related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the display of the right hitting notification image is set over the period from the start of the opening period of the small hit to the end of the small hit. can do. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to hit right before the opening period of the small win starts (during the opening period of 4 seconds). A plurality of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the winning open period. Therefore, although the small hit opening period itself is short (maximum 0.2 seconds), a plurality of game balls can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a, so the game is played according to the right-handed notification image. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of As a result, the player can more seriously confirm the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in some cases where the special symbol lottery is lost, the lottery result (small winning ) is provided. When this small win is achieved, the right specific prize winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds after an opening period of 4 seconds is set. Therefore, by continuously shooting game balls toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, a plurality of game balls are passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the opening period. Therefore, the plurality of game balls can be entered into the opened right specific winning hole 65a. In addition, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of special symbols, a right-handed informing image is displayed from the start of the small win opening period to the end of the opening period. With this configuration, by hitting right only while the right hitting notification image is displayed according to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of game balls can be easily reduced to 0.00 with each small hit. It is possible to win a prize to the right specific prize winning port 65a during the open period of 2 seconds. Therefore, the game can be played while paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, in the third embodiment, right-handed hitting is advantageous only in the case of a big win or a small win, and the game is normally played by left-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to frequently switch between right-handed and left-handed strikes during the time-saving state and the probability-variable state, so that the player enjoys switching the direction in which the game ball is shot. can let Also, if a right-handed hit is reported, it is a chance to win a prize ball, so when a right-handed hit is reported, the player can be pleased.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when there is a small hit at normal times, the effect of notifying the right-handed hit is executed, and in other cases, the effect of notifying the left-handed hit is executed, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, in the case of a small hit, the opening period is set immediately (for example, 0.1 seconds after the end of fluctuation). In other words, it is configured so that it is difficult to enter a game ball during the opening period of the small win unless hitting to the right is started during execution of the variable display. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation which suggests the expectation degree which becomes a small hit during the variable display of a 2nd special design. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable display of the third pattern, the characters "10%", the characters "30%", and the characters "60%" are displayed with respect to the small area Ds3. , and “100%” may be selected and displayed. At the time of selection, the characters to be displayed may be determined with a selection probability according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. More specifically, the character "100%" is selected only in the case of a small win, but the probability of being selected is lower than that of other characters. In addition, the character "10%" is less likely to be selected than "30%" or "60%" when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is most likely to be selected when it is out. configured as follows. In addition, the character "30%" is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small win is higher than "10%" and lower than "60%", while it is selected in the case of a loss. It is configured so that the probability that the In addition, the character "60%" is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than "30%", while the probability of being selected in the case of a loss is higher than "30%". Configure it to be low. By configuring in this way, most of the characters displayed when a small win is made are "30%" or "60%" which can be displayed even when a win is lost. A player can be made to predict whether or not a small win will occur. Then, the game ball can be shot toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting to the right during execution of the variable display (before the start of the small win) for the player who predicts that the small win will occur. As a result, if the player predicts a small hit, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened and a prize ball can be obtained. It is possible to make the player more seriously predict whether or not it is a small win. In addition, when the characters "100%" are displayed, a small win is guaranteed, so that the player can be made to hit to the right while the variable display is being performed without anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game in the variable probability state and the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, as the small hit type, only the small hit with an opening period of 4 seconds was provided, but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types with different opening periods are provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a type with an opening period of 1 second, a type with a 2-second period, a type with a 4-second period, and a type with an 8-second period are provided. By configuring in this way, when a small hit of a type with a short opening period (1 second or 2 seconds) is made, when hitting right after the opening period of the small win starts, the small win Since the number of game balls reaching the open/close door 65f1 is reduced until the opening period is started, the number of prize balls tends to be reduced as compared with the small winning type with an opening period of 4 seconds. On the other hand, when the opening period is longer than the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 (8 seconds), when the type of small hit occurs, the opening period of the small hit is started. If the beating continues, the game ball shot in the first half of the opening period will pass through the opening/closing door 65f1 before the start of the opening period. Therefore, useless balls are more likely to occur, and the number of held balls is more likely to decrease than in the small winning type with an opening period of 4 seconds. As a result, the degree of advantage of the player is varied depending on the type of the small win, so when the small win is notified (the right-handed hitting notification image is displayed), the player hits to the right while hoping for an advantageous small win. can be done.

In the third embodiment, the right hitting notification image is displayed when the small winning is achieved, but the display of the right hitting notification image is not limited to the small winning. For example, the right-handed notification image may be diverted to the display during execution of the jackpot (for example, the display during the opening period). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to prepare separate effects during the big win and during the small win, so the number of data in the display data table can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery, but the configuration is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the lottery for the second special symbol, it may be configured to win a small prize with a predetermined probability (for example, probability of 1/50) when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. By constructing in this way, in the low probability state of the special symbols which is the most disadvantageous for the player and in the normal state of the normal symbols, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of balls in the event of a small hit. , it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, even if the most unfavorable state lasts for a long time (so-called addiction occurs), it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. In this case, the ratio of displaying the right-handed notification image when a small win is won (rate of occurrence of right-handed navigation) may be varied depending on the number of consecutive failures. In other words, until the lottery of the first special symbol does not win a big hit and is lost a specified number of times, even if a small win occurs, right-handed navigation hardly occurs, and when the specified number of times is exceeded, right-handed navigation does not occur. A configuration in which the occurrence rate is high (for example, 50%) may be employed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the number of held balls to decrease when the specified number of times is exceeded, so that the player can continue playing the game for a longer period of time. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the operating winning hole 660, the big win is started. It may be configured such that an over-winning can occur only when it becomes.

In the third embodiment, the jackpot is started when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65 . That is, during the opening period of the right specific prize winning port 65a based on winning a small win, a game ball is entered into the right specific prize winning port 65a, and a game ball enters a specific area to win a big hit. may be started. By configuring in this way, the advantage of entering the ball into the right specific winning hole 65a in the small win can be increased, so that the game can be played with more attention paid to whether or not right-handed navigation will occur. . In this case, it may be configured such that a small win is won even in the lottery of the first special symbols, and the rate of occurrence of right-handed navigation in the case of a small win may be varied for each game state. That is, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, the navigation occurrence rate may be lowered, and in the time-saving state of normal symbols, the navigation occurrence rate may be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the degree of advantage in the time-saving state of normal symbols. Conversely, the low probability state of normal symbols may increase the navigation occurrence rate. As a result, in addition to the case of a big hit in the lottery of special symbols, even if it is a small hit, it will be given a chance to enter a specific area and win a big win, so a situation where the big win will not be won for a long time will occur. can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can continue playing the game for a longer period of time. Furthermore, in the low probability state of normal symbols, when the number of times the special symbols are lost in the lottery exceeds a specific number of times, it may be configured to increase the occurrence rate of right-handed navigation in the case of a small win. . By configuring in this way, when the specific number of times is exceeded, it is possible to form a situation in which it is easier to win a big hit than before exceeding (it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area), so that the special symbol can be used for a long time. It is possible to configure such that a situation in which continuous deviation of the Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, by entering the game ball into the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball is passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, a big win is started and the opening and closing door 65f1 A game ball passing through the upper surface of the is entered into the right specific winning hole 65a. In other words, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the degree of advantage in the first round (in the first round, the right specific prize winning port 65a The number of game balls to be entered) was configured to be a variable game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) is variable according to the timing of starting the big win, and the timing of starting the big win and one round. The player can select a game feature in which the degree of advantage of the eye (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) is irrelevant. More specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the player selects in the jackpot standby state to open the right specific prize winning port 65a of the right variable prize winning device 65 or open the left variable prize winning device in the first round of the jackpot. It is configured to vary whether the left specific winning opening 650a of 650 is opened. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to select his or her favorite game, so that it is possible to provide the game according to the taste of each player.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, The condition for determining that the specific winning hole 650a is closed is "when 30 seconds have passed or 4 or more game balls have won", and the configuration of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed. part of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed, part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 is changed, and that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 69, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting device 680 is arranged on the upper right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, instead of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. Inside the distribution device 680, there are provided two operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681, left operation winning opening 682) into which game balls can enter. Both of these two operation winning openings are determined to be valid for entry of a game ball only during the jackpot standby state, similarly to the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. In the jackpot standby state, when the game ball enters the right-operating winning port 681, a jackpot is started in which the right specific winning port 65a is opened in one round of the jackpot, and the game ball moves to the left-operating winning port 682. is entered, a jackpot is started in which the left specific prize winning opening 650a is opened in one round of the jackpot.

In addition, above the two operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681, left operation winning opening 682), a distribution member for distributing the game ball that entered the distribution device 680 to either of the operation winning openings 683 are provided. The distributing member 683 is configured to be rotatable about a shaft 683a as a rotation axis. The arrangement (see the dashed line in FIG. 69) is changed alternately. When the distribution member 683 is arranged to tilt to the right side, the upper side of the right operation winning opening 681 is blocked by the distribution member 683 and the upper side of the left operation winning opening 682 is opened. For this reason, the game ball entering the distribution device 680 while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right side is inclined from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left direction in front view, which is formed by the distribution member 683. It flows downward along the left direction and enters the left operation winning opening 682.

When a game ball enters the left operation winning port 682 in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot is started in which the left specific winning port 650a is opened in all the rounds of the jackpot. Unlike the right variable winning device 65, the left variable winning device 650 keeps the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning port 650a while the left specific winning port 650a is closed. is configured in such a way that it is impossible to Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls entering the game is less likely to vary, and substantially the same number of prize balls can be stably paid out each time. Therefore, a player or the like who is not confident in the game of hitting the game ball at the right timing can be made to select a big win in which the left specific winning hole 650a is opened.

In addition, as described above, the jackpot that is started when a game ball enters the left operation winning hole 682 is 30 seconds after the start of each round, or the game ball enters the left specific winning hole 650a four times. The round ends when more than one ball is entered. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot (left trigger jackpot) started with the game ball entering the left operation winning port 682, almost four game balls enter the left specific winning port 650a and the jackpot ends. do.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left, the upper side of the right operation winning opening 681 is opened and the upper side of the left operation winning opening 682 is closed by the distribution member 683 . Therefore, a game ball entering the distribution device 680 while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left is tilted from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction in the front view, which is formed by the distribution member 683. , and enters the right-acting winning hole 681 . When the game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds (right trigger Jackpot) is started. The first round of the right trigger jackpot ends when 30 seconds elapse after the right specific winning hole 65a is opened, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning hole 65a. However, as described above, the number of winning prizes to the right specific winning opening 65a is approximately 2 to 6 depending on the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. range up and down. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right-operating winning hole 681 in the jackpot standby state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained varies depending on the timing of the entering.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the arrangement of the distribution members 683 is switched every two seconds when the jackpot standby state is entered, the player can confirm the arrangement of the distribution members 683 and obtain the desired game performance. By entering the game ball at the timing when the game ball can be entered into the operation winning hole corresponding to , it is possible to provide the game property that matches the taste of each player.

Between the right-operating winning opening 681 and the left-operating winning opening 682, when a game ball entering the distribution device 680 does not enter any of the operating winning openings, the game ball is distributed to the distribution device. An out port is provided for discharging to the outside of 680 . By providing this outlet, it is possible to prevent (suppress) problems such as clogged balls inside the sorting device 680 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, display effects in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the standby state production executed in the jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70(a) shows a display mode while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right in the jackpot standby state.

As shown in FIG. 70(a), in the jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, a display area in which the characters "jackpot confirmed!" HR1 and a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the variable display performance executed before the jackpot standby state are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 70(a), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right side, the display area HR2 formed on the display screen is displayed with the message "If you hit it now, it's safe mode!?" and the characters "You can stably win prize balls!" The image shown is displayed. Also, unlike the first embodiment, the chance meter CM is not displayed, and the right side of the display screen is left blank. By these display contents, the player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the left actuation winning hole 682 when the game ball is shot toward the sorting device 680 . That is, regardless of the timing of entering the game balls into the left operation winning hole 682, the big hit of the game property that can stably enter five game balls in the first round in the left specific winning hole 650a. is started.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left, the words "Big Win Confirmed!" The displayed display area HR1 and the combination (final stop pattern) of the third pattern finally stop-displayed (determined display) in the variable display performance executed before the jackpot standby state are displayed. In addition, a chance meter CM is displayed on the right side of the display screen as in the first embodiment. Then, for the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters "If you hit it now, it will be in an unstable mode!?" , and an image showing the direction in which the game balls entering the sorting device 680 flow down (the direction in which the right actuation winning opening 681 is arranged) is displayed. By these display contents, it is possible to make the game ball recognize that there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the right operation winning hole 681 when the game ball is shot toward the sorting device 680 . That is, the number of game balls reaching the opening/closing door 65f1 is discriminated from the gauge number of the chance meter CM, and the game balls are entered into the right-acting winning opening 681 with good timing (when the gauge number is larger). By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that a game-like jackpot in which a larger number of prize balls can be obtained is started.

Thus, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, when a game ball is fired aiming at the sorting device 680, the type of the operating winning hole into which the ball enters and the outline of the jackpot started by entering the ball (game ) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. By constructing in this way, the player can select a jackpot with game characteristics that suit his or her taste. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of switching game characteristics according to each player's preference.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 71, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. Unlike the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13), the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment has a specific winning hole type storage area 203q, a distribution state storage area 203r, and a distribution state timer 203s. and are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning hole type storage area 203q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the specific winning hole opened in the first round of the jackpot. Specifically, when "01H" is stored in the specific winning hole type storage area 203q, the right specific winning hole 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning hole 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. It means that it is a jackpot type to be opened. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored, it means that it is a jackpot type in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each jackpot round. The initial value of the specific winning hole type storage area 203q is set to "00H". "02H" is stored when the game ball enters the left actuation winning hole 682 (see S1131 and S1133 in FIG. 72). When the conditions for starting the first round of the jackpot are established, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is determined based on the data in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q (S1232 in FIG. 73).

The distribution state storage area 203r is a storage area in which data indicating the orientation of the distribution member 683 is stored. Specifically, when "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r, the state in which the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left (the state in which the game ball can enter the right operation winning opening 681) and the When "01H" is stored, it means that the distribution member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the right side (a state in which a game ball can enter the left operation winning port 682). means The data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated to data corresponding to the layout after the switching each time the layout of the distribution members 683 is switched in the jackpot standby state (see S1125 and S1127 in FIG. 72). Note that the initial arrangement of the distribution member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the left. In accordance with this, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203r also becomes "00H". In the jackpot standby state, every time the data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated, a command (distribution state command ) is set. By this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the distribution members 683 has been switched, and the display form of the standby state effect is updated to the display form corresponding to the arrangement after the switching.

The distribution state timer 203s is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 683 is switched. The timer value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to "0" each time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot standby state, and is set to 1 each time jackpot start processing 4 (see FIG. 72) described later is executed. are added one by one (S1121 in FIG. 72). That is, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main processing. Then, when the timer value reaches 500 or more, the state of the sorting member 683 is switched (see SS1124 and S1126 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 72, the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This jackpot start process 4 (S1041) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an operation winning opening (right operation winning opening 681 and left operation winning opening 682). It is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening and starting a jackpot corresponding to the type of the operation winning opening when the entry of a ball into the operation winning opening is detected.

In each of S1101, S1103 and S1104 of the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, S1101, S1103 and S1104 of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment are executed.

Also, in the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is ON (that is, in the jackpot waiting state) in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the distribution state timer 203s (S1121), and it is determined whether the timer value after the addition is 500 or more (S1122). In the processing of S1122, if it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203s after addition is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), it means that the timing for switching the state of the distribution member 683 has come, and therefore the distribution is performed. Each process of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the member 683 is executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is "00H" (whether the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left) (S1123). In the process of S1123, when it is determined that "00H" is stored (S1123: Yes), the sorting member 683 tilted leftward is changed to the rightward tilted state (S1124), and the sorting state is changed. "01H" is stored in the storage area 203r (S1125), and the process proceeds to S1128.

On the other hand, in the process of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is "01H" (S1123: No), the distribution member 683 tilted to the right is tilted to the left. state (S1126), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r (S1127), and the process proceeds to S1128.

In the process of S1128 executed after the process of S1125 or S1127, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the distribution members 683 after switching is set (S1128), and the value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 ( S1129), and the process proceeds to S1130.

On the other hand, in the process of S1122, if it is determined that the value of the distribution state timer 203s after updating is less than 500 (S1122: No), it means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Therefore, each process of S1123 to S1129 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1130. In the processing of S1130, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the right-acting winning opening 681 (S1130). Then, "01H", which is data indicating the right specific winning hole 650a, is stored (S1131), and the process proceeds to S1103. Thus, it is possible to set the start of the big win in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1130, if it is determined that the ball entering the right-acting winning port 681 is not detected (S1130: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball entering the left-acting winning port 682 is detected. (S1132). In the processing of S1132, if it is determined that the ball has entered the left operation winning opening 682 (S1132: Yes), the data "02H" indicating the left specific winning opening 650a is stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q. ” is stored (S1133), and the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, in the process of S1132, if it is determined that the ball into the left operation winning opening 682 is not detected (S1132: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the jackpot standby state, so this End the process.

Also, in the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 (S1134), and this process is completed. In the process of S1134, by resetting the distribution state timer 203s at the end of the jackpot standby state, updating of the timer value can be started from the reset state of the distribution state timer 203s in the next jackpot standby state. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the jackpot control process 4 (S1042) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1042). This jackpot control process 4 (S1042) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. ), this is a process for controlling the opening and closing operations of the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

Among the jackpot control processing 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, S1201 to S1205 and S1207 to S1217, respectively, in the jackpot control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32) S1201 to S1205, , and the same processes as those of S1207 to S1217 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1205 (S1205: Yes), the round to be started this time is one round. (S1231).

In the process of S1231, if it is determined that it is one round (S1231: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is set (S1232), and the process is performed. to S1207. More specifically, if the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is "01H", the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set, while the stored data is "02H". If there is, the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1231, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the first round (S1232: No), the left specific winning opening 650a is set to open (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1207. do.

By executing this jackpot control processing 4 (see FIG. 73), in the first round of the jackpot, a specific winning port corresponding to the type of the operating winning port passed (selected) by the player in the jackpot waiting state is opened. can be made Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to provide game characteristics corresponding to the type of the activated winning hole selected by the player.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 74, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing win-related processing 4 (S4341) in the fourth embodiment. This win-related process 4 (S4341) is a process that is executed instead of the win-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. It is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of.

Of the hit-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S4401 to S4410 is the same as each process of S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. Further, in the winning-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not a distribution state command is included (S4441).

In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the distribution state command (S4441: Yes), the distribution state indicated by the received distribution state command is determined. A display command for updating to the mode of waiting state rendering is set (S4442), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4441, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the distribution state command (S4441: No), this process ends.

By this hit-related processing 4 (see FIG. 74), every time the state of the sorting member 683 is switched, a display mode (see FIGS. 70A and 70B) can be set according to the state after the switching. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot standby state, the player only needs to confirm the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and the current state of the sorting device 680 is the state of his/her own when the game ball is entered. It is possible to easily discriminate whether or not it is a state in which a jackpot with a game property suitable for taste is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has two types of specific winning holes (the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 650a) into which game balls can be entered in the event of a big win. It is configured to be provided. More specifically, while the right specific winning opening 65a is closed, if the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, a game ball can be entered (upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). While the left specific winning opening 650a is closed, the game ball is stopped at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a. It is configured in such a way that it is impossible to leave In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681, left operation winning opening 682) are provided to trigger the start of the jackpot, and the operation winning opening for entering the ball in the jackpot waiting state is played. It is configured so that the person can choose. If a game ball enters the right-operating winning hole 681, the right specific winning hole 65a is opened in each round of the big win, and a right timing jackpot is started, and if a game ball enters the left-operating winning hole 682 , The left trigger jackpot is started in which the left specific prize winning opening 650a is opened in each round of the jackpot. As a result, the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the timing of entering the game balls into the right-operating winning hole 681 greatly affects the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round. , and a game property in which the situation during the jackpot standby state does not affect the number of winning balls, can be selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide game characteristics that meet the tastes of each player.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the game ball cannot be allowed to stay in a position where it can enter the left specific winning hole 650a in the jackpot waiting state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be allowed to enter the left specific winning hole 650a within a range smaller than the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. By configuring in this way, even when the player selects the left-actuated winning hole 682, it is possible to provide a game property in which the degree of advantage is variable according to the timing of entering the game ball.

In the fourth embodiment, when the right trigger jackpot is achieved, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot, while when the left trigger jackpot is achieved, the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in all rounds. Although it was set as the structure which opens, it is not restricted to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific winning opening corresponding to the operating winning opening is opened only in the first round, and the common specific winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Even with such a configuration, the playability in the first round can be switched according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the game ball enters.

In the fourth embodiment, which of the right trigger jackpot and the left trigger jackpot is to be started is made different according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the ball is entered. That is, the type of the specific winning hole to be opened in the big win is made different according to the type of the operating winning hole, but the difference according to the type of the operating winning hole is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the number of rounds of the jackpot is varied according to the type of the operating winning hole. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right-acting winning port 681, the jackpot of 16 rounds or 4 rounds is drawn in half, whereas the left-acting winning port 682 A configuration may be adopted in which, when a game ball enters into the box, a jackpot of 10 rounds is always selected. In addition, in a game machine (so-called V probability machine) in which a variable probability state is given after a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area during a big hit, depending on the type of the operation winning opening, the entry into the specific area It is good also as a structure which makes a ball rate different. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right-acting winning hole 681, a 20% jackpot and a 100% jackpot with a ball-entering rate to the specific area are drawn half and half. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the left-operating winning hole 682, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot with a ball-entering rate of 60% into the specific area is always selected.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) when the jackpot is started according to the number of game balls shot toward the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the jackpot waiting state. was configured to be variable.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the variation display corresponding to the big win ends, the big win starts without going through the big win standby state. By varying the opening period and the interval period of the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot, the number of game balls that can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the opening period and the interval period is varied, and the number of game balls can be varied according to the type of the jackpot. It is configured to vary the degree of advantage.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the end of each jackpot round is changed. The point that the conditions are unified to "when 30 seconds have passed or two or more game balls have won", the point that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 75, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment, the operation winning opening 660 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2) in front view is deleted. . Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the big win ends, the opening period of the big win starts immediately (without going through the waiting state for the big win).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the left variable winning device 650a is eliminated in the fifth embodiment. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, the right specific winning hole is closed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, or when two or more game balls enter. 65a is opened.

<Electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment has a period length selection table 202e added to the configuration of the RM 202 in the first embodiment, and the first winning type selection table 202b is partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The period length selection table 202e is a data table that defines a jackpot opening period and an interval period for each jackpot type. When the start timing of the jackpot opening period and the start timing of the interval period come, the period amount selection table 202e is referred to, and the opening period and the interval period corresponding to the jackpot type are set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70(c), but this period length selection table 202e has two types of opening periods: a relatively long period (5 seconds) and a relatively short period (1 second). is stipulated. Similarly, two types of interval periods are defined: a relatively long period (3 seconds) and a relatively short period (0.5 seconds). As a result, a long closing period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, and a long closing period (interval period) between rounds after the second round and a short jackpot are provided. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG.76(b), the 1st hit classification|category selection table 202b in the 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 76(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 76(b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment, there are five types of jackpot types, "jackpot A5" to "jackpot E5", as the jackpot types of the first special symbols. Three types of jackpot types, "jackpot F5" to "jackpot H5", are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), as the jackpot of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is defined in association with "jackpot A5". (See 202b1 in FIG. 76). Among the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become "jackpot A5" is five, so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A5" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot A2" has 8 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot A" in the first embodiment. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot A5" is one type of jackpot type in which relatively long periods are set as the opening period and the ending period. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, 30 seconds have passed, or two or more game balls enter the right specific winning opening 65a. is closed and the round ends. Therefore, if the opening period and the interval period are long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so more game balls can be opened and closed at the start of the next round. It can be in a state of being on the door 65f1. That is, when a new round is started and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can be dropped from the opening/closing door 65f1 to enter the right specific winning hole 65a. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of entering balls (two) stipulated in each round is likely to enter the right specific winning hole 65a (over winning). It becomes easier to be advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if the opening period and the interval period are short, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during these closing periods. , 2) are more likely to enter and the round ends (possibility of over-winning is reduced). In other words, it tends to be disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In the following explanation, a jackpot with a long opening period and interval period (a jackpot that tends to win more prize balls in each round) is called a "long interval jackpot", and a jackpot with a short opening period and interval period (each A jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a large number of prize balls in a round) is called a “short-interval jackpot”.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot B5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot B2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B5" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot B5" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot B5" is a kind of long interval jackpot, like the "jackpot A5". Therefore, the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot C5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are the "jackpot C2", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C5" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C5" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot C5" is a kind of short interval jackpot. For this reason, it is difficult for the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round to increase as compared with the long-interval jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot D5" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 74" (see 202b4 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot D5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D5" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot D5" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot D5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of winning balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot E5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are "jackpot E5", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot E5" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100). This "jackpot E5" has 5 rounds like the "jackpot C" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot E5" is a kind of short interval jackpot. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the number of prize balls obtained in each round compared to the long-interval jackpot.

In addition, as the jackpot of the second special symbol, "jackpot F5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" (see 202b6 in FIG. 76). . Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the "jackpot F5" is five, so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot F5" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot F5" has 16 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot D" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, the "variable state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot F5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the second special symbol jackpot, "jackpot G5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 64" (see 202b7 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values become "jackpot G5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot G5" is determined. ratio is 60% (60/100). This "jackpot G5" has 10 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot E" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are given. It is a jackpot type. Also, this "jackpot G5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As the second special symbol jackpot, "jackpot H5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b8 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values are "jackpot H5", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot H5" is determined. ratio is 35% (35/100). This "jackpot H5" has 10 rounds in the same manner as the "jackpot D" in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, "special pattern low probability state" and "ordinary pattern time saving state" are given. It is a jackpot type that is played. Also, this "jackpot H5" is a kind of long interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round tends to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

Thus, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the long-interval jackpot and the short-interval jackpot are provided. In the long-interval jackpot, since the closing period of the right specific winning hole 65a between rounds is long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right during the long closing period. Therefore, when the closing period ends and a new round starts, the game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a, so that more prize balls can be obtained. can be obtained. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, the period from the closing of the right specific winning hole 65a to the next opening is short, and most of the game balls are allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the closing period. Since it is not possible, the possibility of over-winning in the next round is also reduced. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is likely to be less than in the long interval jackpot. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the degree of advantage for each jackpot can be varied by varying the possibility of over-winning for each jackpot type, aside from the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot. A game can be played while paying attention to the type.

Next, details of the period length selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 76(c). FIG. 76(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the period length selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 76(c), this period length selection table 202e defines the length of the period to be set as the opening period and the interval period for each type of jackpot.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A5", "jackpot B5", "jackpot D5", "jackpot F5" to "jackpot H5" (long interval jackpot), the opening period is "5 seconds". 76(c) 202e1). In addition, for the types of jackpots "jackpot C5" and "jackpot E5" (short-interval jackpot), an opening period of "1 second" is associated and defined as an interval period of "0.5 seconds". are defined in association with each other (see 202e2 in FIG. 76(c)). By selecting the opening period and the interval period with reference to these stipulated contents, each closing period (opening period, interval period) is relatively long in the long-interval jackpot, so that the game ball is played during the closing period. It is possible to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 relatively often. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, each closing period is set to such a short length that one game ball can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 even if the closing period is started and then hit to the right. , it becomes difficult for over-winning to occur in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, by setting the closing period with reference to the period length selection table 202e, it is possible to vary the possibility of over winning depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying more attention to the jackpot type.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 77, special symbol variation processing 5 (S121) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is a special symbol variation process. Similar to (see FIG. 22), this is a process for setting the display in the first symbol display device 37, setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of S202 to S219 and S222 to S224, S202 to S202 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment respectively The same processes as those of S219 and S222 to S224 are executed.

Also, when the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment is started, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S241), and if the jackpot is in progress (S241: Yes) Terminate the process as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S241: No), the process proceeds to S202.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S219 is completed, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S242), and the process proceeds to S224.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1052) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This jackpot control process 5 (S1052) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is the processing for controlling the operation.

Of the jackpot control processing 5 (see FIG. 78), S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1210 to S1217, respectively, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 32) S1201, S1203 to S1209, and The same processing as each processing of S1210 to S1217 is executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is turned on in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the period length selection table 202e (FIG. 76 (c)) is read (S1241), the opening period of the length corresponding to the jackpot type is specified from the read period length selection table 202e, and an opening command indicating the specified period is set (S1242). . In the processing of S1242, an opening command indicating an opening period of 5 seconds is set in the case of a long-interval jackpot, and an opening command indicating an opening period of 1 second is set in the case of a short-interval jackpot. After the process of S1242 is completed, the process proceeds to S1203.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied in the process of S1208 (S1208: Yes), according to the jackpot type Interval setting processing for setting the interval period is executed (S1243), and this processing ends. Details of this interval setting process (S1243) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the interval setting process (S1243). In this interval setting process (S1243), first, it is determined whether or not the closing condition satisfied this time is the closing due to the end of the final round (S1401). : Yes), there is no need to set the interval period, so this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied due to the end of the round other than the final round (S1401: No), the period length selection table 202e is read out (S1402), corresponding to the jackpot type of this time The length of the interval period to be set is selected (specified) from the read period length selection table 202e (S1403). Then, the start of the interval period of the length specified in the processing of S1403 is set (S1404), and this processing ends.

By executing this interval setting process (see FIG. 79), the length of the interval period can be varied depending on whether the long-interval jackpot or the short-interval jackpot. As a result, in the long-interval jackpot, a large amount of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 that is being closed every interval period, so that a large amount of game balls can be delivered to the right specific winning opening 65a at the start of the next round. can be over-prized. On the other hand, in the case of a short-interval jackpot, an extremely short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the interval period, so that the game ball can reach the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 during the interval period. becomes difficult. Therefore, it becomes difficult for over-winning to occur in each round, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is reduced. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation that the long-interval jackpot will be selected as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, long interval jackpots with relatively long jackpot opening periods and interval periods and short interval jackpots with relatively short jackpot opening periods and interval periods are provided. It is configured. In the event of a long-interval jackpot, the closure period (opening period) from the announcement of the jackpot to the start of the first round, and the start of the next round after one round is completed. During the closing period (interval period) until, a large amount of prize balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting to the right. Therefore, when the closing period elapses and the right specific prize winning port 65a is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can enter the right specific prize winning port 65a at once. It is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of over-winning. On the other hand, in the case of a short-interval jackpot, even if a player hits right during the closing period, the closing period is too short and the game ball hardly reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 before the next round is started. . As a result, over-winning is less likely to occur, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls compared to long-distance jackpots. As a result, the number of rounds of big wins, the game state after the end of big wins, and the likelihood of over-winning can be varied according to the kind of big wins, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each kind of big wins can be increased. be able to. Therefore, when a big win is achieved, the game can be played while paying more attention to the type of the big win.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, only two types of long-interval jackpots with long closing periods and short-interval jackpots with short closing periods are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides more types. Specifically, for example, in addition to the long-interval jackpot and the short-interval jackpot, a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round) of the jackpot, and subsequent rounds In the jackpot type in which a short interval (eg, 0.5 seconds) is set, conversely, a short interval (eg, 0.5 seconds) is set as the closing period until a predetermined round (eg, the third round) , In subsequent rounds, it may be configured to provide a jackpot type in which a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set. Moreover, for example, it is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot classification in which a short interval and a long interval are alternately repeated. By constructing in this way, even if the opening period is short, after a predetermined round has passed, the player is informed that the jackpot will be long or the jackpot will be alternately repeated between short and long intervals. can be expected. Also, if the opening period is a long interval, it is possible to expect a big win in which the long interval is set for all the closing periods. As a result, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the type of jackpot.

In the fifth embodiment, both the opening period and the interval period are set to be long when the long-interval jackpot is won, and both the opening period and the interval period are set to be short when the short-interval jackpot is won. Although it is assumed that the interval is used, it is not limited to this. For example, one period may have a common length, and only the length of the other period may differ according to the type of jackpot. As a result, the control can be simplified, so the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the lengths of the opening period and the interval period are varied according to the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, at least one of the opening period and the interval period may be changed according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of special symbols that are disadvantageous to the player, and in a normal state of normal symbols, a short opening period (eg, 1 second) and an interval period (eg, 0.5 seconds) While it is set, in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, a long opening period (eg, 5 seconds) and an interval period (eg, 3 seconds) are set. It is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot classification. Thereby, it is possible to further improve the advantageous degree of the variable probability state and the time saving state which are advantageous to the player. Conversely, a long closing period may be set in a game state disadvantageous to the player, and a short closing period may be set in an advantageous game state. As a result, when the player wins a big win in a disadvantageous state, more prize balls can be obtained, so that quitting the game when the player is in a disadvantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, the control for varying the length of the closing period according to the game state or the jackpot type does not necessarily need to be combined with the right variable winning device 65 in this embodiment. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device (for example, the left variable winning device 650 in each of the above-described embodiments) that cannot intentionally generate over winning. As a result, the closing period can be changed according to the situation (the jackpot type won, the game state at the time of winning, etc.), so that the effects to be executed during the closing period can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.

<Modified Example of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 80, a modified example of the fifth embodiment described above will be described. A technique for providing a jackpot type that is difficult to win has been described. On the other hand, in this modified example, two types of variable winning devices (lower variable winning device 65, upper variable winning device 650) are used to vary the possibility of over winning without changing the closing period. explain.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, in this modification, a lower variable winning device 65 having the same structure as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments is arranged at the same position as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments. It is Above the lower variable winning device 65, an upper variable winning device 650 having the same structure as the left variable winning device 650 in the first to fourth embodiments is arranged. In this modification, the upper specific winning opening 650a of the upper variable winning device 650 and the lower specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are alternately opened for each round according to the jackpot type (alternating jackpot) ) and a jackpot type (one jackpot) in which the lower specific prize winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot. Each closing period (opening period, interval period) is set to the same period as the short interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above. In this configuration, the one-sided jackpot operates in the same manner as the short-interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above, so there is almost no over-winning, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls.

On the other hand, in the case of an alternate jackpot, if you hit right in the round where the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, some game balls will pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a (upper specific winning opening There is a case where it flows downward without winning the opening 650a and reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. That is, at the start of the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning hole 65a is opened), there is a possibility that one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. As a result, the more game balls that reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the higher the occurrence rate of over winning in the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened). Therefore, when an alternate jackpot is won, the player is made to play a game by devising a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the player to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by passing through the right side of the upper specific winning port 650a. can be done. That is, during a maximum of 30 seconds when the upper specific winning opening 650a is opened, more game balls are allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, and then the upper specific winning opening 650a is played with more than the upper limit number (2 pieces) A game can be played with the aim of hitting a ball. As a result, when the alternating jackpot hits, the prize balls that can be obtained differ according to the game method of the player, so that players who are confident in their skills are actively encouraged to play the game with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be done. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90. FIG. In the fifth embodiment described above, by varying the length of the opening period and the ending period (the length of the closing period) according to the jackpot type, the opening and closing door 65f1 of the right variable winning device 65 is reached in each closing period. The number of game balls that can be played is made different. As a result, when the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of each round (that is, when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is arranged in a position guided into the inside of the right specific winning opening 65a). It is configured so that the number of game balls) can be varied. In the long-interval jackpot, in which a closing period of a length that allows more than two game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 is set, game balls are continuously shot toward the opening/closing door 65f1 during the closing period. By simply continuing to do so, all the game balls passing over the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the next round can be made to enter the opened right specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot that ends when two or more game balls win, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two) is entered only by continuously hitting the right during the closing period. be able to. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, in which the closing period is set to a length that allows only two or less game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the balls pass through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of each round of the jackpot. The number of game balls inside becomes almost two or less. As a result, in each round of the jackpot, almost only the prescribed number (two) of game balls enter and the round ends. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot can be varied according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be increased.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the length of the opening period is fixed at 0.5 seconds regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, even if the player hits to the right after the opening period starts, the opening period ends before the game ball reaches the opening/closing door 65f1, and the right specific winning hole 65a is opened. Then, depending on the suggested content during execution of the variable display effect, whether it is better to shoot the game ball during the variable display How?) is configured to let the player decide. That is, during execution of the variable display, an effect can be executed to notify the player of the possibility of being advantageous when hitting to the right. As a result, the player is made to predict whether or not it is better to hit the right side from the content of the effect, and if it is determined that it is better to hit the right side, the player can predict whether the player should hit the right side before the end of the variation. You can start hitting. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened as predicted, it is possible to make the player feel happy that he/she has generated an over-winning by himself/herself.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the placement and number of passage detection sensors 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 are changed. , the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fifth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the passage detection sensor 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a top view of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 on the inlet side (front view right side) and the outlet side (front view left side). , passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 capable of detecting the passage of game balls are provided. The passage detection sensor 228g1 can detect a game ball flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Further, the passage detection sensor 228g2 can detect a game ball discharged to the left side of the opening/closing door 65f1 after passing through the channel provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. In the sixth embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1) and the number of game balls provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. By calculating the difference between the number of game balls discharged from the passage (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2) and the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, , is configured so that it can be grasped more accurately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment prevents the game ball from flowing down (the period required for the game ball to decelerate and pass through the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1). In addition to the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, protrusions 65f1d and 65f1e are provided on the left and right sides of the opening/closing door 65f1 to prevent game balls from flowing down. ing. The game ball flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 65 can be caused to flow from the front side of the top surface of the right variable winning device 65 into the flow path on the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by the convex portion 65f1d. In addition, due to the convex portion 65f1e, the discharge position can be limited to the front side of the right variable winning device 65 when discharged from the channel provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The inlet side (right side in front view) and the outlet side (left side in front view) of the flow path on the upper surface of these opening/closing doors 65f1 through which game balls can pass (range not blocked by convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e) are , a width that allows only one game ball to pass (a width corresponding to 1.5 game balls), and passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 are arranged at the centers thereof. Passage detection provided on one entrance side and exit side by making the passages on the entrance side and the exit side narrower than in each of the above embodiments (to the width of 1.5 game balls) By the sensors 228g1 and 228g2, game balls flowing into the channel on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 and game balls flowing out from the channel can be detected more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately grasp the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect that may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the variable display effect in the sixth embodiment will be described. conduct. This right-handed expectation indication effect is an effect that may be executed as part of the variable display effect that develops into super reach or special reach, and when a game ball is shot toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. This is an effect for suggesting the player's degree of expectation as to whether or not it will be advantageous to the player. That is, when more game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the variable display, the right specific winning port 65a is opened to indicate the degree of expectation of over winning. It is a performance.

FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing a display mode during super reach in which a right-handed expected degree suggestion effect is set. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is executed in a part of the super reach or the special reach effect. 82(a), an image of an adventurer character holding a sword and a shield and an enemy monster glaring at each other is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. displayed on the display screen. In addition, a display area HR4 is formed on the upper side of the display screen to display the characters "Defeat the enemy!" be done. With these display contents, the player can understand that if the adventurer can defeat the enemy monster, he will win a big prize.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 82(a), the body of the monster has cross-shaped wounds. Furthermore, the front side of the right variable prize winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is decorated with a scar on the body of a monster. As a result, the player can have the impression that the wound of the monster and the right variable winning device 65 are related. Although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, an effect is executed in which the adventurer attacks the monster aiming at its wound. At the same time, as a player-participation type effect, a game ball is shot aiming at the right variable winning device 65, which is decorated to resemble a wound of a monster.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the right-handed expectation suggesting effect, after an image of the adventurer and the monster glaring at each other is displayed, the upper part of the abdomen of the monster is zoomed up and displayed, and the image of the monster is displayed. On the right side of , a display area HR5 is formed in which a physical strength gauge LG indicating the remaining physical strength of the monster is displayed. These display contents allow the player to visually understand the remaining physical strength of the monster in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, to the left of the monster, an image of an arrow pointing to the wound of the monster is displayed, and in the display area HR4, the words "Aim for the wound!" and an image simulating the wound are displayed. Is displayed. Furthermore, the vicinity of the decoration that imitates a scratch on the right variable winning device 65 emits light in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation of the current performance. By these presentation contents, it is suggested to the player that there is a possibility of over-winning by aiming at the right variable prize-winning device 65 decorated like a scratch and shooting the game ball. can be done.

The right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment incorporates light-emitting diodes (LEDs) of a plurality of kinds of emission colors in order to emit light in the vicinity of the decoration that imitates a scratch. That is, it contains a white LED, a blue LED, a green LED, and a red LED. Although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, white is least expected, blue is more expected than white, green is more expected than blue, and red is the most expected. is configured to be high. As a result, using the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue, is it advantageous when the game ball is shot to the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (whether the right specific winning port 65a is opened and over winning occurs). You can guess what. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the content of the right-handed expected degree suggesting performance.

FIG. 83(a) shows a display mode when the player shoots a game ball aiming at the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by hitting to the right in the right-handed expectation suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 83(a), in the right-handed expectation suggesting effect, after the display content suggesting that the monster should be attacked aiming at the wound (see FIG. 82(b)), the game ball Each time the character passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1, the adventurer attacks the wound of the monster, thereby reducing the physical strength gauge LG of the monster by one gauge. By executing the effect of decreasing the gauge, the player can be made to think that hitting the game ball to the right makes it easier to defeat the monster, so that the game ball can be positively hit to the right. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect.

In addition, in the right-handed expectation indication effect in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0, while the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. In this case, the remaining gauge is reduced to only one gauge (the number of gauges never becomes 0). As a result, the player who wants to know the lottery result of the special pattern before the third pattern is stopped and displayed is more actively shot with the game ball toward the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. can be done. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting presentation can be further improved.

FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of stop of variation when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a variation display with right-handed expectation indication effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 83(b), when a big win is notified, the third symbols are stop-displayed in the display area HR3 with the same numbers. In addition to this, an effect is executed in which the adventurer's attack causes the monster to fall and the gauge number of the physical strength gauge to decrease to 0. Also, the characters "Victory" are displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the jackpot has been won.

In addition, these display contents continue to be displayed during the opening period. As described above, the sixth embodiment is configured so that the opening period is as short as 0.5 seconds. Therefore, by executing the right-handed expectation suggesting effect until the opening period, the effect is prevented from becoming unnatural by performing the effect only for 0.5 seconds. At the end of the opening period, the right specific prize winning port 65a is opened, so when the player hits to the right and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect. enters the right specific winning hole 65a where the game ball is opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the temporal change of the display mode before and after the variable display effect in which the right-handed expected degree suggesting effect is set in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84(a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode in the case where the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is executed in the variable display effect in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbols. In FIG. 84(a), an example will be described in which super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation type. As shown in FIG. 84(a), when the variable display corresponding to the big win is started, first, the normal variable display is started, and then the variable display of the third symbols forming each symbol row is started. Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the variable display of the third symbol was started, a ready-to-win state occurs. That is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stop-displayed with the third symbols having the same numbers, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed.

When 20 seconds have passed since the ready-to-win state was generated, it develops into super-ready-to-win, and the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect (see FIG. 82(a)) is started. Then, when 26 seconds have passed since this right-handed hitting expectation suggesting effect was started (that is, when 4 seconds remain until the fluctuation ends), the characters "Aim for the scratch!" are displayed in the display area HR4. The effect (see FIG. 82(b)) is executed. In this effect, as described above, the color of light emitted from the right variable winning device 65 is used to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not there will be an advantage when hitting to the right. About 7 game balls are shot by right-handed hitting for 4.5 seconds, which is the remaining 4 seconds until the end of the fluctuation time and 0.5 seconds for the opening period of the jackpot. Therefore, at the start of one round, about seven game balls can be entered almost simultaneously. In the following description, an effect that informs the degree of expectation of whether or not there will be an advantage if the player hits to the right depending on the color of light emitted from the right variable prize winning device 65 (the text "Aim for scratches!" is displayed) is referred to as "expectation level notification effect".

Actually, in most cases, firing is started after checking the emitted light color and determining whether or not the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. fewer in number. If the game balls are shot in the case of a misalignment, all the game balls that are shot are wasted (almost all the game balls are discharged from the out port 66), so immediately right-handed shots are made every time the effect occurs. This is because if a game is played with the game method that is used, it will actually result in a loss. Therefore, every time an effect (expectation notification effect) in which the characters "Aim for the wound!" When it is determined that the ball will be released, the game can be played by trying to quickly start hitting to the right. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect, and thus to improve the player's interest in the game.

When 0.5 second of the opening period of the jackpot has passed, the first round of the jackpot is started, the right specific prize winning port 65a is opened, and a performance indicating the start of the jackpot (a performance corresponding to the opening performance). is performed for the round period of one round and for the interval period after one round ends. Then, when the second round of big wins is started, a normal mode of big win performance is executed. Compared to executing the opening performance during 0.5 seconds of the actual opening period by configuring to execute the performance corresponding to the opening performance over the period until the second round of the jackpot is started. As a result, it is possible to notify the fact that the jackpot has started over a sufficiently long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize more reliably that the big win has started.

FIG. 84(b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode in the case where the variation type of super reach out with a variation time of 60.5 seconds is determined as the variation pattern, and the right-handed expectation indication effect is set. be. As shown in FIG. 84(b), the change over time of the effect mode in the case of loss is exactly the same as in the case of a big win at least until the expectation level notification effect occurs. On the other hand, as described above, the selectivity of the luminescent color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 is different from that in the case of a big win. Therefore, when the expectation level notification effect occurs, whether to start hitting to the right depends on whether the luminescent color has a high percentage of selection in the big win or the luminescence color with a high percentage of selection in the loss. You can let the player decide.

As shown in FIG. 84(b), when 60 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, it is reported that the monster was not defeated by the adventurer's attack, and the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the failure is stopped. is displayed to notify that it is out. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the lottery result of the special symbol of this time has been lost. This notification of the loss (stopped display of the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the loss) continues for 0.5 second. The reason why the variation time is longer by 0.5 seconds is that, as described above, the opening period of the jackpot, 0.5 seconds, is also used to indicate the expected degree of hitting right. This is for performing the performance. That is, even in the case of losing, by setting the same performance time as in the case of a big win, it is possible to share the performance mode until 60 seconds when the final result is announced. Therefore, since the effect can be executed using the common data, the amount of data for executing the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect can be reduced.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is set, the effect having a common mode except for the selectivity of the luminescent color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 is the same as the end of the effect. It continues until 0.5 seconds ago. As a result, the player can determine whether or not it is better to hit to the right using the color of light emitted from the right variable winning device 65 as a clue.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, every time the game ball passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1 after the expectation notification effect has occurred, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG indicating the physical strength of the monster is increased by one. appear to decrease. In the case of a big win (the right specific prize winning opening 65a is opened), the physical strength gauge LG is reduced to 0, while in the case of a loss, the physical strength gauge LG is reduced only to 1. Therefore, if the player continues to hit right, it may be possible to sense a little earlier whether or not a big win will occur. Since the physical strength gauge LG has an initial gauge number of 5, it is possible to sense whether or not a big hit has occurred by allowing five game balls to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. That is, if the gauge number decreases to 0, it can be determined that a big win has occurred, while if the gauge number does not decrease from 1, it can be determined that the game has failed. However, it takes at least 3 seconds to shoot 5 game balls. It takes about one second for the shot game ball to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, even if the game balls are shot after confirming the emission color of the right variable winning device 65, it is difficult to let the five game balls pass through the passage detection sensor 228g1. For this reason, a game ball can be shot before the expectation notification effect is generated for a player who wants to detect a big win as soon as possible. In other words, depending on the taste of each player, it is possible to determine whether or not the player will hit the jackpot as early as possible, and whether or not the player will hit to the right based on the light emission color of the right variable prize winning device 65. It is possible to allow the player to select the playability to be judged. As a result, it is possible to provide game features that match the tastes of each player, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is set in the variable display effect corresponding to the big win, when five or more game balls pass the passage detection sensor 228g1, the physical strength gauge LG is displayed. Although the number of gauges is always reduced to 0, it is not limited to this. For example, when a big win is achieved, the gauge number of the physical fitness gauge LG can be reduced to 0 at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%), and in other cases, the gauge number is reduced only to 1. can be configured to By configuring in this way, even if the number of gauges is reduced to only 1, it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the big win.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment has an effect mode selection table for the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(a)). 222b is added. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described fifth embodiment, so details thereof will be omitted.

The effect mode selection table 222b is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode to be executed in the variable display effect. In this effect mode selection table 222b, a plurality of effect modes including the above-mentioned right-handed expectation suggesting effect are defined, and at the start of the variable display effect, a mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j, which will be described later, is determined. be done. Details of the presentation mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the presentation mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 86, the effect mode selection table 222b defines, for each variation type, a selectable effect mode and a value range of the effect lottery counter 223j in association with each other. Specifically, with respect to the variation type "hit special reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223j (222b1 in FIG. 86). reference). This normal effect is a generic term for the effect mode in which it is difficult to know whether or not right hand shots are advantageous until immediately before the fluctuation stops. More specifically, in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a big win will occur from the mode of presentation, except for whether or not the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned at the end of variation. It is a production of a mode that makes it difficult. When this normal effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether or not the game is a big win until the third symbol is stopped. Therefore, even if the player perceives a big hit and starts hitting to the right, the first round is started before more than two game balls reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the normal effect is selected, it becomes difficult to win over in the first round.

Of the 100 values "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, 40 counter values are associated with the "normal effect". In addition, the rate at which the normal effect is determined as the effect mode is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223j "40 to 99" is defined in association with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect as an effect mode (see 222b2 to 222b5 in FIG. 86). Of these, the range of "40 to 49" is defined in correspondence with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect in which an expectation level notification effect occurs in which "white" is set as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65. (See 222b2 in FIG. 86), the range of "50 to 74" is defined in association with a mode in which "blue" is set as the emission color (see 222b3 in FIG. 86), and the range of "75 to 90" is associated with a mode in which "green" is set as the emission color (see 222b4 in FIG. 86), and in the range of "90 to 99", there is a mode in which "red" is set as the emission color. are defined in association with each other (see 222b5 in FIG. 86).

Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the luminescent colors "white", "blue", "green", and "red" are 10, 25, and 10, respectively. Since there are 15 pieces and 10 pieces, the ratios at which each emission color is determined are 10% (10/100), 25% (25/100), 15% (15/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. be.

In addition, for the variation type "win super reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 74" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b6 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, 75 counter values are associated with "normal effect". The rate at which the effect is determined is 75% (75/100).

On the other hand, the value range "75 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j is defined in association with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect as the effect mode (see 222b7 and 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of these, the range of "75 to 94" is defined in association with "white" as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation level notification effect (see 222b7 in FIG. 86), and the range of "95 to 99" is defined. The range is defined in association with a mode in which “red” is set as the emission color (see 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the luminescent colors "white" and "red" are 20 and 5, respectively, so each luminescent color is determined. The proportions are 20% (20/100) and 5% (5/100), respectively.

In addition, for the variation type "missing special reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 89" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b9 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, 90 counter values are associated with "normal effect". The rate at which the effects are determined is 90% (90/100).

On the other hand, the value range "90 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j is defined in association with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect as an effect mode (see 222b10 to 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of these, the range of "90 to 96" is defined in association with "white" as the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation level notification effect (see 222b10 in FIG. 86), and "97, 98". The range is defined in association with a mode in which "blue" is set as the emission color (see 222b11 in FIG. 86), and "99" corresponds to a mode in which "green" is set as the emission color. (see 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the luminescent colors "white", "blue", and "green" are 7, 2, and 1, respectively. The proportions at which each emission color is determined are 7% (7/100), 2% (2/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively.

That is, when the winning special reach and the losing special reach are compared, the ratio of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is higher in the winning special reach (the ratio of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation for the big win. Also, in the hit special reach, compared to the off special reach, when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is determined, the ratio of determining the emission color of "white" and "blue" is lower, while "green" The determination ratio of the emission color is increased. Also, only in the case of winning special reach, there is a possibility that the luminescent color of "red" is determined. Therefore, when the luminescent color becomes "green", the player can be made to think that there is a high possibility that hitting to the right will be more advantageous. In addition, when it becomes "red", it is possible to make the player perceive that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

In addition, for the variation type "missing super reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 94" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b13 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, 95 counter values are associated with "normal effect". The rate at which the effects are determined is 95% (95/100).

On the other hand, for the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223j "95 to 99", an expectation level notification effect corresponding to the luminescent color of "white" is defined as an effect mode in association with it (222b14 in FIG. 86). reference). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with the expectation level notification effect with the light emission color of "white" is 5, so the expectation level notification with the light emission color of "white". The rate at which the effect is determined is 5% (5/100).

That is, when comparing the winning super reach and the losing super reach, the ratio of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is higher in the winning super reach (the ratio of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation for the big win. Also, in the hit super reach, compared to the losing super reach, the determination ratio of the "white" luminescent color is lower when the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is determined. Also, only in the case of winning special reach, there is a possibility that the luminescent color of "red" is determined. Therefore, when the luminescent color becomes "white", the player can guess whether hitting to the right is advantageous or not. In addition, when it becomes "red", it is possible to make the player perceive that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

In addition, fluctuation types other than "hit special reach", "hit super reach", "missing special reach", and "missing super reach" ("hit normal reach", "missing normal reach", "long miss", "short miss ”), a “normal effect” is defined in association with all possible value ranges of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b15 in FIG. 86). Therefore, when the variation type is "normal reach for winning", "normal reach for losing", "long loss", or "short loss", the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is not executed.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect and the ratio of selecting each luminescent color in the expectation degree notification effect in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect are changed according to the variation type. It is configured to be different depending on the This allows the player to judge whether or not it is better to hit to the right from the color of light emitted from the right variable winning device 65 when the expectation level notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). As shown in FIG. 85(b), the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment has an effect lottery counter 223j and a passing number counter 223k in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)). , a notification effecting flag 223m, a physical strength gauge counter 223n, a notification standby flag 223p, and a notification type storage area 223q are added.

The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used for selecting the variable display effect mode from the above-described effect mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 86), and the value is updated within the range of "0 to 99". At the start of fluctuation, an effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

The passing number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The value of the passage number counter 223k is changed to 1 each time the passage of the game ball is detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1 provided on the upstream side of the passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 (the output becomes H). are added one by one. That is, each time a game ball flows into the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the value is incremented by one. Also, the value of the passage number counter 223k is incremented by one each time the passage of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H) by the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side. That is, each time a game ball flows out from the channel on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the value is subtracted by one.

The informing effect flag 223m indicates whether or not the expectation level informing effect (effect of notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not there is an advantage if the player hits to the right according to the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is being executed. is a flag indicating If the in-notification effect flag 223m is ON, it indicates that the expectation level notification effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, it means that the expectation level notification effect is not being executed. This informing effect flag 223m is set to ON when the start of the expectation level informing effect is set (see S4708 in FIG. 88), and is set to OFF when the big win is started.

The physical fitness gauge counter 223n is a counter indicating the gauge number of the physical fitness gauge LG displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the expectation level notification effect. The counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is set to a value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from "5", which is the maximum value of the physical strength gauge number, as an initial value at the start of the expectation level notification effect (FIG. 88). (see S4706 of ). As a result, if the game ball is struck to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started, and a plurality of game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the start of the expectation level notification effect, the expectation It is possible to shorten the period required until the gauge number of the physical strength gauge counter LG is completely reduced during execution of the degree notification performance. Therefore, it is possible for a player who wants to know whether or not a big win will occur as soon as possible to hit the game ball to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started. When the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more at the start of the expectation level notification effect, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is uniformly set to 1 regardless of the value of the passing number counter 223k (Fig. 88). (see S4705 of ). That is, even in the case of a big win, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG does not become 0 immediately after the start of the expectation level notification effect. Therefore, it is possible for the player to judge whether or not it is better to start hitting to the right using the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue. The physical strength gauge counter 223n detects the passage of the game ball by the passage detection sensor 228g1 on the upstream side until it reaches the lower limit value (0 in the case of a big hit, 1 in the case of a miss) set for each special symbol lottery result. The value is updated by decrementing it by 1 each time (see S4217 in FIG. 87).

The notification standby flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display effect in which the right-handed expected degree suggestive effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the expected degree informing effect has not yet been reached. This notification standby flag 223p is set to ON when execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is determined (see S4805 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when the start of the expectation degree notification effect is set. (See S4708 in FIG. 88).

The notification type storage area 223q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of expectation notification effect (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) to be executed in the right-handed expectation suggesting effect. When the type of expectation level notification effect is determined by referring to the effect mode selection table 222b at the start of fluctuation, data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the notification type storage area 223q (see FIG. 90). (see S4804). Note that the notification type storage area 223q is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect in which the emission color "white" is set, and "02H" is stored. If it is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect in which the emission color "blue" is set, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect in which the emission color "green" is set, and "04H" is stored. If it is set, it shows an expectation notification effect in which the emission color "red" is set. On the other hand, when "00H" is stored, it indicates that the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is not set.

<Control Processing of Audio Ramp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. First, the rendering update process 6 (S4121) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This effect update process 6 (S4121) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 35). is the processing of

In this effect update process 6 (see FIG. 87), first, the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 arranged on the upper surface of the right variable prize winning device 65 on the upstream side (the entrance side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1) is set to H. (High) is determined (S4211), and if it is determined that the output is H (S4211: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223k and updated (S4212). Next, it is determined whether or not the informing effect flag 223m is ON (S4213), and if it is determined that the informing effect flag 223m is ON (S4213: Yes), the state of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. After executing the processing (S4214 to S4218) for the setting, the processing shifts to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 is L (S4211: No), and if it is determined in the process of S4213 that the informing effect flag 223m is off (S4213: No) , there is no possibility of changing the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG, so the processes of S4214 to S4218 for updating the physical fitness gauge LG are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

Here, the processing for updating the state of the physical fitness gauge LG will be described in detail. In the processing for updating the physical strength gauge LG, first, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery was a big hit (S4214). S4214: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (S4215). That is, it is determined whether or not the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG has reached the lower limit (0) for winning, and if the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (the gauge number has not reached the lower limit). If so (S4215: Yes), the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is updated by subtracting 1 (S4217), and the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG is changed to the gauge number corresponding to the updated value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n. mode (S4218), and the process proceeds to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4215 that the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is 0 (the number of gauges has reached the lower limit) (S4215: No), there is no need to update the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG. , S4217 and S4218 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a loss (not a big hit) (S4214: No), then the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more. (S4216). That is, it is determined whether or not the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG has reached the lower limit value (1) in the case of loss (S4216), and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (the gauge number has reached the lower limit value). not) (S4216: Yes), the processing of S4217 and S4218 for updating the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the physical fitness gauge LG is executed, and the process proceeds to S4219. . On the other hand, in the process of S4216, if it is determined that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 (the lower limit of the gauge number in the case of loss) (S4216: No), the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. Since there is no need, the processes of S4217 and S4218 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4219.

In the processing of S4219, it is determined whether the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the exit side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1) is H (high). (S4219), if it is determined that the output is H (the game ball has passed) (S4219: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated by subtracting 1 (S4220), and the process proceeds to S4221. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 is L (the passage of the game ball is not detected) (S4219: No), the process of S4220 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4221. to move to.

In the processing of S4221, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the expectation degree notification effect, and when the start timing has come, notification start determination processing for executing the expectation degree notification effect is executed (S4221), and this processing is performed. exit. The details of this notification start determination process (S4221) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the notification start determination process (S4221) described above. In this notification start determination process (S4221), first, it is determined whether or not the notification standby flag 223p is ON (S4701). It is not in the middle, or the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is being executed, but it means that the expectation degree notification effect has already started, and there is no possibility of starting the execution of the expectation degree notification effect, so it is left as it is. End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is ON (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start the expectation level notification effect (S4702), and the expectation level notification effect If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4702: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the timing for starting the expectation level notification effect has come (S4702: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is read (S4703), and the read counter value is 4 or more. (S4704).

In the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is set to 1 (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4707. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4704 that the value of the passing number counter 223k is less than 4, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum gauge number of 5 is set to the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n. (S4706), and the process proceeds to S4707. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the initial value of the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG at the start of the expectation level notification effect is set to the value of the passing number counter 223k (the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1). ), it is configured to be different according to. As a result, for a player who wants to know whether or not a big win will occur as soon as possible, more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started. It can make you think you can reach it.

In the process of S4707, the start of the expectation level notification effect is set in accordance with the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q and the value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n set in the process of S4705 or S4706. (S4707). Specifically, the right variable winning device 65 is caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q, and the gauge number corresponding to the counter value of the physical fitness gauge counter 223n is added to the physical fitness gauge LG. Set as display mode. Next, the notification standby flag 223p is set to OFF, and the notification effecting flag 223m is set to ON (S4708), and this processing ends.

By executing this notification start determination process (see FIG. 88), the expectation level notification effect of the mode selected from the effect mode selection table 222b can be accurately executed.

Next, the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 6 (S4122) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). Of the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment, the processes of S4501 to S4509 are the same as the processes of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). .

In addition, in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S4503 ends, the effect mode of the mode corresponding to the variation pattern (variation type) extracted in the process of S4503 is selected. An effect mode selection process for determining from the table 222b is executed (S4511), and the process proceeds to S4504. Details of the rendering mode selection process (S4511) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the effect mode selection process (S4511). In this effect mode selection process (S4511), first, the effect mode selection table 222b and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are read (S4801), and from the read effect mode selection table 222b, the main controller 110 The variation type notified from and the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are specified (S4802).

Next, it is determined whether or not the specified production mode is a production mode corresponding to the right-handed expectation degree suggesting production (S4803). : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when the mode with the right-handed expectation suggesting effect is specified, the data corresponding to the current effect mode (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is stored in the notification type storage area 223q. Then (S4804), the notification standby flag 223p is set to ON (S4805), and this processing ends.

By executing this effect mode selection process (see FIG. 89), the effect mode of the expectation level notification effect can be selected from the effect mode selection table 222b at a rate corresponding to the variation type. is executed, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not to start right-handed beating by estimating whether right-handed beating is advantageous from the light emitting color of the right variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to set 0.5 second as the jackpot opening period regardless of the jackpot type. That is, unless the game balls are shot toward the right variable winning device 65 before the start of the big win, at the start of the first round of the big win, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number (two) is exceeded. It is configured such that the flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 cannot be put into a state of being passed. Then, in a part of the variable display effect for informing the big win and in a part of the variable display effect for informing the loss, an expectation level informing effect for informing the degree of expectation that the right specific prize winning port 65a will be opened. is configured to be executable. Thus, it is possible for the player to judge whether or not to start hitting to the right during the execution of the variable display performance (before the notification of the lottery result of the special symbol) from the content of the expectation report performance. If a right-handed shot is started during execution of the variable display and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened as intended by the player, an over-winning can be generated and the player can be satisfied. In addition, if the player did not hit the right during execution of the variable display and the right specific winning opening 65a remained closed as intended by the player (lost in the special symbol lottery), the right hand would be wasted. It can give you a sense of relief that you were able to avoid hitting and consuming your ball. On the other hand, if the result is contrary to the player's aim (the right specific winning opening 65a is not opened even though the player hits to the right, or the right specific winning opening 65a is opened even if the player does not hit to the right). In the case of ), in the next expectation degree notification effect, it is possible to make the player have a sense of purpose to predict whether or not it is better to hit to the right. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is common regardless of the jackpot type, and the player is informed whether or not it is better to hit to the right during the execution of the variable display by the control of the sound lamp control device 113 side. By making the determination, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of game balls entering the right specific winning hole 65a) is made different for each big win. Therefore, unlike the fifth embodiment described above, there is no need to provide the period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76(c)) that defines the correspondence between the jackpot type and the closing period in the main controller 110. , the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. In addition, since the control process for selecting the opening period is simply the process of setting a common period, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Since the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 needs to perform major controls related to the game, such as the lottery for big wins and the variable display of the first symbol, various major controls can be performed more easily by reducing the processing load. can be executed with certainty.

In the sixth embodiment, as the expectation notification effect, the luminous color of the right variable winning device 65 is used to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is more advantageous to hit to the right. It is not something that can be done. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, the monster displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation by varying the color or appearance thereof, or the level of expectation may be indicated by the content of the adventurer's attack. may be configured to notify. Further, instead of or in addition to the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 and the display mode of the third pattern display device 81, the expectation level may be notified by using different music or sound effects.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening period for all jackpot types is unified to 0.5 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the opening period is configured to be different according to the jackpot type, and some of the cases where the opening period is a short jackpot (and when the special symbol lottery is lost) Then, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the degree-of-expectation notification effect is executed during the execution of the variable display. As a result, in the case of a jackpot type with a long opening period, the player can be made to hit to the right without worrying after the jackpot has been announced. In addition, when the expectation level notification effect is executed, the player is judged whether or not it is better to start hitting to the right while the variable display is being executed based on the content of the notification (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65). It is possible to provide a playability that makes you want to play.

In the sixth embodiment, the right variable winning device 65 is decorated with a wound-like decoration in the expectation level notification effect, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a prompt to aim at the wound. Although the player is indirectly suggested to hit the right hand, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the expectation degree notification effect, it may be configured to clearly notify right-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand that there is a possibility that hitting to the right will be advantageous (over winning will occur).

In the sixth embodiment, the player hits right while the variable display is being performed by executing an expectation degree notification effect for informing the player of the degree of expectation as to whether or not the player will be advantageous if he hits right. Although it was configured to determine whether it is better or not, the expectation level notification effect is not necessarily the right variable winning device 65 (right specific winning port 65a) in this embodiment. It is not necessary to combine with a variable prize winning device with a structure that can hold the ball). For example, the expectation informing effect is applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with only the variable winning device capable of winning only the game balls hit after being released, such as the left variable winning device 650. good too. In other words, the expectation degree notification effect may be executed as an effect of simply notifying the expectation degree as to whether or not a big win will occur after the end of the variation.

In the sixth embodiment, even when the special symbol lottery is lost, the expectation level notification effect is configured to be executable, but only when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the expectation level notification effect is performed. may be configured to execute In this case, the timing for starting the expectation level notification effect may be varied. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect is generated 4 seconds before the end of the variable time. A configuration in which an expectation level notification effect is generated may be employed. Furthermore, in this case, for example, it may be configured such that, as the number of consecutive fluctuation displays corresponding to the failure increases, the probability of occurrence of the expectation level notification effect 4 seconds before or 2 seconds before is increased. In other words, the greater the number of consecutive failures, the greater the hit, and the right-handed hit may be executed for a longer period of time during the execution of the variable display when the right-handed hit expectation indication effect is selected. . With this configuration, as the number of executions of the variable display after the previous big win increases, the number of prize balls in the first round in the case of winning the big win tends to increase. In addition, the player can be encouraged to continue the game until a big win is achieved. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, a device capable of measuring time such as RTC (Real-Time-Clock) may be provided, and the timing at which the expectation level notification effect is likely to occur may be changed according to the time zone. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that he/she wants to play the game in a time zone where the expectation level notification effect is likely to occur 4 seconds or 2 seconds before the end of the fluctuation.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 99. FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, operation winning openings (right activation winning opening 661, left activation winning opening 662) are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13 to trigger the start of the jackpot. In addition, it has a configuration in which the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is made different. In addition, in the left operation winning hole 662, in the case of waiting for a big hit, a game ball enters almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds). In other words, when the left-actuated winning opening 662 becomes a left trigger jackpot that triggers the start of jackpot, the first round of jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when the right operation winning opening 661 becomes a right trigger jackpot that triggers the start of the jackpot, a plurality of game balls are allowed to reach the flow path on the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, and then the right By entering a game ball into the operation winning hole 661, the player can aim for over winning.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, even if the left trigger jackpot is won, the game ball goes to the left operation winning hole 662 unless the player hits left after entering the jackpot waiting state. It is configured so that there is no possibility of entering the ball. Then, in the jackpot standby state, as the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, the structure is such that the effect as if in the normal game state is performed. That is, even during the jackpot standby state, the variation display effect of the third symbol is executed in a pseudo manner, and the player is made to feel as if the player is not in the jackpot standby state (as if the player is in the normal game state). It is configured so that it is possible to misidentify and continue left-handed hitting. In other words, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the player is made to continue hitting leftward by executing an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot waiting state has occurred. The configuration is such that the game ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 before the player realizes that the game ball should reach the game ball. As a result, in the event of a left trigger jackpot, the jackpot can be started after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two, which is the upper limit number in the first round) reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. On the other hand, in the case of a right trigger big hit, the game ball is entered into the right operation winning port 661 at the timing when many game balls have reached the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, making it easy. Over winning can be generated. Therefore, as in the above-described second embodiment, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) can be different between the left trigger jackpot and the right trigger jackpot, so the game can be focused on the jackpot type. can be done.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The only difference is that the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 91, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, the board structure of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 54) in that the storage device 675 is eliminated. ing. By removing the storage device 675, even if the left opportunity jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is entered, the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 immediately as in the second embodiment described above. never do. In other words, even in the case of the left trigger jackpot, the jackpot is not started unless the game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 662 by hitting to the left in the jackpot waiting state. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the third pattern display device 81 stops displaying the third pattern of the combination of the missing combination, and even after shifting to the jackpot standby state, the normal game state is maintained. It is configured to perform variable display in the same manner as in the above. As a result, it is made difficult for the player to recognize that he is in a state of waiting for a big win, and even after the state of waiting for a big win, the game ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 662 by continuing left-handed hitting. It is configured as follows. Therefore, as in the second embodiment, while it is possible to aim for over-winning in the right-moment jackpot, when it becomes the left-moment jackpot, the game property that the jackpot is started without aiming for over-winning can be provided. In addition, the proportion of the game balls that enter the left actuation prize opening 662 among the game balls shot by left-handed hitting is higher than the proportion of the balls entering the first ball entry opening 64.例文帳に追加. As a result, when the left trigger jackpot jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball can enter (win a prize) into the left actuation prize opening 662 in a shorter period of time. Although omitted from the drawing, since the storage device 675 is deleted, the control processing for opening and closing the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is also deleted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, when the left trigger jackpot is achieved, the change over time of the effect mode from the start of the variable display to the start of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram exemplifying a case where a variable display effect corresponding to a left trigger jackpot (super reach with a variable time of 60 seconds) is executed in a state where the number of held balls is two at the start of the variable. . As shown in FIG. 92, when the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is executed, it is pseudo-notified that the game is out at the end of the variation. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are stop-displayed in combination of the missing symbols. At this time, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the big win. However, the third symbol display device 81 is larger than the first symbol display device 37 and arranged at a position that is easy to see. Therefore, since most of the players do not notice that the first symbol display device 37 is a winning stop symbol, a special symbol is presented to the player who has confirmed the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. It can be made to think that the lottery result has been lost (it has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state).

As shown in FIG. 92, when the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot ends, the jackpot standby state is started, and the pseudo variation display is started on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the variation display corresponding to the two held balls that were held during the execution of the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is performed in a pseudo manner. This pseudo-variation display is set with a variation time of 2 seconds each, and the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation. In order to execute this pseudo variable display, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for pseudo variable display. Further, when the pseudo variable display is executed in the jackpot standby state, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also reduced in a pseudo manner. As a result, the player can be made to think that the number of reserved balls is decreasing every two seconds, so that the game balls are additionally entered into the first ball entrance 64 and a lottery of special symbols is executed. I can make you want to do it. When the pseudo fluctuation display is finished and the pseudo held ball is gone, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. This pseudo fluctuation stopped state has exactly the same display mode as when the number of held balls becomes 0 in the normal game state. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the lottery for the special symbol will not be executed unless the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, so that the player can be made to hit left more positively. .

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, only the lottery of the first special symbol is configured to win the left trigger jackpot. That is, the situation in which the left-handed chance jackpot is won is limited to the gaming state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) in which the game is played aiming at the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加As a result, when a pseudo-fluctuation display effect or a pseudo-fluctuation stop state occurs, the direction in which the player shoots the game ball in order to continue the game (lottery for special symbols) is changed to the game board. 13 can be confined to the left. Therefore, in the pseudo-normal state, the game ball can enter the left actuation winning hole 662 more reliably for the player who wants to continue the game.

When the game ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 662 by the player continuously hitting to the left in the jackpot standby state, a special mode effect (blackout effect) is executed. Although the details will be described later, the execution of this blackout effect that does not occur during the normal game state makes the player immediately understand that it is in the jackpot waiting state and that the jackpot is about to start. be able to. This blackout effect is executed for 0.1 seconds during the opening period, and after the end of the effect, a normal jackpot effect is started.

In addition, in the pseudo fluctuation stop state, if the winning to the left operation winning opening 662 is not detected even after 3 seconds have passed, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is terminated and the standby state production (Fig. 7 reference). The reason why the pseudo fluctuation stop state is ended in 3 seconds is that when the player decides to quit the game at the timing of the fluctuation stop state, before the player leaves the table. , in order to make the player aware that they are actually waiting for a big win. That is, it is intended to prevent the player from leaving the seat while the big win is confirmed and another player starting the game from the big win waiting state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game due to quitting the game without noticing that the player has won the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of an effect mode during the left trigger big hit in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 93(a) is a diagram showing a blackout effect executed during the opening period of the left-handed jackpot. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the left opportunity jackpot is won and the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, the pseudo fluctuation display and the pseudo fluctuation stop state effect are performed, so that the jackpot standby This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the state. During the execution of these pseudo effects, a game ball enters the left-actuated winning port 662, and when a jackpot is started, the opening period is extremely short (0.1 seconds), so the third symbol is a winning combination. There is no period for notifying the big hit by the effect such as stopping display at . Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 93(a) is provided so that the player can understand at a glance that the special effect has been executed, and the effect time can be shortened. It is configured to run. That is, when the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 and the opening period of the left trigger jackpot is reached, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly turns dark (blacks out). It is configured to be executed. By making the appearance significantly different from the pseudo-variation display or the pseudo-variation stop state production that has been executed so far, the player can instantly understand that the special production has been executed. can.

After the blackout effect ends, an effect indicating that a big win has started is executed as shown in FIG. 93(b). That is, in the main display area Dm, the characters "Big Win Confirmed!" are displayed, and three third symbols having the same number are stopped and displayed. Further, in the small area Ds1, a display indicating the number of rounds (characters "1 round") and a display indicating the number of awarded balls (characters "0000 GET") are displayed. In addition, in the small area Ds3, characters of "Right hit!!" and a figure of an arrow pointing to the right are displayed for shooting a game ball toward the right specific winning hole 65a. These display contents allow the player to immediately understand that the big win has already started.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. Referring to FIG. As shown in FIG. 94, the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment has a pseudo ball count counter 223r and a , a pseudo-normal state flag 223s, a pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t, and a pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u are added.

The pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of pseudo-variation display pending after winning the left chance jackpot and being in a jackpot standby state. In the jackpot standby state, while the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is 1 or more, the pseudo variable display is repeatedly executed (see S4907 in FIG. 96), and the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r becomes 0. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends in the state, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). This pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is set to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c at the time of transition to the jackpot standby state corresponding to the left trigger jackpot ( See S4614 in FIG. 98). In other words, the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r comprises at least a counter for counting the number of pseudo first special symbol reserved balls and a counter for counting the number of pseudo second special symbol reserved balls. It is Also, the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is decremented by one each time the start of the pseudo-variation display is set (see S4908 in FIG. 96).

The pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set in the jackpot standby state, whether the effect (pseudo-normal state effect) is executed in such a manner as to be in a pseudo-normal gaming state (when the left-moment jackpot is won). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in a jackpot waiting state. If this pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state effect is not being executed. This pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to ON when the left chance jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is started (see S4617 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, this pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set when the pseudo-normal state production ends (when the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 and shifts to the opening period of the jackpot, or when the pseudo-variation stop state If the standby state effect is started continuously for 3 seconds), it is set to OFF (see S4912 in FIG. 96 and S4617 in FIG. 98).

The pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is a timer that measures the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display. A timer value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000) is set in the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t each time the start of the pseudo-fluctuation display is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96). Depending on whether the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is 0 or not, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-fluctuation display is being executed.

The pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is a timer that measures the duration of the pseudo fluctuation stop state. A timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (that is, 3000) is set to the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). When the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u becomes 0, it means that 3 seconds have passed since the pseudo fluctuation stop state was started, so the start of the standby state effect is set. Even if the player intends to quit the game, the jackpot waiting state is set before the player leaves the table by terminating the pseudo fluctuation stop state in 3 seconds. The player can be made to notice that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game by quitting the game without noticing it despite winning the left-moment jackpot.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 95, main processing 7 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. This main process 7 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment (and first embodiment).

Of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, the processing of S4101 to S4118 is the same as the processing of S4101 to S4118 of the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment. executed. Further, in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, after the effect update process (S4111) ends, a pseudo A normal state rendering process is executed (S4131), and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of this pseudo-normal state effect processing (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the above-described pseudo-normal state effect processing (S4131). In the pseudo-normal state rendering process (S4131), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on (S4901). Since it means that the pseudo-normal gaming state is not set (not the jackpot standby state based on the left trigger jackpot), the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation display effect is being executed (S4902). . More specifically, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is 1 or more. In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation display effect is being executed (the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 1 or more) (S4902: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is set to 1 It is updated by subtraction (S4903), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t after the subtraction has become 0 (S4904). That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the pseudo variation display has ended.

In the processing of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is not 0 (S4904: No), this processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the pseudo-fluctuation display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t has become 0 (S4904: Yes), then the value of the pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r is 0 (pseudo corresponding to the first special symbol Whether the number of reserved balls and the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are both 0) is determined (S4905), and when it is determined that the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is 0 ( S4905: Yes), since the pseudo fluctuation display cannot be started, in order to shift to the pseudo fluctuation stop state, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 (S4906), and this processing exit. Since the pseudo-normal state rendering process (see FIG. 96) is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95), 3000 is set as the timer value of the pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u. By setting, the timer value becomes 0 when 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) have elapsed. As a result, three seconds can be accurately counted after the pseudo fluctuation stopped state.

On the other hand, in the process of S4905, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-retained ball counter 223r is not 0 (S4905: No), the start of the pseudo-variation display is newly set, and the timer during pseudo-variation The value of 223t is set to 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) (S4907). Next, the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r is decremented by 1, and the display mode is updated according to the pseudo-retained ball number after the subtraction (S4908), and this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S4902, if it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation display is not being executed (S4902: No), it means that the present is a pseudo fluctuation stop state, so the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is subtracted by 1 (S4909), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after the subtraction has become 0 (S4910). In the processing of S4910, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (S4910: No), in order to continue the pseudo fluctuation stop state, This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4910, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u after subtraction has become 0 (S4910: Yes), by setting the standby state command for display, the standby state production (Fig. 7 reference) is set (S4911). Next, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON, the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to OFF (S4912), and this process is terminated.

By executing this quasi-normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96), in the jackpot standby state shifted based on the winning of the left trigger jackpot, the player feels as if the normal game state continues. It is possible to execute a production in a manner reminiscent of As a result, when the left trigger jackpot hits and the state shifts to the jackpot waiting state, the player can continue to hit left, so the left trigger is triggered before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The first round of jackpots can be started.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation display is configured to be executed by the number of pending balls held at the start of the jackpot standby state (at the end of the fluctuation), and after the jackpot standby state When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected in , the pseudo ball number corresponding to the entering ball is not increased. This is because, as described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the game ball is more likely to enter the left actuation winning hole 662 than the first ball entering hole 64 when left-handed. , When left-handed hits are continuously performed during the jackpot standby state, the possibility that the game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 continuously without winning the left-operated winning opening 662 is extremely high. because it is low. Therefore, since the process for increasing the number of pseudo-reserved balls can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, if it is configured to also perform processing for increasing the number of held balls, when the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 during the jackpot standby state, the number of held balls has reached the upper limit, the sound lamp controller 113 must be notified that the ball has entered. When the number of pending balls reaches the upper limit, the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, and after one or more pseudo-variation display effects are executed, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, pseudo This is because it is necessary to increase the number of balls on hold. As a result, the number of commands to be output from main controller 110 increases, and the processing load on main controller 110 also increases. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since it is configured not to increase the number of pseudo balls held, there is no need to newly increase commands in the main controller 110, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. be able to. Furthermore, if the player luckily enters the first ball entrance 64 first and recognizes that the number of reserved ball symbols does not increase, the player is informed that he is actually in a state of waiting for a big win. can be understood. Therefore, the player who is lucky enough to perceive the waiting state for the big hit is made to play a game by making the game ball reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 and then enter the left operation winning hole 662.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, the player can be made to hit left more positively in order to determine whether the player is in the normal game state or in the jackpot waiting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the winning-related process 7 (S4341) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 7 (S4341) is a process executed instead of the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment. This is a process for performing control according to the command when a command to

Of the hit-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, S4401, S4404, and S4407 to S4410 of the hit-related process 2 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61) S4401, S4404 , and S4407 to S4410 are executed. Further, in the hit related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the standby state command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes), the standby state command process (See FIG. 62), wait state command processing 7 is executed (S4441), and this processing ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, but this standby state command process 7 (S4441) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the jackpot type as a jackpot standby state.

Also, in the winning-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4404: Yes), the jackpot has started. An opening command process for executing an opening effect in a mode corresponding to the situation is executed (S4442), and this process ends. The details of this opening command processing (S4442) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, details of the standby state command process 7 (S4441) described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing 7 (S4441). In the processing of S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command processing 7 (S4441), the same processing as the processing of S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command processing (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment is executed. .

In addition, in the standby state command processing 7 (see FIG. 98) in the seventh embodiment, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the right trigger jackpot (it is a left trigger jackpot) (S4601: No ), read the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S4611), and determine whether or not the read counter values are both 0 (S4612). .

In the process of S4612, when it is determined that the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are both 0 (S4612: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number 0, and if the pseudo-variation display is started, the player will feel uncomfortable, so a pseudo-variation stop state is set. That is, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 (timer value corresponding to 3 seconds) (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4612, if it is determined that at least one of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 0 (S4612: No), read The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are stored as the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r (S4614), and the start of pseudo variation display is set. , 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set to the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t (S4615). Then, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is updated by subtracting 1, and the reserved ball number pattern is displayed by decreasing by one (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617. In the processing of S4617, the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to ON (S4617), and this processing ends.

By executing this waiting state command processing 7 (see FIG. 98), in the jackpot waiting state of the left trigger jackpot, it is possible to pseudo-execute an effect as if the normal game state is continuing. , When the right trigger jackpot hits, the standby state production can be executed. As a result, when the left trigger jackpot hits, the player can continue the left hit without noticing that the player is waiting for the jackpot, so that the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. It is possible to cause the player to enter the left-actuated winning port 662 soon and start the big win. On the other hand, when the right timing jackpot hits, the player can easily understand that the jackpot waiting state has occurred. The degree of advantage of (the number of game balls that can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a) is variable. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of shooting the game ball with good timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 99, details of the opening command processing (S4442) described above will be described. In the opening command process (S4442), first, it is determined whether the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON (S5001). In the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON (S5001: Yes), the left-actuated winning opening is displayed while the pseudo-variation display effect or the pseudo-variation stop state is displayed. Since it means that the opening period of the jackpot has started with the ball entering 662, an opening command for display corresponding to the blackout effect (see FIG. 93(a)) is set (S5002).

Next, the value of the pseudo-retained ball number counter 223r, the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t, and the value of the pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u are all reset to 0 (S5003), and the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to off. (S5004), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is off (S5001: No), an opening command for display corresponding to the normal opening effect is set (S5005), and the standby state effect flag 223g is set. is set to off (S5006), and the process ends.

By executing this opening command process (see FIG. 99), in the jackpot standby state that has been shifted to the left timing jackpot winning, when the game ball wins to the left operation winning port 662 and the opening period is started. , a blackout effect in which the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly turns black (blacks out) can be executed. In other words, it is possible to set a mode that is significantly different from the pseudo-variation display or the pseudo-variation stop state rendering that has been performed up to that point. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that a special effect has been executed instantaneously.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the game balls fired aiming at the first ball entrance 64 are placed at positions where some of the game balls can be entered. It was set as the structure which arrange|positions the operation|movement prize-winning mouth 662. FIG. Then, when the left trigger jackpot hits, as the performance of the third pattern display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbols, the performance of stop-displaying the third symbols of the winning combination is executed. Furthermore, in the jackpot waiting state that shifts after the end of the fluctuation, the production is executed in a manner as if the normal game state continues. That is, even during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo-normal state performance such as a pseudo-variation display performance is executed to make the player misunderstand as if he/she is in a normal game state and to continue hitting left. is configured to be possible. As a result, when the left-handed chance jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is entered, the player can be allowed to continue playing left-handed (it is possible to prevent the player from playing right-handed), so the open/close door 65f1. A game ball can be entered into the left actuation winning hole 662 before the player is conscious of making the game ball reach the upper surface of the . Therefore, in the case of a left trigger jackpot, it is difficult to start the jackpot after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two which is the upper limit number in the first round) reaches the upper surface of the open/close door 65f1. On the other hand, in the case of a right trigger jackpot, by entering the game ball into the right operation winning opening 661 at the timing when many game balls have reached the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, it is easy to over. Winning can be generated. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) can be made different between the left trigger jackpot and the right trigger jackpot, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the jackpot type.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the pseudo-normal state effect is executed without fail when the state of waiting for the left-handed jackpot jackpot is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left trigger jackpot hits, it may be determined by lottery whether to execute the pseudo-normal state effect or to execute the standby state effect.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo variation display is configured to be executed for the number of pending balls at the start of the jackpot standby state (at the end of the variation), and after the jackpot standby state. When a ball entering the 1-ball opening 64 is detected, the number of pseudo balls on hold corresponding to that ball is not increased, but it is not limited to this. For example, each time a start winning prize is detected, the number of pending ball symbols may be increased in a pseudo manner. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the pseudo-normal state presentation is being executed.

In the seventh embodiment, the execution start timing of the degree-of-expectation notification effect is fixed for each variation type. That is, in the case of hit or miss special reach, the execution of the expectation level notification effect is started at the timing when 86 seconds have passed since the start of variation, and in the case of hit or miss super reach, the timing when 56 seconds have passed since the start of variation. Although it was configured to start execution of the expectation level notification effect in , it is not limited to this. For example, even if the variation type is the same, the execution start timing of the expectation level notification effect may be changed by lottery or the like.

In the seventh embodiment, as a pseudo variable display, a special two-second effect different from usual is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable display effect of the same variable time and display mode as the normal variable display is executed in a pseudo manner. More specifically, for example, it may be configured to repeat the variable display that was performed immediately before the jackpot standby state. By configuring in this way, the data of the variable display used immediately before can be used as it is, so that the processing load when executing the pseudo variable display can be reduced.

In the seventh embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot hits and the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, the pseudo variable display is performed the number of times according to the number of balls held at that time, and then the pseudo stop display state is performed. Although it is configured to be transferred, it is not limited to this. For example, when shifting to the jackpot standby state, it may be configured to immediately shift to the stop display state regardless of the number of pending balls. In this case, the number of pending ball symbols may be set to 0 when shifting to the jackpot standby state or during the variable display. By constructing in this way, the player can have the impression that the number of reserved balls is 0 when shifting to the big win standby state, so that the lottery of special symbols can be started from the start of the big win standby state. A player may be forced to hit left in an attempt to force a .

In the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo variable display is performed, the variable display is performed using the same large three-pattern image as in the normal variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a pattern different in mode from the normal third pattern may be prepared as a pattern dedicated to the pseudo-variation display.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 117, a first control example that can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments will be described. In this first control example, as part of the entertainment effect, the player selects a song (voice effect) to be output (reproduced) during a predetermined period (for example, the period in which the variable probability state is set) during the normal game. configured as possible. More specifically, during a predetermined period (period in which the variable probability state is set), when an operation to the operation button 230 provided on the front frame 14 is detected, the third symbol display device 81 selects music (selection ) is configured to display a list of available songs (music selection menu screen). Then, while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the player selects an arbitrary song (sound effect) and performs a determination operation (pressing operation on the center button CB of the operation buttons 230) to select the selected song ( The output (reproduction) of the audio effect) is started. In addition, in the first control example, at the timing when the predetermined period starts (transition to the variable probability state), first, one song (effect mode) is randomly selected and played. The reproduction of the randomly selected music continues until the reproduction of the music selected by the player is started or the variable probability state (predetermined period) ends. As a result, the music can be reproduced even during the period from the transition to the variable probability state until the music is selected by the player (while the music is not selected), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to further increase the player's satisfaction with being in the variable probability state.

In addition, in the first control example, as the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, regardless of the type of music (production mode) randomly selected at the start of the variable probability state, the player selected in the game until then. It is configured such that the more frequently (frequently) music is arranged, the easier it is to select. Here, the “easy-to-select menu position” means a menu position where the number of operations performed on the operation button 230 is small (selection is possible within three operations) until a song is selected. do.

First, referring to FIG. 100, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 100 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 100, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first control example, an operation button 230 is arranged on the left side of the ball rental operation section 40 when viewed from the front. The operation buttons 230 include an upper button UB arranged on the upper side when viewed from the front, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side when viewed from the front, a right button RB arranged on the right side when viewed from the front, and a left button LB arranged on the left side when viewed from the front. , and a central button CB arranged in the central portion of the operation button 230 . Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, but this operation button 230 is preset in the pachinko machine 10 during the period in which the variable probability state is set as described above, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen. This is provided to allow the player to select an arbitrary piece of music from among a plurality of pieces of music (26 pieces of music A to Z).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, the display mode during the variable probability state in the first control example will be described. FIG. 101(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 101(a), in the variable probability state, the music area for displaying the information of the music being played is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (left side of the variably displayed third symbol). MR is formed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(a), the characters "song A" indicating the song currently being reproduced (output) (song A in the example of FIG. 101(a)) and "button operation You can select a song with !" is displayed in the song area MR. These display contents allow the player to easily understand what music is currently being reproduced. Also, the player can easily understand that any music can be selected by operating the operation button 230 .

FIG. 101(b) shows a state in which the image shown in FIG. 101(a) is displayed, and the operation button 230 is operated by the player (by pressing any one of the buttons UB, DB, RB, LB, and CB). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display contents that are switched when FIG. 101(b) exemplifies a case where the display content (display mode) is switched based on (in conjunction with) the player's pressing of the down button DB. As shown in FIG. 101(b), when the operation button 230 is operated (depressed), a plurality of horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display areas with titles of songs (song names) are displayed inside the song area MR. Is displayed. In addition, below the plurality of display areas, the characters "select with up/down button" and the characters "determine with center button" are displayed. With these display contents (music selection menu screen), the player can easily understand that any music can be selected and played back by operating the operation button 230 . Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the state in which the music selection menu screen is displayed (the state in which any music can be selected according to the operation of the operation buttons 230) will be referred to as "music selection mode". A more detailed description will be given with reference to FIG.

FIG. 102(a) is a diagram showing the layout of each item (image indicating the type of music (music name)) on the music selection menu screen that is displayed first when the music selection mode is entered. As shown in FIG. 102(a), the music selection menu screen has at least five display areas (images showing the types of music) arranged with different items (images indicating the types of music) (the number of display areas is less than the total number of music, which is 26). area) is displayed. When the central button CB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed, reproduction of the item (music) arranged in the central display area among the five display areas is determined.

Of the five display areas displayed on the music selection menu screen, in the upper two display areas, the type of music that the player has selected many times in the variable probability state so far (music with a high frequency of selection by the player). Corresponding items PA1 and PA2 (images representing music Y and music Z) are arranged. It should be noted that the item PA1 (the image showing the song Z) arranged at a position relatively close to the central display area is the item P2 (the image showing the song Y) relatively far from the central display area. image), the player's selection frequency is higher.

In the item RA1 (image showing music A) displayed in the center of the music selection menu screen, an item showing a randomly selected music (music played first after shifting to the variable probability state) is arranged. On the lower side of the center, two items are displayed side by side in a predetermined order (alphabetical order in the first control example) based on the first selected song. That is, with item RA1 (music A) displayed in the center as a reference, items RA2 and RA3 of "music B" and "music C" in alphabetical order are displayed side by side under item RA1. In the following description, for simplification of description, two items PA1 and PA2 (which are frequently selected by the player so far) are displayed above the center item RA1 in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen. items) is called a “history area”. A display area in which three items are displayed below the history area (a display area in which randomly selected items are arranged) is called a “random selection area”. A display area in which items to be reproduced when the player presses the center button CB is arranged is called a "music selection area".

As shown in FIG. 102(a), the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area (the center of the music selection menu screen) is displayed in a lit state, and the other items PA1, PA2, RA2, and RA3 are displayed in an unlit state. Is displayed. As a result, when the central button CB is pressed, the item displayed in a manner (lighted appearance) different from other items (images indicating the types of music) is determined as the music to be played this time. This can be made easier for the player to understand. An upper image UG in the shape of a substantially upward triangle is displayed above the music selection area and on the right side of the item PA1, and an approximately downward triangular image UG is displayed below the music selection area and on the right side of the item RA2. A lower image DG of the shape is displayed. Based on these display contents, when the up button UB is pressed, the display contents (music) displayed in the music selection area are displayed one level higher than the current display contents (in the example of FIG. 102(a), image showing song Z), and when the down button DB is pressed, the display content (song) displayed in the song selection area is displayed one step below the current state in conjunction with the depression. It is possible for the player to intuitively understand that it is possible to shift to the content (in the example of FIG. 102(a), the image showing the song B).

FIG. 102(b) shows an example of a display mode when the player presses (operates) the upper button UB of the operation buttons 230 while the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 101(a) is displayed. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the player presses the up button UB, in conjunction with the pressing, all the displayed contents are moved downward by one display area. variable. As a result, the item PA1 (music Z), which was placed one level above the music selection area in FIG. be done. The item PA1 moved to the music selection area is set to appear lit, and the other items are set to appear unlit. Also, an item PA3 indicating "song X" is displayed one level above the item PA2. This item PA3 displays the item (“music X” in the example of FIG. 102B) that has the second largest number after the item PA2 (music Y) as the number of times the player has selected so far. In addition, as each item is shifted downward by one display area, the upper image corresponding to the upper button UB appears to be illuminated. As a result, in conjunction with pressing the up button UB, the layout of the items on the music selection menu screen has been changed (item PA1, which was placed one level above the music selection area, can be moved to the music selection area. ) can be easily understood by the player.

Also, when the up button UB is pressed multiple times, the items are shifted downward according to the number of times the button is pressed. For example, in the layout of the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. An item PA3 (an image representing music X) is arranged in the music selection area. The menu items are arranged in a loop, and by continuing to press the upper button, it is possible to shift all the songs in order to the song selection area. Also, when the up button UB is pressed while the item corresponding to the last song is arranged in the song selection area, the item indicating the first song (song A in the example of FIG. 102(a)) is displayed. is configured to return to the song selection area.

Although illustration is omitted, when the player operates (presses) the down button DB, an operation opposite to that performed when the up button UB is pressed is performed. In other words, by shifting each item display area one by one upward, the item displayed in the display area immediately below the music selection area at the time of the operation is moved to the music selection area. variable. For example, when the down button DB is pressed in the layout shown in FIG. 102(a), the item RA2 is moved to the music selection area and the display mode is changed in conjunction with the pressing. Also, the appearance is set such that the lower image DG corresponding to the lower button DB is illuminated. As a result, even when the player presses the down button DB, the player can easily understand that the item has been shifted in conjunction with the pressing.

In this first control example, three items (items PA1 to PA3) are arranged in the order of the number of times the player has selected them so far on the upper side of the music selection area in the initial layout of the music selection menu screen. there is That is, items (songs) that are frequently selected by the player are arranged at positions where the up button UB can be pressed three times or less (shifted to the music selection area). This is because it is considered that the item that has been selected so far with a higher frequency is more likely to be selected by the player even in this variable probability state. For example, in determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, the items corresponding to the randomly selected items (songs) are arranged in the music selection area, and the other items are simply arranged based on the items arranged in the music selection area. If the songs are arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may become difficult for the player to select their favorite songs. That is, when the item (song) that the player wants to select and the randomly selected item (song) are separated in order, the number of times the operation button 230 is operated to shift the item that the player wants to select to the music selection area. is increased, and there is a risk of making the player feel annoyed. Also, as a method to make it difficult to feel annoyance, it is conceivable to set the item that is first placed in the music selection area when the variable probability state occurs, to an item that is frequently selected by the player. With this method, the player will be satisfied with the music played (output) first in the variable probability state, and there is a high possibility that the player will not change the music (the music selection menu screen will not be displayed). The fewer chances the player has to display the music selection menu screen, the fewer chances he has to know the types of other songs set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the player is less likely to think of selecting another piece of music. Therefore, even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may be wasted without being selected.

Furthermore, as a method for making it easier for the player to select a favorite song, by collectively displaying all the items on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (arranging the items in a matrix), any song ( It is also conceivable to make it possible to understand at a glance where the item) is arranged. However, with this method, the display area for displaying the items (the area of the music selection menu screen) becomes large, and the display area for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the pending number of balls symbol, etc.). may become too narrow.

On the other hand, in the first control example, items displayed on the music selection menu screen are displayed so that the player can easily select items that are likely to be selected (items that have been selected frequently in previous games). set the initial placement of More specifically, the player selects images showing three items (songs) that are frequently selected (selected many times) in the game so far with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at a possible position (three display areas above the music selection area). By configuring in this way, regardless of the item (image showing the name of the song) that is first arranged in the song selection area of the song selection menu screen, it can be selected with a small number of operations (within three operations). Items that are frequently selected by the player can be placed in the positions. Therefore, in each probability variation state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in this probability variation state) can be selected with little effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting music (item). If the number of items (played songs) selected once or more is less than three (that is, the number of items frequently selected by the player is less than three), the items selected once or more Only (less than three items) are arranged in the history area, and the other items are arranged in a predetermined order (in alphabetical order of music) based on the items arranged in the music selection area. For this reason, when the player has not selected any song, such as immediately after turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, the item determined to be placed in the song selection area is simply selected by random lottery. As a standard, all items are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetical order of songs).

Further, in the first control example, in the music selection menu screen displayed first after shifting to the variable probability state, an image indicating the music name of one randomly selected music is arranged in the music selection area, and the music selection is performed. The history area is arranged above the area. By configuring in this way, at least immediately after shifting to the variable probability state, the randomly selected music can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the frequently selected music. . Therefore, a plurality of songs set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. In addition, while listening to randomly selected music, the player may like the music and want to play it again in the variable probability state after the next time. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of songs that the player likes, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous by continuing to select only the same music.

Furthermore, in this first control example, the number of items (images indicating song titles) displayed on the song selection menu screen is limited to 5 (the number is less than 26, which is the total number of songs). All the items set in the pachinko machine 10 can be selected by varying the types of items displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the contents. By configuring in this manner, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced compared to the case where all items are displayed collectively. Therefore, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third pattern and the number of pending pitches pattern, can be displayed in a larger display area.

In addition, in the first control example, display areas corresponding to songs (items) that have been selected frequently (number of times) by the player in the game so far are arranged in the upper three display areas of the song selection area. and the remaining display areas are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetical order) based on one randomly selected display area, but this is not restrictive. The number of items that the player has selected frequently (the number of times) in the game thus far may be set to be less than three, or may be set to be more.

In this first control example, in the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, as items to be laid out in the history area, items that have been frequently selected by the player in previous games are laid out, but this is not the only option. is not. For example, the items selected by the player in the variable probability state set before the current variable probability state may be arranged in the history area in the order of newest (closest) timing of selection. With this configuration, images (items) showing songs that are highly likely to be selected by a player who tends to continuously select favorite songs can be arranged in the history area. convenience for users.

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after entering the variable probability state, but the configuration is not limited to this. A configuration in which the screen is displayed may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the player who wants to select a song, so that the player's convenience can be improved.

In the first control example, the item to be displayed first in the music selection area is selected by random lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the first item to be displayed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected last by the player in the variable probability state set before the current variable probability state may be arranged.

In the first control example, a maximum of three items selected by the player in the game so far in descending order of the number of times are selected (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen with a relatively small number of operations. Although it is configured to be arranged at a position where it is possible to do so, it is not limited to this. It is sufficient for the player to easily understand where on the music selection menu screen the songs that are likely to be selected by the player (songs that have been selected many times so far) are arranged. As an arrangement, it may be configured to be displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With this configuration, even if the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased to more than five, the items that are likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. can be kept Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In this first control example, the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas are configured to have different display modes. The display mode may be varied depending on whether or not it is a highly likely song (items placed in the history area in the initial layout of the song selection menu screen). By configuring in this way, the player can more easily discover items that the player is likely to select, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108. FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, the operation button 230 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113, so the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 8). Also, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, details thereof will be omitted. Note that in the following description of the first control example, the first embodiment will be used as a comparison target, and differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

When any one of the buttons (UB, DB, RB, LB, CB) constituting the operation buttons 230 is pressed (operated), an ON signal (an output signal of H) is applied to the signal line corresponding to the operated button. ) is output. The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the output from the operation button 230, and when the output of the signal corresponding to any button is H, it executes control according to the button type. Specifically, for example, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to one of the buttons has become H while the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the variable probability state, the music selection menu screen is displayed. control. When it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the up button UB has become H while the music selection menu screen is displayed, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted downward by one. control.

Next, referring to FIG. 104(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 104(a), the ROM 222 in the first control example has an item order storage area 222aa added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(a)). is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, details thereof will be omitted.

The item order storage area 222aa is a data table that defines the order of items on the music selection menu screen, and is referred to when setting the initial layout of the music selection menu screen. More specifically, the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is determined when shifting to the variable probability state. When determining this initial arrangement, first, three items (songs) to be arranged in the history area are decided, and then one item to be arranged in the music selection area is selected from other items not arranged in the history area. It is determined randomly (for example, by lottery using random numbers). Then, with the items arranged in the music selection area as a reference, other items (items not arranged in either the music selection area or the history area) are arranged in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa. set. As described above, in the first control example, the item order storage area 222aa is set so that the items are arranged in alphabetical order of the songs.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 104(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 104(b), the RAM 223 in the first control example has an item arrangement storage area 223aa and a menu position pointer 223ab, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)). , in that a music selection number storage area 223ac, a music selection permission flag 223ad, and a menu display flag 223ae are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, details thereof will be omitted.

The item layout storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the layout of each item (image indicating the type of each song) on the music selection menu screen. When shifting to the variable probability state, the initial arrangement of each item is set in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (see S5204, S5208, and S5212 in FIG. 113), and when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the item The music selection menu screen is displayed in the layout set in the layout storage area 223aa. Details of the item arrangement storage area 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 105(a).

FIG. 105(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the item layout storage area 223aa. In FIG. 105(a), "song N", "song O", and "song P" are arranged in the history area, and "song A" is arranged in the selection area. 2 shows an example of the contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa in . As shown in FIG. 105(a), in this item arrangement storage area 223aa, data indicating menu items are stored in association with each value ("00H" to "19H") that the menu position pointer 223ab can take. A storage area is provided for In the example of FIG. 105(a), the data corresponding to the menu item "song A" is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the value "01H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is stored. data corresponding to the menu item "song B" is stored in the storage area corresponding to . After that, data is stored in alphabetical order of music up to the value "0BH" of the menu position pointer 223ab. In addition, data corresponding to "song Q" is stored in a storage area corresponding to "0CH" next to "0BH". In other words, redundant storage of data corresponding to "song N", "song O", and "song P" already stored in the history area in the random selection area is avoided.

From the storage area corresponding to the value "0CH" of the menu position pointer 223ab to the storage area corresponding to "16H", data is stored in the same alphabetical order as in the range "00H" to "0BH". . Also, the range of the value of the menu position pointer 223ab from "17H" to "19H" corresponds to the history area, and in the example of FIG. P” are stored respectively. Data corresponding to the music piece with the highest selection frequency is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the storage area corresponding to "18H" is selected second. Data corresponding to songs with a high frequency is stored, and data corresponding to a song with the third highest selection frequency is stored in the storage area corresponding to "17H".

In the first control example, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the data stored in the item layout storage area 223aa (correspondence relationship between the value of the menu position pointer 223ab and the menu item) and the menu position pointer 223ab The current value is compared with the current value, and the menu items stored in the storage area corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged in the music selection area. Also, the menu items stored in the storage areas corresponding to the two values before and after the value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged above and below the music selection area. For example, in the example of FIG. 105(a), if the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is "19H", an item indicating "music P" is displayed in the music selection area. In addition, "song O" stored in the storage area corresponding to the value (i.e., "18H") one level higher than the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged above the music selection area. be done. Similarly, "music N" corresponding to the value "17H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged two above the music selection area. Conversely, an item corresponding to a value one level lower than the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged one level below the music selection area. Here, in this control example, the value next to the maximum value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to be determined as "00H" (similarly, the minimum value "00H" is The next (one lower) value is determined to be "19H"). "music A" and "music B" stored in .

Returning to FIG. 104(b), the description continues. The menu position pointer 223ab is a pointer used to determine the range of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen in the item layout storage area 223aa. As described above, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the data stored in the five storage areas centered on the storage area corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is read, and the five items corresponding to each data are read. is arranged on the music selection menu screen. The initial value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to "00H", and the value is decremented by one each time the up button UB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed. It should be noted that when the pressing of the upper button UB is detected in the state of "00H", the value is updated to "19H" which is the maximum value. Also, the value is incremented by one every time the down button DB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is being displayed. Note that when the down button UB is further pressed while the value is the maximum value “19H”, the value is updated to the minimum value “00H” (see S5110 in FIG. 111). Also, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is reset to the initial value "00H" each time a big win is achieved (see S4452 in FIG. 114). Since the variable probability state always shifts after the end of the jackpot, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is always set to "00H" at the start of the variable probability state by resetting to the initial value when the jackpot is won. be able to.

The song selection count storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing the number of times each song (item) has been selected. When setting the layout of the menu items in the item layout storage area 223aa, this song selection frequency storage area 223ac is referred to, and the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is set in order from the song selected most frequently. , "18H" and "17H" are stored in storage areas (that is, history areas). The details of this music selection frequency storage area 223ac will be described with reference to FIG. 105(b).

FIG. 105(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the music selection frequency storage area 223ac. As shown in FIG. 105(b), the music selection frequency storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store the type of music and the number of times it has been selected (selected) in association with each other. For example, in the example of FIG. 105(b), "song A" is associated with 0 times as the number of selections and stored, "song B" is associated with 1 as the number of selections and stored, On the other hand, 0 times is associated and stored as the number of times of selection. Similarly, the number of times of selection is associated with other music types and stored. This music selection frequency storage area 223ac stores the number of times of selection corresponding to the determined music each time the player presses the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is being displayed to determine the reproduction of one music piece. 1 is added and updated (see S5108 in FIG. 111). Since the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, all the data indicating the number of selections of each song is cleared.

Returning to FIG. 104(b), the description continues. The song selection permission flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the player can select a song. When this music selection permission flag 223ad is ON, it indicates that any music can be selected, and when it is OFF, it indicates that music cannot be selected. This music selection permission flag 223ad has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when a state command output from main controller 110 notifies that the state has shifted to the variable probability state (see FIG. 113). (see S5213). Also, every time an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, it is reset to off (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it is determined that it is a period in which music can be selected, and pressing of the operation button 230 is treated as valid.

The menu display flag 223ae is a flag indicating whether or not the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 102(a)) is displayed. When the menu display flag 223ae is on, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is displayed, and when it is off, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is not displayed. The initial value of the menu display flag 223ae is set to OFF, and is set to ON when display of the music selection menu screen is set (see S5105 in FIG. 111). Further, when pressing of the center button CB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (see S5109 in FIG. 111). It is also reset to off when an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the menu display flag 223ae is on, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted in the corresponding direction each time the up button UB or the down button DB is detected to be pressed. Further, by detecting the depression of the center button CB, the reproduction of the items arranged in the music selection area is set and the music selection menu screen is closed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108. FIG. FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data output from the audio lamp control device 113 .

As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A RAM 303 is built in.

MPU 301 of audio output device 226 is electrically connected to input port 305 and audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command designating audio data is received from audio lamp control device 113 to audio output device 226 , the command is input to MPU 301 via input port 305 and bus line 304 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 . For example, audio data corresponding to music is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to sound effects is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to warning sounds is output to CN3.

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 .

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 107(a). As shown in FIG. 107(a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least a voice file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. Audio files for reproducing songs (songs A to Z) selectable by the player in the variable probability state are also stored in the audio file storage area 302a. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the performance is read out from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.

Details of the voice file storage area 302a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the voice file storage area 302a. As shown in FIG. 108, in the audio file storage area 302a, a music data group (music A data group 302a1 to music Z data group 302a26) composed of a plurality of data used to reproduce each music. , data used to output each sound effect (for example, sound effect A data 302a27), and all audio files (audio data) reproducible by the audio output device 226 are stored.

As described above, the audio files (song A data group 302a1 to song Z data group 302a26) corresponding to each song (song A to song Z) that can be played during the variable probability state are each composed of a plurality of data. It is The configuration of these music data groups 302a1 to 302a26 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a music data group. As shown in FIG. 109, the music data group is composed of a plurality of pieces of data for each part (separation) of music. More specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 109, for example, intro data corresponding to the prelude (so-called intro) part of the music and A melody 1 corresponding to the first melody (so-called A melody part) of the music. , data for B melody 1 corresponding to the second melody (after A melody) (so-called B melody part), and data for chorus 1 corresponding to the most exciting part of the song (so-called chorus part) data, interlude data corresponding to the interlude part of the music, data for A melody 2 corresponding to the second A melody part of the music, and data for B melody 2 corresponding to the second B melody part of the music , chorus 2 data corresponding to the second chorus of the music, and outro data corresponding to the outro of the music. By reproducing (outputting) the audio data for each part in the order determined for each piece of music, one piece of music is reproduced. By configuring in this way, the audio data can be diverted when part of the music is used in other effects (for example, when reproducing the chorus of a predetermined music during the variable display effect). . In other words, since it is not necessary to separately store the audio data for one piece of music and the audio data for a part of the piece of music, the storage capacity of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced. Further, in each data constituting the music data group, data corresponding to a pointer value of a music pointer 303b (described later) set in the RAM 303 and a reproduction time when each data is reproduced are defined in association with each other. ing. In the first control example, the music is played back in the order of the values of the music pointer 303b. That is, when the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced has elapsed, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1, and the music data corresponding to the updated pointer value is reproduced. As a result, each piece of music data can be reproduced in the same order each time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 107(b). FIG. 107(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 107(b), the RAM 303 has at least a song data group storage area 303a, a song pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a song timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing voice files (music data group) corresponding to music played during the variable probability state. During the variable probability state, the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is reproduced in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b, thereby reproducing one music piece. . In this music data group storage area 303a, a command (audio lottery music command) output from the audio ramp control device 113 to instruct the reproduction of a music determined by lottery at the start of the variable probability state, or a game When receiving a command (speech selection song command) output for instructing reproduction of a song selected by the user, a song data group corresponding to the song instructed by the command is read from the voice file storage area 302a. is output and stored (see S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 116).

In addition, in the first control example, when starting to reproduce music based on the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a, the reproduction position is changed depending on how the music was determined. and Specifically, when starting to play the song determined by lottery at the start of the variable probability state, start playing from the chorus (set the playing of data for chorus 1), while depending on the player's choice When starting the reproduction of the decided music, the reproduction is started from the beginning (intro part) of the music (the reproduction of the intro data is set). As for the music selected by the player, there is a high possibility that the player wants to listen carefully from the beginning of the music. This is because there is a possibility that the music will be changed immediately. Therefore, with respect to the randomly selected music, by starting the reproduction from the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, the player can listen to at least the most characteristic part of the music, and then play the music. You can decide whether to change or not. As a result, the goodness (characteristics) of the randomly selected songs can be conveyed (understood) to the maximum extent possible to the player, making it easier for the player to increase the number of songs that the player likes (randomly selected songs It is possible to make it easier to discover new favorite songs from among. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data is being reproduced among the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a. The value of this music pointer 303b is set to "00H" when the reproduction of the music selected by the player is instructed (the music is notified by the voice selection music command) (see S9206 in FIG. 116). ). Along with this, reproduction of the intro data corresponding to the pointer value "00H" is set. On the other hand, when the reproduction of a randomly selected song is instructed at the start of the variable probability state (the song is notified by the audio lottery song command), a value corresponding to the chorus 1 part is set (Fig. 116 S9211). The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by one each time one piece of music data set in the music data group storage area 303a is completely reproduced. In addition, in a state where the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of music (in the first control example, the pointer value corresponding to the one before the outro part), the pointer When the value is updated, the value is updated to "01H".

Here, when the reproduction is completed up to one part before the outro part, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to "01H" corresponding to the A melody 1 part without reproducing the outro part and the intro part. The reason for this is to make it difficult for the player to recognize the breaks in the music when the music is played repeatedly. If, after playing back the outro part of the song, the song is played again from the intro part, the player can easily recognize the breaks in the song. In this case, there is a possibility that the break of the music will be noticed and it will be difficult to concentrate on the game during the variable probability state. On the other hand, in this control example, when a piece of music is played repeatedly, the outro part and the intro part of the piece of music are skipped and the A melody part is returned to. can. Therefore, the player is less likely to notice breaks in the music, so that the player can be made to concentrate more on the game during the variable probability state.

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. As described above, in this first control example, the first part of the A melody to the part immediately before the outro part is repeatedly reproduced. It may differ depending on the song. Depending on the song, there are cases where the C melody is set after the B melody, multiple types of choruses are set, and interludes are not set, which differs from the data structure shown in FIG. Sometimes. Therefore, when a music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and music reproduction is set, the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 116). Each time the reproduction of one piece of music data set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed, the value of the music pointer 303b is compared with the maximum value stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. , and whether or not the reproduction of the part immediately before the outro part has been completed (whether or not the music pointer 303b should be returned to "01H") can be determined. As a result, even if the data structure differs for each piece of music, the intro portion and the outro portion can be reliably skipped and loop-reproduced.

The music timer 303d is a timer that counts the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. A timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set to the music timer 303d every time the reproduction of new music data is set. It should be noted that the reproduction time of each piece of music data is defined in association with the type of music data in the music data group storage area 303a. During the reproduction of music, whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed is determined based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown, the song timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 114. FIG. First, FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing main processing 8 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example.

S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118 of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example correspond to S4101 to S4111 and S4113 of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4118 is executed. Further, in the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, after the effect update process of S4111 is finished, the operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 is monitored, and if the operation is detected, An operation detection process for executing control is executed (S4141), and the process proceeds to S4142. Details of this operation detection processing (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the processing of S4141 ends or when it is determined in the processing of S4101 that 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous processing (S4101: No), the command determination processing in the first embodiment (Fig. 36), the command determination process 8 is executed (S4142), and the process proceeds to S4113. The details of this command determination process 8 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the operation detection process (S4141) described above will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing this operation detection process (S4141). In the operation detection process (S4141), first, it is determined whether an operation (pressing) on the operation button 230 has been detected (S5101). In the process of S5101, the output of the signal line connected to each button of the operation buttons 230 is detected, and if any output is H, it is determined that the operation of the operation button 230 has been detected.

If it is determined in the process of S5101 that no operation on the operation button 230 has been detected (that is, the output of the signals corresponding to all the buttons is L) (S5101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation on the operation button 230 has been detected (that is, the output of the signal corresponding to any button is H) (S5101: Yes), then the music selection permission flag 223ad is turned on. (S5102), and if the music selection permission flag 223ad is off (S5102: No), it means that it is a period in which music cannot be selected, and the operation of the operation button 230 is disabled. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that the music selection permission flag 223ad is on (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103). In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the menu display flag 223ae is off (S5103: No), the display of the music selection menu screen is set (S5104), the menu display flag 223ae is set on (S5105), End this process. By these processes, when the probability changing state is in effect and the music selection menu screen is not displayed, the music selection menu screen can be displayed regardless of the type of button pressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the menu display flag 223ae is ON (S5103: Yes), different control is executed according to the type of button operated (pressed) by the player. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the operation detected by the process of S5101 is the operation for the center button CB (S5106), and if it is determined that the operation detected this time is the operation for the center button CB. (S5106: Yes), sets an audio selected music command for notifying the audio output device 226 of reproduction of the music corresponding to the value of the current menu position pointer 223ab (S5107).

When the process of S5107 ends, next, among the storage areas set in the number of times of music selection storage area 223ac, 1 is added to the music selection number of the music set (selected) to be reproduced by the process of S5107 and updated. (S5108), the music selection menu screen is closed, the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5109), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that no operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: No), the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is updated according to the type of button that detected the operation (S5110). ). In the process of S5110, when the depression of the upper button UB is detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, while when the depression of the lower button DB is detected, the menu position pointer 223ab Add 1 to the value of Note that when the depression of the up button UB is detected in the state where the menu position pointer 223ab is "00H", the pointer value is updated to "19H" which is the maximum value. Further, when the depression of the down button DB is detected while the menu position pointer 223ab is at the maximum value of "19H", the pointer value is updated to "00H".

After the process of S5110 is finished, the display mode of the music selection menu screen is updated according to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab after being updated by the process of S5110 (S5111), and this process is finished. In the process of S5111, an item (image indicating the type of music) corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged in the music selection area, and an item (music image showing the type of music) are placed above and below the music selection area.

By executing this operation detection processing (see FIG. 111), the music selection menu screen can be updated, the music can be determined, etc., according to the operation content of the operation button 230 (type of button whose depression is detected), as desired by the player. can run to

Next, command determination processing 8 (S4142) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 8 (S4142) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment.

In this command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112), S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313, and S4315 each correspond to S4301 to S4309 and S4311 to S4313 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. , and S4315 are executed. In addition, in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, if it is determined in the process of S4309 that the status command has been received (S4309: Yes), then State command processing for executing control according to the game state is executed (S4351), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, in the process of S4313, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process in the first embodiment Instead of (see FIG. 37), hit-related processing 8 is executed (S4352), and this processing ends. The details of this win-related process 8 (S4352) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, details of the above-described state command processing (S4351) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S4351). This state command process (S4351) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command.

In this state command process (see FIG. 113), first, the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 (S5201). That is, based on the information corresponding to the game state notified by the state command, when the probability variable state of the special design and the time saving state of the normal design are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "11B". , and when the special symbol low probability state and normal symbol time saving state are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "01B", and the special symbol low probability state and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

When the processing of S5201 is completed, then, it is determined whether it is a state command indicating a transition to the variable probability state (the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S5202), and the transition to the variable probability state is performed. (S5202: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5202, if it is determined that the state command indicating the transition to the variable probability state has been received (S5202: Yes), then the number of times of reproduction is stored in the music selection number storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)). A maximum of three data are read in descending order (S5203). After the power is turned on, if the number of songs selected by the player is less than three, only the selected songs (that is, less than three data) are read. Also, if no song has been selected after the power is turned on (that is, if the number of song selections corresponding to all song types in the song selection number storage area 223ac is 0), the data is read in the process of S5203. never.

When the processing of S5203 ends, then, the maximum three data read out in the processing of S5203 are stored in the history area (storage area corresponding to the values "17H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab) in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. It stores (S5204), and the item (music) to be placed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen is determined by lottery (S5205). In the process of S5204, if the number of data read by the process of S5203 is less than three, the data cannot be stored in all (three) storage areas of the history area. Among them, one or more storage areas become free areas. When the process of S5205 ends, it is next determined whether the item (song) already stored in the history area is the item determined by lottery in the process of S5205 (S5206). If there is (S5206: Yes), in order to prevent the same item (music) from being redundantly arranged in the music selection area and the history area, the process returns to S5205 and the lottery is redone.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5206 that the item (music) determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is not an item already stored in the history area (S5206: No), the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is used. An audio lottery music command for notifying reproduction of the corresponding music is set (S5207). The audio lottery music command set here is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process (S4102) of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110). When receiving the audio lottery music command, the audio output device 226 sets the music specified by the command to be reproduced from the chorus 1 part. Here, the reason why the music selected by random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 is that the player may immediately change the music if he does not like it even a little. Therefore, with regard to the randomly selected music, by starting the reproduction from the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, the player can listen to at least the most characteristic part of the music, and then play the music. You can decide whether to change or not. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected songs can be conveyed to the player as much as possible, so that it is easy to increase the number of songs that the player likes. to make it easier to discover). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state.

When the process of S5207 is finished, the item determined by lottery in the process of S5205 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item layout storage area 223aa (S5208), and stored immediately before. The items in the order to be arranged following the selected item are identified by referring to the order (that is, the alphabetical order of the songs) defined in the item order storage area 222aa (S5209). Then, it is determined whether the item (music) specified in the process of S5209 is the data (item) stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210). If it is determined that an item other than the item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa has been specified (S5210: No), the item already stored in the history area is determined. It is determined whether or not the item has been specified (S5211).

In the process of S5211, if it is determined that the data not stored in the history area is specified in the process of S5209 (S5211: No), the item specified in the process of S5209 is processed in S5208 or the previous process of S5212. (S5212), and the process returns to S5209. On the other hand, in the process of S5211, if it is determined that the item specified in the process of S5209 is already stored in the history area (S5211: Yes), the specified item is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. without (skipping the processing of S5212), the processing returns to S5209. In the process of S5210, until the item stored in the storage area corresponding to "00H" is specified, the transition is performed by the process of S5209 of specifying the items in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa and the specified item. The processing of S5212 for storing in the item layout storage area 223aa is repeated.

If it is determined in the process of S5210 that the item specified in the process of S5209 is the item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210: Yes), this means that the items have been stored in the storage area corresponding to all the values "00H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item layout storage area 223aa, and have returned to "00H" after going around. , S5209 to S5212 ends, and the process proceeds to S5213. In the processing of S5213, the music selection permission flag 223ad is set to ON (S5213), and this processing ends. By repeating the processes of S5209 to S5212, regardless of the number of data stored in the history area in the process of S5204, all storage areas other than the areas where data is stored in the processes of S5204 and S5205 are duplicated. Data can be stored securely.

By executing this state command process (see FIG. 113), the initial layout of the composition of the music selection menu screen can be set. In addition, up to three items (songs) can be arranged in the history area on the music selection menu screen in descending order of the number of times the player has selected them. That is, items that the player has selected many times in the past games (items that are highly likely to be selected by the player) can be placed in the three upper music selection areas. Therefore, in each probability change state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in this probability change state) can be selected with little effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting music (item).

In addition, each time the variable probability state occurs, a song to be reproduced first can be determined by random lottery. As a result, at least immediately after shifting to the variable probability state, the randomly selected music can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the frequently selected music. Therefore, a plurality of songs set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. In addition, while listening to randomly selected music, the player may like the music and want to play it again in the variable probability state after the next time. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of songs that the player likes, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous by continuing to select only the same music.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, details of the above-described win-related process 8 (S4352) will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this win-related process 8 (S4352). Of the winning-related process 8 (S4352) in the first control example, the processes of S4401 to S4410 are the same as the winning-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, when the process of S4406 ends, both the music selection permission flag 223ad and the menu display flag 223ae are reset to off (S4451), and the menu position The value of the pointer 223ab is reset to "00H" (S4452), and this processing ends. By executing the processes of S4451 and S4452, the flags and pointers associated with the music selection menu screen can be reset each time an opening command is received (that is, each time a jackpot is won).

In the first control example, the flags and pointers associated with the music selection menu screen are reset each time a jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the reset process is executed only when a jackpot is won in the variable probability state. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a reset process at the time of the start of a probability change state.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 115(a). FIG. 115(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). Details of this command determination processing (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S9001, audio setting processing for setting reproduction of audio data and switching of data is executed (S9002). Details of this audio setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power failure occurrence information (S9003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off processing is executed (S9006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S9007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing.

This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 115(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the command determination process (S9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 115(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. In this command determination processing (S9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S9001).

In the command determination process (see FIG. 116), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201). and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S9202). For all commands of processing, the command type is analyzed (S9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a selection music command for audio for notifying the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 (S9204), and the selection for audio is performed. If it is determined that there is a music command (S9204: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music notified by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a of the ROM 302, and The data group is stored in the song data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, the value of the music pointer 303b is set to "00H", and the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the intro data is set to the music timer 303d (S9206). As a result, the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 can be played back from the beginning, so that the music selected by the player can be played back to the player (from the beginning of the music in its entirety). ) can be heard.

When the process of S9206 ends, next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207). Data reproduction is set (S9208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9204, if it is determined that the command received from the audio ramp control device 113 does not include the audio selection music command (S9204: No), then the command received from the audio ramp control device 113 It is determined whether or not there is an audio lottery music command for notifying of a music selected at random based on the fact that the odds are changed (S9209). In the processing of S9209, if it is determined that there is a lottery music command for audio (S9209: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received lottery music command for audio is stored in the audio file storage area 302a. , and the read music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

When the process of S9210 is finished, next, a pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the chorus 1 data is set to the music timer 303d. Set (S9211). Then, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9212), and playback of the chorus 1 data is set. (S9213), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, if it is determined that the audio selection music command has not been received from the audio ramp control device 113 (S9209: No), other commands received from the audio ramp control device 113 are processed. The process is executed (S9214) and the process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command for instructing reproduction of a sound effect, reproduction of the type of sound effect specified by the command is set. Also, if the command is for instructing the reproduction of a warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type specified by the command is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed in the main process (see FIG. 115(a)) by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing this audio setting process (S9002).

In this audio setting process (see FIG. 117), first, it is determined whether or not the music in the probability changing state is being played (S9301), and if it is determined that the music in the probability changing state is not being played (S9301 : No), it means that a one-shot sound effect or warning sound is being played, or that no sound is being output. End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9301 that the music in the variable probability state is being reproduced (S9301: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to end the music data being reproduced (S9302). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the music timer 303d has become 0, and if it is determined that it is not time to end the reproduction of music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S9302, if it is determined that the end timing of the music data being reproduced has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9302: Yes), In the data group storage area 303a, a process for setting reproduction of music data subsequent to the music data whose reproduction has ended this time is executed. Specifically, first, the data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (maximum value corresponding to the music data group currently being reproduced) is compared with the current value of the music pointer 303b (S9303). ), it is determined whether or not the value of the song pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current song data group (S9304).

In the process of S9304, if it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. and update (S9305), and the process proceeds to S9307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9304 that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is set to " 01H" (S9306), and the process proceeds to S9307. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b to "01H" through the process of S9306, it is possible to return to the A melody 1 portion of the set music and perform loop reproduction. That is, it is possible to perform loop reproduction by skipping the intro part and the outro part.

Here, if a music piece is to be played in a loop, if the music piece is reproduced up to the outro part and then played again from the intro part, the player will be able to easily recognize the breaks in the music. end up In this case, there is a possibility that the player will be concerned about breaks in the music, making it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game during the variable probability state. On the other hand, in the first control example, when a piece of music is played back repeatedly, the outro and intro portions of the piece of music are skipped and the A melody 1 portion is returned to. be able to. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the breaks in the music, so that the player can concentrate more on playing the game during the variable probability state.

In the process of S9307 that is executed after the process of S9305 or S9306 is completed, one piece of music data corresponding to the value of the updated music pointer 303b is read from the music data group storage area 303a (S9307). , the read music data is set to be reproduced (S9308), and this processing ends.

By executing this audio setting process (see FIG. 117), loop playback can be performed by skipping the intro and outro parts of the set song during the variable probability state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the player's operation on the third symbol display device 81 during a predetermined period (for example, the period in which the variable probability state is set) during the normal game A music selection menu screen is displayed in which the display mode (items displayed in a lighting mode in the music selection area) is variable in conjunction with the operation of the button 230, and the player operates the music selection menu screen while the music selection menu screen is displayed. When the center button 230 is pressed, the music (voice effect) corresponding to the display mode (items displayed in the music selection area) of the music selection menu screen is played back (executed). In addition, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the structure of the music selection menu screen that is displayed first can be changed based on the type of music selected so far (at least last time) by the player (type of voice effect). there is

More specifically, when transitioning to the variable probability state, first, one song (1 type of voice effect) is randomly selected from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z) and placed in the song selection area. The item is determined and the reproduction of the selected music is started. Also, during the variable probability state, the player can operate the operation button 230 to select any song (arbitrary effect) of the player. At the time of transition to the variable probability state, one song is randomly selected and played, so that the song can be played until the song is selected by the player (while no song is selected). Since it can be played back, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the fact that the variable probability state is advantageous to the player. In addition, as the initial layout of the screen (music selection menu screen) for selecting music by operating the operation button 230, regardless of the type of music randomly selected at the start of the variable probability state, the player may select. Music that is considered to be high (music that has been selected many times by the player in the game so far) is arranged at a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (within three operations) on the operation button 230. there is Here, in determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, it is assumed that randomly selected items (songs) are arranged in the music selection area, and other items are simply arranged based on the items arranged in the music selection area. Arranging the songs in alphabetical order (predetermined order) may make it difficult for the player to select their favorite songs. That is, when the item (song) that the player wants to select and the randomly selected item (song) are separated in order, the item to be selected (image indicating the type of song to be selected) is shifted to the song selection area. The number of times the operation button 230 is operated to activate the game is increased, which may annoy the player. In addition, as a method to make it difficult to feel annoyance, it is conceivable to set the item that is first placed in the music selection area when the variable probability state occurs as an item that is frequently selected by the player. With this method, the player will be satisfied with the music played (output) first in the variable probability state, and there is a high possibility that the player will not change the music (the music selection menu screen will not be displayed). The fewer chances the player has to display the music selection menu, the fewer chances he has to know the types of music set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the player is less likely to think of selecting another piece of music. Therefore, even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may be wasted without being selected. Therefore, the player is less likely to think of selecting another song, so even if a large number of songs are selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them will be selected. It may end up being wasted.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is set so that it is easy for the player to select items that are likely to be selected (items that have been selected frequently in previous games). is doing. More specifically, the player can select three items (songs) that have been selected frequently (selected many times) in the game so far with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at the position (three display areas on the upper side of the music selection area). With this configuration, the number of operations (up button Items that are frequently selected by the player can be placed in positions where they can be selected by pressing the UB three times or less. Therefore, in each probability variation state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in this probability variation state) can be selected with little effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting music (item).

Further, in the first control example, the playback position (execution start position) of the music (sound effect) is changed according to the circumstances in which the playback of the music (sound effect) is set. More specifically, the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 is configured to start playing from the beginning of the music (that is, the intro part) (from the second start position). On the other hand, at the start of the variable probability state, the music determined (selected) by random lottery is configured to start playing from the chorus 1 part of the music (from the second start position). As a result, the music selected by the player at his or her own will can be heard in its complete form from the beginning. On the other hand, the reason why the music selected by random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 is that there is a possibility that the player will immediately change the music if he does not like it even a little. Therefore, with regard to the randomly selected music, by starting the reproduction from the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, the player can listen to at least the most characteristic part of the music, and then play the music. You can decide whether to change or not. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected songs can be conveyed to the player as much as possible, so that it is easy to increase the number of songs that the player likes. to make it easier to discover). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the variable probability state.

In the first control example, the number of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (the number is smaller than the total number of items), and the items displayed on the music selection menu screen can be changed by operating the operation button 230. All items can be selected in conjunction with the player's operation. Here, in the music selection menu screen, as a method for making it easier for the player to select his/her favorite music, all the items are collectively displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (items are arranged in a matrix). By doing so, a method of making it possible to understand at a glance which song (item) is arranged at which position is also conceivable. However, with this method, the display area for displaying each item (the area of the music selection menu screen) becomes large, and the display for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the pending number of balls symbol, etc.) The area may become too narrow. On the other hand, in the first control example, the number of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number smaller than the total number of items). By configuring in this way, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced compared to the case where all items are displayed collectively. Therefore, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third pattern and the number of pending pitches pattern, can be displayed in a larger display area.

In addition, in this first control example, for the music determined by random lottery at the start of the variable probability state, while setting the playback from the chorus 1 part, select by operating the operation button 230 during the variable probability state. Although the song that was played was configured to be played from the intro part, it is not limited to this. Conversely, for songs determined by random lottery, playback from the intro part is set, while for songs voluntarily selected by the player by operating the operation button 230, the song is played from the chorus 1 part. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Most of the players who have voluntarily selected a piece of music most want to listen to the chorus of the selected piece of music. can be fulfilled immediately. In addition, the player can calmly select the music by reproducing the music determined by the random lottery at the start (transition) of the variable probability state from the intro part. More specifically, the intro part of a piece of music generally has a relatively calm melody, while the chorus part of a piece of music has a relatively intense melody. Therefore, by setting playback from the intro part, it is possible to set a relatively calm melody to play first. Therefore, while a relatively calm melody is being played, the player can be made to select a piece of music in a calm mood. Also, it is not always necessary to change the playback position according to the circumstances in which the playback is set. For example, regardless of the circumstances, it is possible to start playing from the chorus 1 part (that is, from the most exciting part of the song), or to start playing from the intro part. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the control of determining the circumstances and changing the reproduction position, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In the first control example, the history area is arranged above the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and may be set to any arrangement. For example, the history area may be arranged below the music selection area. That is, three items (songs) frequently selected by the player in previous games may be arranged below the music selection area.

In the first control example, an area in which items that are frequently selected by the player are arranged is provided as the history area, but the structure of the history area is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the first control example, an area in which items unlikely to be selected by the player based on the player's past tendencies are arranged as the second history area. It may be arranged in a range where it is difficult for the user to select (the operation buttons 230 for selecting songs are operated a relatively large number of times). More specifically, for example, in a state in which a randomly selected song is played, if the song is changed to another song before the predetermined period elapses (for example, within 5 seconds), The song is placed in a range where it is relatively difficult for the player to select it (for example, a range in which the player cannot select it without performing at least 10 operations) as an item that is unlikely to be selected by the player from the next time onwards. It may be configured to allow If the music is changed within a predetermined period, there is a possibility that the player changed the music in a hurry because the music that the player did not want to listen to was played. The possibility of not wanting to listen to it (the possibility that the song will be changed immediately if played) increases. In other words, there is a possibility that the player will feel discomfort due to the reproduction. Therefore, by arranging a song changed at a relatively early stage (within a predetermined period) during playback in the second history area, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of being selected at a random lottery in the probability changing state after the next time. At the same time, other items (items that are more likely to be selected by the player than the items arranged in the second history area) are relatively easy to select (selectable with a relatively small number of operations). ) position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music reproduced at the start of the variable probability state will make the player feel uncomfortable.

In this first control example, the number of selections of each song after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is counted for each song, and three items (songs) are arranged in the history area in descending order of the number of times. However, the method of estimating songs that are likely to be selected by the player is not limited to this. For example, an external server owned by the manufacturer that developed the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that the music selection tendencies of each player can be accumulated. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, the information of the URL for connecting to the external server can be displayed in a format (for example, a two-dimensional barcode format) readable by the mobile terminal. Configure. By reading the URL information with a mobile terminal, accessing the external server from the mobile terminal, and entering the ID and password registered in advance or newly registered this time, the player's personal data (pachinko The number of times the machine 10 wins the jackpot, the number of times special symbols are drawn, etc.) can be confirmed. In this item, the history of the selected music and the number of times are also set. When a game is started by the pachinko machine 10 while logged in to the server, the selection history stored in the server is reflected in the pachinko machine 10, and items to be stored in the selection area are changed based on the selection history. It is good also as a structure which determines. As a method of reflecting the server data on the pachinko machine 10, for example, the data set in the server is password-coded (encoded) and displayed on the mobile terminal of the player, and the password is used to operate the mobile terminal. A method of inputting to the pachinko machine 10 side by a person can be mentioned. That is, on the pachinko machine 10 side, the correspondence relationship between the password and the history is defined in advance, and when the password is input, the history corresponding to the password (the number of selections for each piece of music) is stored in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac. may be set to . To provide a pachinko machine 10 which enables a player to more easily select his or her favorite music by constructing in this manner to display a music selection menu screen adapted to the tendency of each player. be able to.

In this first control example, the initial layout of the items on the music selection menu screen was configured to vary according to the type of music selected by the player, the number of times, etc. (player's selection history). It is not limited. In the case of executing a player-participation-type effect, such as an effect that prompts an operation of a predetermined operation button, the initial mode of the effect may be changed according to the player's participation status. For example, for a player who tends to participate actively, control is performed so that an effect mode prompting a greater number of operations is likely to be selected, while for a player who participates in the effect less frequently. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which control is performed so as to make it easier to select an effect mode that encourages operations performed a relatively small number of times. Further, for example, in the case of a player who does not participate in the performance frequently, pressing the button may facilitate the execution of a highly anticipated performance in which an advantageous result for the player is reported. By constructing in this way, a player with a low participation frequency is more likely to participate in the pressing effect, so an appropriate mode can be set according to the player's tendency. Also, in this case, instead of determining the effect mode according to the player's participation status (history), the effect mode such as the number of operations may be randomly determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to store the player's participation status, so the control can be simplified.

In the first control example, when the player selects one song from the song selection menu screen, the playback is started from the beginning of the song regardless of the situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining time until the variable probability state ends is short (for example, when the variable display being executed ends and the jackpot starts), the playback may be started from the chorus.

In this first control example, the music selected at random at the start of the variable probability state is played from the chorus of the music, while the music selected by the player from the music selection menu screen is played from the beginning of the music. However, the control for changing the music reproduction position (the type of music data used first) according to the circumstances in which the music reproduction is determined is not limited to this. For example, if the music to be played back during the jackpot is set to be played back based on the start of the first round of the jackpot, the playback is started from the beginning (intro) of the song, while the ending of the jackpot is set. When the reproduction of music is set based on the start of the period, the reproduction may be started from the outro portion of the music.

In this first control example, the playback position (audio However, this control is not limited to voice effects. For example, the present control may be applied to the display effects executed in the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the process of determining the type of effect is not limited to the one exemplified in the first control example (whether it was selected by random lottery or voluntarily selected by the player). For example, when it is decided to execute a specific effect under the condition that the variable display corresponding to the loss is being executed, the specific effect is configured to be executed from the beginning, while the variable display corresponding to the big win is executed. When execution of a specific effect is determined under the situation that is being executed, the execution may be started from the middle of the specific effect. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the content of the presentation during the game.

In this first control example, the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is varied according to the history of selection of music by the player (the number of selections of each music). Although it has been configured to be arranged in positions that can be selected by the number of times, this control is not limited to the case of selecting music. For example, an item corresponding to the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 226, an item corresponding to the brightness of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81, an item corresponding to the game history, etc. The menu screen is configured to be displayed by operating the operation button 230 . Then, according to the history of the items selected by the player in the past, items that are more likely to be selected by the player may be arranged at positions that can be selected with a smaller number of operations.

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after entering the variable probability state, but the configuration is not limited to this. A configuration in which the screen is displayed may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the player who wants to select a song, so that the player's convenience can be improved.

In the first control example, the item to be displayed first in the music selection area is selected by random lottery, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the first item to be displayed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected last by the player in the variable probability state set before the current variable probability state may be arranged.

In this first control example, a maximum of three items selected by the player in the game so far in descending order of the number of times are selected (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial layout of the music selection menu screen with a relatively small number of operations. Although it is arranged in a position where it is possible to do so, it is not limited to this. It is sufficient for the player to easily understand where on the music selection menu screen the songs that are likely to be selected by the player (songs that have been selected many times so far) are arranged. As an arrangement, it may be configured to be displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With this configuration, even if the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased to more than five, the items that are likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. can be kept Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In this first control example, the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas are configured to have different display modes. The display mode may be changed depending on whether or not it is a song with a high probability (an item placed in the history area in the initial layout of the song selection menu screen). By configuring in this way, the player can more easily discover items that the player is likely to select, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In the first control example, when playing back a song determined by a random lottery at the start of the variable probability state, playback is started from the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the song. The playback position is not limited, and may be a playback position where the player's attention is easily directed (the player is likely to listen to a randomly selected piece of music). For example, a piece of music that is partly used in another production (for example, a variable display production, etc.) (for example, a piece of music that starts playing from the A melody part as background music for the production at the start of the Super Reach Reach production) , the music may be played back from the same playback start position as the playback start position set in the presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to start playback from the playback position that was played during the normal game (that is, the playback position that is relatively familiar to the player). Therefore, by starting with a melody that can be played back during a normal game (a melody that the player is likely to have already heard), it is possible to attract the player's attention, so that the player can listen to the song more carefully. can let

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen can be displayed in the variable probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the music selection menu screen may be configured to be displayed during the jackpot, or may be configured to be displayed during the time saving state. Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, super ready-to-win effect) is selected as the effect mode during execution of the variable display, the music selection menu screen is displayed during execution of the specific effect mode, and the variable display is performed. It may be configured such that the player can freely select the music during display.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 139. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is configured to start playing a randomly selected song (voice effect) at the start of the variable probability state, and by operating the operation button 230, any song ( It was configured to be changeable to voice production). In addition, for randomly selected music, playback is started from the chorus (the most exciting part of the music), whereas for music voluntarily selected by the player, the beginning (intro) of the music is played. It was configured to start playback from.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the player is allowed to select the song (type of sound effect) during the jackpot. Then, the reproduction order of the music data is dynamically rearranged in accordance with the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus portion is reproduced as much as possible before the end of the final round. That is, at a predetermined timing during execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round or at the start of the final round), the type of music data currently set to be reproduced (A melody 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is discriminated, and when a part far from the chorus is being reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged, and then reproduced. The composition is changed so that the part is closer to the chorus part. As a result, the player can more reliably hear the chorus, which is the most exciting (most characteristic) part of the song, before the end of the big win.

Further, in the second control example, when the chorus portion (specific range) is being reproduced at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed so that the chorus portion can be reproduced longer. It is configured to continue. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the most exciting (most characteristic) chorus part of the music from being forcibly terminated due to the end of the jackpot. As a result, the player can enjoy the chorus part more, so that the player's interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in this second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the audio output device 226 is partially changed, and the audio lamp control device 113 The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226 Other processes executed by are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 118, the jackpot configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 118, when the opening period for the jackpot starts, a song dedicated to the opening period (opening song) is played. When the opening period ends and the first round starts, a period during which music can be selected (music selection period) is set. During this music selection period, a music area MR (see FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b)) is formed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as in the variable probability state in the first control example. Since the display contents for this music area MR are the same as those in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second control example, even if the player displays the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 101(b)) and selects a song during the music selection period, playback does not start immediately (playback is delayed). ), and the music is set to play at the timing when the first round ends. Also, during the first round in which the music selection period is set, a music dedicated to the music selection period (music for music selection) is reproduced. By constructing in this way, during the round period of one round, the playback start timing of the music can be adjusted regardless of whether the player selects the music immediately or when the player selects the music just before the end of one round. Since it can be the same, it is possible to carefully select a favorite song during the song selection period. Note that the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen is set by the same control as in the first control example described above. That is, in the music selection area, songs (items) selected by random lottery are arranged, and songs (items) that have been selected many times by the player in the game so far are displayed in the upper three display areas of the music selection area. ) is placed.

As shown in FIG. 118, when one round ends and the interval period starts, the song selected by the player (if the player did not select a song on the song selection menu screen, the lottery at the start of the jackpot) ) is started to be played back. Playback of this song continues at least until the final round of the jackpot ends. Then, when the final round ends and the timing for starting the ending period comes, the ending effect is basically started, and the music for the ending effect is reproduced. As described above, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round, the reproduction of the chorus portion of the music is continued for a longer time by delaying the start timing of the ending effect. Since the player can listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, for a longer period of time, the interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 118, in the jackpot in this second control example, there are two rearrangement determination timings for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data group (the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot). and at the start of the final round of the jackpot). At the recombination determination timing, it is determined whether or not the music data to be reproduced next is to be recombined (changed from the normal reproduction order) based on the reproduction position of the music (the type of the music data currently being reproduced). determine. In this determination, if it is determined that the song is to be rearranged, the number of parts (number of song data to be played) until the next chorus is played is reduced (for the song currently set to be played). The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the playback of the chorus is set next to the data group. As a result, the time until the next chorus is reproduced can be shortened, so that the chorus can be reproduced more reliably until the big win is finished. Note that whether or not the music data is of a type that can be determined by rearranging the playback order of the music is preset (regulated) in a rearrangement determination table 222bb (see FIG. 123), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, a specific example of rearranging the playback order of songs will be described. FIG. 119 shows the transition of the jackpot state and the number of parts of the song when it is determined that the playback order is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round) during the playback of the song A. An example of a correspondence relationship with transition is shown.

As shown in FIG. 119, during one round of the jackpot, a song for song selection dedicated to the song selection period is reproduced as a song. When the player selects the song A during this period, the playback of the song A is started from the beginning of the song A (that is, from the intro part of the song A), triggered by the end of one round of the jackpot. After that, in the order of arrangement of the music data group corresponding to music A (in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b associated with each data), from the first part of the A melody to the part immediately before the outro part. is played in a loop.

While the loop reproduction is continuing, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, it is judged whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged. FIG. 119 illustrates a case where the A melody 1 portion is being reproduced at the time when the recombination determination timing 1 comes. As shown in the middle of FIG. 119 (transition of the music before recombination), when the A melody 1 part is being played at the recombination determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is played by the end of the final round of the jackpot. The final round is likely to end during playback. That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the song A ends before reaching the chorus 1, which is the part (part) that the player most likely wants to listen to. Therefore, in this case, when the recombination determination timing 1 comes, the reproduction order of the music data group is rearranged, and the reproduction order is set so that the chorus 1 part is likely to be reproduced by the end of the final round.

More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119 (transition of the music after recombination), when the reproduction of the A melody 1 part that was being played at the time when the recombination was decided, the original (Fig. 119 The transition before rearrangement shown in the middle row) is skipped, and the chorus 1 is played back. More specifically, the pointer value of the music pointer 303b is updated to a value corresponding to the chorus 1 part (chorus 1 data) of the music A, and the reproduction of the chorus 1 data is set. As a result, in the final round, the player can listen to the first part of the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, so that the player can feel more satisfied with the big win by raising the player's mood. can be done.

After rearranging the playback order and setting the playback of chorus 1, the playback continues in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. That is, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119, if the end timing of the jackpot does not come during the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion (interlude data) is reproduced as usual.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a specific example of the case where it is determined that the order of reproduction of the music is to be rearranged at the rearrangement judgment timing 2 (that is, the start timing of the final round of the jackpot) will be described. In the example of FIG. 120, the B melody 1 is being reproduced at the timing 1 of recombination determination, and the reproduction of the melody 1 is completed before the recombination determination timing 2 is reached, and the chorus 1 is played. A case of shifting to playback is illustrated.

In the example of FIG. 120, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is being reproduced, and the next part to be reproduced is the chorus 1 part. There is a high possibility that one part will be played. Therefore, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the rearrangement of the playback order is avoided. Also, in the example of FIG. 120, at the recombination determination timing 2, the chorus 1 portion is being reproduced. In this case, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 120, if the reproduction is continued without rearranging the reproduction order, the reproduction of the chorus 1 part ends in the middle of the final round, and the next part of the chorus 1 part is played for a relatively long period of time. is played back. Since the interlude part has a relatively gentle melody, the long reproduction of the interlude part in the final round may spoil the player's interest in the jackpot game. Therefore, if the chorus 1 part is already being played at the recombination determination timing 2, the playback order of the music is rearranged, and as shown in the lower part of FIG. ) is set to play. With this configuration, the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the song, can be played back for a longer period of time in the final round of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the final round of the jackpot.

Thus, in the second control example, at a predetermined timing (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round) in the jackpot, the progress of the music (current playback position in the music) Accordingly, it is configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music pieces. In the final round of the jackpot, if there is a possibility that the chorus part will not be played at all or the playback time will be shortened, the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus part 2, etc.) will be played longer during the final round. , the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged (at least the music data to be reproduced next is changed from a predetermined order (the order of the value of the music pointer 303b)). In other words, based on the progress of the jackpot and the playback position of the music, the playback order of the music data is dynamically changed so that the chorus is played longer during the predetermined period (final round) of the jackpot. It is configured to allow By configuring in this way, it is possible to let the player listen to the most exciting chorus of the song for a longer period of time in the final round of the big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of exhilaration just before the end of the big win, so that the player's motivation for the game can be enhanced.

Also, in the case of a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, jackpot B with 5 rounds), there is a possibility that all the rounds will end without reaching the chorus. In particular, if the player cannot listen to the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus part 2, etc.) and the jackpot ends even though the player displays the music selection menu screen and plays back the music that he/she voluntarily selects, There is a possibility that the player will be greatly disappointed. This is because when the player voluntarily selects a song, there is a high possibility that the player is looking forward to listening to the chorus of the selected song. On the other hand, in the second control example, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the chorus at least once before the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, the player who selected the music can be satisfied.

Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot, it is conceivable to set the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus part at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music. . However, with this method, there is a risk that the connection of the songs will become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the chorus). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the chorus part will suddenly start in the middle of another part. Therefore, in this method, there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the music that is being reproduced, and will suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is broken or the like. That is, it becomes doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, since the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged (changed) for each part (separation unit of melody (musical tone)), when the reproduction order is rearranged, a sense of incongruity may occur. A piece of music can be reproduced in a mode with few sounds. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game during the big win with peace of mind.

In the second control example, it is determined whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot and at the start of the final round. It is not limited to this. The number and timing of determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order can be determined arbitrarily.

In addition, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus is played back longer during the final round, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the chorus is played back. The round can be set arbitrarily.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, description will be given of the relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a case where, as a result of rearrangement of the playback order of music data, the chorus 2 part is being played back at the end of the final round.

The top row of FIG. 121 shows the transition of the state of the jackpot, the second row from the top shows the transition of the music assuming that the start of the ending effect was not delayed, and the second row from the bottom shows the chorus part. Shows the transition of the music when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in order to reproduce longer, and the bottom shows the transition of the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big win. there is

As shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 121, if the delay control of the ending effect is not performed, the reproduction of the music is interrupted during the reproduction of the chorus 2, and the ending music is reproduced. In this case, the player may be dissatisfied with the impression that a different melody has suddenly started even though he or she was listening to the most exciting part. Therefore, in this second control example, when the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus 2 part, etc.) is being played at the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, the second diagram from the bottom in FIG. , the timing at which the ending song is reproduced is delayed, so that the chorus portion is continued to be reproduced for a longer period of time. Along with this, the effect mode that is displayed during the big win is continued as it is. That is, even though the ending period has actually started, the effect is such that the jackpot continues until a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds maximum) elapses after the end of the final round. It is configured to be set to a mode (display mode, voice mode).

By configuring in this way, the possibility of the music ending during the reproduction of the chorus is reduced, and the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be played for a longer period of time before the start of the big winning ending effect. A portion can be played by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has selected the music feel more satisfied.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 126. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 122(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 122(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 104(a)). 222ba, a rearrangement determination table 222bb, and an ending effect selection table 222bc are added.

The song data group type storage area 222ba is a data table that stores the structure of the song data group corresponding to each song. In the music data group type storage area 222ba, at least information indicating the reproduction order and reproduction time of each music data constituting the music data group is defined for each music classification. In the above-described first control example, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the type of music to be reproduced and the process of determining the music (whether the music is selected by random lottery or the music is selected by the player). ) is notified to the audio output device 226, after that, the audio output device 226 loop-reproduces the music data in a predetermined order. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 does not need to know the progress of the music being reproduced. On the other hand, in the second control example, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot and the reproduction position of the music (the type of the music data being reproduced), and the start timing of the ending effect is changed. delay control must be performed. For this reason, the audio lamp control device 113 side also needs to know the reproduction position of the music (the type of music data currently being reproduced) and the like. Therefore, in the second control example, the music data group storage area 222ba is defined, and the composition of the music data group set in the audio output device 226 and the data for the music being used (played) are stored. The type of data, the type of music data to be reproduced next, and the like can be grasped.

The rearrangement determination table 222bb is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of music data when either of the rearrangement determination timings 1 and 2 for a big win has come. In this recombination determination table 222bb, there are determined whether or not to recombine according to the type of music data currently set to be reproduced, and the determination result of whether or not to perform recombination, and the music data set to be reproduced next when it is determined to be recombined. type is specified. Details of the rearrangement determination table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the recombination determination table 222bb. As shown in FIG. 123, the recombination determination table 222bb contains, for each type of music, the type of music data that is being reproduced at the time of the recombination determination timing, and the determination result (playback order). (whether or not to discriminate if rearranged) are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, for example, for the A melody 1 part of the song A, "acceptable" is defined as the determination result in association with "chorus" as the type of song data to be played next. 1” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when it is time to determine the recombination during playback of melody 1, chorus 1 is played back after playback of melody 1 is completed (playback of melody 1 is skipped). Thus, the playback order of the music data is rearranged. In addition, "impossible" is defined as a determination result in association with the B melody 1 portion. Therefore, even if the recombination determination timing comes while the B melody is being reproduced, the reproduction order of the music data cannot be changed. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 1 portion is completed, the chorus 1 portion is reproduced as usual.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 123, the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, and the A melody 2 part of the song A are defined as being associated with "acceptable" as the determination result. As the type of music data to be reproduced, "chorus 2" is associated and defined. Therefore, if the recombination decision timing comes while the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, or the A melody 2 part is being reproduced, the chorus 2 part will be played after the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, or the A melody 2 part is played The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the part is played back. In addition, for the B melody 2 part of the song A, "impossible" is defined as a determination result in association with it. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 2 portion is completed, the chorus 2 portion is reproduced as usual. Furthermore, for the chorus 2 part of the song A, "acceptable" is defined in correspondence as the determination result, and "chorus 1" is defined in correspondence as the type of music data to be played next. It is Therefore, when the recombination determination timing comes while the chorus 2 part is being reproduced, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus 2 part is reproduced after the chorus 2 part is reproduced.

Similarly, for the song B and subsequent songs, recombination determination is performed while a playback position relatively far from the chorus part set multiple times in the song (a playback position where one part or more is away) is being played. The data in the rearrangement determination table 222bb is defined so that when the timing comes, the most recent chorus is played after the part currently being played ends. By configuring in this way, the chorus part can be reproduced more reliably in the final round, so that the big win can be finished after the most exciting part of the music is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 122(a), the description continues. The ending effect selection table 222bc is a data table that defines the mode of the ending effect for each timing when the ending effect is started. As described above, in the second control example, when the end timing of the final round comes while the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus part 2, etc.) is being reproduced, the chorus part is continued to be reproduced, and the ending effect is performed. It is configured to delay the start. Here, even if the start timing of the ending effect is delayed, since the ending period of the jackpot is constant, the execution period of the ending effect is shortened by the amount of delay. In the second control example, the ending effect selection table 222bc defines a plurality of ending effects that can be selected according to the execution period of the ending effect. Details of the ending effect selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc. As shown in FIG. 124, in the ending effect selection table 222bc, selections are made for each range of the remaining time (value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) until the playback of the chorus part ends at the end of the final round of the jackpot. The type of ending effect to be performed is defined in association with each other. The remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is set to a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data at the timing when the reproduction of the music data is set, and the value is decremented by 1 periodically (every millisecond). It is configured to be

As shown in FIG. 124, in the range where the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 1000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the hook part at the end of the final round is 1 second or less), normal An ending effect (normal ending) of the mode is associated and defined. This normal ending effect is composed of a effect time of 4 seconds. That is, the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the ending effect (the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the chorus part and the normal ending effect period) is longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. is set to be On the other hand, the ending period of the jackpot is set to 5 seconds. That is, there is a gap of about one second at the maximum between the end of the normal ending effect and the end of the ending period. In this control example, an image (result image) that informs the number of prize balls won by the player during the jackpot is displayed during the ending effect. During this period, the result image is continuously displayed as a still image. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the performance is interrupted during the period from the end of the ending performance to the actual end of the ending period. .

The value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and 2000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the chorus portion at the end of the final round is longer than 1 second and is 2 seconds or less). On the other hand, as a type of ending effect, a shortened ending 1 with a effect time of 3 seconds is associated and defined. That is, the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the chorus part and the presentation time of the ending presentation is set to be longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. Therefore, also in this case, the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period can be reduced to 1 second or less. Therefore, the period during which the result image continues to be displayed as a still image can be shortened, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display contents of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Also, if the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000 and 3000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the hook part at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and is 3 seconds or less). A shortened ending 2 with an effect time of 2 seconds is associated with the range and defined as the type of ending effect. That is, as in the case where the normal ending or the shortened ending 1 is set, the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the chorus part and the effect time of the ending effect is longer than 4 seconds and less than or equal to 5 seconds. set. In addition, a shortened ending 3 with a rendering time of 1 second is defined as a type of ending rendering in association with a range in which the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is greater than 3000. Here, in the second control example, in order to secure the effect time of the ending effect, the start timing of the ending effect is not delayed by 4 seconds or more. That is, when the chorus continues to be reproduced even after four seconds have passed since the ending period started, the reproduction of the music (jackpot performance) is stopped and the ending performance is executed. Therefore, when the shortened ending 3 is set, the playback time of the chorus portion can be limited to between 3 and 4 seconds. Therefore, as in the case where the normal ending or the shortened endings 1 and 2 are set, the sum of the reproduction time of the chorus part and the effect time of the ending effect is set to be longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. set.

As described above, in the second control example, when the ending timing of the final round is reached, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed when the chorus portion is being reproduced. Then, according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the chorus part (or the reproduction of the chorus part is stopped), the mode of the ending effect is changed, and the remaining time of the chorus part. Regardless, the ending effect can be finished before the ending period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, for a longer period of time, and to perform an ending effect that does not cause a sense of incompatibility.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 122(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 122(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 104(b)) in that a reproduction data type storage area 223ba and a The difference is that a reproduction time timer 223bb, an ending delay flag 223bc, a song type storage area 223bd, an ending type storage area 223be, and a delay period timer 223bf are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The reproduction data type storage area 223ba is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of music data being reproduced by the audio output device 226. FIG. During the music reproduction period of the jackpot, the reproduction position of the music is specified based on the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba, and when the recombination determination timing comes, the reproduction order of the music data is determined. You can decide whether to replace or not. This reproduction data type storage area 223ba is updated to a value corresponding to the type of music data indicated by the command each time a music command is received from the audio output device 226 (see S5701 in FIG. 135). Here, the music command is the type of music data to be set when the reproduction time of one music data ends in the audio output device 226 and the reproduction of the next music data is set. This is a command for notifying to 113. With this command for music, the type of music data being reproduced by the audio output device 113 can be accurately grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

The remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the remaining reproduction time of the music data. This remaining playback time timer 223bb is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond). At the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, if the chorus portion is being reproduced, the remaining reproduction time of the chorus portion is specified by referring to the timer value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb. The effect type of the ending effect is determined according to the remaining reproduction time and the specified contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc (see S5603 in FIG. 134).

The ending delay flag 223bc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the execution start of the ending effect is delayed. If this ending delay flag 223bc is ON, it indicates that it is a period (ending delay period) from when the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined until the ending effect is started. On the other hand, if the ending delay flag 223bc is off, it indicates that it is not the ending delay period. The ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON when the chorus portion is being reproduced when the ending command is received (S5605 in FIG. 134). Also, when the ending delay period has elapsed and the start of the ending effect is set, the setting is set to OFF (see S5306 in FIG. 129).

The music type storage area 223bd is a storage area for storing data according to the type of music selected by the player during the music selection period set in the first round of the jackpot. This music type storage area 223bd stores data corresponding to one music piece (item) determined by random lottery at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot) (S5221 in FIG. 132). reference). Also, when a song is selected by the player during the song selection period, data corresponding to the selected song is overwritten (see S5121 in FIG. 128). At the end of the song selection period (the first round of the jackpot), a voice selection song command for notifying playback of a song corresponding to the data stored in the song type storage area 223bd is set (S5507 in FIG. 133). reference).

The ending type storage area 223be stores the effect type of the ending effect determined according to the ending effect selection table 222bc and the timer value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb as the ending delay when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. This is a storage area for storing during the period. In the ending type storage area 223be, when the ending command is received, the chorus part is being reproduced, the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined, and when the effect type of the ending effect is determined, the determination is performed. Data corresponding to the produced effect type is stored (see S5604 in FIG. 134). When the ending delay period has elapsed, the start of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is set (see S5305 in FIG. 129).

The delay period timer 223bf is a timer for measuring the elapsed time (the length of the ending delay period) after the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined. This delay period timer 223bf is updated periodically (eg, every 1 millisecond) during the ending delay period. Based on the value of the delay period timer 223bf, if it is determined that the length of the ending delay period has reached 4 seconds before the end of the reproduction of the chorus, the ending delay period is terminated. An ending effect is started (see S5303 in FIG. 129).

Next, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. First, FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the first control example (see FIG. 106), instead of the input port 305, the input/output port 311 is provided, the bus line 312 is provided instead of the bus line 304, and the configuration of the RAM 303 is partially changed.

The input/output port 311 and the bus line 312 are changed so that commands can be output from the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113 . That is, the input/output port 311 and the bus line 312 are configured to be able to communicate bi-directionally from the audio lamp controller 113 to the MPU 301 and from the MPU 301 to the audio lamp controller 113 .

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 126, the RAM 303 in the second control example has a rearrangement standby flag 303e and a rearrangement type storage area 303f added to the configuration of the RAM 303 in the first control example (see FIG. 107(b)). It is different in that Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rearrangement standby flag 303e is a flag indicating a period from when the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data is notified by the sound lamp control device 113 to when the rearrangement of the order is actually set. The type storage area 303f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type notified from the sound lamp control device 113 as the type of music data to be set to be reproduced first after rearrangement of the reproduction order. . When an audio rearrangement command for notifying rearrangement of the playback order of music data is received from the sound lamp control device 113, data corresponding to the type of music data notified by the command is stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. , and the rearrangement standby flag 303e is set to ON (see S9402 and S9403 in FIG. 138). When the playback time of the song data being played has passed while the recombination standby flag 303e is on, the song data corresponding to the data stored in the recombination type storage area 303f is selected as the next song data to be played back. It is set (see S9313 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 127, main processing 9 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This main process 9 is a process executed in place of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example.

S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118 of the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example correspond to S4101 to S4111 and S4111 of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4113 to S4118 is executed.

In addition, in the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, when the rendering update process of S4111 ends, the operation detection process 9 is executed instead of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. (S4151). This operation detection process 9 (S4151) monitors the operation (pressing) on the operation button 230, similarly to the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, and performs control corresponding to the detection of the operation. It is a process for execution. This operation detection process 9 (S4151) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the operation detection process 9 (S4151) ends, next, in the period during which the delay of the start of the ending effect is set (ending delay period), the ending effect for determining whether or not to start the ending effect. Start determination processing is executed (S4152). Details of the ending effect start determination process (S4152) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the ending effect start determination process (S4152) ends, command determination process 9 is executed (S4153) instead of command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, and the process proceeds to S4113. In command determination processing 9 (S4153), hit-related processing 9 (S4361) is executed instead of hit-related processing 8 (see FIG. 114) in command determination processing 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example. Since they are the same except for the point that the

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, details of the operation detection process 9 (S4151) described above will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 9 (S4151) in the second control example. This operation detection process 9 (S4151) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. This is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing the corresponding control when the operation is detected.

S5101 to S5106 and S5109 to S5111 of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example correspond to S5101 to S5106, S5101 to S5106 of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, respectively. And the same processing as each of the processing of S5109 to S5111 is executed. Further, in the operation detection process 9 in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the music piece corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is detected. (Items currently arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen) are stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5121), and the process proceeds to S5109.

With this operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128), the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen can be changed according to the details of the player's operation of the operation buttons 230, and the determination operation by the player during the music selection period can be changed. When (the operation of pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed) is performed, the music (music) arranged in the music selection area is set to be loop-reproduced during the music reproduction period. be able to.

Next, details of the above-described ending effect start determination process (S4152) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This ending effect start determination process (S4152) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to start the ending effect in the ending delay period.

In the ending effect start determination process (see FIG. 129), first, it is determined whether or not the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301). This means that it is not the delay period, and since there is no possibility of setting the start of the ending effect, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that it is the ending delay period. A process for determining whether or not is executed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 0 (S5302). In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S5302: No), it means that the playback of the chorus portion of the music has not ended. Therefore, next, it is determined whether the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303). That is, it is determined whether four seconds or more have passed since the start of the ending effect was delayed. In the process of S5303, if it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is not 4000 or more (less than 4000) (S5303: No), the ending delay period is continued (reproduction of the hook part of the music is continued). Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303: Yes), the processing of S5304 to S5306 for setting the start of the ending effect is executed. Also, in the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 0 (that is, the playback time of the chorus part has ended) (S5302: Yes), the process proceeds to S5304 to perform the ending effect. set the start of

In the process of S5304, the effect type of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be (either normal ending or shortened ending 1 to 3) is specified (S5304), and the specified effect type is specified. A display ending command and an audio ending command are set for executing the ending effect (S5305). Then, the end of the ending delay period is set by setting the ending delay flag 223bc to off (S5306), and this processing ends.

Through this ending effect start determination process (see FIG. 129), while the ending delay period is set, the music playback status (whether or not the chorus has been played back) and the length of the ending delay period are determined. Then, it is possible to set the start of the ending effect at an appropriate timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the details of the win-related process 9 (S4361) will be described. This hit-related process 9 (S4361) is a process that is executed instead of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example. This is processing for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the win received from 110 .

Of this hit-related process 9 (S4361), S4401-S4407 and S4409 processes are the same as S4401-S4407 and S4409 of hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example. Processing is performed. In addition, in the winning-related process 9 (S4361) in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the number-of-rounds command (S4407: Yes ), a round number command process for performing control according to the number of rounds indicated by the round number command is executed (S4461), and this process ends. Details of the round number command processing (S4461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not contain a round number command ( S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not an interval command indicating the start of the interval period has been received from the main controller 110 (S4462). In the processing of S4462, if it is determined that an interval command has been received (S4462: Yes), interval command processing for performing control according to the type of interval (what round interval is it?) is executed ( S4463), the process ends. Details of this interval command processing (S4463) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4462, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include an interval command (S4462: No), the process proceeds to S4409.

Further, in the winning-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4409: If Yes), an ending command process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect is executed (S4464) according to the music playback status, and this process ends. The details of this ending command process (S4464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4409, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include an ending command (S4409: No), then the music command output from the audio controller 226 is received. (S4465), and if it is determined that a music command has been received (S4465: Yes), the reproduction data type storage area 223ba and the reproduction time are stored according to the type of music data indicated by the music command. Music command processing for updating the timer 223bb is executed (S4466), and this processing ends. Details of this music command processing (S4466) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4465 that the music command has not been received (S4465: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, details of the above-described round number command processing (S4461) will be described. In the round number command processing (S4461), first, a display round number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the round number indicated by the round number command is set (S5401), and then the round indicated by the round number command is set. It is determined whether the number is the number of rounds corresponding to the final round in the current jackpot (S5402).

In the processing of S5402, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is the final round (S5402: Yes), it is determined that the rearrangement determination timing 2 (the timing for determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music pieces) has come. Therefore, each process of S5403 to S5405 for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order is executed. Specifically, the defined contents of the recombination determination table 222bb and the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba are compared (S5403), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. , it is determined whether or not it is a type for which the reproduction order should be rearranged (S5404).

In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that the type of the music data being played is the type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5404: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (for the song currently being played) A sound rearrangement command for notifying the type of music data to be set for reproduction next to the data is set (S5405), and this processing is terminated. The speech recombination command set here is output to the speech output device 226 in the command output processing of main processing 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio recombination command, it stores data indicating the recombination result notified by the command (the type of audio data to be reproduced next) in the recombination type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the music data currently being reproduced has passed, the reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. As a result, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the most exciting chorus part of the music until the end of the final round.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5404, if it is determined that the data reproduction order should not be rearranged (S5404: No), the hook part is reproduced by the end of the final round even if the reproduction order is not rearranged. Since the possibility is high, the processing of S5405 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Also, in the processing of S5402, if it is determined that the number of rounds notified by the round number command is not the final round (S5402: No), then it is determined whether the number of rounds notified is the first round. It discriminates (S5406). In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that the notified number of rounds is the first round (S5406: Yes), music selection period setting processing for setting the start of the music selection period is executed (S5407), and this processing is performed. exit. Details of this music selection period setting process (S5407) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5406 that the notification is not the first round (S5406: No), the process of S5407 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, details of the music selection period setting process (S5407) described above will be described. This music selection period setting process determines the initial layout of the music selection menu screen in order to set the music selection period during which the player can select a song (the music selection menu screen can be displayed). is the processing of That is, it is a process corresponding to the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. Since the music selection period setting process (S5407) and the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example have much in common, the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example is similar to the state command process (see FIG. 113). The explanation will focus on the points of difference.

S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) correspond to S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. The same processing as is performed.

Further, in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, when the process of S5208 ends, data corresponding to the item (music) determined by random lottery in the process of S5205 is added to the music classification. The data is stored in the storage area 223bd (S5221), and the process proceeds to S5209. As described above, in the second control example, at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot), the music determined by random lottery is not played, and the dedicated music for the music selection period is played. Because of this configuration, unlike the state command process in the first control example, the process of immediately playing back the music determined by lottery (the process of S5207) is not performed.

In the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, in the process of S5210, the item layout storage area 223aa has already been stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab. item has been specified again (S5210: Yes), set a voice command for instructing (notifying) the voice output device 226 to reproduce the song for the song selection period (S5222), The process proceeds to S5213.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, details of the interval command processing (S4463) described above will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this interval command processing (S4463). In the interval command process (S4463), first, a display interval command is set for setting an interval production in a mode corresponding to the finished round (S5501), and then the interval command received from the main controller 110 is the final It is determined whether or not the command indicates the interval immediately before the round (S5502).

In the process of S5502, if it is determined that the command indicates the interval immediately before the final round (S5502: Yes), it means that the rearrangement determination timing 1 (timing for determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music pieces) has come. Therefore, each process of S5503 to S5505 for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data is executed. Specifically, the specified content of the recombination determination table 222bb is compared with the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (S5503), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. , it is determined whether or not it is a type for which the reproduction order should be rearranged (S5504).

In the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the type of the music data being played is the type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5504: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (for the song currently being played) A sound recombination command for notifying the type of music data to be set for reproduction next to the data is set (S5505), and this processing is terminated. The speech recombination command set here is output to the speech output device 226 in the command output processing of main processing 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio recombination command, it stores data indicating the recombination result notified by the command (the type of audio data to be reproduced next) in the recombination type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the music data currently being reproduced has passed, the reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. As a result, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the most exciting chorus part of the music until the end of the final round.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the data reproduction order should not be rearranged (S5504: No), the chorus is reproduced by the end of the final round even if the reproduction order is not rearranged. Since the possibility is high, the processing of S5505 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Also, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the current interval command is not the command indicating the interval immediately before the final round (S5502: No), then the command indicating the interval set after the end of the first round is used. It is determined whether there is (S5506). In the process of S5506, if it is determined that the command indicates the interval after the end of one round (S5506: Yes), the reproduction of the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is instructed (notified). A music selection command for audio is set (S5507), and 1 is added to the data corresponding to the music selection frequency of the music set to be reproduced this time among the data in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac (S5508). Then, the music selection menu screen is set not to be displayed, and both the menu display flag 223ae and the music selection permission flag 223ad are set to off (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval after the end of the first round (S5506: No), each process of S5507 to S5509 is skipped, This process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the ending command process (S4464) described above will be described. This ending command process (S4464) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect according to the music reproduction status.

In the ending command process (see FIG. 134), first, the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (that is, the data corresponding to the type of music data currently being reproduced) is read (S5601). It is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the chorus portion (that is, whether the chorus portion is being reproduced) (S5602). In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the chorus portion has been read (S5602: Yes), each processing of S5603 to S5605 for delaying the start of the ending effect to make the reproduction time of the chorus portion longer. to run. Specifically, from the ending effect selection table 222bc (see FIG. 124), the effect type of the ending effect corresponding to the range to which the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb belongs is selected (S5603).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124, when the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is in the range of 1000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the hook part at the end of the final round is 1 second or less), , As the type of ending effect, a normal ending with a effect time of 4 seconds is selected, and the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and 2000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction of the chorus part at the end of the final round) time is longer than 1 second and less than or equal to 2 seconds), the shortened ending 1 with the effect time of 3 seconds is selected as the ending effect type, and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000. and 3000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the chorus portion at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and is 3 seconds or less), the ending effect type is 2 effects. If the second shortened ending 2 is selected and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 3000 (that is, the remaining playback time of the chorus portion at the end of the final round is longer than 3 seconds), the ending effect As the type of , a shortened ending 3 with a rendering time of 1 second is selected (see FIG. 124).

When the processing of S5603 ends, then, the data corresponding to the ending effect selected in the processing of S5603 is stored in the ending type storage area 223be (S5604), the ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON (S5605), and the main End the process.

By executing the processing of these S5603 to S5605, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed, and the type of the ending effect to be executed after the ending delay period is set in advance in the ending type storage area 223be. can be done. As a result, an ending effect with an appropriate effect time (mode of effect) is set according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the chorus (or the reproduction of the chorus part is terminated). be able to. Also, it is possible to let the player listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, for a longer period of time.

In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the data read out from the reproduction data type storage area 223ba is data corresponding to a part other than the chorus (S5602: No), there is no need to delay the start timing of the ending effect. Then, the display ending command corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5606), and the voice ending command indicating the music corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5607), and this processing is terminated. Thus, when a part other than the chorus part is being reproduced at the start of the ending period (at the end of the final round), the normal ending performance can be executed simultaneously with the start of the ending period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, details of the music command processing (S4466) described above will be described. In this music command processing (S4466), first, data indicating the type of music data indicated by the music command output from the audio output device 226 (music data for which reproduction is set in the audio output device 226) is set to the reproduction data type. It stores in the storage area 223ba (S5701). Then, the timer value corresponding to the notified music data type is set in the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb (S5702), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this music command processing (S4466), the type of music data (the part being reproduced) being reproduced by the audio output device 226 and the reproduction time can be easily grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 136, main processing 9 executed in the second control example in place of the main processing (see FIG. 115(a)) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this main process 9. As shown in FIG.

Of the main processing 9 (see FIG. 136) in this second control example, each processing of S9003 to S9007 is the same as each processing of S9003 to S9007 of the main processing (see FIG. 115(a)) in the first control example. Processing is performed. Further, in the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, when the process is started, first, various commands for the audio lamp control device 113, which are set by the processes of S9012 and S9013, are output by voice. A command output process for transmission to the lamp control device 113 is executed (S9011).

Next, instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example, command determination process 9 is executed (S9012). This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113, similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. be. The details of this command determination process 9 (S9012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S9012 ends, instead of the sound setting processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, sound setting processing 9 is executed (S9013), and the processing proceeds to S9003. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, this audio setting process 9 (S9013) is similar to the audio setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example. and processing for setting switching of music data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the details of the command determination process 9 (S9012) described above will be described. This command determination process 9 (S9012) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example.

Of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, each process of S9201 to SS9214 is the same as each process of S9201 to SS9214 of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. Processing is performed. Also, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, it is determined in the process of S9209 that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include an audio lottery music command. If so (S9209: No), then it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes a command related to the winning song (S9221).

In the process of S9221, if it is determined that a command related to the song in the jackpot is included (S9221: Yes), the jackpot song-related process for executing control according to the command type is executed ( S9222), this process ends. The details of this jackpot music related process (S9222) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S9221, if it is determined that the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 does not include a command related to the song that is winning the jackpot (S9221: No), the process proceeds to S9214. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, details of the above-described jackpot music-related processing (S9222) will be described. In this jackpot music-related processing (S9222), first, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes an audio recombination command (S9401). If so (S9401: Yes), the data in the recombination type storage area 303f is updated according to the recombination content notified by the command (the type of music data to be set to be reproduced next) (S9402). Next, by setting the recombination standby flag 303e to ON, it is indicated that the tune data to be played next to the tune data currently being played is to be recombinated (changed from the playback order according to the value of the tune pointer 303b). (S9403), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9401, if it is determined that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include the audio recombination command (S9401: No), then the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 It is determined whether the command includes an audio ending command (S9404).

In the processing of S9404, if it is determined that an audio ending command is included (S9404: Yes), the reproduction of the song currently being played is terminated (S9405), and the type of ending notified by the audio ending command is played. Playback of music for use is set (S9406), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9404, if it is determined that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include an audio ending command (S9404: No), this process ends.

Next, details of the above-described audio setting process 9 (S9013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the sound setting process 9 (S9013). This sound setting process 9 (S9013) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the sound setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example.

Of the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, each process of S9302 to S9308 is the same as each process of S9302 to S9308 of the sound setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example. Processing is performed. In addition, when the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the song (any of songs A to Z) that is a big hit is being played. (S9311), if the song that is winning the jackpot is being played back (S9311: Yes), the process proceeds to S9302. On the other hand, in the process of S9311, if it is determined that the song that is winning the jackpot is not being reproduced (S9311: No), the process ends.

In addition, in the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S9302 that it is time to end the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (S9302: Yes), It is determined whether or not the standby flag 303e is on (S9312). In the processing of S9312, if it is determined that the recombination standby flag 303e is ON (S9312: Yes), the playback order different from the playback order predetermined for each song (the order specified by the sound lamp control device 113) is selected. ), the value corresponding to the data stored in the recombination type storage area 303f is updated by overwriting the value of the music pointer 303b (S9313). to S9307. Thereby, it is possible to set the reproduction of the rearranged music data.

On the other hand, in the process of S9312, if it is determined that the recombination standby flag 303e is off (S9312: No), the process proceeds to S9303, and the value order reproduction of the music pointer 303b is set.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured so that the player can select the music that is winning the jackpot. Then, the playback order of the music data is dynamically rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus is played as much as possible before the end of the final round. That is, at a predetermined timing during execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round or at the start of the final round), the type of music data currently set to be reproduced (A melody 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is discriminated, and when a part far from the chorus is being reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged, and then reproduced. The composition is changed so that the part is closer to the chorus part. As a result, the player can more reliably hear the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the song, before the end of the big win.

Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot, it is conceivable to set the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus part at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music. . However, with this method, there is a risk that the connection of the songs will become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the chorus). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the chorus part will suddenly start in the middle of another part. Therefore, in this method, there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the music that is being reproduced, and will suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is broken or the like. That is, it becomes doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, since the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged (changed) for each part (separation unit of melody (musical tone)), when the reproduction order is rearranged, a sense of incongruity may occur. A piece of music can be reproduced in a mode with few sounds. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game during the big win with peace of mind.

In addition, in the second control example, when the chorus part (chorus 1, chorus 2, etc.) is being reproduced at the end of the final round of the big win, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed to make the chorus part longer. It is configured to continue playback of By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the climax of the song from being forcibly terminated due to the end of the big win. As a result, the player can enjoy the chorus part more, so that the player's interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

In the second control example, when the chorus part ends in the middle of the final round of the jackpot, the music is reproduced in the order of the music data without rearranging the reproduction order. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion ends in the final round, the reproduction order of the music data may be rearranged again so that the chorus portion may be repeatedly reproduced. In this case, the music data for which reproduction has been completed may be reproduced again, or a chorus portion different from the chorus portion for which reproduction has been completed may be reproduced (for example, when the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion is completed, The playback of the chorus 2 part may be set continuously, and when the playback of the chorus 2 part is completed, the playback of the chorus 1 part may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reproduce the climax part of the song, which is the most exciting, for a longer time in the final round, so that the player's interest in the final round can be further improved. In addition, rather than simply playing back the chorus repeatedly, when the chorus is repeated, the end timing of the chorus is predicted in advance from the progress of the final round, etc., and fits within the round period of the final round. The chorus part may be repeated only when the prediction result indicates that the possibility is high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ending period from being started immediately after setting the repetition of the chorus part, and the reproduction of the chorus part being interrupted due to the inability to listen to the chorus part sufficiently.

In the second control example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot and at the start of the final round, it is determined whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data. It is not limited. The number and timing of determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order can be determined arbitrarily.

In the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus is played back longer during the final round, but the present invention is not limited to this. Can be set arbitrarily.

In the second control example, the playback order of music data is rearranged on a part-by-part basis. By performing the recombination in units smaller than the part unit, the recombination can be set more finely. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the data is rearranged in units that are coarser than in units of parts, the structure of the music data group can be simplified.

In this second control example, when it is decided to rearrange the music data, after the reproduction time of the part being reproduced (music data) has elapsed, the parts in an order different from the original reproduction order are reproduced. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the rearrangement is determined, the music data after the rearrangement may be reproduced immediately. By configuring in this way, in the audio output device 226, there is no need to provide a configuration (that is, the recombination type storage area 303f) for holding the type of music data after recombination until the timing of recombination. Therefore, the storage capacity can be reduced. Further, more simply, at the start of the final round of the jackpot, the reproduction of the chorus may be started regardless of the reproduction position of the music. By configuring in this way, the processing can be simplified, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

In the second control example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 decides whether or not the music data can be recombined. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify the audio output device 226 only that the rearrangement determination timing has come. Then, the rearrangement discrimination table 222bb provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is transferred to the sound output device 226, and the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the sound output device 226 that the rearrangement judgment timing has come. Based on this, the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 may be configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data.

In the second control example, the playback order of the music data can be rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot game and the playback position of the music. The method for increasing the possibility of being targeted is not limited to this. For example, the music playback speed may be changed according to the progress of the game and the playback position of the music. That is, for example, at recombination determination timing 1, if the current playback position is far from the chorus (two or more parts apart), the song is played at a faster speed than usual (for example, 1.5 times speed), and if it is close (one part or less), play the music at a slower speed than usual (for example, 0.5 times speed) until the chorus is played. good.

In the second control example, both the progress of the jackpot and the progress of the music are determined, and it is determined whether or not to change (rearrange) the playback order of the music data. (whether or not it is time to start the final round), and determine whether or not to start playing music data corresponding to a specific part (chorus). Also, this control is not limited to the final round. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to loop-reproduce one piece of music during the jackpot and reproduce the outro part of the piece of music as a sound for the ending effect during the ending period, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the first round of the jackpot. However, if it is the start timing of the first round, the data corresponding to the intro part may be reproduced (reproduced from the beginning of the music) regardless of the situation of the music. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is time to start the ending period, and if it is the time to start the ending period, change the data to be reproduced to music data corresponding to the outro part regardless of the situation of the music. By configuring in this way, the music during the ending production can be set to the music of the outro part corresponding to the music played during the big win, so that the music played during the big win and during the ending production is unified. can make you feel. Also, this control can be applied when a music piece dedicated to the ending is provided. That is, in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, regardless of the situation of the music, the music data corresponding to the dedicated music for the ending production is reproduced. It is good also as a structure which makes it start.

In this second control example, at the start timing of the ending period, the progress of the music (reproduction position) is determined, and if a specific reproduction range (chorus) is being reproduced, the start of the ending effect is delayed. However, the applicable control is not limited to the beginning of the ending period. It can be applied if the condition for playing another song is satisfied during playback of the song, for example, the song is loop-played during the variable probability state described above, and the end timing of the variable probability state. In this case, if the chorus portion is being reproduced, the start of the effect indicating that the variable probability state has ended may be delayed so that the chorus portion is reproduced for a longer period of time. In addition, a well-known clock device such as RTC (Real Time Clock) is included in the configuration, and when the time clocked by the clock device reaches a predetermined time, it is possible to execute a specific effect (so-called island interlocking effect) that is different from usual. In a gaming machine with such specifications, the control in the second control example may be applied at the start of the island-linked effect. Specifically, when the chorus portion (specific reproduction range) of the song is being played at the start timing of the specific effect, by delaying the start timing of the specific effect, the chorus portion (specific reproduction range) can be reproduced. It may be configured to reproduce for a longer time. In addition, the object to which this control can be applied is not limited to an effect involving sound (an effect of reproducing music). It can also be applied to the display effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Specifically, for example, when the time measured by the timing device reaches a predetermined time during the execution of the variable display, the island-linked effect is started according to the progress of the variable effect being executed (performance mode). may be configured to determine whether or not to delay. Specifically, for example, during execution of a super ready-to-win effect with a relatively high expectation of a big win, the execution of the island-linked effect may be suppressed (delayed) until the end of the super ready-to-win effect. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the result of the variable display effect. In addition, for example, a variable display effect or a effect during a big win, an effect prompting the operation of a predetermined operation button is executed, and when the operation is detected or the operation valid period elapses, the pressing switches to a different effect mode. You may apply to the game machine which can perform production|presentation. That is, during the operation valid period, even if an operation on the operation button is detected, the switching of the presentation mode is delayed until the presentation during the operation valid period ends (the presentation mode is delayed until the operation valid period ends). may be configured to suppress the variation of ).

In the second control example, if the chorus part is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the start timing of the ending performance is delayed to reproduce the chorus part for a longer period of time, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the chorus portion is being played back at the start timing of the ending period, the playback of the chorus portion may be continued while the display mode for the ending effect is started as the display mode. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display modes corresponding to the remaining ending period as the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. can be done. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In this second control example, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the start of the ending effect is delayed for a maximum of 4 seconds, and after the delay period has passed, it ends within the range of the remaining ending period. Although it has been configured to execute the ending effect of the length to be performed, it is not limited to this. For example, the ending effect to be started after the delay period has passed may have the same content as the ending effect to be started without delay (normal ending effect). That is, the length until the ending period ends may be extended according to the delay period. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of types with different performance periods as the performance mode of the ending performance, so the number of display data tables for executing the ending performance can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, instead of extending the ending period, only the ending effect may be continued even after the ending period ends. In this case, the variable display based on the held ball held at the end of the big win is executed in a less conspicuous manner compared to the ending effect (for example, reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81). may be Even when configured in this way, the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced, so the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 150. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example is configured so that the player can select an arbitrary song (sound mode) as a song (sound effect type) to be reproduced (executed) during the jackpot. Then, in the final round of the jackpot, it is determined whether or not to switch the playback position of the music (rearrange the playback order of the music data) at a predetermined timing in the jackpot so that the chorus part is likely to be played back. was configured to run

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, a menu item called "random music selection" is added to the music selection menu screen to randomly select music (mode of sound effect). , the music to be reproduced after the end of the first round (music selection period) is determined by a predetermined lottery. Also, in the "random music selection", a composition (audio effect) that is not displayed as an item on the music selection menu screen can be determined. More specifically, when "random song selection" is determined in the probability variable jackpot, a lottery is drawn from among "song A" to "song Z" displayed on the song selection menu screen plus "song a" It is configured to determine the music to be reproduced during the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to select "random music selection" in anticipation that "music a", which cannot normally be listened to, will be determined.

In addition, in the third control example, as a kind of effect executed during the jackpot, during a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot (for example, until the end of the 5th round or the 10th round), the number of rounds of the jackpot is reported less than the original number of rounds, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an effect of notifying the original number of rounds can be selected. By constructing the effect (pseudo small round effect) in which the number of rounds is pseudo-reported less than the original number of rounds, when a relatively small number of rounds is reported at the start of the big win (that is, the second When 5 rounds are reported with a jackpot of one special symbol, or when 10 rounds are reported with a jackpot of a second special symbol, more rounds are displayed after a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 10(a)). Expecting that the number (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be announced, the game can be played until a predetermined period elapses. Further, in accordance with this, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during execution of the pseudo short round effect, the chorus part is played back by rearranging the playback order of the songs, as in the original final round. It is configured as follows. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the simulated small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the player's expectations for the announcement of a larger number of rounds.

The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226 The various processes executed by are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b), the configuration of the music selection menu screen in the third control example will be described. FIG. 140(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the music area MR when the music selection menu screen is displayed for the first time after the start of the music selection period for the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 140(a), on the music selection menu screen in the third control example, a plurality of display areas (items RA1 to RA3, PA1, PA2 are arranged) in which music titles selectable by the player are displayed. In addition to the display area), a display area in which the item OA of "random music selection" is displayed is displayed on the right side of the plurality of images in which the music titles are displayed when viewed from the front. The item OA of "random song selection" is an item in which one song is randomly selected by lottery from the songs (songs A to Z and song a) set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

When the music selection menu screen is displayed for the first time, the item OA of "random music selection" is set to have a turned off appearance (similar to the items arranged in the display area other than the music selection area). A right image RG having a substantially triangular shape facing right is displayed between the plurality of images displaying the song titles and the item OA. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that "random music selection" can be selected by pressing (operating) the right button RB of the operation buttons 230. FIG.

FIG. 140(b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the music area MR when the player operates (presses) the right button RB while the music selection menu screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the player presses the right button RB (when detecting that the output of the signal corresponding to the right button RB has become H), the item RA1 ( The image in which the characters "music A" are displayed) is switched to the appearance mode in which the item OA is lit up. That is, the appearance of the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area and the appearance of the item OA are switched. In addition, the right image RG becomes a luminous appearance. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that "random music selection" is determined when the center button CB is pressed.

Also, when "random music selection" is determined, the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab, which is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), is set to ON (1). As described above, in the first control example and the second control example, when determining the initial layout of the menu, "Music A" to "Music Z" are associated one by one, and the corresponding relationship is stored in the item layout storage area 223aa. In other words, the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab can specify the item arranged in the music selection area, and the upper 3 bits are empty bits. In this third control example, one bit (for example, the most significant bit) of the empty bits is defined as a bit corresponding to "random song selection". With this configuration, even if "random music selection" is selected, the item (music) arranged in the music selection area immediately before "random music selection" is selected can be displayed by the menu position pointer 223ab. can be easily determined from the lower 5 bits of . That is, even if the player presses the right button RB to select "random music selection" and then presses the left button LB again, the state immediately before selecting "random music selection" (the display mode of the music selection menu screen) ) can be easily reverted to In addition, when the player presses the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed (the menu display flag 223ae is ON), the player can easily perform a "random selection" simply by checking the state of the most significant bit. It can be identified whether or not "music selection" has been determined.

Although the details will be described later, in the third control example, the player selects "random music selection" (the operation of the center button CB is detected while the item OA is lit up). In this case, if a specific condition is satisfied (for example, if the jackpot being executed is a variable probability jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (that is, cannot be selected by the player). (That is, one song is determined by lottery from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z and song a) including song a). As a result, a player who wants to listen to a special song can be made to actively select "random song selection".

Next, referring to FIGS. 141(a) and 141(b), a jackpot set with the above-described pseudo-small-round effect (a effect that makes it appear as if the number of rounds is smaller than the actual number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot). An example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in . In Figure 141 (a) and (b), when the number of rounds is 8 rounds jackpot A is won, and the number of rounds (5 rounds) less than the actual number is announced due to the setting of the pseudo small round effect. will be described as an example.

FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the pseudo final round (fifth round) during execution of the pseudo small round effect. As shown in FIG. 141(a), in this third control example, during the jackpot, the progress of the jackpot (the current number of rounds, the maximum number of rounds, and the characters (characters "5/5 rounds") are displayed. In addition, below the characters indicating the progress of the jackpot, there is a character indicating the winning status of the prize balls (comparison between the number of prize balls paid out so far and the maximum number of prize balls paid out in the current jackpot). (that is, the characters "500/500 GET") are displayed. Figure 141 (a), in the pseudo final round (fifth round), when it is detected that the specified number (that is, 10) gaming balls entered the left specific winning hole 650 (that is, When the number of awarded balls reaches 500), the display of the number of awarded balls in the small area Ds1 is updated from "490/500 GET" to "500/500 GET". It shows the moment when

Further, as shown in FIG. 141(a), an image simulating a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm. This suggests that the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls (profit). Also, in the music area MR, an image indicating the name of the music selected by the player during the music selection period and currently being reproduced is displayed. FIG. 141(a) exemplifies a case where the player selects "music Z" during the music selection period. is displayed.

FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing a display mode immediately after the pseudo final round ends (that is, immediately after the display mode shown in FIG. 141(a)) in the jackpot where the pseudo small round effect is set. is. When the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round effect is completed, the effect of notifying the original number of rounds is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the characters displayed in the small area Ds1 are updated to characters indicating the original maximum number of rounds and the original maximum number of winning balls. That is, the characters "5/5 round" displayed on the upper side of the small area Ds1 are updated to the characters "5/8 round", and the characters "500/500/500" displayed on the lower side of the small area Ds1 are updated. "500 GET" is updated to "500/800 GET". In addition, an effect is executed in which the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 utters the line "still more!!". By these performance modes, the player can easily recognize that the big win does not end in 5 rounds but continues up to 8 rounds (pseudo small round performance was executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that more prize balls can be obtained, so that the player's interest can be improved. Hereafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, an effect that notifies that the jackpot will continue without ending, which is executed based on the end of the pseudo final round in the pseudo small rounds (see FIG. 141(b)) This is referred to as "continuous production".

Although details will be described later, in the third control example, as in the second control example, in the final round of the jackpot, a predetermined At the timing (at the start of the interval immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round), it is determined whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data. In addition, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during execution of the pseudo short round effect, there is a possibility that the chorus part will be played by rearranging the playback order of the songs, as in the original final round. It is configured to be controlled to be higher. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the simulated small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the player's expectations for the announcement of a larger number of rounds.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 142(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 142(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment has a random music selection table 222ca and a pseudo-small round lottery table 222ca in contrast to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 122(a)). 222cb is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The random music selection table 222ca is a data table referred to for determining one music when the player selects "random music selection". Details of the random music selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the random music selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 143, the random music selection table 222ca indicates that the corresponding relationship between the music type and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca indicates the situation when the lottery is executed. Type of pattern) is defined for each. Here, the song lottery counter 223ca is provided to select one song from the random song selection table 222ca, and is a random number counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 259".

As shown in FIG. 143, in the variation pattern production, the production mode in which the third symbols with odd numbers are aligned (that is, only in the case of the probability variable jackpot, the production mode selected at a rate of 40%). In the case of a probability variable jackpot (odd pattern notification probability variable jackpot), the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of “0 to 8” (range of nine values of the music lottery counter 223ca) “Music A”. are defined in association with each other (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to correspond to the range of "9 to 17" with "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to be in the range of "18 to 26". "Song C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although omitted from the drawing, each song type of "song D" to "song Z" is defined in association with a range corresponding to nine values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, nine music lottery counter 223ca values are defined in association with each of the music types "music A" to "music Z". , odd-numbered pattern announcement becomes a probability variable jackpot, and when "random song selection" is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of "song A" to "song Z" is about 3.5% (9/260 ).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in the situation where the probability variation jackpot of the probability variation pattern notification has occurred, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of "234 to 259", a special music that is not displayed on the music selection menu screen is defined in association with "song a". Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, the values associated with "music a" are 26 values of "234 to 259". When the user selects "random music selection", the rate (probability) of determining "music a" is 10% (26/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143).

On the other hand, in the variable pattern production, the production mode in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned (that is, in the case of a probability variable jackpot, it is selected at a rate of 60%, while in the case of a normal jackpot, it is 100%. In the case of the probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot of even number design notification) notified by the production mode selected by the ratio), as shown in FIG. "Song A" is defined in association with the range of seven values of the lottery counter 223ca (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to correspond to the range of "7 to 13" with "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to be in the range of "14 to 20". "Song C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although omitted from the drawing, each song type of "song D" to "song Z" is defined in association with a range corresponding to seven values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, seven music lottery counter 223ca values are defined in association with each of the music types "music A" to "music Z". , Even-numbered pattern announcement becomes a probability variable jackpot, and when "random song selection" is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of "song A" to "song Z" is about 2.7% (7/260 ).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in the situation where the probability variable jackpot of the even number symbol notification is reached, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of "182 to 259", a special music that is not displayed on the music selection menu screen. is defined in association with "song a". Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, the values associated with "music a" are 78 values of "182 to 259". When the user selects "random music selection", the rate (probability) of determining "music a" is 30% (78/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is, the ratio of selecting "music a" when "random music selection" is selected is higher in the probability variable jackpot of the even number symbol notification than in the probability variable jackpot of the odd number symbol notification. Therefore, when a player who wants to listen to (reproduce) "song a" is notified of a big win by executing a variable display in which the third symbols with even numbers are displayed, the player is more positively informed of the big win. It is possible to select "random song selection".

As shown in FIG. 143, for the normal jackpot, "music A" corresponds to the range of the value of the music lottery counter 223ca from "0 to 9" (the range of 10 values of the music lottery counter 223ca). (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to correspond to the range of "10 to 19" with "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined to be in the range of "20 to 29". "Song C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although omitted from the drawing, each song type of "song D" to "song Z" is defined in association with a range of 10 values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, 10 music lottery counter 223ca values are defined in association with each of the music types "music A" to "music Z". , is usually a jackpot, and when "random music selection" is selected during the music selection period, the rate at which "music A" to "music Z" are determined is approximately 3.8% (10/260). On the other hand, in the case of the normal jackpot, the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is not associated with the special song "song a" (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). In other words, when a normal jackpot is won, there is no possibility that "music a" will be determined (played) even if "random music selection" is selected. In other words, when "random music selection" is selected and "music a" is reproduced, the probability variable jackpot is decided. Therefore, in particular, when a big hit is caused by a variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned (when it is unknown whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), even a little For players who want to know whether or not to shift to the variable probability state early (that is, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether or not to shift to the variable probability state), positively "random music selection ” can be selected. In addition, the player can be pleased when "song a" is reproduced as expected by the player. Furthermore, even if the ``music a'' is not reproduced, it is possible to continue to have expectations for the variable probability state until the performance of informing whether or not the variable probability state will be changed during the big win is executed. can.

Returning to FIG. 142(a), the description continues. The pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is a data table referred to for determining (lottery) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect. The lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect using this pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is executed when an opening command corresponding to the big win A or the big win D is received (see S5833 in FIG. 147). . Although not shown, this pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the execution of the pseudo-small round effect is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot A or jackpot D is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 142(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 142(b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a music lottery counter 223ca and a jackpot status storage, which is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example (see FIG. 122(b)). The difference is that an area 223cb and a pseudo final R storage area 223cc are added.

The song lottery counter 223ca is a counter used to select (determine) one song from the random song selection table 222ca described above, and its value is updated within the range of "0 to 259". When the player determines "random music selection" during the music selection period, music corresponding to the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is selected from the random music selection table 222ca.

The jackpot status storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the type of jackpot and the data corresponding to the symbols aligned in the variable performance executed when the jackpot is won. This jackpot situation storage area 223cb is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if "01H" is stored as data, it indicates that it is a probability variable jackpot with odd symbol notification. Further, if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a probability variable jackpot with even-numbered symbol notification, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates that it is a normal jackpot with even-numbered symbol notification. On the other hand, if "00H" is stored, it indicates that the jackpot has not been won. In this jackpot situation storage area 223cb, when the execution of the variable effect to notify the jackpot is set, the type of the jackpot won and the type of pattern to notify the jackpot (the third pattern with an odd number are aligned) or whether the third symbols with even numbers are aligned), the corresponding data is stored (see S4522 in FIG. 150). In the music selection period, when the player selects (determines) "random music selection", of the random music selection table 222ca, the prescribed contents corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb and the music lottery counter 223ca. are compared to determine one song to be played during the jackpot.

The pseudo final R storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing data indicating a pseudo final round when the pseudo small round effect is determined. In this pseudo final R storage area 223cc, when the 8 rounds jackpot (jackpot A) is determined and the pseudo small rounds effect is decided, 5 rounds (that is, the first special symbol jackpot has a relatively large number of rounds). While the data corresponding to the small number of rounds of jackpots B and C) is set (see S5836 in FIG. 147), when the 16-round jackpot (jackpot D) is determined and the pseudo-small-round production is determined, 10 rounds (That is, the data corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpots E and F, which have a relatively small number of rounds, among the jackpots of the second special symbol) is set (see S5837 in FIG. 147). In the big win, at the start of a new interval period or at the start of a new round, it is the start timing of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round according to the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. and whether it is the start timing of the pseudo final round. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to determine the recombination of music.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 150. FIG. Although not shown, in the third control example, main processing 10 is executed instead of main processing 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example. In this main process 10, the operation detection process 10 (S4161) is executed instead of the operation detection process 9 (S4151, see FIG. 128) in the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example. The only difference is that the command determination process 10 (S4165) is executed instead of the command determination process 9 (S4153), and the variable display setting process 10 (S4162) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). are different.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, the details of the operation detection process 10 (S4161) in the third control example will be described. This operation detection process 10 (S4161) is a process that is executed instead of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example. This is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing control according to the operation content when the operation is detected.

S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example correspond to S5101 to S5106 of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example. , S5109, and S5110 are executed. Further, in the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation (pressing) on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the selected item A music determination process is executed to determine the music to be reproduced after the music selection period ends according to the type (S5121), and this process ends. The details of this song determination process (S5121) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the details of the music piece determination process (S5121) described above. In this song determination process (S5121), first, it is determined whether or not the player has determined random song selection (whether the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is ON (1)) (S5801). If it is determined in the process of S5801 that an item other than random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is off (0) at the time when the depression of the center button CB is detected) (S5801: No ), the data indicating the music corresponding to the value of the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab is specified from the item layout storage area 223aa and stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5802), and the process proceeds to S5806.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5801 that random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is ON (1)) (S5801: Yes), the random music selection table 222ca (see FIG. 143) (S5803), and by comparing the specified content corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb in the read table with the value of the song lottery counter 223ca, the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is determined. is determined (S5804). Then, data corresponding to the music determined in the process of S5804 is stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5805), and the process proceeds to S5806.

In the process of S5806 executed after the process of S5802 or S5805, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to OFF (S5806), and this process ends. By executing this song determination process (see FIG. 145), when random song selection is determined, one song can be randomly selected from a plurality of songs.

As described above, when random song selection is determined, there is a possibility that a song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (that is, "song a") is selected. This "music a" may be determined only in the case of a variable jackpot, and in the case of a variable jackpot with an even pattern notification (if it is unknown whether it is a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot) ) is determined at a higher rate than when it becomes a probability variable jackpot of odd number design notification (when it is determined that it is a probability variable jackpot). By configuring in this way, when it becomes a jackpot of the even number design notification, as soon as possible (that is, before confirming the result of the effect to notify whether to shift to the probability variation state) to the probability variation state A player who wants to know whether or not to transfer can be made to positively select "random music selection". In addition, the player can be pleased when "song a" is reproduced as expected by the player. Furthermore, even if the ``music a'' is not reproduced, it is possible to continue to have expectations for the variable probability state until the performance of notifying whether or not the variable probability state is shifted to during the big win is executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the details of the win-related process 10 (S4371) in the third control example will be described. This win-related process 10 (S4371) is a process executed instead of the win-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example. Of the winning-related processing 10 (S4371) in the third control example, in each of the processing of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466, the winning-related processing 9 in the second control example (Fig. 130 ), S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 are executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that the opening command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4404: Yes), then, a pseudo-small round lottery process is executed for lottery (judgment) as to whether or not a pseudo-small round effect, which is an effect to make it look as if the number of rounds is smaller than the original number of rounds, is executed (S4471). ), and the process proceeds to S4406. The details of this pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the winning-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the number-of-rounds command (S4407 : Yes), then, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example, the round number command process 10 is executed (S4472), and this process ends. The details of this round number command process 10 (S4472) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4462 that the interval command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4462: Yes), then instead of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, interval command processing 10 is executed (S4473), and this processing ends. Details of this interval command process 10 (S4473) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the above-described pseudo small round lottery process (S4471), which is one of the winning related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, will be described. This pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) is, as described above, a process for drawing lots to determine whether or not to set the execution of the pseudo small round effect.

In the pseudo-small round lottery process (see FIG. 147), first, the type of the jackpot notified of the start of the opening period by this opening command is the jackpot A (8 of the jackpots of the first special symbol, which has a relatively large number of rounds). Round jackpot) or jackpot D (16-round jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds among jackpots of the second special symbol) is determined (S5831). In the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is neither the jackpot A nor the jackpot D (S5831: No), the jackpot this time is the jackpots B and C (of the jackpots of the first special symbol, relatively 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds), and E, F (10-round jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds among jackpots of the second special symbol). Therefore, in this case, since the original number of rounds is small and there is no possibility of executing the pseudo small round effect, each process of S5832 to S5837 for lottery (judgment) for execution of the pseudo small round effect is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S5838.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is either jackpot A or jackpot D (S5831: Yes), lottery (determine) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect Each process of S5832 to S5837 is executed. Specifically, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is read (S5832), and lottery (judgment) is made as to whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed (S5833). In addition, as described above, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect is obtained at a rate of 50%.

When the process of S5833 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the lottery (judgment) result by the process of S5833 is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834). When it is determined that it is not the corresponding lottery result (S5834: No), each process of S5835 to S5837 for setting the execution of the pseudo small round effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5838.

On the other hand, in the process of S5834, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current big win is the big win A (S5835). . In the processing of S5835, if it is determined that the current jackpot is jackpot A (first special symbol 8-round jackpot) (S5835: Yes), this jackpot is the first special symbol jackpot, the number of rounds is a relatively small jackpot (5 round jackpot), the value (data) corresponding to 5 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc (S5836), and the process proceeds to S5838. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S5835, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot D) (S5835: No), the jackpot this time is the second special symbol jackpot, A value (data) corresponding to 10 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc (S5837), and the process proceeds to S5838 in order to make it look like a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (10 round jackpot). Transition.

In the process of S5838, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect to be executed is set, and this process ends. By executing this pseudo small round lottery process, when a relatively small number of rounds is reported at the start of the jackpot (that is, when 5 rounds are reported with the first special symbol jackpot, or when the second special symbol is announced) Even if 10 rounds are reported in the big win), it is possible to play the game during the big win in the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be reported (pseudo small round production is executed). can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 148, it is one process in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example. Details of the round number command process 10 (S4472) to be executed will be described. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing this round number command process 10 (S4472).

Of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, each process of S5401 to S5407 corresponds to each process of S5401 to S5407 of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example. The same processing is performed. In the round number command process 10 in the third control example, when the process of S5401 ends, the round notified by the round number command this time is set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. It is determined whether it matches the final round (S5411), and if it is determined that the current round is the pseudo final round (S5411: Yes), the process proceeds to S5403, and the playback order of the music data type It is determined whether or not to rearrange the On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if it is determined that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5411: No), the process proceeds to S5402.

By executing this round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148), at the start of the pseudo final round when the pseudo small round effect is being executed (at the start of 5 rounds in jackpot A and 10 in jackpot D) At the start of the round), just like in the original final round, the rearrangement of the playback order of the music data is determined, and the possibility that the chorus part of the song will be played during the pseudo final round is increased. can be configured to That is, since the voice mode in the pseudo final round and the voice pair usage in the original final round can be made equivalent, it is the pseudo final round or the original final round from the voice mode of the song. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from detecting whether or not the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, is the continuous effect executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round)? Since it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot will end as it is, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the pseudo final round.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, it is one of the hit-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is executed instead of the interval command process (see FIG. 133) in the second control example. Details of the interval number command processing 10 (S4473) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing this interval number command process 10 (S4473).

Of the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, each processing of S5501 to S5509 is the same as each of S5501 to S5509 of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example. Processing is performed. In the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, when the process of S5501 ends, the interval period notified by the current interval command is set to the pseudo final round (pseudo final R storage area). (S5511), and if it is determined that the current interval period is the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round (S5511 : Yes), the process proceeds to S5503 to determine whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data types. On the other hand, in the process of S5511, if it is determined that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5511: No), the process proceeds to S5502.

By executing the processing of S5511, at the start of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round in the case where the pseudo small round effect is being executed, at the start of the interval period immediately before the original final round , the rearrangement of the playback order of the music data can be discriminated, and the possibility that the chorus of the song will be played back during the pseudo final round can be increased. That is, since the voice mode in the pseudo final round and the voice pair usage in the original final round can be made equivalent, it is the pseudo final round or the original final round from the voice mode of the song. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from detecting whether or not the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, is the continuous effect executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round)? Since it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot will end as it is, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the pseudo final round.

Also, in the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, in the processing of S5506, the interval period notified by the interval command this time is not the interval period after the end of the first round of the jackpot. If it is determined (S5506: No), then it is determined whether the current interval is the interval period after the end of the pseudo final round (the round set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc) ( S5512). Then, in the processing of S5512, when it is determined that it is the interval period after the end of the pseudo final round (S5512: Yes), the execution of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is set (S5513). , the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc is reset (S5514), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, details of the variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process 10 (S4162). The variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example is similar to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (and the first embodiment). is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute .

In each of S4501 to S4509 of the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, S4501 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (first embodiment) The same processing as each processing of S4509 is executed. In addition, in the variation display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for informing a big hit. (S4521), if it is determined that it is a variation pattern for notifying a jackpot (S4521: Yes), the type of the jackpot and the type of the third pattern that matches the variation pattern set this time (odd pattern or even number Is it a pattern?) is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb (S4522), and the process proceeds to S4505. In the process of S4522, if the probability variable jackpot with odd number symbol notification is received, "01H" is stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cb, and if the probability variable jackpot with even number symbol notification is determined, "02H" is stored. In the case of a normal jackpot with an even symbol notification, "03H" is stored.

The data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb by the process of S4522 is referred to when the player selects (determines) "random song selection" during the song selection period, and is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb of the random song selection table 222ca. and the song lottery counter 223ca are compared to determine one song to be reproduced during the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4521, if it is determined that the variation pattern set this time is not the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit (that is, the variation pattern corresponding to the loss) (S4521: No), the processing of S4522 is skipped. Then, the process moves to S4505.

As described above, in the third control example, when the player selects "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, the music to be played after the first round (music selection period) ends is determined by a random lottery. It is configured to be determined. Also, when a "random song selection" is determined, if a specific condition is satisfied (that is, if the current jackpot is a variable hit), a special song that is not displayed as an item on the music selection menu screen (that is, , “song a”) can be selected. As a result, it is possible to select "random music selection" in the expectation that "music a", which cannot normally be listened to, will be determined. In particular, when a big hit is caused by a variable display (variable effect) in which the third pattern with an even number is aligned (if it is unknown whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), as soon as possible ( That is, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether or not to shift to the variable probability state, positively "random music selection" for the player who wants to know whether to shift to the variable probability state. can be selected. Furthermore, the rate at which "song a" is determined by lottery is configured to be higher for the even-numbered pattern notification variable probability jackpot than for the odd-numbered symbol notification probability variable jackpot. As a result, when winning a jackpot with even-numbered symbol notification, "random music selection" can be selected more positively. By increasing the possibility that the player will select "random music", the plurality of music pieces (music A to music Z) set in the pachinko machine 10 can be evenly reproduced. This allows the user to listen to a plurality of songs without waste.

In addition, in the third control example, as a kind of effect executed during the big win, during a predetermined period after the start of the big win (for example, until the end of the 5th or 10th round), the number of rounds of the big win is reported less than the original number of rounds, and when a predetermined period of time elapses, a pseudo-small-rounds presentation in which the original number of rounds is notified can be selected. By enabling execution of this pseudo-small-round performance, when a relatively small number of rounds is announced at the start of the jackpot, a larger number of rounds (eight rounds or 16 rounds) after a predetermined period elapses. In anticipation of being notified, the game can be played until the predetermined period elapses. Further, in accordance with this, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during execution of the pseudo short round effect, the playback order of the songs is rearranged and the chorus part is played back in the same way as the original final round. It is configured as follows. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the simulated small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the announcement of a larger number of rounds.

In addition, in the third control example, only in the case of the probability variable jackpot, if the player decides "random music selection", there is a possibility that "music a" will be played, and the probability variable jackpot with odd number symbol notification is set. It was configured so that the percentage of “song a” selected was higher for the probability variable jackpot of the even number pattern notification, but when “random song selection” was decided, the rate at which each song was decided , can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, even when a normal jackpot is won, "song a" may be selected with a low probability (for example, 0.1%). That is, when "random music selection" is selected during the execution of the variable probability jackpot, the ratio of selecting "music a" is higher than when "random music selection" is selected during the normal jackpot. may be configured. With this configuration, even if the ``music a'' is reproduced, the probability variable jackpot is not determined, so the game can be played with a sense of tension until the probability variable state is notified. . Also, the rate at which "song a" is determined may be configured to be higher for odd-numbered symbol notification odd-numbered jackpots than even-numbered symbol notification odd-numbered jackpots.

In the third control example, among the entertainment effects executed during the jackpot (predetermined period), the effect mode (type of music to be played) of the audio entertainment effect is set to the operation content ( Although the selection result on the music selection menu screen) is determined, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, in the third symbol display device 81 during a predetermined period, the effect mode of the display effect displayed may be varied according to the player's selection result (operation details for the operation button 230). More specifically, when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied, a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of effect modes (corresponding to items corresponding to "song A" to "song Z" in the third control example). ) and an item for which the mode of presentation is randomly selected (corresponding to the item corresponding to “random music selection” in the third control example) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Then, depending on the item selected by the player operating the operation button 230, the effect mode of the effect to be executed is determined. That is, when an item corresponding to the effect mode is selected, the effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the selected item, and when a randomly selected item is selected, the selection is made at a predetermined timing. A configuration may be adopted in which one effect mode is determined from among a plurality of possible effect modes. With such a configuration, the player can select between the playability of selecting the player's favorite presentation mode and the playability of having the player select the presentation mode at random and paying attention to which presentation mode is selected. can be made Also, in this case, as in the third control example, a special effect that can be determined only when the player selects an item in which the effect mode is randomly selected (a special song in the third control example). A display effect corresponding to a certain "music a" may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to visually determine whether or not a special effect has been executed, so whether or not it is a special effect (that is, whether or not to shift to a definite variable state after a big hit) can be understood more easily.

In the third control example, only when the player selects "random song selection" on the song selection menu screen, the special song "song a" can be selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when the probability variable jackpot is confirmed (that is, when the probability variable jackpot of the odd-numbered symbol notification occurs, and the player is already convinced that the probability variable jackpot is already achieved), "music a" is displayed on the music selection menu screen. The item may be configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, in a situation where the variable probability state is determined, the player who wants to listen to "song a" is more likely to select another song. ”, the item “song a” can be selected. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved. Also, in this case, "music a" is added at a predetermined ratio to the music selection menu screen displayed in the probability variable jackpot of the even number symbol notification (a situation in which the player cannot know whether or not the probability variable state will occur). The item may be configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, variations (whether or not "song a" is included in the item, and " (whether or not the song a" is reproduced), it is possible to further improve the interest of the player during the song selection period of the even-numbered symbol notification jackpot.

In the third control example, only when the player selects "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, the special music "music a" can be selected. It does not have to be configured to be able to For example, the operation button 230 may be eliminated, and a piece of music played during the execution of the jackpot may be randomly selected each time with reference to the random music selection table 222ca. That is, it is configured so that "music a" can be played when the odds change after the big win is over, but there is no possibility of playing "music a" when the probability is low after the big win is over. may Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game during the big win by paying attention to whether or not the "music a" is reproduced when the big win of the even-numbered symbol notification is achieved. Moreover, it is not limited to the case of using "music a" to suggest whether or not it is in the variable probability state. In a predetermined period of time during a game, whether the state after the predetermined period of time is advantageous to the player (for example, a big win, a time-saving state, a small win RUSH, a slot BIG BONUS, ART, AT, etc.) or its advantage It is determined whether the state is more disadvantageous than the unfavorable state, and if the state is advantageous, a special song can be played, and if the state is unfavorable, the special song is played. It should be configured so that there is no possibility that it will be

In the third control example, the song that can be selected when "random song selection" is selected is made different depending on whether or not it is a variable probability jackpot, but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which songs that can be selected when "random song selection" is selected differ depending on whether or not the pseudo small round effect is being executed. Specifically, when "random music selection" is determined during execution of the pseudo-small round effect, one song is selected from a plurality of songs including "song a", and the pseudo-small-round effect is executed. If there is none, it may be configured to select one of the plurality of songs excluding "song a".

In the third control example, the control for setting the music during the big win has been described as an example, but this control is not limited to during the big win. After the end of the predetermined music reproduction period, when the player is in a relatively advantageous state, a special music (that is, "music a") can be selected when "random music selection" is selected. On the other hand, if the situation becomes relatively disadvantageous after the end of the playback period, at least the special song (that is, "song a") is excluded (that is, among "song A" to "song Z"). Any situation is possible as long as it is possible to select one song from the list. For example, as in the first control example, a configuration may be used for control for selecting songs in the variable probability state. In this case, if "random music selection" is selected while the reserved balls include the jackpot, a special song can be selected, while the reserved balls include the jackpot. If not, one song may be selected from among the special songs excluded. In addition, it is possible to display a music selection menu screen during the execution of the variable display effect, and when "random music selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the big win, a special While the configuration is such that music can be selected, if "random music selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the omission, one music is selected from among special music excluded. may be configured.

In the third control example, when "random music selection" is selected, if "music a" is selected, the variable probability state is determined. Also in the case of selecting, it is possible to provide a case where the probability variation state is determined at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, when the player selects one song during the execution of the variable probability jackpot, with a predetermined probability, the playback position of the song is played from a playback position different from the normal one (for example, the chorus part playback from the beginning of the song, playback from the 2nd number of the song, etc.). Alternatively or in addition, with a predetermined probability, a song different from the selected song (for example, "song a") is played, the tune is changed from usual, or the version is changed from usual. It is good also as a structure which makes it different. By constructing in this way, it is possible to meet the desires of players who want to select their favorite music and want to quickly detect whether or not the variable state will occur. In this case, the music selected by the player may be reproduced in a voice mode different from usual only when the same music is continuously selected over a predetermined number of jackpots.

In the third control example, regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot, when the first round of the jackpot ends, the music selected during the music selection period is played back from the beginning (intro part). It is not limited. For example, for jackpots with a large number of rounds (e.g., 8-round jackpot or 16-round jackpot), playback starts from the beginning of the song, while jackpots with a small number of rounds (e.g., 5 rounds) and pseudo-small rounds are produced. is set, the configuration may be such that playback is started from the chorus of the song. By configuring in this way, even in a jackpot type with a small number of rounds, it is possible to make the player listen to the chorus of the song more reliably in one jackpot. Further, in this case, if the pseudo-short-round effect is set, it may be determined by lottery whether to start the reproduction from the chorus of the music or from the intro of the music. Specifically, for example, when the pseudo-small round effect is set, the playback is started from the chorus part of the song at a rate of 90%, and the playback is started from the beginning part of the song at a rate of 10%. good too. By configuring in this way, even though a small number of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) has been notified, if the reproduction is started from the beginning of the music, the pseudo-small number of rounds effect is executed at that point. Since the player can be made to understand that, it is possible to make the player feel satisfied with the big win with a large number of rounds before confirming the continuous performance.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 169. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first to third control examples, when determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, the game A maximum of three items that are frequently selected by users are arranged. If the number of items selected once or more is less than 3 items, the less than 3 items are placed in the history area, and items determined by random lottery are placed in the remaining area (in the music selection area). One item determined by lottery is arranged, and other items are arranged in alphabetical order based on the one item. By configuring in this way, all songs can be arranged on the song selection menu screen without duplication even when the number of songs selected is small, such as immediately after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when there are few items (less than 3 items) to be set in the history area, an empty area in the history area (an area in which frequently selected items are not arranged) It is configured to prescribe the priority of items to be arranged in each order. This priority is given to songs that are more likely to be known by more players (for example, theme songs of works that are the motif of the pachinko machine 10, songs that are played during normal games such as ready-to-win effects, etc.). set to be higher. By configuring in this way, even if the number of selections of songs is small, songs that are likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area, thereby enhancing convenience for the player. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second and third control examples, in the final round during the jackpot, the music piece is played at a predetermined timing during the jackpot so that the chorus portion is likely to be in a state of being played back. The data reproduction order was configured to be recombinable. As a result, the chorus part, which is the most exciting part (characteristic part) of the music, can be more reliably heard by the player in the final round.

In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion ends during the final round, it is determined whether or not the chorus portion is to be reproduced repeatedly according to the progress of the final round. More specifically, it is possible to end the chorus between the end of the chorus playback and the end of the final round (or the end of the period during which the ending effect can be delayed). If there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played repeatedly, if there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end in the middle (the ending effect will start in the middle of the chorus part being played), the chorus part will not be repeated. Playback is set according to the playback order of music data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the possibility that the chorus part will not be cut off in the final round and can be reproduced in a complete form.

Further, in the above-described third control example, the first round of the jackpot is set as the music selection period, and the player is made to select the music. During this music selection period, regardless of whether or not the music to be played is determined (the center button CB is pressed), the dedicated music is continuously played during the music selection period, and the music selection period elapses (one round It was configured to start playback from the beginning (intro part) of the song at the timing when the end of the eye.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, every time a different item is arranged in the music selection area by the player operating the operation button 230 during the music selection period, the chorus of the music corresponding to the arranged item is reproduced. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to select a song by considering not only the name of the song displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also the melody of the most characteristic chorus part of the song. Further, in the fourth control example, when a song is determined during the song selection period, the playback start position and playback start timing of the song are varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (16 rounds), at the end of the music selection period, playback is started from the beginning of the song (intro part), and the jackpots of 10 rounds and 8 rounds are played. In the case of (2), when the song selection period ends, playback is started from the A melody part of the song (that is, skipping the intro part). On the other hand, in the case of a big win with a small number of rounds (five rounds), when the player decides on a song, the song continues to be played from the chorus part that is already being played (the song selection period ends). The music is played from the front). By configuring in this way, even in the case of a small number of rounds, the player can listen to the chorus portion for a longer time.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The configuration of the RAM 303 in the audio output device 226 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is changed. The only difference is that the control processing that Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226 Other processes executed by are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the third control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 151(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 151(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 151(a), the ROM 222 in the fourth control example has the same prescribed contents of the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third control example (see FIG. 142(a)). The difference is that the part is changed and that a priority definition table 222da and a chorus loop determination table 222db are added.

The priority definition table 222da is a table that defines the priority of items to be arranged in the history area. When determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, if the number of songs that have been selected one or more times is less than three, the empty area of the history area is filled with the priority defined in the priority definition table 222da. The items are laid out in descending order of priority (see S5275 in FIG. 163). Details of the priority definition table 222da will be described later with reference to FIG. 152(b).

The chorus loop determination table 222db is referred to in order to determine whether or not the chorus portion is to be repeatedly played back (looped) when the reproduction end timing of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion comes in the final round. It is a data table (see S5905 in FIG. 158). Details of the chorus loop determination table 222db will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152(a), details of the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb in the fourth control example will be described. This pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is a data table referred to for determining (lottery) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect, as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb in the fourth control example associates the range of values of the effect lottery counter for lottery of the effect mode, and whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed. (Whether to execute normal production or to execute pseudo small round production) is defined in correspondence. In addition, the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb in the fourth control example adjusts the sound mode (playback mode) when playing back the music to match the number of rounds pseudo-notified by the pseudo-small round effect, or the original round Whether to match the number is also defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter. That is, in the fourth control example, whether or not to match the display mode of the pseudo-small round effect and the playback mode of the music is also determined by the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb. When the player recognizes that the reproduction mode of the music does not match the number of rounds notified by the pseudo few rounds presentation, the player can be made to understand that the pseudo few rounds presentation is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give satisfaction to the player who understands that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot A, the value of the effect lottery counter in the range of "0 to 49" is defined in association with the "normal effect" as the display mode, and the music reproduction mode is defined. "for 8R/10R" is defined in association with the above. Therefore, when the jackpot A is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of '0 to 49', the quasi-small round performance is not executed, and it is notified that the jackpot is 8 rounds from the beginning of the jackpot. (Normal production is executed). In addition, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R/10R) is set in which the music is reproduced from the A melody 1 portion at the end of the music selection period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize from the start of the big win that the big win of the first special symbol is a big win of 8 rounds, which has a relatively large number of rounds. Therefore, the player can play the game during the big win from the start of the big win without any worries. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from '0 to 99' that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode 'normal effect' and the reproduction mode 'for 8R/10R'. Since there are 50 values (random numbers) "0 to 49", the ratio of determining the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 8R/10R" is 50% (50/100). .

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot A, the value of the production lottery counter is defined in the range of "50 to 94" in association with "pseudo small round production" as a display mode. "For 5R" is associated and defined as a reproduction mode. Therefore, when the jackpot A is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of ``50 to 94'', a pseudo-small round performance is executed, and despite the fact that the jackpot is 8 rounds, it is held for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 5th round big win is executed. In addition, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 5R) is set in which the music continues to be reproduced from the reproduction position where the music was reproduced when the player decided the music. As a result, until the continuous effect is executed, both the display mode and the sound reproduction mode are the same as the 5-round jackpot (jackpot B and jackpot C). It can be difficult to identify whether the pseudo small-round effect is being executed or the 5-round jackpot is being executed. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the player can be given greater pleasure. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from '0 to 99' that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode 'pseudo small round effect' and the reproduction mode 'for 5R'. Since there are 45 values (random numbers) ranging from "50 to 94", the ratio of determining the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 5R" is 45% (45/100).

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot A, the value of the production lottery counter is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with "pseudo small round production" as a display mode. "For 8R/10R" is associated and defined as a reproduction mode. Therefore, when the big win A is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of "95 to 99", the pseudo small round performance is executed, and despite the big win of 8 rounds, it is held for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 5th round big win is executed. In addition, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R/10R) is set in which the music is reproduced from the A melody 1 at the end of the music selection period. As a result, at least until the player decides the music during the music selection period, the display mode and the voice reproduction mode are the same as the 5-round jackpot (jackpot B and jackpot C), but the music is selected. The audio reproduction mode after the determination is set to a mode different from the 5-round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the reproduction mode and the display mode of the voice do not match, so that the player can easily understand that the quasi-small round effect is being executed. can. As a result, the player who can see that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed can have a sense of superiority. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, it is associated with the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the playback mode "for 8R/10R". Since there are five counter values (random numbers) "95 to 99", the ratio of determining the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the playback mode "for 8R/10R" is 5% (5/100). is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot D, the value of the effect lottery counter is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "normal effect" as a display mode. As a reproduction mode, "for 16R" is associated and defined. Therefore, when the jackpot D is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of '0 to 49', the quasi-small round performance is not executed, and it is reported that the jackpot is 16 rounds from the beginning of the jackpot. (Normal production is executed). Also, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 16R) in which the music is reproduced from the intro part at the end of the music selection period is set. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize from the start of the big win that the big win of 16 rounds, which has a relatively large number of rounds, among the big wins of the second special symbols. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, the counter value ( Since there are 50 random numbers "0 to 49", the ratio of determining the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot D, the value of the effect lottery counter is defined in the range of "50 to 94" in association with "pseudo small round effect" as a display mode. "For 8R/10" is associated and defined as a reproduction mode. Therefore, when the big win D is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of ``50 to 94'', a pseudo small round performance is executed, and despite the 16 rounds of the big win, it is held for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 10th round jackpot is executed. In addition, as the music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R/10R) is set in which the music is reproduced from the A melody 1 at the end of the music selection period. As a result, until the continuous effect is executed, both the display mode and the sound reproduction mode are the same as the 10-round jackpot (jackpot E and jackpot F). It can be difficult to identify whether a pseudo small round effect is being executed or a 10 rounds jackpot is being executed. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the player can be given greater pleasure. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from '0 to 99' that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode 'pseudo small round effect' and the reproduction mode 'for 5R'. Since there are 45 values (random numbers) ranging from "50 to 94", the ratio of display mode "pseudo small round effect" and playback mode "for 8R/10R" is 45% (45/100). .

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the jackpot D, the value of the effect lottery counter is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with "pseudo small round effect" as a display mode. As a reproduction mode, "for 16R" is associated and defined. Therefore, when the jackpot D is won and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of "95 to 99", a pseudo small round performance is executed, and despite the fact that the jackpot is 16 rounds, for a predetermined period of time. (Until the end of the 5th round), a display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a 10th round jackpot is executed. In addition, as a music reproduction mode, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 16R) is set in which the music is reproduced from the intro at the end of the music selection period. As a result, at least until the music selection period ends, the display mode and sound reproduction mode are the same as the 10-round jackpot (jackpot E and jackpot F), but after the music selection period ends The audio reproduction mode is set to a mode different from the 10-round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the reproduction mode and the display mode of the voice do not match, so that the player can easily understand that the quasi-small round effect is being executed. can. As a result, the player who can see that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed can have a sense of superiority. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) from '0 to 99' that the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode 'pseudo small round effect' and the reproduction mode 'for 16R'. Since there are five values (random numbers) "95 to 99", the ratio of determining the display mode "pseudo small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" is 5% (5/100).

As described above, in the fourth control example, the music reproduction mode (the timing at which the music reproduction is started and the music reproduction position) is changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Then, in a part (predetermined ratio) when the pseudo-small-round production (production as if it were a (disadvantageous) jackpot with a number of rounds smaller than the actual number of rounds) is executed, only the voice mode is actually It is configured to be set to a reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to perceive from the voice mode that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player, who can sense early that the pseudo small round effect is being executed, have a sense of superiority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152(b), the defined contents of the priority level definition table 222da will be described. As described above, the priority definition table 222da is a data table that defines the priority (priority order) of items to be arranged in the history area. When determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, if the number of songs that have been selected one or more times is less than three, the empty area of the history area will be filled with the priority specified in the priority definition table 222da. Items are arranged in order from the item with the highest priority.

As shown in FIG. 152(b), in the priority definition table 222da, priorities to be arranged in the history area and menu items are defined in association with each other. More specifically, in the priority definition table 222da, the priority "high" is defined in association with "song A" as a menu item, and the priority "medium" is defined as a menu item. "Music J" is defined in correspondence, and "music E" is defined in association with the priority "low" as a menu item. These items are set so that the higher the priority of a song that is likely to be known by more players, the higher the priority. Specifically, for example, the opening song (theme song) of the work that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10 is specified as the "song A" corresponding to the priority "high", and the "song A" corresponding to the priority "medium" is specified. As "song J", the ending song of the work used as the motif is defined, and as "song E" corresponding to the priority "low", the insert song of the work used as the motif is defined.

By referring to the priority definition table 222da to determine the items to be arranged in the history area, for example, when the number of songs selected one or more times is 2 and the state shifts to the variable probability state, the song selection menu screen is displayed. As an initial arrangement, first, two songs (items) that have been selected once or more by the player are arranged in the history area. Then, "song A", which is an item corresponding to the priority "high", is arranged in an empty area for one item. In addition, when the number of pieces of music selected once or more is one and the state shifts to the variable probability state, one item selected once or more by the player is arranged in the history area, and two items are placed. "music A" corresponding to "high" priority and "music J" corresponding to "medium" priority are stored in the empty area of . Furthermore, when a song has not been selected even once, all three items defined in the priority definition table 222da are stored in the history area.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the number of songs selected is small (the number of songs selected one or more times is less than three), the priority of the items to be arranged in the empty area of the history area is set to the priority It is configured to be defined in advance by the regulation table 222da. This priority stipulation table 222da is configured so that the higher the priority of a song that is likely to be known by more players, the higher the priority. By configuring in this way, even if the number of selections of songs is small, songs that are highly likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area. Therefore, it is possible to enhance convenience for the player when selecting music.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the chorus loop determination table 222db will be described. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chorus loop determination table 222db. As described above, the chorus loop determination table 222db is used to determine whether or not the chorus portion that has been played back is to be loop-played again when the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion ends during the final round. is a data table referenced by

As shown in FIG. 153, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db contains the range of the playback time of the chorus portion of the song currently being played, and the number of prizes determined to be loop-playable The number of game balls hit) are defined in association with each other. Here, as described above, the game ball shooting interval in the pachinko machine 10 (the interval from when one game ball is shot until when the next game ball is shot) is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. is doing. During the jackpot, in many cases, it is considered normal for the player to shoot the game ball at the shortest shooting interval, so in the final round the game ball is shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. to win a ball (winning a prize). Thereby, it is possible to roughly predict the time until the ending effect is started based on the number of prizes won in the final round. A chorus loop determination table 222db permits loop reproduction of the chorus part and reproduces the chorus part when the remaining time until the ending effect starts, which is predicted from the number of prizes won in the final round, is equal to or longer than the reproduction time of the chorus part. The correspondence relationship is defined so that loop reproduction of the chorus is restricted when the duration is less than the time. The length of the chorus portion of the song with the shortest chorus portion among the songs A to Z and the song a is 7 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, the chorus loop determination table 222db defines only the range in which the reproduction time (L) of the chorus portion is 7 seconds or longer.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 153, the number of winning prizes that allow loop playback of the chorus portion is within the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 7 seconds or more and less than 7.6 seconds. , "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other. If the number of prizes won is 3 or less, even if the 4th prize is detected immediately after the chorus is played, the 6th prize from the 5th to the 10th will be played before the end of the final round. About 3.6 seconds (interval of 0.6 seconds x 6 pieces), which is the time until the winning of the minute is detected, can be ensured. In addition, as described above, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed by up to 4 seconds after the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, there is a high possibility that 7.6 seconds or more will pass before the ending effect starts, so if the chorus part has a playback time of less than 7.6 seconds, it can be played in a loop. There is a high possibility that the reproduction of the chorus part will end before the ending effect starts. Therefore, when the reproduction time (L) of the chorus portion is within a range of less than 7.6 seconds, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db is set so as to allow the loop reproduction of the chorus portion in the range where the number of winning prizes is 3 or less. stipulated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, for the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 7.6 seconds or more and less than 8.2 seconds, the number of prizes allowed for loop playback of the chorus portion is: "0 to 2" are associated and defined. If the number of prizes won is 2 or less, even if the 3rd prize is detected immediately after the chorus part has finished playing, the 7th to 10th prizes will be played before the end of the final round. Approximately 4.2 seconds (0.6 second interval x 7 pieces) until the minute winning is detected, plus 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending production, for 8.2 seconds It can be secured as time for performing loop playback. Therefore, if the chorus portion has a playback time of less than 8.2 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus portion will end before the ending effect starts even if loop playback is performed. is 7.6 seconds or more and less than 8.2 seconds, the chorus loop determination table 222db is defined so as to allow the loop reproduction of the chorus portion for the range where the number of winning prizes is 2 or less. ing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, for the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 8.2 seconds or more and less than 8.8 seconds, the number of prizes allowed for loop playback of the chorus portion is: "0, 1" are associated and defined. If the number of prizes won is 1 or less, even if the 2nd prize is detected immediately after the chorus is played, the 8th prize from the 3rd to the 10th will be completed before the end of the final round. About 4.8 seconds (0.6 second interval x 8 pieces) until the minute winning is detected, plus 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending production, for 8.8 seconds This can be reserved as time for loop playback. Therefore, if the chorus portion has a playback time of less than 8.8 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus portion will end before the ending effect starts even if loop playback is performed. is in the range of 8.2 seconds or more and less than 8.8 seconds, the hook loop determination table 222db is defined so as to allow the loop playback of the hook part in the range where the number of winning prizes is 1 or less. ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 153, for the range where the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is 8.8 seconds or more and less than 9.4 seconds, the number of prizes that allow loop playback of the chorus portion is: Only "0" is associated and defined. If the number of prizes won is 0, even if the first prize is detected immediately after the chorus is played, the nine pieces from the 2nd to the 10th will be played before the end of the final round. Approximately 5.4 seconds (0.6 second interval x 9 pieces) until the winning is detected, and 9.4 seconds, which is the sum of 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending effect, is looped in the hook part It can be secured as a time for playing. Therefore, if the chorus portion has a playback time of less than 9.4 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus portion will end before the ending effect starts even if loop playback is performed. is 8.8 seconds or more and less than 9.4 seconds, the chorus loop determination table 222db is defined so as to allow the loop reproduction of the chorus part in the range where the number of winning prizes is 0 or less. ing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153, when the playback time (L) of the chorus portion is in the range of 9.4 seconds or longer, loop playback is not allowed. This is because, regardless of the number of prizes won, there is a high possibility that the timing for starting the ending effect will come during the playback of the chorus.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion is completed in the final round, the chorus loop determination table 222db determines whether or not the chorus portion is to be loop-reproduced. By configuring in this way, whether the chorus part can be loop-played before the ending effect is started (whether the ending effect is likely to start during the playback of the chorus part is low) can be accurately determined. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ending effect is started during the reproduction of the chorus part, so that the chorus part can be completely reproduced during the final round of the jackpot (and the ending delay period). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 151(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 151(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 151(b), the RAM 223 in the fourth control example has a loop discrimination flag 223da and a reproduction mode storage area 223db in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third control example (see FIG. 142(b)). , and a winning number counter 223dc is added.

The loop determination flag 223da is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for determining whether loop reproduction of the chorus portion is possible. If this loop discrimination flag 223da is ON, it indicates that it is a period for determining whether or not loop reproduction is possible (that is, the final round of the jackpot), and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is not a period for determining whether or not loop reproduction is possible. . This loop discrimination flag 223da is set to ON at the start of the final round of the jackpot (see S5421 in FIG. 161), and set to OFF at the start of the ending period of the jackpot (see S4484 in FIG. 159).

The reproduction mode storage area 223db is a storage area for storing data indicating a music reproduction mode (for 5R, 8R/10R, or 16R). The reproduction mode storage area 223db stores data indicating a reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the lottery result as to whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed (see S5841 and S5842 in FIG. 160). Based on the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db, the reproduction mode when the music is determined is set.

The winning number counter 223dc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a in each round of the jackpot. The winning number counter 223dc has an initial value of 0, and each time the main controller 110 receives a winning command output when a winning to the right specific winning port 65a or the left specific winning port 650a is detected. is incremented by 1 (see S4486 in FIG. 159). Also, the value is reset to 0 when each round ends (see S4484 in FIG. 159 and S5521 in FIG. 164). In the final round of the jackpot (while the loop discrimination flag 223da is ON), when the reproduction of the chorus portion is completed, the value of the winning number counter 223dc and the chorus loop discrimination table 222db are referred to, and the chorus portion is reproduced. It is determined whether or not to perform loop playback (see S5905 in FIG. 158).

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303 in this fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 154, the RAM 303 in the fourth control example has a temporary music selection flag 303g added to the configuration of the RAM 303 in the third control example (and the second control example) (see FIG. 126). is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the third control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The provisional music selection flag 303g is a flag indicating whether or not the chorus portion of the music arranged (temporarily selected) in the music selection area by the player's operation of the operation button 230 during the music selection period should be loop-played. be. When this provisional music selection flag 303g is ON, it indicates that the loop reproduction of the chorus portion should be performed, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the loop reproduction of the chorus portion should not be performed. The provisional music selection flag 303g is set to ON each time the operation button 230 is operated by the player and a new item is arranged in the music selection area while the music selection menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 168). S9507). In addition, when the player decides the song during the song selection period in the 5th round jackpot (the player presses the center button CB), or when the song selection period ends in a jackpot other than the 5th round, it is set to OFF ( See S9233 and S9239 in FIG. 167). While the provisional song selection flag 303g is on, control is performed so that the chorus is played back in a loop (see S9603 in FIG. 169).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 165. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 155, the main processing 11 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. 155 is a flowchart showing main processing 11. FIG.

S4101 to S4111, S4114 to S4118, and S4152 of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155) correspond to S4101 to S4111, S4113 to S4118, S4113 to S4118, S4113 to S4118 of the main process 10 (not shown) in the third control example, respectively. and S4152 are executed. Further, in the main process 11 (see FIG. 155) in the fourth control example, when the process of S4111 ends, the operation detection process 11 is executed instead of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. (S4171). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 156, this operation detection process 11 (S4171) monitors the operation (pressing) on the operation button 230 and detects the operation, as in the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144). is detected, it is a process for executing control according to the operation content.

When the operation detection process 11 (S4171) is finished, next, in the final round of the jackpot, when the reproduction of the chorus part is finished, the chorus part loop process is executed for determining whether or not to loop-play the chorus part. (S4172). The details of this chorus portion loop processing (S4172) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when the chorus portion loop processing (S4172) ends, the command determination processing 11 for performing control according to the type of command received from the main controller 110 is executed (S4173), and the processing proceeds to S4162. .

Next, details of the operation detection process 11 (S4171) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This operation detection process 11 (S4171) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. Of this operation detection process 11 (S4171), the processes of S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 correspond to the operations of S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. The same processing as the processing is executed.

Further, in the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), music determination in the third control example is performed. Instead of the process (see FIG. 145), the music determination process 11 is executed (S5131), and this process ends. This song determination process 11 (S5131) is a process for determining a song to be reproduced after the song selection period ends or immediately after the selection according to the type of the selected item and the number of rounds of the jackpot. The details of this song determination process 11 (S5131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, when the process of S5110 ends, the chorus part of the music corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab updated by the process of S5109 is played in a loop. A temporary music selection command for audio is set (S5132), and this process ends. The provisional audio music selection command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the audio provisional music selection command is received, the audio output device 226 sets the start of reproduction from the chorus of the music indicated by the received command. Thus, every time a player operates the operation button 230 to place a new item in the music selection area, the chorus portion corresponding to the placed item can be reproduced. Therefore, not only the title of the song but also the melody of the chorus can be taken into consideration when selecting the song, so that the user can select the desired song more accurately. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the details of the above-described song determination processing 11 (S5131) will be described. This song determination process 11 (S5131) is, as described above, a process executed instead of the song determination process (see FIG. 145) in the third control example.

In the music determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, the processes in S5801 to S5806 are the same as the processes in S5801 to S5806 in the music determination process in the third control example (see FIG. 145). Processing is performed. Also, in the song determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, if the random song selection has not been determined by the player in the process of S5801 (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is not ON (1)). If it is determined (S5801: No), then the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db is read (S5811), and it is determined whether the read data corresponds to the reproduction mode for 5R ( S5812).

In the processing of S5812, if the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is not stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (that is, the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 8R/10R or 16R is stored). If so (S5812: No), the process proceeds to S5802. On the other hand, in the process of S5812, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5812: Yes), the voice for notifying the cancellation of the loop playback of the hook part A command for canceling the loop for use is set (S5813), and this processing ends. The audio loop release command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the audio loop release command is received, the audio output device 226 releases the loop reproduction of the chorus (that is, sets the provisional music selection flag 303g to OFF). As a result, when the reproduction time of the chorus part currently being reproduced ends, the parts (music data) specified in the order of reproduction next to the chorus part are set to be reproduced without the loop reproduction of the chorus part. After that, each piece of music data is reproduced in order according to the reproduction order of the piece of music data. As a result, the number of rounds is small and the period until the jackpot ends (that is, the period in which the song can be played) tends to be short. (b) can play music. Therefore, in the 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds, it is possible to effectively utilize a relatively short period until the jackpot ends to reproduce music.

Also, in the song determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, when the process of S5805 ends, the playback of the song for the song selection period is set (S5814), and the process proceeds to S5806. When the random music selection is determined (S5801: Yes), setting the reproduction of the music for the music selection period without reproducing the chorus of the music determined by lottery using the random music selection table 222ca is the music selection. By determining random music selection many times during the period, it is possible to prevent an irregular selection method of repeatedly determining whether or not the chorus part of ``music a'' is reproduced, ” is reproduced only once.

Next, referring to FIG. 158, the above-described chorus portion loop processing (S4172) will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing this chorus portion loop processing (S4172). As described above, this chorus part loop processing (S4172) is a process for determining whether or not the chorus part is to be loop-reproduced when the reproduction of the chorus part is completed in the final round of the jackpot.

In the chorus portion loop processing (see FIG. 158), first, it is determined whether or not the loop determination flag 223da is on (S5901). Since there is no possibility of loop-reproducing the chorus part, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the loop determination flag 223da is ON (S5901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the part currently being reproduced is the chorus (S5902). is not being reproduced (S5902: No), there is no possibility of loop-reproducing the chorus part, so this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5902 that the part being reproduced is the chorus portion (S5902: Yes), then the remaining reproduction time of the chorus portion (the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) is 0. (S5903), and if it is determined that the remaining playback time of the chorus portion (the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) is not 0 (S5903: No), the main part is played as it is to continue the playback of the chorus portion. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5903 that the remaining reproduction time of the chorus portion (the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) has become 0 (S5903: Yes), it is determined whether loop reproduction of the chorus portion can be executed. The processing of S5904 to S5907 is executed to

More specifically, first, the chorus loop determination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is read (S5904), and the defined contents of the read chorus loop determination table 222db and the playback time (L) of the chorus portion of the currently-reproduced song are determined. , and the value of the prize number counter 223dc, it is determined whether or not loop reproduction of the chorus can be executed (S5905). As described above, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is set so as to permit loop reproduction of the chorus when there is a high possibility that the chorus will end before the ending effect starts. It is

Next, it is determined whether the determination result by the processing of S5905 corresponds to execution of loop reproduction (S5906). ), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5906 that the determination result corresponds to execution of loop playback (S5906: Yes), a loop playback command for audio indicating loop playback of the chorus is set (S5907). , the process ends. The audio loop reproduction command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). Upon receiving the audio loop reproduction command, the audio output device 226 reproduces the chorus portion that has been reproduced from the beginning again. This allows the player to listen to the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, more times before the ending effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the win-related process 11 (S4381) in the fourth control example will be described. This win-related process 11 (S4381) is a process executed instead of the win-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example. Of the winning-related processing 11 (S4381) in the fourth control example, in each of the processing of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466, the winning-related processing 10 in the third control example (FIG. 146 ), S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 are executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes an opening command (S4404: Yes), instead of the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example, the pseudo small round lottery process 11 is executed (S4481), and the process proceeds to S4406. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, this pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) is similar to the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example, and the pseudo small round effect is executed. This is a process for determining whether or not the application is possible.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the round number command (S4407 : Yes), instead of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, the round number command process 11 is executed (S4482), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 161, this round number command process 11 (S4482) is a process for performing control according to the number of rounds indicated by the round number command.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4462 that the interval command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4462: Yes), instead of interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, interval command 11 is executed (S4483), and this processing ends. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, this interval command process 11 (S4483) is a process for performing control according to the type of interval (what round the interval is).

Further, in the winning-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4409: Yes), the loop determination flag 223da is set to OFF, the winning number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S4484), and the process proceeds to S4464. Through the processing of S4484, the period for judging the loop reproduction of the chorus portion can be terminated.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4465 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not contain a music command (S4465: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command is included in the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4485), and if it is determined that the winning command is included (S4485: Yes), The value of the winning number counter 223dc is incremented by 1 (S4486), and this process is terminated. By updating the value of the winning number counter 223dc according to the winning command, it is possible to grasp the progress of each round of the jackpot (approximate remaining time until the round ends). Therefore, in the final round, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a period of time left to reproduce the chorus to the end, taking into consideration the counter value of the winning number counter 223dc. On the other hand, in the process of S4485, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the winning command (S4485: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, details of the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) described above will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481). This pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) is, as described above, a process executed instead of the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example. Of the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) in the fourth control example, in each process of S5831 to S5838, each process of S5831 to S5838 of the pseudo small round lottery process in the third control example (see FIG. 147) The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5834 that the pseudo small round effect is to be executed (S5834: Yes), whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed At the same time as the lottery, the data indicating the reproduction mode of the song determined by lottery using the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cb (see FIG. 152(a)) is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5841), and the process is performed. Move to S5835. Based on the data stored by the process of S5841, when the music is determined during the music selection period, the reproduction mode of the determined music can be appropriately set. As a result, in a part (predetermined ratio) when the pseudo-small round production (production as if it were a (disadvantageous) jackpot with a number of rounds smaller than the actual number of rounds) is executed, only the voice mode It is possible to set the reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the actual jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to perceive from the voice mode that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can perceive early that the pseudo small round effect is being executed.

In addition, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160) in the fourth control example, in the process of S5831, the jackpot won this time is neither jackpot A nor jackpot D (that is, jackpots B, C, E, F). Either) (S5831: No), and in the process of S5834, if it is determined that the pseudo small round effect is not executed (S5834: No), the number of songs corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot The data indicating the reproduction mode is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5842), and this processing is terminated. Specifically, if the current jackpot is either jackpot B or C (5-round jackpot), data corresponding to the playback mode for "5R" is stored, while either jackpot E or F ( If it is a 10-round jackpot), data corresponding to the reproduction mode of "for 8R/10R" is stored. In addition, if the current jackpot is jackpot A (8 round jackpot) and the simulated small round effect is not executed, data corresponding to the reproduction mode "for 8R/10R" is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db. On the other hand, if the jackpot is D (16 round jackpot) and the simulated small round effect is not executed, the data corresponding to the "for 16R" reproduction mode is stored.

By executing this pseudo-small-round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160), the music reproduction mode (the timing at which music reproduction is started and the music reproduction position) can be varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. can be done. Then, it is possible to set a reproduction mode in which only the voice mode corresponds to the actual number of rounds of the jackpot in a part (predetermined ratio) of the cases where the pseudo small round effect is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive from the voice mode that the pseudo small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can perceive early that the pseudo small round effect is being executed.

Next, details of the above-described round number command process 11 (S4482) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This round number command process 11 (S4482) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example.

In the processes of S5401 to S5406 and S5411 of the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, S5401 to S5406 of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example , and S5411 are executed. In the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5402 that the number of rounds notified by the current round number command is the final round (S5402: Yes ), the loop determination flag 223da is set to ON (S5421), and the process proceeds to S5403. By setting the loop determination flag 223da to ON in the process of S5421, it is possible to determine whether or not the chorus portion is to be loop-reproduced at the timing when the chorus portion reproduction time has elapsed during the final round. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the chorus portion is reproduced during execution of one jackpot.

In the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5406 that the number of rounds notified by the current round number command is the first round (S5406: Yes), instead of the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and the second control example), the music selection period setting process 11 is executed (S5422), and this process ends. Details of this music selection period setting process 11 (S5422) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the music selection period setting process 11 (S5422). Of this music selection period setting process 11 (S5422), in each of the processes of S5205, S5206, S5208 to S5213, S5221, and S5222, the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and the second control example) ) are executed in steps S5205, S5206, S5208 to S5213, S5221, and S5222.

Also, in the music selection period setting process 11 (see FIG. 162) in the fourth control example, first, a history area setting process for setting items to be arranged in the history area is executed (S5231), and the process proceeds to S5205. do. Details of this history area setting process (S5231) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing history area setting processing (S5231). This history area setting process (S5231) is, as described above, a process for setting items to be arranged in the history area. In this history area setting process (S5231), first, the data stored in the song selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)) is read out (S5271), and there are three or more songs with a playback count of 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S5272). In the process of S5272, if it is determined that there are less than three songs with the number of times of reproduction of 1 or more (S5272: No), the data of the number of times of reproduction of 1 or more among the data defined in the number of times of selection storage area 223ac is selected. (S5273), and stores the read data in the history area (storage area corresponding to the value range "17H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab) of the item arrangement storage area 223aa (see FIG. 105(a)). are stored in descending order of the number of times played (S5274). Next, among the history areas, the remaining areas (empty areas) in which data was not stored in the processing of S5274 are given higher priority as defined in the priority definition table 222da (see FIG. 152(b)). The data are stored in order from the item (S5275), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5272 that the number of songs whose number of times of reproduction is one or more is three or more (S5272: Yes), three pieces of data are read from the music selection number storage area 223ac in descending order of the number of times of reproduction. (S5276), the three pieces of read data are stored in the history area of the item arrangement storage area 223aa in descending order of the number of times of reproduction (S5277), and this process ends.

By executing this history area setting process (see FIG. 163), even if the number of songs selected is small (the number of songs selected at least once is less than 3), Items that are highly likely to be selected by the player (high priority items defined in the priority definition table 222da) can be arranged. More specifically, most players who have seen works that have served as motifs in the past, such as opening songs (theme songs), ending songs, insert songs, etc. Music that has definitely been heard before is defined as an item with a high priority. By configuring in this way, even when the number of times music is selected is small, items that are highly likely to be known by more players can be arranged in the history area. That is, regardless of the number of times the song is selected, songs that are likely to be selected by the player can be placed in the history area, so convenience for the player when selecting songs can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, details of the interval command process 11 (S4483) described above will be described. S5501 to S5506 and S5511 to S5514 of the interval command process 11 (S4483) in the fourth control example correspond to S5501 to S5506 and S5501 to S5506 of the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S5511 to S5514 is executed.

Also, in the interval command process 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example, after the process of S5501 is completed, the prize number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S5521), and the process proceeds to S5511. By resetting the winning number counter 223dc each time an interval command is received, the number of game balls winning a specific winning hole (the right specific winning hole 65a or the left specific winning hole 650a) in each round of the jackpot. can be accurately grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Further, in the interval command processing 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example, it is determined in S5506 that the interval period whose start is notified by the current interval command is the interval period after the end of the first round. If it is determined (S5506: Yes), the selected music setting process is executed to set the reproduction of the music selected (determined) by the player during the music selection period (that is, the first round) (S5522), End this process. Details of this selected music setting process (S5522) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the selected music setting process (S5522). In this selected music setting process (S5522), first, the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is identified (S5551). A reproduction mode is specified (S5552). Then, it is determined whether or not the reproduction mode specified in the process of S5552 is the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553), and if it is determined to be the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553: Yes), then It is determined whether or not the music during the music selection period is being reproduced (S5554). In the processing of S5554, if it is determined that the music during the music selection period is being reproduced (S5554: Yes), the player determines whether the music selection menu screen has been displayed even once during the music selection period or the player randomly selects music. This means that the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is not set to be played back. A music selection command for use is set (S5555), and the process proceeds to S5559.

On the other hand, in the process of S5554, if it is determined that the music for the music selection period is not being played (S5554: No), the player displays the music selection menu screen during the music selection period, , any of the songs A to Z) is selected. As described above, when a song is selected while the playback mode for 5R is set, the loop playback of the chorus of the song is canceled at that point, and the song data is replayed from the playback position that was being played at the time of decision. The music is set to start playing according to the playing order. That is, since there is no need to newly set the reproduction of music at the end of the music selection period, the process of S5555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5559.

Further, in the processing of S5553, if it is determined that the reproduction mode specified in the processing of S5552 is not the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553: No), then It is determined whether it is in the mode (S5556). In the process of S5556, if it is determined that the playback mode for 16R is not specified (the playback mode for 8R/10R is specified) (S5556: No), the song specified by the process of S5551 is replaced with the A melody part. A music selection command for audio to be played back from is set (S5557), and the process proceeds to S5559. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5556 that the specified playback mode is the playback mode for 16R (S5556: Yes), a selected audio music command for playing back the music specified in the process of S5551 from the intro part is set (S5558), and the process proceeds to S5559.

In the processing of S5559, 1 is added to the data corresponding to the number of song selections of the currently reproduced song in the song selection count storage area 223ac (S5559), the song selection menu screen is closed, and the menu display flag 223ae and song selection permission flag 223ad are displayed. is set to off (S5560), and the process ends.

By executing this selected music setting process (see FIG. 165), at the end of the music selection period, the reproduction of the music selected by the player is set in a reproduction mode corresponding to the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db. can do.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 169. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 166, main processing 11 executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this fourth control example will be described. This main process 11 is a process executed in place of the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the third control example (and the second control example).

Of the main processing 11 (see FIG. 166), S9003 to S9007, S9011, and S9013 of the main processing 9 (see FIG. 136) in the third control example (and the second control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S9011 and S9013 is executed. Further, in the main process 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, when the process of S9011 ends, instead of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example (and the second control example) Then, command determination processing 11 is executed (S9021), and the processing proceeds to S9013. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, this command determination process 11 (S9021) is similar to the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example. It is a process for executing control according to the type of

In addition, in the main processing 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, when the processing of S9013 is completed, the chorus portion of the item (music) placed (temporarily selected) by the player in the music selection area during the music selection period is displayed. (S9022), and the process proceeds to S9003. The details of this provisional music selection period processing (S9022) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the command determination process 11 (S9021) described above will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 (S9021). This command determination process 11 (S9021) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example. In the processes of S9201 to S9205, S9207, S9214, S9221, and S9222 of the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167), S9201 to S9205 and S9205 of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example, respectively. The same processing as each of S9207, S9214, S9221, and S9222 is executed.

In the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, when the process of S9205 is finished, next, the pointer value corresponding to the part indicated by the audio selection music command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is set. The music pointer 303b is set, and the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the part for which reproduction is set is set in the music timer 303d (S9231), and the process proceeds to S9207. When the process of S9207 is finished, it sets reproduction from the music data corresponding to the part indicated by the selected audio music command received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9232), and sets the provisional music selection flag 303g to OFF. (S9233), and the process ends.

In addition, in the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S9204 that the unprocessed command does not include the audio selection music command (S9204: No ), and then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include an audio loop playback command (that is, a command for instructing loop playback of the chorus portion in the final round) (S9234). In the process of S9234, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include the voice loop playback command (S9234: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the chorus part where the playback ends is set to the music timer 303d. , and the playback of the chorus portion where playback ends is set again (S9235), and this processing ends. By executing the process of S9235, the chorus can be played back in a loop in the final round of the jackpot. Therefore, the chorus portion can be reproduced more times during one big win, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9234 that the unprocessed commands do not include the audio loop playback command, then the unprocessed commands include the temporary audio music selection command (newly added to the music selection area). It is determined whether or not a command for instructing loop reproduction of the chorus portion of the music arranged in the . In the process of S9236, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include the provisional music selection command for audio (S9236: Yes), the item (temporarily selected music) newly placed in the music selection area (music ) is executed (S9237), and the process ends. The details of this provisional music selection command process (S9237) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the process of S9236 that the unprocessed commands do not include the audio temporary music selection command (S9236: No), then the unprocessed commands include the audio loop release command. It is determined whether or not it is included (S9238). In the processing of S9238, when it is determined that an unprocessed command includes an audio loop release command (a command for instructing release of the loop playback of the chorus of the temporarily selected song in the 5th round jackpot) (S9238: Yes), by turning off the provisional music selection flag 303g, the loop reproduction of the chorus portion of the provisionally selected music is set to be canceled (S9239), and this processing ends. By canceling the loop reproduction of the chorus part in the process of S9239, after the reproduction time of the chorus part has elapsed, the music data can be reproduced in order according to the reproduction order of the music data. As a result, the number of rounds is small and the period until the jackpot ends (that is, the period in which the song can be played) tends to be short. (b) can play music. Therefore, in the 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds, it is possible to effectively utilize a relatively short period until the jackpot ends to reproduce music.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9238 that the unprocessed commands do not include the audio loop playback command, the process proceeds to S9221.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, details of the provisional song selection command process (S9237) described above will be described. This provisional music selection command process (S9237) is, as described above, a process for loop-playing the chorus of the item (music) newly placed (temporarily selected) in the music selection area.

In the provisional music selection command process (see FIG. 168), first, it is determined whether or not the command is a provisional music selection command indicating random music selection (S9501). ), the reproduction of the music for the music selection period is set (S9502), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9501, if it is determined that the received provisional music selection command is not a provisional music selection command indicating random music selection (S9501: No), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the command is retrieved. It reads from the voice file storage area 302a and stores the read voice file in the music data group storage area 303a (S9503).

When the process of S9503 is finished, next, a pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion of the music notified by the command is set to the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the chorus 1 portion is set to the music pointer 303b. is set in the timer 303d (S9504). Next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9505), and reproduction of music data corresponding to the chorus 1 is set (S9506). Then, the provisional music selection flag 303g is set to ON (S9507), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this provisional music selection command process (see FIG. 168), it is possible to start the loop reproduction of the chorus 1 portion of the provisionally selected music piece. As a result, the player can select his or her favorite song by taking into consideration not only the name of the song displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also the melody of the chorus of the song. Therefore, it is possible to enhance convenience for the player when selecting music.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169, the details of the temporary music selection period process (S9022) executed in the above main process 11 (see FIG. 166) will be described. This provisional music selection period process (S9022) is, as described above, a process for loop-playing the chorus of the music when the music is provisionally selected (arranged in the music selection area).

In this provisional music selection period processing (see FIG. 169), first, it is determined whether or not the provisional music selection flag 303g is on (S9601). No), which means that the music has not been provisionally selected, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9601 that the provisional music selection flag 303g is ON (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (S9602), and the reproduction ends. If it is determined that it is not the timing (S9602: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9602, if it is determined that it is time to end the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (the value of the music timer 303d is 0) (S9602: Yes), the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion is started. It resets (S9603), resets the reproduction time corresponding to the chorus 1 part to the music timer 303d (S9604), and terminates this processing.

By executing this provisional music selection period process (see FIG. 169), the chorus 1 portion of the provisionally selected music (arranged in the music selection area) can be repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to more easily select his or her favorite music, thereby enhancing the convenience of the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, when the number of items to be set in the history area is small (less than 3 items), the empty area of the history area (items with high selection frequency are not arranged) The order of priority (priority) of items to be arranged in each area is defined. This priority is higher for songs that are more likely to be known by more players (for example, the theme song (opening song) of the work that became the motif of the pachinko machine 10, the ending song, the insert song, etc.). is set to By configuring in this way, even if the number of selections of songs is small, songs that are likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area, thereby enhancing convenience for the player. can.

Further, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion ends during the final round, it is determined whether or not the chorus portion is to be reproduced repeatedly according to the progress of the final round. More specifically, it is possible to end the chorus between the end of the chorus playback and the end of the final round (or the end of the period during which the ending effect can be delayed). If there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played repeatedly, if there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end in the middle (the ending effect will start in the middle of the chorus part being played), the chorus part will not be repeated. Playback is set according to the playback order of music data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the possibility that the chorus portion will not be cut off in the final round and can be reproduced in a complete form.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, each time a different item is arranged (temporarily selected) in the music selection area by the player operating the operation button 230 during the music selection period, the chorus portion of the music corresponding to the arranged item is displayed. is configured to play back. As a result, it is possible to select a song by considering not only the name of the song displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also the melody of the most characteristic chorus part of the song. Further, in the fourth control example, when a song is determined during the song selection period, the playback start position and playback start timing of the song are varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (16 rounds), at the end of the music selection period, playback is started from the beginning of the song (intro part), and the jackpots of 10 rounds and 8 rounds are played. In the case of (2), when the song selection period ends, playback is started from the A melody part of the song (that is, skipping the intro part). On the other hand, in the case of a big win with a small number of rounds (five rounds), when the player decides on a song, the song continues to be played from the chorus part that is already being played (the song selection period ends). The music is played back from the front). By configuring in this way, even in the case of a small number of rounds, the player can listen to the chorus portion for a longer time.

In the fourth control example, when there are few items to be placed in the history area (when the number of songs selected by the player at least once is less than 3), the priority definition table 222da, the data is stored in descending order of priority, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the number of vacant areas in the history area, the items arranged in the history area may be stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa in descending order of priority. With this configuration, even if the player has selected many songs, the songs that are relatively likely to be selected by the player (high priority) can be selected by a relatively small number of operations. It can be set to an arrangement that can be moved to the music selection area with .

In this fourth control example, when the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is determined, a range (history area in the item layout storage area 223aa) that can be selected with a small number of operations among the storage areas of the item layout storage area 223aa. On the other hand, among items with one or more selection counts, a maximum of three items are stored in descending order of selection counts. If the number of items arranged in the history area is less than 3, an item to be arranged in the empty area of the history area is added and set from among the items with 0 selection counts. The control is not limited to determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen. Any control that sets a predetermined number of data in a specific range of storage areas in storage means such as a RAM can be used. In other words, of the storage means, a predetermined number of data are set in the first storage area and the second storage area, and the specific condition is set in the first storage area. is stored, and other data is stored in the second storage area. Specifically, for example, a player selects one item from a plurality of items on a predetermined menu screen (for example, a game menu screen or a menu screen for selecting an effect mode in a ready-to-win effect). When a plurality of items including selectable items and unselectable items are displayed at the same time (for example, selectable items increase each time a player completes a predetermined mission (task)). It may be diverted to the case of displaying a menu with specifications that follow). In other words, for a specific display range, items that can be selected by the player are preferentially arranged, and the remaining items can be arranged in other display ranges. good. In this case, first, data corresponding to items to be displayed in a specific display range is set. Then, when a sufficient number of items to be displayed in a specific display range can be set, the remaining data are subsequently set as items to be displayed in another display range. On the other hand, if the number of items less than the number of items that can be displayed in the specific display range is selectable by the player, the items that the player cannot select as the items to be displayed in the specific display range. Data may be set so that items are displayed in a specific display range in order of priority among the items. As a method of setting the priority in this case, for example, items that are easily switched to a selectable state (items that are switched to a selectable state by completing a mission with a relatively easy difficulty) have a higher priority. can be set as

In this fourth control example, when the number of items (items selected once or more) to be placed in the history area is less than 3, the priority of the items to be additionally placed in the history area is as follows. The composition is such that the more frequently used songs (opening song (theme song), ending song, insert song, etc.) are used in the work that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the priority, but it is not limited to this. . The priority may be set arbitrarily, and for example, the higher the frequency of music used in the game on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the music played during the ready-to-win effect), the higher the priority. may Also, for example, it may be configured such that the player can set the priority during the normal game.

In the fourth control example, when the number of songs selected one or more times is small (less than three), the songs with high priority specified in the priority specification table 222da are preferentially arranged in the history area. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to counting the number of times the player selects a song during the jackpot song selection period in the song selection number storage area 223ac, the song played during the normal game (for example, played by developing into a super ready-to-win effect) It is also possible to count the number of playback times of the music played. While the number of selections by the player is small, the songs that have been played many times during the normal game are stored in the empty area of the history area (remaining storage area after storing the songs that the number of selections by the player is 1 or more). It is good also as a structure stored with respect to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to arrange in the history area the songs that the player has listened to while playing the game. In most cases when a player voluntarily selects a song, he/she selects a song that he or she has heard before, so the songs that the player has definitely heard (music that has already been played during a normal game) are stored in the history area. By arranging them, it is possible to arrange songs (menu items) that are highly likely to be selected by the player in a selectable range with a small number of operations (up to three times) on the operation buttons 230 . Therefore, convenience for the player can be further enhanced. This modification will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG.

<Modification of the fourth control example>
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a reproduction count storage area 223dd added to the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth control example. The number-of-plays-in-effects storage area 223dd is a storage area for storing, for each type of music, the number of times a song has been played back (used) in the variable display effect executed during the normal game. As shown in FIG. 170, the number-of-plays-in-effects storage area 223dd stores data indicating the number of times played (used) during the normal game in association with each type of song (song A to song Z). is configured as That is, it has the same configuration as the music selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)). The example of FIG. 170 illustrates a case where music C and music Z are played once each during the normal game, and other songs are not played.

The number of reproductions of each song stored in the number-of-reproductions-in-effects storage area 223dd is determined in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in this modified example, and the detailed mode of the variation pattern effect is determined and displayed. After the variation pattern command is set, if there is a song to be played back in the determined variation pattern effect, 1 is added to the number of playbacks of the song (see S4532 in FIG. 172). Further, the number of times of reproduction (number of times of use) of each song stored in the number-of-reproductions-in-effect storage area 223dd is referred to when setting items to be arranged in the history area in the initial layout of the music selection menu screen (Fig. 171 S5281).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modification will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 171, the details of the history area setting process 12 (S5241) in this modified example will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing history area setting processing 12 (S5241). This history area setting process 12 (S5241) is executed instead of the history area setting process (see FIG. 163) in the fourth control example. This is a process for determining items (songs) to be placed in the .

In the history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171) in the modified example of the fourth control example, the processes in S5271 to S5277 correspond to the processes in S5271 to S5277 in the history area setting process (see FIG. 163) in the fourth control example. The same processing as each processing is executed. In addition, in the history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171) in this modified example, when the process of S5274 is completed, the data in the reproduction number storage area 223dd during the effect (corresponding to the number of times each song was reproduced during the normal game) data) is read (S5281), and whether or not the number of songs that have been played back once or more during the normal game is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas in which no data has been stored in the history area in the process of S5274. It discriminates (S5282).

In the process of S5282, if it is determined that the number of songs played once or more during the normal game is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: Yes), the The data corresponding to the number of songs in the empty area of the history area are read out in descending order of the number of times of reproduction stored (S5283), and the read data are stored in the empty area of the history area in descending order of the number of times of reproduction. (S5284), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5282, if it is determined that the number of songs played once or more during the normal game is less than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: No), the number of times played during the normal game is 1 or more (S5285), all the read songs are stored in the empty area of the history area (S5286), and the process proceeds to S5275.

By executing this history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171), when the number of times the player selects a song is small, the song that the player has listened to during the normal game is arranged in the history area. be able to. Therefore, songs (items) that are highly likely to be selected by the player can be preferentially arranged in the history area, so convenience for the player can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the variable display setting process 12 (S4182) in the modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 12 (S4182). This variable display setting process 12 (S4182) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the fourth control example (and the third control example). 150), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute a variation effect (variation display effect) in the third pattern display device 81. This process is for

In each process of S4501 to S4509, S4521, and S4522 of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modification of the fourth control example, the variable display in the fourth control example (and the third control example) is performed. The same processing as each of S4501 to S4509, S4521, and S4522 of setting processing 10 (see FIG. 150) is executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modification of the fourth control example, when the process of S4504 ends, the variable display effect executed by the display variation pattern command set in the process of S4504 is executed. determines whether or not it is an effect content that accompanies the reproduction of music (S4531). In addition, in this modified example, when the super ready-to-win effect or the special ready-to-win effect is executed, a part of the music corresponding to the type of ready-to-win is reproduced.

In the processing of S4531, if it is determined that the current variable display effect is the content of the effect that accompanies the reproduction of music (S4531: Yes), the 1 is added to the number of times of playback corresponding to the music played during execution (S4532), and the process proceeds to S4521. On the other hand, in the processing of S4531, if it is determined that the current variable display effect is the effect content that does not accompany the reproduction of music (for example, the variable display effect corresponding to the variation pattern that is completely out of line) (S4531: No), The process of S4532 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4521.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth control example, when the number of songs that have been selected by the player is small (less than three), during the normal game, during the execution of the variable display effect, the playback (execution) is performed. The image corresponding to the selected song (voice effect) is preferentially arranged in the history area (menu position that can be selected with a small number of operations). With this configuration, even if the number of songs that the player has ever selected is small (less than 3), the songs that the player has listened to can be arranged in the history area. Therefore, songs (menu items) that are likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in a selectable range with a small number of operations (up to three times) on the operation buttons 230, regardless of the number of times the songs are selected. , the convenience of the player can be further enhanced.

It should be noted that in this modification, when the number of songs selected is small (the number of songs selected once or more is less than 3), the songs that have been played during the normal game in the empty area of the history area Although the corresponding images (items) are preferentially arranged, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as items to be placed in the history area, first, songs that have been played many times during the normal game are preferentially placed. may be configured such that an image corresponding to a song selected (determined) many times is arranged in an empty area. Also, for example, after arranging songs that have been selected many times by the player in the history area, regardless of whether or not there is an empty area in the history area, an image corresponding to the song that has been selected many times may be displayed. Subsequently, images corresponding to up to three (predetermined upper limit number) music pieces may be arranged in descending order of the number of times reproduced during the normal game.

In the above fourth control example and its modification, when the player temporarily selects random music and when the player decides on random music selection, the music for the music selection period is played back, and a random lottery is performed. Although it is configured such that it is impossible to identify what the music determined by is until the music selection period elapses, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the point when the player decides on the random selection of music, the configuration may be such that the reproduction of the chorus of the music determined by random lottery is started. Further, for example, at the time when the player temporarily selects a random song, the song to be played may be determined by lottery, and loop playback of the chorus portion may be started in the same manner as other items. With this configuration, the player can identify the music determined by lottery during the music selection period, so if the player does not like the music determined by lottery, he or she will have the opportunity to reselect another item. can give. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further enhanced. In these cases, each time the player tentatively selects or determines a random song selection during one song selection period, the song selection may be re-determined by a random lottery. The music to be reproduced may be fixed to the music first determined by lottery in one music selection period. Each time the random music selection is tentatively selected or determined, the random selection of music is re-determined by a random lottery, so that during the music selection period, the random music selection is provisionally selected or determined until the desired music is reproduced. A player may be given the option to repeat. Therefore, whether or not the desired music can be reproduced by random music selection can be one of the pleasures during the music selection period, and the game during the jackpot can be played, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. . On the other hand, if the music played when the random music selection is determined is fixed to the music first determined by lottery in one music selection period, the probability variable jackpot will be generated at the time of playback. The chance of whether or not the determined “music a” is determined by lottery can be limited to once per jackpot. Therefore, even if the ``music a'' is not reproduced when the random music selection is tentatively selected or determined, the player can be made to think that he/she just happened to lose the lottery, so that the player's expectation for the definite variable jackpot is maintained. can be made

In the above-described fourth control example and its modification, the chorus portion of the song provisionally selected during the song selection period is loop-played. It can be set arbitrarily. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the volume of the music played based on the provisional music selection is different from the volume of the music played after the music selection period has elapsed. For example, by reducing the volume of the temporarily selected music and increasing the volume of the music reproduced after the music selection period has passed, the player can listen to the music selected by the player at a higher volume. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who listens to the music feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Also, by increasing the volume of the temporarily selected music, the player can more clearly recognize the melody of the chorus of the music temporarily selected during the music selection period. Therefore, it is possible to more easily determine whether or not the song is a favorite song, so that the player's convenience when selecting a song can be improved.

In the fourth control example and its modification example, in a part of the case where the pseudo small round effect is determined, the song is played in a different playback mode from the playback mode of the song corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect. By reproducing, it is possible to detect in advance whether or not the pseudo small round effect is being executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, by setting part of the display mode to a mode corresponding to the number of rounds different from the number of rounds notified by the pseudo-small-rounds effect instead of the playback mode, whether or not the pseudo-small-rounds effect is being executed. A configuration may be provided in which the player can perceive whether or not before the pseudo small round effect ends (before the continuous effect is executed). Specifically, for example, the character displayed in the small area Ds2 in the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be different according to the number of rounds, and when the pseudo small round effect is decided, the pseudo small round effect is basically performed. A character corresponding to the number of rounds notified by is displayed, but at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%), the character displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed as a character corresponding to the actual number of rounds. may be By constructing in this way, the third symbol display device 81 can be used to pay attention to the game during the big win.

In the fourth control example and its modification, when the pseudo small round effect is executed, the reproduction mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect is set, or the actual number of rounds is set. Although it is determined by lottery whether to set the reproduction mode of the corresponding music, this control is not limited to the case where the pseudo small round effect is executed. In the case of transitioning to an advantageous state (or it is decided to shift in the future), the production to be executed when temporarily shifting to a disadvantageous state (or it is decided to shift in the future) It can be applied as long as it executes an effect that is difficult to distinguish. Specifically, for example, in the probability variable jackpot of the even-numbered pattern notification and the normal jackpot of the even-numbered pattern notification, the opening performance of the jackpot and the opening music are set to be basically the same display mode and sound mode. . On the other hand, in the case of a probability variable jackpot of odd-numbered pattern notification, a mode different from the display mode and sound mode of the opening in the normal jackpot of even-numbered pattern notification is set as the opening performance of the jackpot or the music for the opening. In this case, in a part (for example, at a rate of 10%) of the probability variable jackpot of the even number pattern notification, the same music as the probability variation jackpot of the odd number pattern notification is reproduced as the opening music. may be configured. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player perceive that even-numbered symbols have been reported as a big win, but in reality, the big win was a variable probability. Therefore, since the voice mode during the opening period can be listened to more intensively, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, instead of or in addition to varying the opening music, the display mode of the opening production is changed to odd number patterns in a part (for example, 10% ratio) of the case where the even number pattern notification becomes a definite variable jackpot. The configuration may be such that the display mode is set to be the same as in the case of a variable probability jackpot of the notification. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while paying more attention to the display mode during the opening period. Further, these modifications are not limited to the display mode and sound mode during the opening period. This control may be applied to the display mode or sound mode in a predetermined round during the jackpot, or this control may be applied to the display mode or sound mode in a predetermined interval period, This control may be applied to the display mode or audio mode in the ending period.

In the above-described fourth control example and its modification, the pseudo-small-round lottery table 222cb is used to simultaneously determine whether the pseudo-small-round effect can be executed and the lottery mode of the music reproduction mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo small round effect is determined, the playback mode corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect is set as the playback mode of the music, or the playback mode corresponding to the original number of rounds is set. Alternatively, a dedicated data table for drawing lots may be provided separately.

In the fourth control example and its modification, when the pseudo small round effect is executed, the reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds notified in the pseudo small round effect is set, or the original number of rounds is set. Although it is configured to select by lottery whether to set the reproduction mode, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo-small-round effect is executed, the configuration may be such that the reproduction mode corresponding to the original number of rounds is always set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the user to more carefully check the playback mode of the music.

In the above-described third, fourth control examples, and modified examples of the fourth control example, even when a song determined by a random lottery executed when the player decides to randomly select a song is reproduced, the number of times of song selection Although the number of times of reproduction stored in the storage area 223ac is incremented by 1, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a piece of music reproduced by randomly selecting a piece of music may be excluded from counting the number of times of reproduction. With this configuration, it is possible to count only the number of selections of songs voluntarily selected by the player, so that items that are more likely to be selected by the player are placed as items to be placed in the history area. can be made

In the above second and third control examples, during the music selection period (first round), the music dedicated to the music selection period is reproduced, and from the end of the first round, the music selected by the player is reproduced. , but not limited to these. For example, every time the player operates (presses) the up button UB or the down button DB on the music selection menu screen (every time the lit-up display mode of the item changes), the chorus of the item newly arranged in the music selection area is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which a portion is reproduced. By configuring in this way, not only the title of the song (song name), but also the voice mode of the most characteristic chorus part of the song can be taken into consideration, so that the song to be played during the big win can be determined. Music can be made easier to select. In this case, if the current jackpot is a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, a jackpot of 5 rounds), the music is reproduced as it is from the continuation of the reproduction position when the player selects by pressing the center button CB. may be configured to continue. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more effectively reproduce the music by using the remaining period of the jackpot in which the number of rounds is small.

In each of the above control examples, the player can select the production mode (type of music to be played) of the audio production from among the entertainment productions executed during the predetermined period (during the variable probability state or during the jackpot). However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be selected.

In each of the above control examples, a music data group is provided for each type of music to be reproduced, and one music is reproduced by reproducing each data constituting the music data group in a predetermined order. , but not limited to these. A configuration may be adopted in which only one piece of data capable of reproducing one piece of music from start to finish is provided for the number of pieces of music. In this case, the data structure may be configured so that the reproduction position can be identified, and the reproduction position can be changed at least on a part-by-part basis. By configuring in this way, as in the first control example described above, it is possible to start the reproduction of the music from different reproduction positions depending on how the music was selected. Further, as in the above-described second control example, the reproduction position can be varied so that the possibility that the chorus portion is reproduced during the round period of the final round of the big win increases.

In each of the above control examples, only the items to be arranged in the music selection area are determined by random lottery, and the other items (items to be arranged in menu positions other than the history area) are predetermined based on the items to be arranged in the music selection area. Although it has been configured to arrange them in the order (alphabetical order) specified, it is not limited to this. For example, other items may also be determined by random lottery.

In each of the above control examples, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items that are frequently selected by the player are arranged in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations, and one item selected by random lottery is placed in the music selection area. In this configuration, items other than these are arranged in a predetermined order based on the items arranged in the music selection area, but this is not the only option. For example, the player may freely customize the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen by operating the operation buttons 230 or the like. By configuring in this way, the music that the player wants to select can be arranged in advance in positions where the player can select within a range where the number of operations is small, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily conjectured that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible.

For example, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, one or a plurality of actuating winning holes are provided to trigger the start of a jackpot when a game ball enters, but the trigger to start a jackpot is It is not limited to this. For example, an operation means such as a switch is provided within reach of the player's hand, and a big win is started when a specific operation is performed on the operation means after a special pattern lottery results in a big win. may be With such a configuration, a big win can be easily started, so that the player is discouraged if the game ball is not entered into the operating winning hole even though the game ball is shot aiming at the operating winning hole. You can prevent it from being lost.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 185. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the state shifts to a big win standby state, and a game ball is entered into the operation winning hole 660 during the big win standby state. It was configured to start a jackpot when Also, the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be provided only at one place on the upper right side of the game board 13 . That is, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot starts unless the game ball is shot toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and entered into the operation winning hole 660. It was configured to not be.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured to provide a plurality of operation winning holes, and the type (advantage degree) of the jackpot that is started according to the type of the operation winning hole won in the jackpot standby state It was configured to be different. More specifically, it is configured to provide four operating winning ports, ie, MAX operating winning port 6710a, normal operating winning ports 6710b and 6710c, and special MAX operating winning port 6720, and in the jackpot standby state, MAX operating winning port 6710a , and special MAX operation winning opening 6720, while a jackpot with 16 rounds is started, normal operation winning opening 6710b, 6710c When a game ball enters the game ball, a big hit of 4 rounds is started. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, if a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a to start a big hit, the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720. Since it is possible to form an easy state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the next big hit waiting state. Therefore, in the two big wins, the number of rounds is continuously large (that is, the game is advantageous to the player), resulting in a 16-round big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 , the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 173, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment, below the variable display device unit 80, game balls are distributed to either the MAX operation winning opening 6710a or the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c. A sorting device 6700 is provided. This sorting device 6700 is provided with an opening on the right side in front view into which game balls can enter, and an operation gate 6700a for opening and closing the opening. This operating gate 6700a is normally in a closed state (closed position) in which game balls cannot enter the sorting device 6700, and enters the sorting device 6700 only during the jackpot waiting state. It becomes an open state (open position) in which the ball is possible.

As shown in FIG. 173, inside the sorting device 6700, there are a guide channel 6700b into which a game ball entered from an opening can flow down, and a game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 6700b into three operating prizes. A 3-hole crown 6710 is provided for randomly distributing to one of the openings (MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning opening 6710b, 6710c). When the ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, a jackpot of 16 rounds starts, while when the ball enters one of the normal operation winning openings 6710b, 6710c in the jackpot waiting state, A jackpot with 4 rounds is started.

The 3-hole croon 6710 is made up of a known croon means, and has three actuating winning holes on the bottom portion of the mortar-shaped inner wall. The game ball which flowed down the guidance channel 6700b and flowed into the 3-hole croon 6710 rolls on the mortar-shaped inner wall for a predetermined period, and then enters one of the operation winning openings. In addition, the rate at which the game ball that has flowed into the 3-hole croon 6710 enters each operation winning hole is equal. That is, the probability (percentage) of the game ball entering the sorting device 6700 entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a and the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c is 1/3. In other words, the probability of a 16-round big win (probability of being distributed to the MAX operation winning port 6710a) when a special symbol lottery wins a big win is 1/3, and the probability of a 4-round big win (normal operation winning a prize) is 1/3. The probability of being assigned to either of the mouths 6710b and 6710c) is 2/3.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 of the eighth embodiment, a special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is provided in the lower left direction with respect to the sorting device 6700 when viewed from the front. This special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is a kind of operation winning opening in which the start of the 16-round jackpot is set by entering a game ball in the jackpot standby state. That is, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is an operation winning opening having the same function as the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. As shown in FIG. 173, this special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is provided with a non-electric accessory 6720a capable of opening and closing the special MAX operation winning opening 6720.

The non-electric accessory 6720a is connected to an opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside the MAX operation winning port 6710a, and while the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed, the MAX operation winning port 6710a is opened. It is configured such that the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened mechanically (without using electrical control) when a game ball enters (a game ball passes through the opening mechanism). In addition, the opening mechanism has only the function of opening the non-electrical accessory 6720a, and in the state where the non-electrical accessory 6720a is opened, the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. Even if (the game ball has passed through the opening mechanism), the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a does not change (the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed).

In addition, the non-electric accessory 6720a is mechanically opened by the game ball passing through a closing mechanism (not shown) provided inside the special MAX operation winning port 6720 during the open state. closed (without electrical control). Note that the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is different from the other operation winning openings, and is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view can enter. there is That is, in order to make the game ball enter the other operation winning openings (MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning openings 6710b, 6710c), hit right while the operation gate 6700a is open. On the other hand, in order to enter the game ball into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, it is sufficient to hit left while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open.

In addition, as described above, the non-electric accessory 6720a is normally closed, and is opened only when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. In other words, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed, the jackpot hits, and when the game ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot game (player A jackpot of a type that is advantageous to the player) is executed, and the special MAX operation winning port 6720 can be opened. Therefore, if the game ball does not enter the special MAX operation winning port 6720 until the next big hit (if the game ball does not pass through the closing mechanism), left-handed in the next big hit waiting state. Just by doing so, it is possible to easily enter a game ball into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 and start a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player). In the eighth embodiment, as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, either the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot or It is set according to whether it is a normal jackpot). That is, even if the lottery of the special pattern continues to be lost, the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues until the lottery of the special pattern ends at least 100 times, so the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640. 640a becomes easier to open. For this reason, at least until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times, the game is played aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right (the player does not hit to the left), so the jackpot ends. After that, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game ball from immediately entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and closing the non-electric accessory 6720a. As a result, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a and a big win is started, a state can be formed in which it is easy for the player to continuously win the big win of 16 rounds, which is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, above the operating gate 6700a, a rectifying device 6800 for lengthening the interval between game balls reaching the sorting device 6700 is provided. Although the details will be described later, the rectifying device 6800 periodically shifts between a stationary state in which the game balls that have arrived are stationary in the device, and a flowing state in which the stationary game balls flow down toward the sorting device 6700. switch. The cycle of this switching is set to be a period during which one game ball can flow down in 5 seconds. After a game ball enters the sorting device 6700 through the opening, an interval of 5 seconds can be provided until the next game ball reaches the sorting device 6700 . On the other hand, the sorting device 6700 is controlled such that the operating gate 6700a is closed when a game ball enters one of the operating winning holes. In addition, the internal structure of the sorting device 6700 is configured so that the period until the game ball entering the sorting device 6700 enters one of the operation winning holes is about 4 seconds. ing. In other words, since the period from when one game ball enters the distribution device 6700 to when the operation gate 6700a is closed is less than 5 seconds, the rectification device 6800 causes the distribution device 6700 to By setting the shortest arrival interval of the game ball to 5 seconds, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from entering the sorting device 6700 during one jackpot waiting state.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of game balls can enter the distribution device 6700 without providing the rectifying device 6800, it is possible for game balls to enter a plurality of different operating winning holes in one jackpot waiting state. have a nature. That is, after one game ball has entered either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c, there is a possibility that another game ball has entered the MAX operating winning opening 6710a. In this case, although the 4-round jackpot corresponding to the normal operation winning opening is executed, the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened (becomes a state in which it is possible to enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 ), the number of cases in which a ball can be entered into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 increases, which may be excessively advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, a rectifying device 6800 is provided upstream of the opening of the sorting device 6700, so that a game ball that can enter the sorting device 6700 in the standby state for one big win. Limited to one (1 game ball enters the distribution device 6700, enters one of the operation winning openings, and the operation gate 6700a is closed). the next game ball is prevented from reaching). ), the non-electric accessory 6720a can be opened with a probability (ratio) of 1/3 each time. Therefore, the frequency of opening the non-electric accessary product 6720a is increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous, thereby preventing an unexpected disadvantage in the hall. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, details of the operation of rectifier 6800 will be described. FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing a case where a game ball reaches the stagnant straightening device 6800 in a state where the operation gate 6700a of the sorting device 6700 is open. As shown in FIG. 174(a), the rectifying device 6800 has a vertical flow path that allows game balls to flow down to the sorting device 6700, and is provided in the middle of the flow path to close the flow path. and a gate guide valve 6800a that can be opened. In the stationary state of the rectifier 6800, since the gate induction valve 6800a is closed, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the rectifier 6800. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 174(a), the game ball that has reached the straightening device 6800 is blocked from flowing down by the gate guide valve 6800a, and is stopped above the gate guide valve 6800a. In addition, since the upper part of the gate induction valve 6800a is configured to have a width that allows only one game ball to be parked, if another game ball reaches the rectifier 6800 while one game ball is parked, Also, it does not stay above the gate guide valve 6800a, but flows down below the game board 13 through the flow path on the right side of the straightening device 6800. FIG. As a result, when the gate induction valve 6800a is opened, two or more game balls can be prevented from flowing down toward the distribution device 6700 at the same time. It is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from entering the device 6700 .

FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing a case where the gate guide valve 6800a is opened while the game ball is parked above the gate guide valve 6800a. As shown in FIG. 174(b), when the gate guide valve 6800a is opened, the game ball stopped above the gate guide valve 6800a falls downward. As a result, the game ball enters the distribution device 6700 when the operation gate 6700a is open. As shown in FIG. 174(c), the opening/closing period of the gate valve 6800a is set so that the gate valve 6800a closes immediately after the game ball passes through the gate valve 6800a. More specifically, gate guide valve 6800a is configured to cycle between a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds. As a result, only a maximum of one game ball can be allowed to flow down toward the sorting device 6700 per five seconds. It is possible to more reliably prevent other game balls from entering the sorting device 6700 for about 4 seconds until the operation gate 6700a is closed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, details of each operation winning opening will be described. FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is rolling on the inner wall of the 3-hole croon 6710. FIG. As shown in FIG. 175(a), the 3-hole crew 6710 provided inside the sorting device 6700 has, at its approximate center, a MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c. There are two operative winning ports. When the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 16 rounds, while when the ball enters either the normal operation winning opening 6710b or 6710c, the round of the jackpot The number is set to 4 rounds. Therefore, when a game ball enters the sorting device 6700 in the jackpot standby state, among the three operating winning ports provided in the 3-hole croon 6710, the MAX for the advantageous 16 round jackpot It is possible to realize a playability that makes the player expect the ball to enter the operation winning hole 6710a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the MAX operation winning opening 6710a and the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 are mechanically connected. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(b), the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, and the opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside the MAX operation winning opening 6710a is opened. When it passes, the non-electric accessory 6720a associated with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opens in conjunction with the passage of the game ball. As a result, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is kept open until the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 . Therefore, if the jackpot is won before the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, and the state shifts to the jackpot standby state, it is easy to aim at the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 by hitting left. A 16-round jackpot with a large number of rounds (ie, an advantage to the player) can be initiated. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high possibility of successively winning advantageous jackpot types, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, only the number of rounds for the big win is determined according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the game ball entered during the waiting state for the big win, and the game state after the end of the big win is determined according to the type. It has a configuration that is predetermined according to the type (whether it will be a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot is determined at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed). Therefore, the game state after the 16-round jackpot executed by entering the MAX operation winning port 6710a (that is, with the non-electric accessory 6720a opened) is a variable probability state and a time saving state. There are both possibilities. In other words, even if a relatively disadvantageous normal jackpot is won, if the game ball can be entered into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the number of rounds will be increased when the jackpot is won until the time-saving state elapses. is set to 16 rounds continues, so when the time-saving jackpot is entered into either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c (when the non-electric accessory 6720a is not opened) In comparison, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the lottery result in the time-saving state will result in a big win. That is, even in the same time-saving state, it is possible to vary the expectation of winning the big prize according to the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present eighth embodiment, a mechanism is employed in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened by one game ball entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. The number of winnings to the MAX operation winning opening 6710a required until the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened can be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, the number of winnings for the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 required until the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the open state is closed can be arbitrarily determined.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a characteristic display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending effect of the big win when the big win ends with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opened. It should be noted that the case where the jackpot ends with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 being opened basically means that the game ball entered the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state. This is the case when the 16-round jackpot has ended. In addition, even though the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is open, the player makes a mistake in the shooting direction, etc., and hits to the right in the jackpot standby state and goes to the sorting device 6700. Even when the ball is entered and entered into one of the operation winning openings provided in the 3-hole croon 6710, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened at the end of the big hit. Also in this case, a similar ending effect is executed.

In the ending effect when the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is open, the characters "Enter the MAX zone!" !” is displayed. According to these display contents, by winning a jackpot while the player is hitting to the right, the game ball is entered into the special MAX operation winning port 6720 and a 16-round jackpot (MAX jackpot). can be easily understood. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened will be referred to as "MAX zone".

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), a display mode (standby state effect) during the jackpot standby state when the jackpot is won during the MAX zone will be described. As shown in FIG. 176(b), when a jackpot is won in the MAX zone, a display area HR5 in which characters "Aim for MAX with a left-hand shot!" is displayed above the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is formed, and below the display region HR5, a display region HR6 is formed in which display content is displayed in which an arrow image is directed to an image simulating a special MAX operation winning opening 6720. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to aim at the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 by hitting to the left instead of aiming at the sorting device 6700 by hitting to the right in this jackpot waiting state. can be understood.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177(a), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the number of times of time saving ends in the MAX zone (short time period has passed) will be described. As shown in FIG. 177 (a), when the number of times of working hours has passed in the MAX zone, the characters "MAX zone fall pinch!" A display area HR7 is formed in which characters such as "If you win, MAX is confirmed!?" are displayed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone may end. Conversely, even if a short period of time has passed and the game has shifted to a relatively disadvantageous game state (normal game state) in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left, the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. If it is possible to enter a game ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and win a big win before the ball is played, an advantageous 16-round big win is executed just by entering the ball into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720. - 特許庁Since the benefit of the MAX zone that the game is played can be received as it is, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game when the time saving state ends. That is, since it is possible to make the player think to continue the game at least until the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 and the MAX zone ends, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. can be improved. In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is left-handed while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the game ball is sent to the non-electric accessory 6720a at a rate of 1 in about 5 game balls. It is configured to be able to enter the ball. On the other hand, since only 1 out of 10 game balls enter the first ball entrance 64, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is open and left-handed, , The number of times the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is almost one or less. Therefore, it is very unlikely that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 first while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, and that the lottery based on the ball entered wins a big prize. occurs, the player can have a greater sense of accomplishment and satisfaction. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 177(b) is a diagram showing a case where the MAX zone ends (when the non-electric accessory 6720a closes) by entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the MAX zone. As shown in FIG. 177 (b), a short period of time has passed in the MAX zone, and the game ball is entered into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 by hitting left to execute the special symbol lottery. Then, the display content of the display area HR7 is changed to "Fall!!", and the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone has ended.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened and left-handed, the shot game balls enter at a rate of about 1 out of 5. However, the rate at which game balls enter may be determined arbitrarily. By increasing the ratio of game balls entering (for example, the ratio of 1/3), when the non-electric accessory 6720a is open and the jackpot is achieved, the special MAX operation winning with a smaller number of shots Since the ball can be entered into the mouth 6720, the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, by lowering the ratio of game balls entering (for example, the ratio of 1/20), when the number of times of working hours has passed with the non-electric accessory 6720 opened, special MAX operation The state in which the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened because the possibility that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 before the ball enters the winning opening 6720 and the special symbol lottery can be executed increases. You can increase your chances of hitting the jackpot. Furthermore, it may be configured such that a hall clerk or the like can vary the ratio of the ball entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 when the ball is hit left-handed. That is, it may be configured such that it is possible to select whether to set so that the game can be played efficiently or to increase the possibility of winning a big win with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720a opened. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize specifications that match the management policy of each hall.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 and 179. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first embodiment. ing. First, with reference to FIG. 178, the first winning type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, since it is the same as that of ROM202 in 1st Embodiment except the defined content of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b, it abbreviate|omits about the detailed description here.

As shown in FIG. 178, the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment defines two types of jackpots, "jackpot A12" and "jackpot B12", as jackpot types. In the eighth embodiment, a common jackpot type is selected regardless of whether the lottery is for the first special symbol or the lottery for the second special symbol. More specifically, when the first special pattern or the second special pattern lottery results in a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 64", the jackpot type A “jackpot A12” is determined (see 202b1 in FIG. 178). This "jackpot A12" is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state. As described above, the number of rounds varies according to the type of the winning opening in the jackpot standby state. More specifically, when the ball enters the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c, while the 4-round jackpot is achieved, the ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operating winning opening 6720. In that case, it will be a jackpot of 16 rounds.

Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 65 counter values "0 to 64" are associated with "jackpot A12", so a special symbol lottery , the ratio of determining "jackpot A12" is 65% (65/100).

On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "65 to 99", the jackpot type is " A jackpot B12” is determined (see 202b2 in FIG. 178). This "jackpot B12" is a jackpot type that is set to a time-saving state in which the number of times of time-saving is 100 times as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, since the game state is more disadvantageous than the variable probability state, the "jackpot B12" is more disadvantageous to the player than the "jackpot A12". It should be noted that the number of rounds varies according to the type of the winning operation winning hole, as in the case of "jackpot A12".

Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values of "65 to 99" are associated with the "jackpot B12", so a special symbol lottery , the ratio of determining "jackpot B12" is 35% (35/100).

Thus, in the eighth embodiment, only the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type, and the number of rounds is determined by the number of rounds in which the game ball enters (first) in the jackpot standby state. It is configured to be determined according to the type of the operated winning hole that has been played. That is, the degree of advantage of the jackpot game is configured to vary according to the type of the operating winning hole into which the game ball entered in the jackpot standby state. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the operation winning hole into which the game ball enters when the big win standby state is entered, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided within the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 179, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)) in that a flag 223da in the MAX zone is added, and The difference is that the level counter 223h is deleted.

The MAX zone flag 223da is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the MAX zone (that is, whether the non-electric accessory 6720a is open). If this MAX zone flag 223da is on, it indicates that it is in the MAX zone (the non-electric accessory 6720a is open), and if it is off, it is not in the MAX zone (the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed). This MAX zone flag 223da is set to ON when winning to the MAX operating winning port 6710a is detected in the jackpot standby state (see S40003 in FIG. 185), and detecting winning to the special MAX operating winning port 6720 is set to off (see S40005 and 40009 in FIG. 185). When an ending command is received from the main controller 110 during the ending period of the jackpot, the state of the MAX zone flag 223da is referred to, and a normal ending effect is executed or an ending effect indicating the MAX zone is executed. (See S4493-S4495 in FIG. 184).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 180, the special symbol variation process 12 (S131) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 12 (S131) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the display mode in the first design display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third design by the third design display device 81, and the like.

Among the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, in each processing of S201 to S223, each processing of S201 to S223 of the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22) The same processing is performed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S220 is completed, the operation gate 6700a is set to open (S251), and the process proceeds to S223. By setting the opening of the operation gate 6700a, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the sorting device 6700 by hitting to the right in the jackpot waiting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, startup processing 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This start-up process 12 is a process that is executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. This is a process that is started along with S901 to S912 and S914 to S917 of the startup process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment correspond to S901 to S912 and S912 of the startup process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. , and the same processes as those of S914 to S917 are executed. In the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S912 is completed, the start of driving of the gate guide valve 6800a is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S914. When the gate induction valve 6800a starts to be driven, the gate induction valve 6800a cyclically repeats a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds until the power is cut off. As a result, the interval at which the game ball that has reached the straightening device 6800 reaches the sorting device 6700 can be set to an interval of 5 seconds or more, so that one game ball is sent to the sorting device 6700 in one jackpot waiting state. During about 4 seconds until the game ball enters one of the operation gates (the operation gate 6700a is closed) after entering the ball, another game ball enters the sorting device 6700 You can prevent it from hitting the ball. Therefore, when the non-electric role 6720a is closed and the jackpot is reached, the rate of shifting to the MAX zone based on the ball entering the MAX operation winning port 6710a (non-electric role 6720a is opened) can be maintained at 1/3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole from excessively shifting to the MAX zone and giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182, main processing 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This main process 12 is a process that is executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and performs main control of the game in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. It is a process for execution.

S1001 to S1003 and S1005 to S1016 of the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment correspond to S1001 to S1003 and S1005 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1016 is executed. In addition, in the main processing 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, when the processing of S1003 is completed, the jackpot start processing 12 is executed instead of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31, S1004) in the first embodiment. (S1061), and the process proceeds to S1005. The details of this jackpot start process 12 (S1061) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing jackpot start processing 12 (S1061). This jackpot start process 12 (S1061) is a process that is executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a process for starting a jackpot based on the ball entering the operating winning hole. is. Of the jackpot start processing 12 (S1061) in the eighth embodiment, in each of S1101, S1102, and S1104, each of S1101, S1102, and S1104 of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment The same processing as the processing is executed.

Also, in the jackpot start process 12 (see FIG. 183) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S1102 ends (S1102: Yes), next, the operation gate 6700a is set to close (S1121), and the operation that detects the winning A winning hole type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the winning hole type is set (S1122). The winning hole type command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) executed by the MPU 201, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning hole type command, it updates the flag 223da in the MAX zone according to the type of the operating winning hole notified by the command. As a result, the mode of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot can be set according to the state of the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (whether or not it is in the MAX zone).

Also, when the processing of S1122 is finished, next, the start of the jackpot of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the operation winning hole where the winning is detected is set (S1123). More specifically, when the winning to either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c is detected, while executing the start of the 4 round jackpot, the operating winning opening for MAX 6710a or the operating winning opening for special MAX When winning either of 6720 is detected, the start of the 16-round jackpot is set. When the process of S1123 is completed, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S1124), and the process proceeds to S1104.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 184, the winning-related process 12 (S4391) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 12 (S4391) is a process executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to the process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command.

Of the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, each process of S4401 to S4409 is the same as each process of S4401 to S4409 of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. Also, in the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4407: No), then, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a winning mouth type command (S4491). : Yes), a winning hole type command process for executing control according to the type of the activated winning hole notified by the command is executed (S4492), and this process ends. The details of this winning hole type command process (S4492) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4491, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the win type command (S4491: No), the process proceeds to S4409. In the processing of S4409, if it is determined that an ending command is included in the unprocessed commands received from main controller 110 (S4409: Yes), then whether or not the MAX zone flag 223da is ON. (S4493), if it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is ON (S4493: Yes), it means that the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, probability variable set after the end of the jackpot By winning the jackpot again during the state or the time saving state, it means that it is possible to enter the special MAX operation winning port 6720 and start the advantageous 16 round jackpot, so the MAX zone Execution of the ending effect (see FIG. 176(a)) is set (S4494), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4493, when it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is off (S4493: No), a normal ending effect is set (S4495), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, details of the winning hole type command process (S4492) will be described. This winning hole type command process (S4492) is, as described above, a process for executing control according to the type of the operating winning hole notified by the winning hole type command received from main controller 110. FIG.

In this winning hole type command process (see FIG. 185), first, it is determined whether or not the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S40001). : Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the command for winning prize type received this time is a command indicating the operation winning prize opening for MAX 6710a (S40002). In the process of S40002, if it is determined that the command indicates the MAX operation winning opening 6710a (S40002: Yes), it means that the game ball entered the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, Since it means that the game ball has passed through the opening mechanism for opening the non-electric role 6720a (the non-electric role 6720a has been released), the flag 223da in the MAX zone is set to ON (S40003), End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40002, if it is determined that the winning hole type command received this time is not a command indicating the MAX operating winning hole 6710a (S40002: No), then the special MAX operating winning hole 6720 is indicated. It is determined whether it is a command (S40004), and if it is determined that it is a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (S40004: Yes), the ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 Since it means that the game ball passes through the closing mechanism (the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed), the MAX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S40004, if it is determined that it is not a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (S40004: No), the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a is not switched, so it is left as it is. End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S40001, if it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is turned off (S40001: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 has been received. It is determined (S40006), and if it is determined that it is a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (S40006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40007). . In the process of S40007, when it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40007: Yes), in a state other than the jackpot standby state, the ball enters the open special MAX operation winning opening 6720. Since it means that the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed, the execution of the fall effect (see FIG. 177(b)) is set (S40008). Next, the in-MAX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40009), and this processing ends. This allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone has ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40006, it is determined that the command is not a winning hole type command indicating the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 (the winning hole type command indicates either the MAX operation winning hole 6710a or the normal operation winning hole 6710b or 6710c). If it is determined (S40006: No), the distribution device 6700 is not in the jackpot standby state (the operation gate 6700a is closed and the game ball cannot enter the distribution device 6700). This means that a game ball has entered the inside, and there is a possibility that the operation gate 6700a has failed or some kind of fraud has occurred. End this process. In addition, in the processing of S40007, when it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is off (S40007: No), the game ball is special even though the non-electric accessory 6720a should be closed. It means that the ball has entered the MAX operation winning opening 6720, and there is a possibility that a malfunction such as a failure of the non-electric accessory 6720a has occurred, so the process is shifted to S40010 and an error notification is set. and terminate this process.

By executing this winning hole type command process (see FIG. 185), it is possible to appropriately update the MAX zone flag 223da in accordance with the type of the operating winning hole in which winning is detected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the degree of advantage (jackpot type) of the jackpot game to be executed (determined) varies depending on the type of the activated winning hole into which the ball is entered in the jackpot standby state. It is configured. That is, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the jackpot standby state, a relatively advantageous 16-round jackpot is executed, while the normal operation winning opening 6710b, Entering 6710c executes a relatively unfavorable 4-round jackpot. Of the four operation winning openings, three operating winning openings for MAX operation winning opening 6710a, normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c are provided inside distribution device 6700, and enter inside distribution device 6700. It is configured such that the balled game balls are evenly distributed with a probability (proportion) of 1/3. That is, when a game ball enters the sorting device 6700 in the jackpot standby state, the 16-round jackpot hits at a rate of 1/3 (that is, the ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a), and the rate is 2/3. 4 rounds will be a big hit (that is, the ball will enter either of the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c). As a result, it is possible to realize a game property that makes players expect to be allocated to the MAX operation winning port 6710a, so that the player's interest in the game in the jackpot standby state can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, which is normally closed, is opened by entering the game ball into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. Configure. The open state of this special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is maintained until a game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 next time. Here, since the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is arranged in the left channel in the game board 13, between the probability variable state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, and the time saving state (that is, the game by right hitting ), the game ball will not enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and the non-electric accessory 6720a will not be closed. Therefore, if you win the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A12) and enter the MAX operation winning port 6710a in the jackpot standby state, 16 rounds jackpot will be executed, and if the next jackpot Since the ball can be entered into the MAX operation winning hole 6720, it is possible to provide the game property that it is confirmed that the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player will be executed in succession with two jackpots. . On the other hand, when the normal jackpot (jackpot B12) is won and the ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a, the next jackpot is also a 16-round jackpot due to the jackpot while the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of playing the game while strongly hoping for a big win again during the time saving state. In this way, the game characteristics after the end of the jackpot are differentiated depending on whether the ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a in the jackpot waiting state of the variable probability jackpot or the jackpot waiting state of the normal jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, by providing a 3-hole crown 6710 inside the distribution device 6700, the game balls are randomly distributed to the three operating winning openings, but the game balls are randomly distributed. The configuration for is not limited to this. Any configuration can be adopted as long as the configuration can randomly distribute game balls to a plurality of operation winning holes.

In the eighth embodiment, control is performed so that only one game ball can enter the sorting device 6700 in one jackpot standby state, but conditions (for example, jackpot type and jackpot standby state) The number of game balls that can be entered into the sorting device 6700 may be varied according to the game state at the time of transition to , the number of special symbol lotteries at the time of winning the jackpot, etc.). When more game balls can enter, the possibility of entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a and opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 increases, so for the player Since the player can be expected to move to the MAX zone more strongly, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, game balls entered into the sorting device 6700 are randomly sorted to one of the three operating winning holes, but it is not always necessary to randomly sort them. For example, it may be configured such that the operation winning openings to which the game balls are distributed are switched in a predetermined order each time the jackpot standby state is entered. By configuring in this way, when the operation winning opening to be distributed next time is the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until a big win is achieved. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the MAX operation winning opening 6710a has a role as an operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot, and a role of opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. It is not limited. For example, an opening mechanism for opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 with respect to the normal operation winning opening 6710b may be provided. By configuring in this way, when a relatively unfavorable jackpot (4-round jackpot) is executed, the special MAX operation winning port 6720 opens and becomes an advantageous state, so even if it is a disadvantageous jackpot Also, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game. Furthermore, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot, it is strongly desired that the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is kept open and the time-saving number of times is 100 times, and the jackpot again becomes a jackpot and wins the 16-round jackpot. You can ask them to play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game. In addition to the operation winning opening, a dedicated ball entrance for opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 may be provided. In this case, the dedicated ball entrance for opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 does not necessarily have to be provided inside the sorting device 6700, for example, it may be provided inside the specific winning opening 65a. .

In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a in the jackpot standby state, it always becomes a jackpot of 16 rounds, while when a game ball enters the normal operation winning ports 6710b and 6710c, there are always 4 rounds. Although it was set as the structure which becomes a big hit, it is not restricted to this. For example, according to the type of jackpot, the distribution may be made different between the operation winning opening in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds and the operation winning opening in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds. That is, in addition to the case of entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, even when the ball enters the normal operation winning opening 6710b, the jackpot type in which a 16-round jackpot is set, A jackpot type in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds even if it is distributed to the operating winning port, and a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds regardless of which operating winning port in the distribution device 6700 is distributed. It may be configured to provide a jackpot type.

In the eighth embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the type of the jackpot, and only the number of rounds of the jackpot is set according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the game ball enters. However, it is not limited to the number of rounds of the jackpot that can be varied depending on the type of the operating prize opening. It may be configured to be set accordingly. Specifically, for example, when the ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, instead of or in addition to setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to 16 rounds , It may be configured such that the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the variable probability state. In addition, when the ball enters the normal operation winning hole 6710b, instead of setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to 4 rounds, or in addition, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state. can be configured to In addition, when the ball enters the normal operation winning hole 6710b, instead of setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to 4 rounds, or in addition, the game state after the jackpot is finished is set to the time saving state. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the difference in the degree of advantage set according to the type of the operating winning hole for the game ball can be increased. You can play games. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electrical accessory 6720a is opened, the non-electrical accessory 6720a is closed when one game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. However, the condition (the number of game balls entered) for switching the open state special MAX operation winning port 6720 to the closed state is not limited to this. For example, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 may be kept open until two gaming balls enter. In the case of such a configuration, if the game ball can be entered into the MAX operation winning port 6710a, an advantageous state (MAX zone) in which the 16-round jackpot is confirmed when the jackpot is won during the right-handed game is established. It can be continued over a maximum of two jackpots. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the benefit when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, attention is paid to the type of the operation winning hole to which the game ball entering the distribution device 6700 is distributed. You can play a game with it.

In the eighth embodiment, even if a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, there is no effect on the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a. Although it was configured (only to open the closed non-electrical accessory 6720a), it is not limited to this, and the MAX operation winning port 6710a is opened while the non-electrical accessory 6720a is open. , the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a may be further advantageous to the player. Specifically, for example, each time a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the special MAX until the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed It may be configured such that the number of balls entering the operation winning hole 6720 is increased by one. By configuring in this way, even if a big win occurs in the state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the option of shooting a game ball aiming at the sorting device 6700 in the big win standby state can be played. can give to anyone. That is, it is possible to make the player think to add the number of entering balls until the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed by entering the game balls into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. Therefore, in the state in which the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the shooting direction, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot is reached, the probability variable state and the time saving state continue until the next jackpot hit, and when the normal jackpot hits, the time saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of times of time saving may be diversified. Specifically, for example, a probability variable jackpot (jackpot a) in which the time saving state continues until the next jackpot, a probability variable jackpot (jackpot b) in which the number of times of time saving is set to 10 times, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times and a normal jackpot (jackpot d) in which the number of times of time saving is set to 10 times may be provided at least. By configuring in this way, when a jackpot occurs in a state in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened, the game ball to the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the jackpot standby state in consideration of the jackpot type. or enter the game ball into the sorting device 6700. That is, in the case of a jackpot a or jackpot c (a jackpot type with a relatively high possibility of winning a jackpot again during the time saving state), the state in which the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is opened is the next jackpot A player may be given the option of shooting a game ball at a sorting device 6700 to carry over to. On the other hand, if the jackpot b or jackpot d (there is only 10 times of time saving state and the possibility of winning the jackpot within the number of time saving times is relatively low), the game goes to the special MAX operation winning port 6720 If the ball is not entered, the time saving state will pass and the game will return to the left-handed game, and the possibility that the game ball will enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 will increase (the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is The possibility of losing the right to the 16-round jackpot is increased due to the closing), so the player is given the option of entering the game ball into the special MAX operation winning port 6720 to execute the 16-round jackpot. can be done. In addition, in this case, if a specification is combined in which 1 is added to the number of entering balls, which is a condition for closing the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, every time a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the Effective. That is, when a game ball enters the sorting device 6700 with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opened and enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, not only does it become a jackpot of 16 rounds. , Since 1 is added to the closing condition of the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, regardless of whether the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is closed or open, the game ball goes to the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. By entering the ball, it is possible to give merit to the player. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 208. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, when a ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, the advantageous 16-round jackpot is started, and the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 By adopting a configuration in which a MAX zone is provided in which a ball can be entered, a configuration is adopted in which advantageous types of jackpots are easily executed in succession, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win, which is a kind of loss, during the small winning game. It adopts a specification that a jackpot is won even when a game ball enters a V winning hole (specific area) provided in the game area. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640). (The lottery for the second special symbol is easier to win a small prize than the lottery for the first special symbol), and the ease of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 according to the game state is improved. It is configured to be variable. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is fixed regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (normal symbol winning and (probability of winning), normal symbol fluctuation time, opening time, etc., are varied according to the game state, so that the possibility of winning a small win is changed according to the game state, resulting in a possibility of winning a big win. are different (so-called specifications of a 1-type 2-type mixer).

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, as the types of the V winning opening that wins the jackpot when winning the small winning, the V winning opening for MAX that triggers the execution of the 16-round big winning and the small winning type There are two types of openings, ie, a normal V winning opening that triggers the execution of a big win of the number of rounds corresponding to . In addition, as in the eighth embodiment described above, a non-electric accessory 6752a is provided in conjunction with one MAX V winning opening (special MAX V winning opening 6752) to which a 16-round jackpot is awarded. , The non-electric accessory 6752a is opened in conjunction with the entry of the game ball into the 1st V winning port (MAX V winning port 6750f1) to which the 16 round jackpot is awarded. As a result, when a small hit occurs while the time saving state of the normal pattern continues, the game ball is entered into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 by hitting to the left before the small hit ends. You can easily secure a 16-round jackpot just by playing.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 , the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 186, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is provided with a lottery device 6750 instead of the sorting device 6700 in the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 173). , and in place of the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, a special MAX V winning opening 6752 is provided.

The lottery device 6750 is provided inside the lottery device 6750 when a game ball can be entered for a predetermined period of time (that is, the attacker 6750a for the small hit is opened) when a small win is obtained in the lottery of special symbols. A jackpot is won when a game ball enters one of the three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5). Inside the lottery device 6750, the same number of out-ports (out-ports 6750f2, 6750f4, 6750f6) as the number (three) of the V prize-winning ports are provided. A game ball that enters the lottery device 6750 always enters one of the V winning openings or one of the out openings, so that the game ball that enters the lottery device 6750 will enter one of the V winning openings. The ratio (probability) of hitting the ball into the mouth (V winning occurs) is 1/2 (3/6).

When a game ball enters one of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during execution of the small winning game (during the valid period of the small winning), a jackpot of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the executed small winning is executed. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX, a 16-round big win is executed regardless of the small win type. Further, inside the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, an opening mechanism for opening the non-electric accessory 6752a provided in association with the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is provided. For this reason, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX during the small hit valid period, a jackpot of 16 rounds with the largest number of rounds (advantageous to the player) is executed, and a left-handed hit is performed. Only by performing, it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball into the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX. Even if the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small winning validity period, the number of rounds will be the same as when entering the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, regardless of the small winning type. Winning the jackpot of 16 rounds, which is the largest number, gives a chance of winning consecutive advantageous jackpots. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the ninth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the possibility of winning a small hit is 0, but when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a high probability (for example , 9/10) to win a small prize. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640, by continuing to hit to the right, it becomes a small hit with a high probability, and the small winning attacker 6750a is opened. Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the V winning hole. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if the player hits to the right, so it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left. A left-handed game ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, but cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, so that a small win can be won in the normal state of the normal pattern. There is no Therefore, the gaming state after the jackpot executed based on the game ball entering the MAX V winning port 6750f1 (the special MAX V winning port 6752 is opened) is the normal state of the normal symbol. In that case, the left-handed game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 before the small hit, and the non-electric accessory 6752a is closed. On the other hand, the gaming state after the jackpot executed based on the fact that the game ball entered the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX (the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX was opened) is the time saving of normal symbols. If it is in the state, it is possible to win a small hit with a high probability. You can enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute the advantageous big win type of the big win in succession with the two big wins.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, details of the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 187, inside the lottery device 6750, there are three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning openings 6750f3, 6750f5) and three out openings (out openings 6750f2, 6750f4, 6750f6). ) are provided, and a sorting rotor 6750f that always rotates at a constant speed is provided. A game ball that has reached the distribution rotator 6750f enters one of the three V winning openings and the three out openings. Since the distribution rotating body 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is turned off, the timing of winning a small win and the inside of the lottery device 6750 are determined. Depending on the rolling speed of the game ball in , it is variable whether it is distributed to which ball entrance (three V winning openings and three out openings) provided in the distribution rotor 6750f. That is, each time a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the ball entrances.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187, a small winning attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the lottery device 6750 when viewed from the front. This small winning attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) when winning a small winning. The game balls that reach the small winning attacker 6750 a from above during this open period flow into the lottery device 6750 . Inside the lottery device 6750, as shown in FIG. 187, there is provided a guide channel 6750b for causing the game balls to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f. A ball discharge door 6750c for opening and closing the floor is provided in the part. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c form one flow path, so the game ball is pushed downstream from the ball discharge door 6750c. and can flow down. On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls to the discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the sorting rotor 6750f. Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the game ball that has flowed down is temporarily stopped in the guide channel 6750b downstream by about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c (the guide channel A ball stop 6750e is provided that can close a specific location of 6750b).

The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stopper 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotor 6750f in one small hit to a maximum of one. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188(a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device 6750 while both the ball ejection door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 188(a), when the ball ejection door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed, the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6750 passes over the upper surface of the ball ejection door 6750c. As a result, the flow is blocked by the ball stopper 6750e, and the ball is stopped to the right of the ball stopper 6750e. In addition, when the game ball further flows down the guidance flow path 6750b while one game ball is stationary, the already stationary game ball prevents the flow down, and the stationary game ball be stopped. In addition, as described above, the ball stop portion 6750e is arranged with a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the second and subsequent balls enter the lottery device 6750. The played game ball is stopped on the upper surface of the ball ejection door 6750c.

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while game balls are stationary. As shown in FIG. 188(b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the game balls other than the game balls stopped on the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e fall into the discharge area 6750d, thereby pachinko. It falls outside the machine 10 . Thereby, a state in which only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 can be formed. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the ball ejection door 6750c was opened, the ball stopper 6750e is tilted leftward in a front view, thereby allowing passage through the guide channel 6750b. As a result, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can be caused to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f. By controlling in this way, the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotor 6750f in one small hit can be limited to a maximum of one, so the probability of a big hit lottery using the lottery device 6750 (distribution It is possible to make constant the ratio of distribution to the V winning openings by the rotating body 6750f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the details of the distribution rotor 6750f will be described. FIG. 189(a) is a top view of the distribution rotor 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189(a), the distribution rotator 6750f has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and six ball entrances are arranged on the outer edge thereof. Since the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with an inclination downward from its center toward the outer edge direction, a game ball that reaches the vicinity of the center of the distribution rotator 6750f from above is inclined toward the outer edge direction. , to one of the entrances provided on the outer edge.

As shown in FIG. 189(a), the distribution rotator 6750f is alternately arranged with three V winning openings having a trapezoidal shape when viewed from above and three out openings having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from above. That is, the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, the OUT opening 6750f2, the normal V winning opening 6750f3, the OUT opening 6750f4, the normal V winning opening 6750f5, and the OUT opening 6750f6 are arranged in this order. In addition, as shown in FIG. 189(a), while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the distribution rotator 6750f always rotates at a constant speed in the clockwise direction (for example, , a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 189(b), when the game ball that reaches the distribution rotator 6750f enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball is opened inside the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. Since it passes through the mechanism, the non-electric accessory 6752a is opened in conjunction with the passage of this opening mechanism. As a result, an open state is formed in which the game ball can enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752 . This open state continues until the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 and passes through the closing mechanism provided inside. In addition, since the special MAX V winning opening 6752 will not enter as long as the game ball is hit to the right, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 will be switched to the open state. If the jackpot won based on the ball entering the mouth 6750f1 is a time-saving jackpot, the game can be progressed by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting the time-saving state after the jackpot is over. You can win a small hit without hitting. Therefore, when you win a small hit, you can easily enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning port 6752 just by hitting left during the small win valid period. ) can be executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot won by entering the MAX V winning port 6750f1 is a normal jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the normal state of the normal pattern will occur, and even if you hit the right, the second special pattern Therefore, it is necessary to proceed with the game by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the non-electric accessory 6752a is closed at a relatively early stage. Therefore, in most cases, it is not possible to benefit from the opening of the special MAX V winning opening 6752 .

Thus, in the ninth embodiment, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is determined depending on whether the big winning distributed to the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 in the small winning is the time-saving jackpot or the normal big winning. It is configured to be variable whether or not to receive the benefit due to the opening of (that the 16-round jackpot can be easily won in the next small win). Therefore, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and a jackpot is executed, it is more expected that the game state after the jackpot ends will be a time-saving state with normal symbols. You can play a game with it. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, each part of the lottery device 6750 (a small winning attacker 6750a, a ball stopping part 6750e, and a ball The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the discharge door 6750c) will be described. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of each part when a small hit is won.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small winning attacker 6750a is opened along with the start of the small winning (the start of the small winning effective period). As shown in FIG. 190, the open state of this small hit attacker 6750a continues for 0.5 seconds, and is closed after 0.5 seconds. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6750a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. If the game ball can enter the small hit attacker 6750a during the open period of 0.5 seconds, the game ball can reach the distribution rotor 6750f during the small hit effective period, A game ball can be entered into the ball entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 190, the ball stop portion 6750e is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 188(a)) until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and at the time when 2 seconds have passed (small win 1.5 seconds after the closing of the attacker 6750a) to the end of the small hit, it is switched to an open state (a state in which the guide channel 6750b can flow down), and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. . On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 188 (a)) until 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and at the time of 1.5 seconds (for the small win) 1 second after the closing of the attacker 6750a) to the end of the small hit, it is switched to the open state (see FIG. 188(b)), and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. That is, for 1.5 seconds after the start of the small winning, the ball stopping portion 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are closed, so that all the game balls entering the lottery device 6750 are It is retained in the guiding channel 6750b by the ball stopper 6750e.

In addition, when 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stop portion 6750e closed, so the player is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e. All the game balls other than the one game ball that is present fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 . Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball ejection door 6750c is opened, the ball stop portion 6750e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 is directed toward the distribution rotor 6750f. flow down In this way, by first opening the ball discharge door 6750c and then opening the ball stop portion 6750e, two or more game balls are placed inside the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small winning attacker 6750a. Even if the ball enters, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6750d until the ball stopper 6750e is opened. Therefore, the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotator 6750f in one small win can be limited to one each time, so the probability of winning the big win in the small win (the probability that the game ball enters the V winning opening ) can be made constant (50%) at all times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, a characteristic display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, a lottery device 6750 in which a right-handed game ball can enter is used as a V winning opening where a big win is awarded by entering a game ball during the small winning valid period. In addition to the three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5), a special MAX V winning opening is located at a position where a game ball fired left-handed can enter. A port 6752 is provided. In the ninth embodiment, when a small hit occurs while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened instead of the lottery device 6750 within the small winning valid period. An effect (special small hit effect) is executed to urge you to aim. The display mode of this special small winning effect is provided with three types of display modes capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of a time-saving big win when a game ball is entered into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 .

FIG. 191(a) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a special small winning effect (special small winning effect for low expectation) is executed to suggest that the expectation of the time saving jackpot is low. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), when the special small hit effect for the low expectation is executed, the remaining time until the small hit effective period ends ( When a game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752, the entry is treated as valid, and a display area HR8 is formed for displaying the period during which the jackpot of 16 rounds is won. Inside the display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 191(a), the character "MAX effective timer" is displayed, and the effective period of the small win is displayed below the character "MAX effective timer". The number of seconds corresponding to the remaining time until is displayed. By confirming the display contents of the display area HR8, the player can easily understand the remaining time until the ball entering the special MAX V winning opening 6752 becomes invalid.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the approximate center of the display screen, the text "If you enter MAX before the timer reaches 0, the MAX jackpot will be confirmed!" A display area HR9 is formed in which the characters "maybe...?" are displayed. Furthermore, below the display area HR9, an image simulating the special MAX V winning opening 6752 and the characters "Left shot" facing the direction of the image simulating the special MAX V winning opening 6752 were displayed. A display area HR10 is formed in which an image resembling an arrow is displayed. The display contents of these display areas HR9 and HR10 make it easy for the player to win a jackpot of at least 16 rounds by shooting the game ball aiming at the special MAX V prize opening 6752 by hitting to the left. can be understood. In addition, by displaying characters with a relatively bearish expression such as "It may enter into the time saving mode ...?" It is possible to make the player recognize that the possibility of shifting to the time saving state) is low. Therefore, during the small winning period, the game is played to win the 16 round big win by hitting left, or to stop launching the game ball and wait for the next small win (avoid the V prize in this small win). Since it is possible to realize the playability of allowing the player to make a selection, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the special small winning performance for low expectations is configured to be difficult to be selected during the small winning effective period corresponding to the time-saving big winning and to be easily selected during the small winning effective period corresponding to the normal big winning. there is

FIG. 191(b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a special small-hit effect (special small-hit effect for a high degree of expectation) suggesting that the expectation of the time-saving jackpot is high is executed. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 191 (b), the display mode of the special small hit effect for high expectations is different from the display mode of the special small hit effect for low expectations only in the display mode of the display area HR9. It is configured. Specifically, the characters displayed in the lower part of the display area HR9 are the characters "High expectations for the time saving mode!". With this display mode, it is possible for the player to enter the game ball into the special MAX V prize opening 6752 during the validity period of the small win, and the possibility of winning the time-saving jackpot is extremely high. can be easily understood. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 195(b), but this special small winning effect for high expectation is likely to be selected during the small winning effective period corresponding to the short time jackpot, and corresponds to the normal jackpot It is configured to be difficult to be selected during the small winning effective period.

Although illustration is omitted, the special small winning effect in the ninth embodiment is provided for medium expectation in addition to low expectation and high expectation. When a small win is won with the special MAX V winning opening 6752 open, a special small win performance for 1 expectation is determined according to the type of small win among these three expectations. be done. As a result, the player is made to select whether to aim for a prize in the special MAX V prize opening 6752 by hitting to the left or to avoid the V prize in consideration of the degree of expectation suggested by the special small winning performance. Since it is possible to realize sexuality, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 192(a). FIG. 192(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9(a)). The difference is that a type selection table 202ea is added, and the contents of the first winning random number table 202a and the first winning type selection table 202b are partially changed.

The small hit type selection table 202ea is a data table that is referred to for determining the small hit type when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(b), but when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, this small hit type selection table 202ea is referred to, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 A corresponding small hit type is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 192(b), the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192(b), in the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are defined as judgment values for judging a big win. (See 202a1 in FIG. 192(b)). It should be noted that the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Of the 400 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of judgment values (counter values) judged to be a big win is two, so the probability of being judged to be a big win in the lottery of special symbols. is 1/200 (2/400).

In addition, "2 to 399" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 192 (b)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol No value is specified (see 202a3 in FIG. 192(b)). In addition, "2 to 39" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 192 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "40 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 192(b)). Of the 400 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of judgment values (counter values) judged to be small hits is 360, so it is judged to be a big hit in the lottery of special symbols. The probability is 9/10 (360/400).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize only in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, the game ball is easily entered into the V winning opening in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in which the lottery of the second special pattern is easily executed, so that the big win is likely to occur again in a short period of time. As a result, the degree of advantage in the time-saving state can be increased, so that great joy can be given to the player in the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 193(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment is provided with two types of jackpots A13 and B13 as the first special symbol jackpot types. Two types of jackpots C13 and D13 are provided as jackpot types of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot A13". (See 202b1 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (4-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state with normal symbols. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A13", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A13" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot B13". (See 202b2 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state of normal symbols. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B13" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79" with "jackpot C13" associated with it. (See 202b3 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (16-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state with normal symbols. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are "jackpot C13", so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot C13" is determined. ratio is 80% (80/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" with "jackpot D13". (See 202b4 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state with normal symbols. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values are "jackpot D13", so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D13" is determined. ratio is 20% (20/100).

Thus, in the ninth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the 4th round jackpot with a small number of rounds is always executed, while the second special symbol lottery wins a big win. In this case, 80% of the time, 16 rounds with the largest number of rounds are executed, and 20% of the time, 4 rounds with the smallest number of rounds are executed. In addition, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big hit, the rate of setting an advantageous time-saving state after the end of the big win is 50%, whereas the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit. In this case, the rate of setting the time saving state is 80%. Therefore, it is configured to be more advantageous for the player to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery than to win a big win in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to Drawing 193 (b), the details of small hit classification selection table 202ea are explained. FIG. 193(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202ea. This small hit type selection table 202ea is a data table that defines a determination value for determining a small hit type when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, and is a determination value of the small hit type counter C5. Is defined in association with each small hit type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 4", "small hit A13" is associated with the small hit type (See 202ea1 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small win A13" is a small win type that wins a "jackpot E13" (16 round short time big win) when a game ball enters one of the V winning openings during the small win validity period. . That is, even when a game ball enters the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5, a round is performed in the same manner as when a gaming ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752. This is the most advantageous jackpot type in which the 16-round jackpot with the largest number (advantageous to the player) is executed and a time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes "small hit A13" is 5, so when it becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery, "small hit A13" The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit B13" as the small hit type for the range of "5 to 54" ( See 202ea2 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small win B13" is a small win type that wins a "big win F13" (special short-time big win) when a game ball enters one of the V winning openings during the small win validity period. In this "jackpot F13", the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4 rounds when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the small win validity period, while MAX When the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for special MAX or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the number of rounds for the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. In other words, the "small win B13" varies according to the type of the V winning opening where the number of rounds of the big winning (degree of advantage) is won, so when the game ball enters the normal V winning opening, the player disadvantageous for In addition, since the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state, it is a big win type that is advantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big win. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit B13", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B13" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C13" as the small hit type for the range of "55 to 99" ( See 202ea3 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small win C13" is a small win type that wins a "big win G13" (special normal big win) when a game ball enters one of the V winning openings during the small win validity period. In this "jackpot G13", the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4 rounds when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the validity period of the small jackpot, while MAX When the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for special MAX or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the number of rounds for the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. In other words, the "small win C13" varies according to the type of the V winning opening in which the number of rounds (advantage) of the big winning is won. disadvantageous for In addition, since the game state after the big win is set to the normal state of normal symbols, it is a big win type that is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big win. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 45 counter values are "small hit C13", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit C13" The ratio determined is 45% (45/100).

In this way, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the rate at which the small hit type (small hit A13, B13) corresponding to the time-saving jackpot is determined is set to 55% (5% + 50%). On the other hand, the rate at which the small hit type (small hit C13) corresponding to the normal jackpot is determined is set to 45%. As described above, in the time-saving state of the normal design, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special design is 9/10, so winning the jackpot in the time-saving state of the normal design is almost a small hit. This is a case where V winning occurs. Therefore, when the jackpot is achieved in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the ratio of the time-saving state of the advantageous normal symbols again after the big hit is 45%. In addition, the number of rounds of the big win to be won when the second special pattern lottery is a small win and the V prize is generated is configured to be variable according to the state of the special MAX V prize opening 6752.例文帳に追加That is, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the lottery device 6750 in order to generate the V winning during the small winning valid period, so the V winning occurs. 1/3 of the cases are V prizes for the MAX V prize opening 6750f1, whereas 2/3 of the cases where V prizes occur are V prizes for either the normal V prize openings 6750f3 or 6750f5. . Then, as described above, the small hit B13 determined at a rate of 50% of the small hit and the small hit C13 determined at a rate of 45% are usually placed in either of the V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5. When the game ball enters, the number of rounds for the big win is set to 4 rounds. That is, when a V prize is won for the MAX V prize opening 6750f1, a 16 round jackpot is set at a rate of 100%, while when a V prize is generated for either the normal V prize opening 6750f3 or 6750f5. , a 16-round jackpot is set at a rate of 5% (small hit A13), while a 4-round jackpot is set at a rate of 95% (either small hit B13 or C13). For this reason, in the state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the 16 round jackpot will be achieved at a rate of about 36.7% (1/3 + 2/3 x 5%) when the V winning occurs. , with a rate of about 63.3% (2/3 x 95%) being a 4-round jackpot. On the other hand, as described above, if the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the 16 rounds will be a big win at a rate of 80%. As for the ratio of the advantageous 16-round jackpot, if it becomes a small win in the lottery of the second special pattern, and if a V prize occurs during the execution of the small win game (during the small win valid period) and a big win (approximately 36.7%), it is higher in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (80%).

On the other hand, in the time saving state and in the state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, regardless of the small hit type, left hitting is performed and the special MAX in the open state Just by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 6752, the 16 rounds jackpot with the largest number of rounds is always set, so the number of rounds is greater than when the second special symbol lottery wins. be advantageous. In other words, in the ninth embodiment, even in the same gaming state (ordinary symbol time saving state), the second special symbol lottery is drawn depending on whether the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open. , and the degree of advantage is switched between the case where the V winning occurs during execution of the small winning game and the big winning and the case where the big winning is achieved by lottery of the second special pattern. By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to wish for different opportunities as a chance to win the jackpot (V win and lottery for the second special symbol) according to the state of the special MAX V win opening 6752. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided inside the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 194, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment is the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 13) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. , The difference is that the jackpot type storage area 203eb and the V passage flag 203ec are added, and the probability variation flag 203h and the ball waiting flag 203j are deleted. Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The small hit flag 203ea is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203ea is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit medium flag 203ea is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the small hit starts. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 203). In the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197), this small hitting medium flag 203ea is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the small hitting is in progress (see S261 in FIG. 197).

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (see S321 in FIG. 198). In addition, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, and the game ball enters the V winning opening in the small win, data indicating the big win type corresponding to the small win type is stored (see S1502 in FIG. 199). ). The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to set the game state after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type.

The V passing flag 203ec is for indicating whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening during execution of the small winning game (whether or not it is confirmed that the big winning will occur after the small winning is completed). flag. If the V passing flag 203ec is turned on at the end of the small win, the start of the big win is set at the end of the small win, whereas if the V passing flag 203ec is off, the small win is made without starting the big win. is terminated. The initial value of the V passage flag 203ec is set to OFF, and is set to ON when the game ball enters the V winning opening during execution of the small winning game (see S1608 in FIG. 204). In addition, it is set to OFF after setting the start of the big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole (see S1325 in FIG. 203).

Next, referring to FIG. 195(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 195(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(a)). The only difference is that a selection table 222ea is added. This expectation degree selection table 222ea determines the effect mode (expectation degree suggested by the effect) of the special small win effect to be executed when the small win is won while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open. This is a data table that is referenced to Here, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, the jackpot is won by entering any one of the V winning openings during the small win valid period. Also, the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern) to be won when the ball enters the V winning hole is predetermined for each small hit type (see FIG. 193(b)). That is, when the game ball is entered into the V winning opening and the jackpot is won, whether or not the time saving state is granted after the jackpot ends is determined at the time when the small hit type is determined (variation of special symbols determined at the start). In the ninth embodiment, if a small win is won while the special MAX V winning mouth 6752 is open, the expectation that a time saving state is given by making a V win during the small win valid period is selected from the expectation level selection table 222ea and executed. By configuring in this way, when a small hit occurs while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the game ball is allowed to enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752 within the small winning effective period. Whether or not to start the big win can be determined according to the degree of expectation suggested by the special small win performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Details of the degree of expectation selection table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 195(b).

FIG. 195(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation degree selection table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 195(b), this expectation level selection table 222ea includes, for each small hit type, the type of expectation level (expectation level suggested by the special small hit effect) and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea. and are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195(b), the value of the production lottery counter 223ea for the small hit A13 and the small hit B13 (the small hit type that wins the time-saving jackpot when V winning occurs) The production mode for high expectations (see FIG. 191 (b)) is defined in association with the range of "0 to 19", and the production mode for medium expectations is defined in the range of "20 to 89" (not shown) are defined in association with each other, and the effect mode for low expectations (see FIG. 191(a)) is defined in association with the range of "90 to 99".

Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 100 values of "0 to 99", when the small winning A13 or B13 is achieved, the production mode for high expectation, middle expectation and low expectation. are determined at 20% (20/100), 70% (70/100) and 10% (10/100) respectively.

Also, as shown in FIG. 195(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is within the range of "0 to 4" for the small hit C13 (a small hit type that usually wins a big hit when a V win occurs). Production mode for high expectations (see FIG. 191 (b)) is defined in association, production mode for medium expectations in the range of "5 to 49" (not shown) is defined in association, " The range of 50 to 99” is defined in association with the low-expectation performance mode (see FIG. 191(a)).

Since the production lottery counter 223eka can take 100 values from "0 to 99", when the small win C13 is reached, the production modes for high expectation, medium expectation and low expectation are determined. are 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively. From these stipulations, it can be said that the high-expectation production modes are more likely to be selected when the small win A13 and the small win B13 are won, but are less likely to be selected when the small win C13 is won. In addition, the performance mode for the medium expectation degree is selected at a relatively high rate both when the small winning A13 and the small winning B13 are won, and when the small winning C13 is won, and the performance mode for the low expectation degree is selected. is difficult to be selected when the small winning A13 and the small winning B13 are won, and is easy to be selected when the small winning C13 is won. Therefore, when the performance mode for high expectations is executed, it is possible to suggest that the small win being executed is likely to be the small win A13 or the small win B13, When the performance mode for the low degree of expectation is executed, it is possible to suggest that the small win being executed is highly likely to be the small win C13. In addition, when the performance mode for medium expectation degree is executed, it is possible to suggest that there is a possibility of a small win A13 and a small win B13 as well as a possibility of a small win C13. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the playability that allows the player to select whether or not to enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 according to the degree of expectation suggested by the effect mode. , the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, when a small win is won in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, a special small win effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, even when a small win occurs in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the special small win effect may be executed. In this case, for example, every time a small win is won, a special small win production is executed, or a normal small win production (a production in a mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation of a short-time jackpot when a V win is made). It may be determined by lottery whether or not it is executed. Also, the lottery probability may be varied depending on the situation. More specifically, the probability of executing the special small winning performance when winning the time saving jackpot and moving to the time saving state increases as the normal jackpot is won continuously. good too. By constructing in this way, it is possible to seek relief in the event of a relatively disadvantageous situation for the player, such as winning consecutive jackpots. It is possible to keep the motivation for the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided within the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 196, the RAM 223 in the ninth embodiment has a production lottery counter 223ea added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 179), and a standby state production flag 223g. The difference is that the is deleted.

The effect lottery counter 223ea is a counter used to select one effect mode (expectation level type) from the above-described expectation level selection table 222ea. The value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting the effect mode (expectation type) of the special small hit effect, the random number (counter value) defined in the expectation selection table 222ea is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea, and the corresponding 1 is selected. This effect lottery counter 223ea is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process 13 (see FIG. 201).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 204. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 197, the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, and the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment. ), this is a process for setting the display mode in the first symbol display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, in each of S202 to S212, S214 to S218, and S221 to S223, the special symbol variation processing 13 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 197 See), the same processes as the processes of S202 to S212, S214 to S218, and S221 to S223 are executed. Also, when the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit game or a small hit game is being executed (S261), and a big hit game is executed. Or, when it is determined that the small winning game is being executed (S261: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S261, when it is determined that neither the big winning game nor the small winning game is being executed (S261: No), the process proceeds to S202. In the process of S261, if the big hit flag 203m is on, it is determined that the big hit game is being executed, and if the small hit flag 203ea is on, it is determined that the small hit game is being executed. When it is determined that both the medium flag 203m and the small hit medium flag 203ea are off, it is determined that the win is neither a big hit nor a small hit.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S207 or S212 ends, the special symbol variation processing (S213, FIG. 23), the special symbol variation process 13 is executed (S262), and the process ends. The details of this special symbol variation process 13 (S262) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, in the processing of S218, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S218: Yes), the counter during time saving 203i is reset to 0 (S263), the start of the big win is set, the big win start flag 203k is set to ON (S264), and the process proceeds to S223.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S222 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S265). , When it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S265: Yes), a small win start process for setting the start of a small win is executed (S266), and this process ends. The details of this small winning start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a small hit (that is, it is a loss) (S265: No), the small win start process (S266) is skipped and left as it is. End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the details of the special symbol variation start process 13 (S262) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation start process 13 (S262) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and first embodiment), and is executed in the eighth embodiment (and Similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment), the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on this, along with performing a lottery (whether or not) of "special design jackpot", "special design omission", or "special design small hit", the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the variable effect to be performed.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S312, the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) ) are executed in steps S301 to S312. Also, in the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S305: Yes), the big hit type Data indicating the type of jackpot won in this lottery is stored in the storage area 203eb (S321), and the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (S305: No), then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is a small win (S322). ), when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S322: Yes), based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S323). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 obtained in the process of S301 and the small hit type selection table 202ea (see FIG. 193 (b)) are compared to determine what the small hit type is. . As described above, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a small hit A13, and if it is in the range of "5 to 54", it is a small hit B13 If it is in the range of "55 to 99", it is determined to be a small hit C13 (see FIG. 193(b)).

When the processing of S323 is completed, the variation pattern at the time of the small winning is determined (S324). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S324, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at a combination of symbols indicating a small hit. The variation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (variation time) is determined. When the process of S324 ends, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, details of the above-described small winning start process (S266) will be described. This small winning start process (S266) is, as described above, a process for setting the start of the small winning when the special symbol lottery results in a small winning. When this small winning start process is executed, first, the operation scenario of the lottery device 6750 corresponding to the small winning type is read (S1501). This operation scenario defines data for setting the operations shown in FIG. 190 for the small hit attacker 6750a, the ball stopper 6750e, and the ball ejection door 6750c.

When the processing of S1501 is finished, next, data indicating the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type of this time is stored in the big hit type storage area 203eb (S1502). In the processing of S1502, if the small hit type this time is a small hit A13, the data indicating the big hit E13 (16 rounds short time big hit) is stored in the big hit type storage area 203eb, and the small hit type this time is a small hit B13. If there is, store the data indicating the jackpot F13 (special short-time jackpot) in the jackpot type storage area 203eb, and if the small hit type this time is the small hit C13, store the data indicating the jackpot G13 (special normal jackpot) in the jackpot type. Store in area 203eb. When the process of S1502 ends, the start of the small hit is set (S1503), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, startup processing 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start-up process 13 is a process executed instead of the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment. This is a process that is started along with the input. In the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, S901-S910, S912, and S914-917 of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are performed. The same processes as those of S910 and S914 to S917 are executed.

In addition, in the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S910 is completed, the time saving medium counter 203i, the big hit medium flag 203m, and the small hit medium flag 203ea are read (S941), and the process to S912.

In addition, in the startup process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, the start of the rotation operation of the sorting rotor 6750f provided inside the lottery device 6750 is set (S942), and the process proceeds to S914. to move to. By executing the process of S942, the distribution rotor 6750f rotates at a constant rotation speed (for example, a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds) until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. continue. Therefore, it is possible to randomly change the ball entrance through which the game balls entering the lottery device 6750 are distributed according to the timing of winning the small prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, details of the main processing 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. This main process 13 is a process that is executed instead of the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, and similar to the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment. This is a process for executing control.

S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1016 of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment correspond to S1001 to S1003 and S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1016 is executed. Further, in the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, instead of the jackpot control process (S1005, see FIG. 30) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) , the jackpot control process 13 is executed (S1071), then the small win control process 13 for executing various controls during the small win game is executed (S1072), and the process proceeds to S1006. Details of these jackpot control processing 13 (S1071) and small hit control processing 13 (S1072) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203, respectively.

First, with reference to FIG. 202, details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1071) described above will be described. As described above, this jackpot control process 13 is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and performs opening/closing control of the specific winning opening 65a. This process is for

Of the jackpot control process 13 (S1071) in the ninth embodiment, in each process of S1201 to S1212, S1214, S1216, and S1217, the jackpot control process (FIG. 32 See), the same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1212, S1214, S1216, and S1217 are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control processing 13 (see FIG. 202) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending production has come in the processing of S1212 (S1212: Yes), the jackpot this time is a time-saving jackpot. It is determined whether or not (S1251), and if it is determined that it is a time saving jackpot, the process proceeds to S1214. On the other hand, in the processing of S1251, when it is determined that it is not a time-saving jackpot (S1251: No), the processing proceeds to S1216.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, details of the above-described small winning control process 13 (S1072) will be described. This small hit control process 13 (S1072) is, as described above, a process for executing various controls during the small hit game. In other words, it is a process for performing the same control as the small hit control process (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment described above.

Of the small hit control processing 13 (see FIG. 203), in each process of S1301 to S1304, S1310, and S1311, respectively S1301 to S1304, S1310 of the small hit control processing (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, and The same processing as each processing of S1311 is executed. In addition, in the small winning control processing 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S1303 ends, then the start of the operation scenario for the small winning is set (S1321), and this processing ends .

In addition, in the small hit control processing 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S1311 is completed, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203ec is on (S1322), and the V passage When it is determined that the flag 203ec is on (S1322: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203i is reset to 0 (S1323), and the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb The start is set (S1324), the V passage flag 203ec is set to off (S1325), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1322 that the V passage flag 203ec is off (S1322: No), the processes of S1323 to S1325 are skipped and the process ends.

Further, in the small winning control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning in the process of S1310 (S1310: No), the ball enters the V winning opening. is monitored, and if a ball entry is detected, a V passing detection process for performing control corresponding to the type of the V winning hole is executed (S1326), and this process ends. Details of this V passage detection process (S1326) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the V passage detection process (S1625). As described above, this V passing detection process (S1625) is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the V winning opening and performing control corresponding to the type of the V winning opening when the entry of a ball is detected. . When the V passage detection process (S1625) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the V passage flag 203ec is on (S1601). Yes), it means that the entry (passing) of the ball into one of the V winning holes has already been detected, and no new setting is required, so this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203ec is off (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (passed through) any of the V winning openings (S1602), If it is determined that the ball entering (passing through) the V winning hole is not detected (S1602: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that a ball has been entered into the V winning hole (S1602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning is valid (S1603). If it is (S1603: No), there is a possibility that the game ball entered (passed through) the V winning hole due to fraud, etc., so an error command is set (S1604), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1603, if it is determined that it is within the V valid period (S1603: Yes), then the type of the V winning hole in which the ball is detected in the process of S1602 is normal V winning hole 6750f3. , 6750f5 (S1605), and the current entry (passing) is neither normal V winning opening 6750f3 nor 6750f5 (MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or special MAX V winning opening 6752) (S1605: No), the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is rewritten to data corresponding to the 16-round jackpot (S1606), and the process proceeds to S1607. and migrate.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that the ball entered into either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 is detected (S1605: Yes), the process of S1606 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1607. Transition. In the processing of S1607, the V pass command is set (S1607), and then the V pass flag 203ec is set to ON (S1608). Next, a V winning opening command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the type of the V winning opening for which passage has been detected is set (S1609), and this processing is terminated.

Through this V passing detection process, when a ball is detected to enter the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small winning effective period, 16 rounds of big winning are executed regardless of the small winning type. can do. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball is entered during the small winning effective period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 207. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 205, the winning-related process 13 (S43001) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 13 (S43001) is a process executed instead of the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to related process 12 (see FIG. 184), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to winning.

Of the winning-related processing 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 each process S4404, S4405 of the winning-related processing 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment. , S4407, and S4408 are executed. Also, in the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, in the process of S4407, it is determined that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110. In the case (S4407: No), next, it is determined whether or not the small winning opening command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (S44001), and the small winning opening command is When it is determined that it is included (S44001: Yes), an expectation degree suggestion setting process for setting the effect mode during the small hit is executed (S44002), and this process is finished. The details of this expectation level suggestion setting process (S44002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the hit related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, in the process of S44001, when it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is not received (S44001: No), then the main control device 110 (S44003), and if it is determined that the V winning opening command is included (S44003: Yes), V winning opening command processing for executing control according to the type and state of the V winning opening from which the ball is detected is executed (S44004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S44003, when it is determined that the V winning mouth command is not included (S44003: No), the process proceeds to S4409. Details of the V winning opening command process (S44004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the details of the above-described expectation level suggestion setting process (S44002) will be described. This expectation level suggestion setting process (S44002) is, as described above, a process for setting an effect mode during a small hit. In the expectation level suggestion setting process (S44002), first, it is determined whether or not the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40101). If it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40101: Yes ), it means that a small hit is executed in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, so each process of S40103 to S40105 for determining the effect mode of the special small win effect is executed. More specifically, the expectation degree selection table 222ea is read (S40103), and from the read expectation degree selection table 222ea, the small hit type of this time and the expectation degree type corresponding to the counter value of the effect lottery counter 223ea are specified. (S40104), the execution of the special small hit effect of the specified expectation type is set (S40105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S40101, if it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is off (S40101: No), it means that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed. Execution of a small hit effect is set (S40102), and this process is terminated. By this expectation suggestion setting process (see FIG. 206), when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the expectation that the time-saving jackpot is executed when the V prize is won by the special small hit production production mode can be suggested to the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of allowing the player to select whether or not to enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 in consideration of the content of suggestion of the special small winning effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the details of the above-described V winning opening command processing (S44004) will be described. This V winning hole command process (S44004) is, as described above, a process for executing control according to the type and state of the V winning hole in which the ball is detected. In this V winning opening command processing (S44004), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening command received this time is a command indicating entry into the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX (S40201). When it is determined that the command indicates the winning opening 6750f1 (S40201: Yes), the MAX zone flag 223da is set to ON (S40202), and V indicates that the V winning opening has been won during the small winning valid period. A prize effect is set (S40203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40201, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating entry into the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX (S40201: No), then V indicating entry into the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX It is determined whether or not it is a prize winning command (S40204). In the processing of S40204, if it is determined that the current V winning opening command is a command indicating the special MAX V winning opening 6752 (S40204: Yes), then the MAX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40205 ), and then it is determined whether or not a small winning game is currently being executed (S40206). In the process of S40206, if it is determined that the small hit game is currently being executed (S40206: Yes), during the small hit valid period, the game ball enters the open state special MAX V winning opening 6752 Since this means that the player has done so, the execution of the V winning effect is set (S40207), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S40206, if it is determined that the small hit game is not being executed (normal game is being played) (S40206: No), it is opened by performing a left hit outside the small hit effective period. Since it means that the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the execution of the falling effect is set (S40208), and this processing ends. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40204, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating winning to the special MAX V winning opening 6752 (S40204: No), the normal V winning opening 6750f3, Since it means that the command indicates one of 6750f5, execution of the V winning effect is set (S40209), and this processing is terminated. By executing this V winning opening command process (see FIG. 207), suitable control can be executed according to the type of the V winning opening from which winning is detected, the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752, and the like. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the type of V winning opening that wins a big win when a small win is won is V for MAX that triggers the execution of a 16-round big win. It is configured to provide two kinds of winning openings, that is, a winning opening and a normal V winning opening which triggers execution of a big winning of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of small winning. In addition, as the V winning opening for MAX to which the 16-round jackpot is awarded, two of the V winning opening for MAX 6750f1 and the V winning opening for special MAX 6752 are provided. is configured to be accompanied by a non-electric accessory 6752a. This non-electric accessory 6752a is configured to be opened in conjunction with the entry of the game ball into the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. This open state continues until the next game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752, so if the game ball can enter the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 during the small hit , when a small win is achieved, the big win of 16 rounds can be easily fixed by just hitting the game ball to the special MAX V prize opening 6752 by hitting it left before the small win is finished. A very favorable situation can be created. In other words, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot of the most advantageous type in succession, so that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, if the second special symbol lottery is a big hit in the time saving state, regardless of the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the 16 round big hit will be at a rate of 80%. is configured as On the other hand, if a V winning occurs in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the rate is about 36.7% (when the ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and 16 round jackpot is won only in A13 when V winning occurs during the small winning valid period), while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, special MAX during the small winning valid period A 16-round jackpot is always won simply by shooting a game ball aiming at the V winning port 6752 for use. In other words, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second special symbol lottery becomes a big hit than when the V winning occurs during the small winning valid period. On the other hand, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, it is better if V winning occurs during the small winning effective period. The ratio of 16-round big wins is higher than the case of big wins in the lottery of 2 special symbols. Therefore, in spite of the same game state, depending on whether the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open or not, the second special symbol lottery becomes a small hit, and during the execution of the small win game It is possible to switch the degree of advantage between the case of the occurrence of the V prize and the big win and the case of the big win in the lottery of the second special symbols. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal design, depending on the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the player can wish for different opportunities as a jackpot winning opportunity (V winning prize and lottery of the second special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described ninth embodiment, by entering (passing) the game ball into one of the V winning openings during the execution of the small winning game (during the small winning valid period), it corresponds to the type of the V winning opening It was configured to start the jackpot of the number of rounds to be played. That is, according to the type of small win, it is predetermined only whether it will be a short-time jackpot or a normal jackpot when a V prize is won, and the number of rounds of the jackpot is indeterminate until a V prize is generated. board.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, in addition to the number of rounds of the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is also changed according to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball is entered during the valid period of the small win. It is configured to obtain More specifically, even if a small win C13 corresponding to the big win G13 (special normal big win) is won, the ball enters the MAX V winning port 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning port 6752 during the small winning effective period. Then, a 16-round short-time jackpot is awarded (the jackpot G13 is rewritten to a 16-round short-time jackpot). By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the benefit when the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX and the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, so that the game ball can be sent to the lottery device 6750. When the player enters the ball, the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball enters. In addition, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened and the state shifts to the time saving state, 16 rounds can be easily made just by hitting left within the small winning effective period of the small winning winning on 9/10. Since it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the time-saving jackpot can be won, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the ninth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described ninth embodiment in that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. This is the point. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the ninth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the ninth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the V passage detection process (S1625) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this modification will be described. This V passing detection process (S1625) monitors the ball entering the V winning hole, similarly to the V passing detection process (see FIG. 204) in the above-described ninth embodiment. This is a process for performing control corresponding to the type of the V winning opening.

Of the V passage detection process (see FIG. 208) in the modification of the ninth embodiment, the processes of S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609 each correspond to the V passage detection process (see FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment. The same processes as those of S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609 are executed.

In addition, in the V-passing detection process (see FIG. 208) in this modification, the V-winning opening that detected the passage this time in the processing of S1605 is neither the normal V-winning opening 6750f3 nor the 6750f5 (that is, the V-winning opening for MAX 6750f1 or special MAX V winning opening 6752) (S1605: No), the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is rewritten to data indicating a 16-round short-time jackpot. (S1611), the process proceeds to S1607.

Thus, in the V passing detection process (see FIG. 208) in the present modification, when detecting a ball entering the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit valid period, , Regardless of the type of small hit (that is, regardless of the type of jackpot corresponding to the type of small hit), the 16-round short-time jackpot is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage of the player when the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, so that the player's game can improve interest in

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the ninth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 during the small winning valid period, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 In addition to being open, it is configured to win a 16-round short-time jackpot. With this configuration, when the ball is entered into the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX, the game state is always shifted to a game state in which the game is played by hitting to the right, so the special V winning opening 6752 for MAX is opened. After that, it is possible to suppress the fact that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed without winning even one small win. In addition, even if the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit valid period, it is configured to win the 16 round short time jackpot, so the game ball goes to the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. , it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which it is almost certain to win the 16-round short-time jackpot at least twice at short intervals. Therefore, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 during the small winning valid period, it is possible to strongly expect that the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX and the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the time saving state. , The easiness to shift to the time saving state can be varied according to the game state and the state of the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special design, it becomes a time-saving jackpot at a rate of 50%, while the second special design is normally in the time-saving state of the design. 193(a)). On the other hand, in the time saving state, the ratio of the time saving state when winning the jackpot by the V winning in the small hit varies depending on whether or not the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened. That is, when V winning occurs in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, during the small winning valid period in either small winning A13, B13 (small winning corresponding to time saving jack) When a V prize occurs (55%), and when the ball enters the MAX V winning port 6750f1 during the small hit C13 valid period (45% x 1/3), the time-saving jackpot is won. do. In other words, it becomes a time-saving jackpot at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX is open, the ball is entered into the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX only by hitting left during the effective period of the small winning, and the time-saving jackpot is executed. can be made Therefore, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed in the time saving state, if the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the V winning occurs during the small winning valid period. While it becomes easier to shift to the time saving state than, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, rather than becoming a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, V winning during the small winning valid period occurs, it is easier to transition to a time-saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state of normal symbols, depending on the state of the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, it is possible to make the player wish for a different opportunity as a chance to win a jackpot (V winning and lottery of the second special symbol). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment and its modification, the type of jackpot to be won when V winning occurs during the validity period of the small winning is defined in association with each small winning type, and the V winning for MAX When the game ball enters the opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the jackpot type is rewritten to the 16 round jackpot or the 16 round short time jackpot, but not necessarily for each small hit type. need not be defined in advance. The jackpot type may be determined by lottery when the V winning occurs. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the small winning validity period, 16 rounds short time jackpot at a rate of 5%, 4 at a rate of 50% A lottery may be performed so that the 4-round normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 45% for the short-time round jackpot. In addition, when detecting the ball entering the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX and the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, a lottery may be performed so that the 16 round short time jackpot is always determined. By configuring in this way, the small hit type and the big hit type need not be defined in association with each other, so the small hit type selection table 202ea can be omitted.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 220. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol that is likely to be executed during the time saving state, while winning a small hit with a high probability, in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit It was a composition that could not be elected. A game ball is entered into the V prize opening during the validity period of the small prize to win the big prize.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, even when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a small win is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100). It is configured to set an open pattern that can win a V prize with a part of the small hit of one special symbol. In other words, even in the normal state where the game should be progressed by shooting the game ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left, it is possible to generate a big hit by V winning. In addition, a plurality of small winning types with different V winning rates (V winning rates of 50%, 75%, and 100%) are provided as small winnings of the first special symbols in which V winnings can occur. As a result, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to expect a small win of an open pattern that enables V winning, and a small win with a higher V winning rate can be expected. Since the player can play the game in anticipation of what will happen, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the configuration of the Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the ninth embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the ninth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 209, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 209, in the tenth embodiment, a lottery device 6755 is provided below the variable display device unit 80 instead of the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment. The difference is that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is deleted. Details of the lottery device 6755 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. FIG.

FIG. 210 is an enlarged front view around the lottery device 6755 on the game board 13 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 210, inside the lottery device 6755 in the tenth embodiment, a sorting rotator 6755f is provided instead of the sorting rotator 6750f in the ninth embodiment. The distribution rotator 6755f is provided with three V winning openings (central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3) and three out openings (central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3). Like the minute rotator 6750f, it is configured to always rotate at a constant speed. A game ball that reaches the distribution rotor 6755f is randomly distributed to one of the six ball entrances according to the timing of winning a small hit, etc., so that the game ball that reaches the distribution rotor 6755f enters the V winning opening. The distribution probability (proportion) is 1/2 (3/6).

Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the lottery device 6755 has a small winning attacker 6755a capable of opening and closing the lottery device 6755, an ejection area 6755d for ejecting game balls to the outside, and an ejection area 6755 that opens and closes. A ball discharge door 6755c for this purpose and a ball stopping portion 6755e for temporarily stopping a game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6755c in the guiding flow path 6755b are provided. These small winning attacker 6755a, ejection area 6755d, ball ejection door 6755c, and ball stopper 6755e are the small winning attacker 6750a, ejection area 6750d, and ball ejection provided in the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment, respectively. Since it is configured to have the same functions as the door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 210, at a predetermined position between the small hit attacker 6755a inside the lottery device 6755 and the discharge area 6755d, a game ball is placed in a different direction (downward) from the distribution rotor 6755f. and a guidance channel 6755b2 that can flow down, and two ball entrances (right V winning mouth 6755bV, and right out mouth 6755bO), an upper opening/closing door 6755bU capable of opening and closing the upper end of the guide channel 6755b2, and a lower opening/closing door 6755bD capable of opening and closing the upper side of the right V winning opening 6755bV. The peripheral structure of this guiding channel 6755b2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 211(a) is an enlarged front view of the guide channel 6755b2 and its surroundings when both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are closed, and FIG. FIG. 211(c) is an enlarged front view of the guide channel 6755b2 and its surroundings in a state in which the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed, and FIG. 211(c) is a state in which both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and lower opening/closing door 6755bD are opened is an enlarged front view of the periphery of the guide channel 6755b2 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), when both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU so that it can pass through. . As a result, the game ball entered into the lottery device 6755 passes over the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and flows down toward the distribution rotor 6755f. In addition, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed, the game ball can flow into the guidance flow path 6755b2, and the game that has flowed in It becomes impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the right V winning hole 6755bV. Further, as shown in FIG. 210(b), the lower opening/closing door 6755bD slopes downward toward the right outlet 6755bO in the closed state. As a result, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is opened, and the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6755 with the lower opening/closing door 6755bD closed flows into the guide passage 6755b2 whose upper end is open, and is closed. As a result of being guided in the direction of the right out port 6755bO by the inclination formed by the upper surface of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball enters the right out port 6755bO.

Also, as shown in FIG. 210(c), the right V winning port 6755bV is arranged directly below the guide channel 6755b2, while the right out port 6755bO is located on the left side of the guide channel 6755b2 in the downward direction. is provided at a branched position. Therefore, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 in a state in which both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are opened flows down along the flow direction of the guide flow path 6755b2, and flows down to the right V. Enter the winning hole 6755bV.

In this way, the lottery device 6755 of the tenth embodiment distributes game balls that have flowed into the lottery device 6755 according to the combination of opening and closing of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD. The state of flowing down to the side (see FIG. 211(a)), the state of flowing down to the right out port 6755bO (see FIG. 211(b)), and the state of flowing down to the right V winning port 6755bV can be switched. can. That is, the downstream direction in which V winning occurs at a rate of 1/2 (the direction in which the distribution rotator 6755f is provided), the downstream direction in which V winning is impossible (difficult) (the direction of the right outlet 6755bO), It is possible to switch the flowing direction (the direction of the right V winning opening 6755bV) in which the V winning is confirmed (becomes easier). Therefore, since the game can be played while paying more attention to the flowing direction of the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although details will be described later, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, V winning by entering the ball into one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 When is generated, the possibility of a time-saving jackpot is higher than when V winning is generated by entering the ball into the right V winning opening 6755bV. More specifically, when the game ball enters the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 during the small winning game of the second special pattern, the right V winning while winning the 16 round short time jackpot at a rate of 100% When the ball enters the mouth 6755bV, it is configured so that only a little less than 40% will be a time-saving jackpot. By configuring in this way, when the second special pattern is a small hit, the ball can be entered into any one of the center V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 rather than entering the right V winning opening 6755bV. can be played with a stronger expectation of Therefore, in particular, when the game ball flows down toward the distribution rotor 6755f during the execution of the second special symbol small winning game (that is, the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, or the central out opening 6755fo1 to 6755fo3 When it is determined that the game ball is distributed to any of the above), it is possible to make the player strongly desire to win the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 212, the configuration of the distribution rotor 6755f in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a top view of the distribution rotor 6755f in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the distribution rotor 6755f in the tenth embodiment has six along the outer peripheral portion, similar to the distribution rotor 6750 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 189(a)). An entrance is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212, the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and the central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3 are arranged so that the V winning openings and the out openings are alternately adjacent to each other. Since the distribution rotator 6755f continues to rotate at a constant speed in a certain direction with the axis 6755fz as the rotation axis, the game ball that reaches the distribution rotator 6755f is sent to each ball entrance at an equal rate. distributed. That is, the rate (probability) of the game ball entering the V winning hole is 1/2 (3/6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, operation patterns of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c when the special symbol lottery results in a small win will be described. Here, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is won, only the opening and closing operation mode (opening pattern) of the small hit attacker 6755a is changed according to the type of the small hit, and other operating modes (upper opening and closing The operation patterns of the door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c) are configured to be common regardless of the small hit type. In FIG. 213, the operation mode of the portion other than the small hit attacker 6755a, which is common regardless of the small hit type, will be described. In addition, the release pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a for each small hit type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing temporal changes (operation patterns) of the opening/closing states of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball ejection door 6755c during execution of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 213, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is set to an open state as an initial state, and switches to a closed state when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. That is, it switches to a state in which the game ball can flow down in the direction of the distribution rotor 6755f. This closed state continues for 0.2 seconds (that is, continues until 0.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win), and switches to the open state when 0.2 seconds have passed since switching to the closed state. After that, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is maintained in an open state from the start of the small win until 2 seconds have passed, and is switched to a closed state again from the time of 2 seconds to the time of 3 seconds. Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the state is switched to the open state again, and thereafter the open state is maintained until the end of the small win. That is, the gaming ball that entered the lottery device 6755 between the time of 0.2 seconds and 0.4 seconds after the start of the small win and the time of 2 seconds and 3 seconds, The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the closed upper opening and closing door 6755bU and flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f side (see FIG. 211 (a)), and enters the lottery device 6755 during other periods It flows into the guide channel 6755b2 and is guided to the right V winning port 6755bV or the right out port 6755bO (see FIGS. 211(b) and (c)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 213, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is set to the closed state as the initial state, and the closed state is maintained for 0.6 seconds after the start of the small win. Then, when 0.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the state is switched to the open state. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the guide channel 6755b2 can enter the right V winning port 6755bV. The open state of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds, and switches to the closed state when 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win. After that, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is kept closed until 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win, and is switched to the open state again at the time when 3 seconds have elapsed. This open state continues for one second. That is, the open state continues until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and the state is switched to the closed state at the time of 4 seconds from the start of the small win. After that, the closed state is maintained until the small winning ends.

By combining the operation patterns of these upper opening/closing door 6755bU and lower opening/closing door 6755bD, a state in which the game ball is guided to the right out port 6755bO for 0.2 seconds from the start of the jackpot (see FIG. 211 (b)) becomes. That is, for 0.2 seconds from the start of the small hit, even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the V winning opening (V impossible period ). Then, when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit and the upper open door 6755bU is switched to the closed state, the game ball is guided to the distribution rotator 6755f (see FIG. 211(a)). As described above, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotator 6755f is distributed to one of the V winning openings at a rate of 1/2, so that 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and the lottery device It is a period during which game balls entering 6755 are V-winning at a rate of 1/2 (V-winning rate 50% period). This V winning rate 50% period continues until 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small winning, and when 0.4 seconds have elapsed, it switches to a V disabled period.

The V disabled period continues until 0.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and when 0.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the lower door 6755bD is opened while the upper door 6755bU is kept open. is released. As a result, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV (see FIG. 211(c)). In other words, the game balls entering the lottery device 6755 are V winning at a rate of almost 100% (V winning rate 100% period). This V winning rate 100% period continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed, thereby switching to the V disabled period again. This V disabled period continues until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is closed at the time of 2 seconds from the start of the small win, so that 1 second is reached until 3 seconds have passed after the start of the small win. During , it switches to the V winning rate 50% period. Then, when 3 seconds have passed after the start of the small win, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is opened, thereby switching to the V winning rate 100% period. This V winning rate 100% period continues until 4 seconds after the start of the small hit (that is, 1 second), and when 1 second elapses, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed to enter the V disabled period. switch. After that, the V disabled period is maintained until the small win is finished.

In this way, during execution of the small winning game, the V disabled period, the V winning rate 50% period, and the V winning rate 100% period are switched. The V winning rate can be varied. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to the timing when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 213, the ball stopping portion 6755e is maintained in a closed state until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and at the time of 5 seconds (the second V winning rate 50% period is After that, it is switched to an open state (a state in which the guide channel 6755b can flow down) from the time when 2 seconds have passed) to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6755c is kept closed until 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and when 4.5 seconds have passed (the second V winning rate 50% period has passed) After that, it is switched to the open state from the time point of 1.5 seconds) to the end of the small win, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small win. That is, for 4.5 seconds after the start of the small win, both the ball stopping portion 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are closed. All game balls that enter the ball and pass through the upper surface of the closed upper opening/closing door 6755bU are stopped in the guiding flow path 6755b by the ball stopper 6755e.

In addition, when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stopper 6755e closed, so that the ball is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6755e. All game balls other than the one game ball that is present fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if a plurality of game balls flowed into the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate period of 50%, after the ball discharge door 6755e was opened, the game stopped inside the lottery device 6755. It is possible to have only one ball at maximum. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball ejection door 6755c is opened, the ball stop portion 6755e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 is directed toward the distribution rotor 6755f. flow down By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then opening the ball stop part 6755e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, Also, the second and subsequent game balls can be ejected to the outside from the ejection area 6755d until the ball stop portion 6755e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotor 6755f in one small hit can be limited to one at most, the game balls entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period. The V winning rate in each case can be fixed (50%) each time.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, the operation of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c when winning a small win is performed regardless of the type of the small win. It is common. Thereby, only the operation of the small hit attacker 6755a may be changed according to the small hit type, so that the processing load at the time of winning the small hit can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the release pattern set for the small winning attacker 6755a when the first special symbol lottery results in a small winning in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, four types of different opening patterns are provided as opening patterns of the small winning attacker 6755a in the small winning of the first special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, the V winning rate pattern (see FIG. 214(a)), the V winning rate 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)), and the V winning rate 75% pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) and normal small winning patterns (see FIG. 214(d)).

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), when the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, the small hit attacker 6755a is activated for 1 second from the start of the small hit. kept closed. During this time, the game ball launched by hitting to the right is blocked by the closed small hit attacker 6755a and cannot enter the lottery device 6755. - 特許庁Then, when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the small hit, the small hit attacker 6755a is opened for 0.1 second. After 0.1 seconds have passed, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed. Since this 0.1 second period corresponds to the V disabled period, even if the game ball can be entered into the lottery device 6755, the prize ball for the entered ball (for example, 10 prize balls) can only be obtained, and the ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening.

The closed state after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed continues until 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small win. Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the small hit attacker 6755a is set to the open state for 1 second (that is, until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit). As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 100% for 3 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of the small winning. That is, both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are opened (see FIG. 211(c)). , the game ball is almost certainly entered into the right V prize opening 6755bV, and the jackpot is won. If the player continues hitting to the right during the small hit, the game ball can be easily entered into the lottery device 6755 during the open period of 1 second, so the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the open pattern. Then, the V prize is almost decided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(b), when the V winning rate 50% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small winning attacker 6755a, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds has passed is the same as the V winning fixed pattern. Become. That is, the attacker 6755a for small hits is opened only for 0.1 seconds from the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hits. Then, in the V winning rate 50% pattern, when 2 seconds have passed after the start of the small winning, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from 2 seconds after the start of the small hit until 3 seconds have passed, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed at the time of 3 seconds. During this one second period, one or more game balls can be easily entered into the lottery device 6755 by continuing to hit the game ball to the right at the shortest shooting interval (that is, 0.6 second interval). set as a period. After the small winning attacker 6755a is closed, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the end of the small winning. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period of 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the small win is the 50% V winning rate period. That is, both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are closed (see FIG. 211(a)). , 1 can be made to flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f. As described above, when the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6755f, it is distributed to the V winning opening at a rate of 1/2. The rate of occurrence is 50%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 214(c), when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds has passed is the V winning confirmation pattern or the V It is the same as the winning rate 50% pattern. That is, the attacker 6755a for small hits is opened only for 0.1 seconds from the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hits. Then, in the V winning rate 75% pattern, when 2.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small winning, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed at the time of 3.5 seconds. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the small win is a 50% V winning rate period, and 3 to 4 seconds is a 100% V winning rate period. That is, when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set, the first 0.5 second of the open period becomes the V winning rate 50% period, and the latter half 0.5 second of the open period becomes the V winning rate 100% period. Become. Therefore, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the first half of the 1-second open period, the V winning rate is 50%, while when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the latter half, the V winning rate is 100%. becomes. Therefore, when the 75% V winning rate pattern is set, the average V winning rate is 75% (50%*1/2+100%*1/2).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(c), when the normal small winning pattern is set, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds has passed is the V winning confirmation pattern, the V winning rate 50% pattern, Although it is the same as the V winning rate 75% pattern, after the opening period of 0.1 seconds is over, the small winning attacker 6755a is not opened until the small winning ends. Therefore, when the normal small winning pattern is set, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened only for a very short period of 0.1 seconds during the small winning effective period, and the game ball is lucky during the opening period. Even if the ball can enter the lottery device 6755, the ball enters the right outlet 6755bO. That is, no V prize is generated. Therefore, the normal small winning pattern is the opening pattern that is the most disadvantageous (less beneficial) for the player.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, one of the four types of open patterns with different V winning rates is used as the open pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a. It is configured to be set. In addition, at least until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, regardless of the opening pattern set for the small hit attacker 6755a, the common opening and closing operation (open only for 0.1 seconds after 1 second operation) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which release pattern is set until at least two seconds have passed since the start of the small win. V prize can be expected in the small hit type. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls in one small hit is set to one, and the small hit ends based on the detection of one game ball entering. was configured to be set. That is, the closing of the small winning attacker 6755a is set, and all the game balls entered into the lottery device 6755 until the small winning attacker 6755a is completely closed are placed in any of the lottery devices 6755. By entering and ejecting the ball into one of the ball entrances, the small winning is finished regardless of the elapsed time from the start of the small winning. Therefore, for example, when a right-handed game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the open period of 0.1 seconds, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed and entered. It is configured such that the small hit is finished when the game ball hit enters the right out port 6755bO. In other words, even if the open pattern (see FIGS. 214 (a) to (c)) that can win a V prize is set, during the open period of 0.1 seconds set at the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit If you let the game ball enter the ball, it is extremely disadvantageous that the small hit will end before reaching the V winning period (V winning rate 50% period and V winning rate 100% period) Situations can arise. On the other hand, when the normal small hit pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) is set, if the game ball is not entered during the open period of 0.1 seconds, then the small hit attacker 6755a is not released, and there is no chance of winning a prize ball. Therefore, if the player does not hit to the right in accordance with the 0.1 second release period, there is a possibility that the player will lose money. Therefore, when an opening pattern capable of winning a V prize is set, there is a high possibility that it is more advantageous for the player not to enter the game ball during the opening period of 0.1 seconds. When a normal small winning pattern is set in which V winning is impossible, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball during the open period of 0.1 seconds, so the small winning type ( A set opening pattern) can be predicted, and a playability can be realized in which the user selects whether or not to enter the ball into the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 second. That is, the player who is predicted to have an opening pattern capable of winning a V win is made to select waiting or hitting left so that the game ball does not enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 second. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player, who is predicted to have the pattern for normal small winning, hit to the right, aiming at the opening period of 0.1 second. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in all the small hit types, the operation for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit is common, but it is not limited to this. In some of the small wins that can win a V prize, the opening pattern of the small winning attacker 6755a that does not include the same operation mode as the normal small winning pattern may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a case in which a small win that can win a V prize can be quickly detected, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the release pattern of the small win attacker 6755a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the release pattern set for the small winning attacker 6755a when the second special symbol lottery results in a small winning in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, three different open patterns (open patterns A to C) are provided as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a in the small hit of the second special symbol.

In the tenth embodiment, when one or more game balls enter during the small hit, the small hit ends when the entered game ball is discharged, while the game ball In the case where the ball is not entered, the small winning is not finished until 8 seconds have elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the opening period of the attacker 6755a for a small hit in one small hit has not been detected, the small hit may be terminated at that point. By configuring in this way, although the game ball did not enter the lottery device 6755 (that is, there is no possibility of V winning), the small winning is continued until 8 seconds have passed since the small winning started. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the game is not terminated, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Conversely, it may be configured to set the end of the small hit according to the elapsed time from the time when the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small hit ends. More specifically, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small hit ends, the small win is forced (the game ball remains in the lottery device 6755 It is also possible to configure the configuration to end. In this case, during the period until the small winning is finished, the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period is sorted to one of the ball entrances by the sorting rotator 6755f. A period of time that is at least longer than the period in which the game ball is detected (detection of an incoming ball), and a period of time during which it is difficult to forcibly guide the game ball to the flow path (central route) on the distribution rotor 6755f side by a magnet or the like. should be set to By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress cheating of forcibly guiding the game ball to the sorting rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like. Here, since the game ball is usually made of a magnetic material (metal), the flowing direction of the game ball can be changed by bringing a magnet or the like close to the game ball flowing down the game area. It is possible to By utilizing this property, for example, a game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 is attracted by a magnet, and regardless of whether the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is closed or open, the magnetic force of the magnet guides the game ball. As a result, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of guiding the ball through the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c to the sorting rotor 6755f is performed. In particular, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotor 6755f enters the V winning opening, resulting in the most advantageous 16-round time-saving jackpot. In other words, if a magnet or the like is used to guide the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f for each small hit, the probability of winning the small hit is high (9/10) and the time saving state is the most advantageous. Such a 16-round time-saving jackpot is repeated endlessly, creating an extremely advantageous situation for the cheater. In other words, there is a possibility that the hole will suffer an unexpected disadvantage. On the other hand, in this modification, even if a game ball is forcibly guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like, the small hit is finished before the game ball enters any ball entrance. It is configured so that it can be stored away. That is, in a state in which the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is open, by attracting the game ball from the front side of the game board 13 with a magnet, the game ball is floated with respect to the guide flow path 6755b, and the upper opening/closing door 6755bU in the open state When a series of fraudulent acts such as forcibly passing above the ball discharge door 6755c is performed, normally (V winning rate 50% period) The game ball enters the lottery device 6755 and enters the distribution rotor 6755f When the game ball flows down), the period until it flows down to the distribution rotor 6755f is longer than that, so the game ball that reaches the distribution rotor 6755f due to fraud A small hit can be terminated before being distributed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

In addition, instead of ending the small hit after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the closing timing of the attacker 6755a for the small hit, after the lapse of the last V winning rate 50% period in the small hit After configuring to end the small hit (that is, after sharing the period from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit regardless of the type of the small hit), the V winning rate 50% period and the V By changing the order of the 100% winning rate period, it may be possible to prevent cheating by guiding the player to the sorting rotor 6755f by using a magnet or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the end condition of the small winning, so that the processing load can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 215(a), when the opening pattern A is set, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened along with the start of the small winning. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small winning attacker 6755a is closed when 0.6 seconds have passed after the start of the small winning. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. Since the opening time is relatively short at 0.6 seconds, even if the shortest firing interval (that is, 0.6 seconds interval) is executed to the right, the percentage of game balls entering is about 70%. . Also, it becomes extremely difficult to enter two or more game balls during the open period.

As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period from the start of the small win until 0.2 seconds has elapsed, and from the point at which 0.4 seconds have elapsed to the point at which 0.6 seconds have elapsed is set to the V-disabled period. On the other hand, the period from the time when 0.2 seconds have passed to the time when 0.4 seconds have passed is set to the period of 50% V winning rate. Therefore, ⅓ (0.2 s/0.6 s) of the ball entering the lottery device 6755 with the open pattern A set is during the V winning rate period of 50%. That is, the game balls entering the lottery device 6755 are distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f at a rate of 1/3, and V prizes are generated at a rate of 1/2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215(b), when the open pattern B is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state for 0.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, and 0.4 seconds. It switches to an open state for 0.6 seconds from the elapsed time to the elapsed time of 1 second, and after the elapsed time of 1 second, it is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small winning. As described above, from the time of 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds after the start of the small hit, and from the time of 0.8 seconds to 1 second, while it is set to the V impossible period, 0 From the point of time when 0.6 seconds have elapsed to the time of 0.8 seconds, the V winning rate is set to 100% period. Therefore, ⅓ (0.2 s/0.6 s) of the ball entering the lottery device 6755 with the open pattern B set is during the V winning rate 100% period. That is, at a rate of 1/3, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 enters the right V winning hole 6755bV to generate a V winning. In addition, as described above, if the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV in the case of a small hit of the second special symbol, the possibility of a time saving state is relatively low (less than 40%). It is On the other hand, as described above, when the ball is entered into the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot for the player is determined. Therefore, it can be said that the open pattern B, in which the ball can only be entered into the right V winning hole 6755bV, is a more disadvantageous open pattern than the open pattern A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215(c), when the open pattern C is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state for 0.2 seconds after the start of the small hit, and 0.2 seconds. During 0.6 seconds from the elapsed time until 0.8 seconds elapsed, it is switched to the open state, and after the lapse of 0.8 seconds, it is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small winning. As described above, from 0.2 seconds to 0.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, the V winning rate is set to 50% period, and from 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds , is set to the V-disabled period, and from the point in time when 0.6 seconds have elapsed to the point in time when 0.8 seconds have elapsed, the period is set to the V winning rate 100% period. Therefore, 1/3 (0.2 s/0.6 s) of the ball entering the lottery device 6755 with the open pattern C set is the ball entering during the period of 50% of the V winning rate. (0.2s/0.6s) is a ball entry during the period of 100% V winning rate. That is, since the opening pattern C is an opening pattern in which a V winning occurs in 2/3 of the cases where the ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is an advantageous opening pattern with a higher V winning rate than the other opening patterns.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, one of the three types of opening patterns is set, and the V winning rate is determined according to the opening pattern. Also, the types of V winning openings into which balls can enter are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the opening pattern (the operation of the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the lower opening and closing door 6755bD during the opening period) set in the small winning attacker 6755a at the time of the small winning. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, a characteristic effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the selection effect that is executed when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit in the tenth embodiment. As described above, in the 10th embodiment, as the small win of the first special symbol, a small win in which an open pattern that can win a V prize (see FIGS. 214 (a) to (c)) is set and a small win that cannot win a V prize (Difficult) open pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) is set with a small hit, but until at least 2 seconds have passed, the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (small hit attacker 6755a) are common, it becomes difficult to visually distinguish whether or not an opening pattern that allows a V prize is set. Therefore, it is unclear whether it would be particularly beneficial or detrimental to the player if a game ball is entered during the 0.1-second open period that is set while operating in the common open pattern. In other words, when an open pattern that allows V winning is set, if a game ball is entered during the open period of 0.1 seconds set in the V disabled period, the prize ball is given, Although it is a loss because the small winning is terminated, when the normal small winning pattern is set, if the game ball is entered during the open period of 0.1 second, the prize ball is awarded. Therefore, it is profitable for the player. The selection effect is a effect for allowing the player to select whether or not the game ball should be shot aiming at the release period of 0.1 seconds set while the common release pattern (operation mode) is being executed. .

As shown in FIG. 216, when the selection effect is executed, a display area HR8 in which characters "CHOOSE!!" In addition, on the left side of the center of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR9 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape in which the characters "low expectation for winning prize ball" and "medium expectation for V challenge" are displayed. In addition, an arrow image YG1 having a shape resembling a left-pointing arrow and displaying the characters “left shot” is displayed below the display area HR9. On the other hand, on the right side of the center of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR10 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape in which the characters "Medium expectation for winning a prize ball" and the characters "Low expectation for V challenge" are displayed. In addition, an arrow image YG2 having a shape resembling a right-pointing arrow and displaying characters “Right shot” is displayed below the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to grasp the merits and demerits of hitting left and the merits and demerits of hitting right. That is, when hitting left, a game ball cannot be entered during the open period of 0.1 seconds to obtain a prize ball, but the attacker 6755a for small hits is released during the period during which the V prize can be won. The player can be made to understand that there is a possibility (of executing the V-Challenge). Also, if you hit right, there is a possibility that you can get a prize ball by entering the game ball during the 0.1 second open period, but if an open pattern that allows V winning is set, can make the player understand that there is a possibility that the small winning will end without executing the V challenge (opening of the small winning attacker 6755a during the V winning period).

It should be noted that there are provided a plurality of types of selection effects with different expectations in which opening patterns that allow V prizes are set. That is, a plurality of types are provided in which the ratio selected when an open pattern that can win a V prize is set and the ratio selected when an open pattern for a normal small win is set (not shown) figure). As a result, the player can decide whether to hit the ball to the right or the ball to the left, taking into consideration the degree of expectation of the opening pattern that can win a V prize suggested by the selection effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the change over time of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the first special symbol lottery results in a small win will be described. FIG. 217(a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when winning a small win (V challenge small win) in which an opening pattern that allows V winning is set. In FIG. 217(a), an example will be described in which a small win in which a V winning rate of 50% pattern is set as the V challenge small win is won.

As shown in FIG. 217(a), when winning a small win in which the V winning rate 50% pattern is set, first, a variable display corresponding to the small win is started. After this variable display continues for 60 seconds, winning of a small win is reported, and a selection effect (see FIG. 216) is started. In other words, the selection effect is started at the time when the symbol corresponding to the small winning is fixedly displayed. This selection effect continues for a maximum of 3 seconds. That is, it continues until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win (until the common operation mode ends).

If the game ball does not enter the lottery device 6755 during the open period of 0.1 seconds set when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small win (that is, if the condition for ending the small win is not satisfied), During the V winning period, the small winning attacker 6755a is released, and the V challenge effect indicating that the V challenge effect has been executed is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in this V challenge effect, the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the lottery device 6755, so that the game goes to either the distribution rotator 6755f or the right V winning opening 6755bV. This is an effect that notifies that the ball can be reached. In other words, it is an effect for notifying that V winning occurs at a rate of at least 50%. When a game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755 in this V challenge effect and a V winning occurs, a big win is executed.

It should be noted that when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds by hitting to the right during execution of the selection effect, there is an effect to congratulate the winning of the prize ball. It is executed and the selection effect is terminated. That is, in the V challenge small hit, even if the execution of the V challenge is canceled by entering the game ball during the open period of 0.1 seconds, the normal small hit pattern is set. It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to distinguish from the case where the game ball enters. Therefore, even if the execution of the V-challenge was canceled, the player could hit the right hand by predicting that the normal small winning pattern was set, and the game ball could be entered as intended. can let Therefore, even if the V-challenge is canceled, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.

FIG. 217(b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the effect mode in the case of winning the normal small win in which the normal small win pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 217(b), when the normal small win is won, the variation display corresponding to the normal small win is started until 2 seconds pass after the start of the small win. is the same as in the case of winning the V challenge small hit. That is, the selection effect is executed after execution of the variable display effect for 60 seconds. The selection effect continues for 4 seconds on the condition that the entry of the game ball is not detected during the open period of 0.1 seconds (that is, the conditions for ending the small win are not satisfied). . That is, it is the same as the start timing of the small winning V challenge in which the V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214 (a)) is set with the longest period until the small winning attacker 6755a is released among the small winning V challenges. The selection effect continues to be executed until the timing of (4 seconds after the start of the small hit). Then, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, an effect for informing that the V challenge is not executed (that the V challenge was not won) is executed. As a result, the player who predicts that the V challenge is a small win and selects to hit to the left during the selection performance can continue to have expectations for the V challenge for a longer period of time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, the selection effect is started at the end of the small hit variation, and the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the selection effect. It is not limited. The timing of the selection effect and the open period may be set at earlier timing. Specifically, the selection performance is executed during fluctuation (before the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37), and the release period is set immediately after the start of the small win. may By configuring in this way, the small winning type is specified by identifying the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37, and the game ball is shot so that the game ball enters during the open period. Even if it is decided whether or not to hit, it is possible not to make it in time for the opening period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 to 220. FIG. Here, in the tenth embodiment, for the configuration of the ROM202 in the ninth embodiment described above (see FIG. 192 (a)), the first per random number table 202a, and the defined content of the small per type selection table 202ea The only difference is that there are some changes. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 218, the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218(a), in the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are stipulated as judgment values for judging a jackpot. (See 202a1 in FIG. 218(a)). It should be noted that, similarly to the ninth embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Of the 400 possible random numbers of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big win is 2, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol lottery is 1/200 (2 /400). In addition, "2 to 395" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 218 (a)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol "396 to 399" is defined as the value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 218(a)).

Of the 400 random numbers that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a small hit is 4, so the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1. /100 (4/400). Although the details will be described later, 60% of the small hits of the first special symbol are open patterns and are usually patterns for small hits (that is, even if a game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755, V winning can occur. open pattern) is set. That is, the V challenge small hit is 40% of the small hit of the first special symbol. That is, at a rate of 1/100, the opening operation for 0.1 second of the small winning attacker 6755a that enables the player to expect the V challenge small winning is executed, and the V challenge is executed in 40% of them. (That is, the small hit attacker 6755a is released at the timing when the V prize can be won). Therefore, the probability of the V challenge small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 1/250 (1/100×4/10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 218(a), "2 to 39" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 218(a)), and the second special symbol "40 to 399" is stipulated as the range of the judgment value judged to be a small hit (see 202a3 in FIG. 218(a)). Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 9/10 (360/400) as in the ninth embodiment. In addition, regarding the small hit of the second special symbol, in all the small hit types, it is configured so that the V winning period is included between the opening periods of the small hit attacker 6755a.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, similarly to the ninth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of winning a small hit with a high probability (9/10) when the second special symbol lottery is executed , Even when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a low probability (1/100). That is, even in the lottery for the first special symbol, which is mainly executed in the disadvantageous normal state, it is possible to expect the winning of a big win based on the V winning. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, as a small hit of the first special symbol, during the period in which V winning is possible (one or both of the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period) It is configured to provide a V challenge small win in which 6755a is opened and a normal small win in which the attacker for small win 6755a is opened only during a period in which V winning is impossible (difficult) (V impossible period). As a result, when a small win is won, the player can expect to win a V-challenge small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the tenth embodiment, the normal small hit and the V challenge small hit have a common operation mode of the opening and closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a in 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, after 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit, an operation mode is executed in which the small hit attacker 6755a is opened only for 0.1 second. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a normal small win or a V-challenge small win for at least 2 seconds after the notification of the winning of the small win. Therefore, even if the player usually wins the small prize, the player can continue to have expectations for the V challenge small prize for a predetermined period (two seconds) from the start of the small prize. Therefore, every time a small win is won, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 218 (b), the details of small hit classification selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment are explained. FIG.218(b) is the figure which showed the structure of small hit classification selection table 202ea in the 10th Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218(b), the small hit type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment is referred to determine the small hit type when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. A special figure 1 small winning table 202ea1 and a special figure 2 small winning table 202ea2 referred to for determining a small winning type when a small winning is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol are provided. First, with reference to FIG. 219, the details of the special figure 1 small per table 202ea1 will be described.

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special figure 1 small per table 202ea1 described above. As shown in FIG. 219, the table 202ea1 for the special figure 1 small hit, in association with the range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, the determined small hit type is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit A14" as the small hit type for the range of "0, 1". (See 202ea1a in FIG. 219). This "small hit A14" is a small hit type in which a V winning prize confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214(a)) is set as the release pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win A14", a "big win E14" is won. "Jackpot E14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. Therefore, the "small win A14" can almost certainly generate a V winning prize by simply hitting the game ball to the right during the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small win and entering the game ball into the lottery device 6755. , V winning is a small hit type in which an advantageous time-saving state is given after a big hit.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit A14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining "small winning A14" when winning is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit B14" as the small hit type for the range of "2, 3" (of FIG. 219 202ea1b). This "small hit B14" is a small hit type in which a V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214(a)) is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, similarly to the "small hit A14". Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win B14", the "big win F14" is won. "Big win F14" is a big win type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the big win is set to a normal state of disadvantageous normal symbols. Therefore, the "small win B14" can almost certainly generate a V prize by simply hitting the game ball to the right during the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small win and entering the game ball into the lottery device 6755. This is a small win type in which a disadvantageous normal state is given after a big win when a V winning occurs. Therefore, "small hit B14" is a small hit type more disadvantageous than "small hit A14".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit B14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining "small winning B14" when winning is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C14" as the small hit type for the range of "4 to 9" (of FIG. 219 202ea1c). This "small win C14" is a small win type in which a V winning rate 75% pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) is set as the release pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V winning occurs in this "small win C14", a "big win E14" (5 round short-time big win) is won. Therefore, "small win C14" is set to "small win A14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set, and an open pattern in which V winning is less likely to occur than "small win B14" is set, but V winning has occurred. In the case, it is a small hit type that gives an advantageous time saving state after the big hit. Therefore, "small hit C14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" or "small hit B14" as an opening pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a (V prize becomes difficult). In addition, it is more advantageous than "small win B14" in terms of the game state that is set after the big win when a V win occurs.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 6 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit C14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining the "minor winning C14" when winning is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit D14" as the small hit type for the range of "10 to 15" (of FIG. 219 202ea1d). This "small hit D14" is a small win type in which a V prize rate of 75% pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Also, when a V win occurs in this "small win D14", a "big win F14" (5-round normal big win) is won. Therefore, "small win D14" is set to "small win A14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set, or an open pattern in which V winning is less likely to occur than "small winning B14" is set, and V winning occurs. If you do, it is a small hit type in which a disadvantageous normal state is given after the big hit. Therefore, "small hit D14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" or "small hit B14" as an opening pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a (V prize becomes difficult). In addition, the aspect of the game state that is set after the big win when the V winning occurs is also the most disadvantageous.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 6 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit D14", so the first special symbol lottery The ratio of determining the "minor winning D14" when winning is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit E14" as the small hit type for the range of "16 to 27" (of FIG. 219 202ea1e). This "small hit E14" is a small hit type in which a V prize rate of 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)) is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win E14", a "big win E14" (5 round short time big win) is won. Therefore, the "small hit E14" includes "small hit A14" and "small hit B14" in which the V winning pattern is set, and "small hit C14" and "small hit C14" in which the V winning rate 75% pattern is set. Although an open pattern is set in which V winning is less likely to occur than "Hit D14", when V winning occurs, it is a small winning type in which an advantageous time-saving state is given after a big win. Therefore, "small hit E14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" to "small hit D14" as an opening pattern for the small hit attacker 6755a (V prize becomes difficult). On the other hand, it is most advantageous in terms of the game state that is set after the big win when the V winning occurs.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 12 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit E14". The ratio of determining "small winning E14" when winning is 12% (12/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit F14" as the small hit type for the range of "28 to 39" (of FIG. 219 202ea1f). This "small win F14" is a small win type in which a V winning rate 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)) is set as the release pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small win F14", a "big win F14" (5-round normal big win) is won. Therefore, the "small hit F14" includes "small hit A14" and "small hit B14" in which the V winning confirmation pattern is set, and "small hit C14" and "small hit C14" in which the V winning rate 75% pattern is set. This is a small winning type in which an opening pattern is set in which V winning is less likely to occur than "Hit D14", and a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after a big winning when V winning occurs. Therefore, "small hit F14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" to "small hit D14" as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (V prize becomes difficult). In addition, it is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state that is set after the big win when a V winning occurs. In other words, "small hit F14" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the opening pattern set in the small hit attacker 6755a among the V challenge small wins, and in terms of the game state after the big win when the V winning occurs. It is a small hit type.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 12 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit F14". The ratio of determining "small hit F14" when it hits is 12% (12/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit G14" as the small hit type for the range of "40 to 99" (of FIG. 219 202ea1g). This "small hit G14" is a small hit type in which a normal small hit pattern (see FIG. 214(d)) is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Therefore, it is almost impossible to win a V prize during the small prize valid period. Although it is extremely difficult for a V winning to occur, if a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win G14", it becomes a "big win E14" (5 round short time big win).

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 60 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit G14". The ratio of determining "small winning G14" when winning is 60% (60/100).

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, as the V challenge small hit of the first special symbol, a plurality of types of small win types with different V winning rates are provided. That is, "small win A14" and "small win B14" where the V winning rate is 100%, "small win C14" and "small win D14" where the V winning rate is 75%, and the V winning rate is 50%. "Small win E14" and "Small win F14" are provided. With such a configuration, the player can expect to win a small prize with a higher V winning rate, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the V challenge small win, "small win G14" (normal It is configured to provide a small hit). As a result, when a small win is won, the player can expect to win a V-challenge small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that, in the tenth embodiment, the normal small winning and the V challenge small winning have a common operation mode of the opening and closing operation of the small winning attacker 6755a in 2 seconds after the start of the small winning. That is, after 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit, an operation mode is executed in which the small hit attacker 6755a is opened only for 0.1 second. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a normal small win or a V-challenge small win for at least 2 seconds after the notification of the winning of the small win. Therefore, even if the player usually wins the small prize, the player can continue to have expectations for the V challenge small prize for a predetermined period (two seconds) from the start of the small prize. Therefore, every time a small win is won, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the details of the special figure 2 small winning table 202ea2 described above will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this special figure 2 small per table 202ea2. As shown in FIG. 220, in this special figure 2 small hit table 202ea2, six kinds of small hit types of "small hit H14" to "small hit M14" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit H14" for the range of "0 to 12" (see 202ea2a in FIG. 220). This "small hit H14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern A (see FIG. 215(a)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out port 6755bO or reaches the distribution rotor 6755f. An opening pattern is set. When a V winning occurs in the "small hit H14", a different big winning type is won according to the type of the V winning hole into which the ball is entered. More specifically, when a ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV and a V winning occurs, a "jackpot G14" is won. This "jackpot G14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a game ball enters one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 (that is, enters the V winning opening provided in the distribution rotator 6755f), V winning occurs. wins the "jackpot I14". This "jackpot I14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is set to an advantageous time-saving state. That is, since the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the end of the big win is also advantageous, it is the most advantageous jackpot type. In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, when the second special symbol is a small hit and the game ball enters one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 during the valid period of the small win, It is configured to win the "big win I14" regardless of the small win type. Therefore, when a game ball flows down to the distribution rotator 6755f, the most advantageous jackpot is won at a rate of 50%. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the opening pattern A, since the small winning attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV, basically the V winning is "small winning H14". If it occurs, it is a V prize for one of the central V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win H14", basically the most advantageous "jackpot I14" is won.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit H14" is 13, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The percentage of winning the "small winning H14" when winning is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit I14" for the range of "13 to 25" (see 202ea2b in FIG. 220). This "small hit I14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out port 6755bO or the right V winning port 6755bV. An open pattern with is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning port 6755bV in "small win I14", "big win G14" (10 round short time big win) is won in the same way as "small win H14". In addition, in the open pattern B, since the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, basically "small hit I14" V winning occurs If it does, it is a V prize for the right V prize opening 6755bV. That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win I14", basically "big win G14" (10 round short time big win) is won.

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit I14" is 13, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The percentage of winning the "small winning I14" when winning is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit J14" for the range of "26 to 38" (see 202ea2c in FIG. 220). This "small hit J14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern C (see FIG. 215(c)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it enters the right out port 6755bO, the right V winning port 6755bV, or An open pattern is set with a possibility of reaching the distribution rotor 6755f. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning hole 6755bV in "small win J14", "big win G14" (10 round short time big win) is won in the same way as "small win H14" and "small win I14". In addition, in the opening pattern C, even at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, the small hit attacker 6755a is opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. . That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win J14", there is a possibility of a "big win G14" or a "big win I14".

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit J14" is 13, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The percentage of winning the "small winning J14" when winning is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit K14" for the range of "39 to 58" (see 202ea2d in FIG. 220). This "small hit K14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern A (see FIG. 215(a)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out port 6755bO or reaches the distribution rotor 6755f. An opening pattern is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V prize opening 6755bV in the "small hit K14", the "big hit H14" is won. This "jackpot H14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a normal state of a disadvantageous normal pattern is set after the jackpot is finished. In addition, in the opening pattern A, since the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the ball can be entered into the right V winning opening 6755bV, basically when the V prize occurs with "small hit K14" is a V prize for one of the central V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. That is, when a V winning occurs during the small winning validity period of "small winning K14", basically "big winning I14" (16 round short time big winning) is won.

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit K14" is 20, so the second special symbol lottery The percentage of winning the "small winning K14" when winning is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit L14" for the range of "59 to 79" (see 202ea2e in FIG. 220). This "small hit L14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out port 6755bO or the right V winning port 6755bV. An open pattern with is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning port 6755bV in the "small win L14", the "big win H14" (10 round normal big win) is won in the same way as the "small win K14". In addition, in the open pattern B, since the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, basically "small hit L14" V winning occurs If it does, it is a V prize for the right V prize opening 6755bV. That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win L14", basically "big win H14" (10 round normal big win) is won. Therefore, the "small win L14" is a small win type that is disadvantageous to the player when the V winning occurs (the time saving state ends).

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit L14" is 21, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The percentage of winning the "small win L14" when winning is 21% (21/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit M14" for the range of "80 to 99" (see 202ea2f in FIG. 220). This "small hit M14" is a small hit type in which the open pattern C (see FIG. 215(c)) is set as the open pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it enters the right out port 6755bO, the right V winning port 6755bV, or An open pattern is set with a possibility of reaching the distribution rotor 6755f. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning port 6755bV in the "small win M14", a "big win H14" (10 round normal big win) is won in the same way as the "small win K14" and "small win L14". In addition, in the opening pattern C, even at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, the small hit attacker 6755a is opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. . That is, when a V winning occurs during the validity period of the "small win M14", there is a possibility of a "big win H14" or a "big win I14".

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit M14" is 20, so the second special symbol lottery is small. The ratio of winning the "small win M14" when winning is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, a different big hit type is won according to the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball enters. That is, when the game ball enters one of the center V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the most advantageous "jackpot I14" is determined, while when the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV , a relatively advantageous "jackpot G14" or a disadvantageous "jackpot H14". In addition, the ratio of "jackpot H14" (that is, "small hit K14" ~ It is configured so that the ratio of winning any of the "small hits M14") is higher. As a result, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player receives a V prize only at a rate of 50% compared to entering the right V prize opening 6755bV. It is possible to provide novel playability in which the player expects the game ball to reach the rotator 6755f. Therefore, every time a game ball enters the lottery device 6755, the game can be played while paying attention to the flowing direction of the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is configured to win a small prize with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100) when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. As a result, even in the normal state of normal symbols in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left, the game can be played in anticipation of a small win in the lottery of the special symbols. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, a plurality of types with different V winning percentages are provided as small hits of the first special symbols. That is, there are provided V challenge small wins with V winning rates of 100%, 75%, and 50%, and normal small wins in which V winning is impossible (difficult). As a result, when a player wins a small prize, the player can play the game expecting that a small prize type corresponding to a higher V winning rate will be determined, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can be done. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the first special symbol is a small hit, regardless of the small hit type, the opening and closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit is common. is becoming With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which type of small win is being executed until at least two seconds have passed since the start of the small win. Even when the winning is executed, the expectation for the V-challenge small winning can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is predicted whether or not it is a V challenge small win, and the shooting direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. It is configured to execute a selection effect to be varied by the player. That is, when the current small win is a normal small win, the game ball is sent to the lottery device 6755 by hitting right while the common operation mode is being executed for 2 seconds after the start of the small win. While it is possible to win a prize ball by hitting the left ball, it is not possible to win a prize ball by hitting left. On the other hand, if the small hit of this time is the V challenge small hit, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 by hitting right while the common operation mode is being executed, that At this point, the condition for ending the small win (that one or more game balls enter the game) is established, and the small win ends without executing the V-challenge. On the other hand, while the common operation mode is being executed in the V challenge small win (that is, during the execution of the selection effect), if the left hand is hit, the small win is terminated until the V challenge starts. never. Therefore, in the normal small hit, there is an advantage that it is possible to win the prize ball by hitting the right during the selection effect, whereas in the V challenge small hit, by hitting the left during the selection effect , there is an advantage that the V-challenge can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with novel game characteristics such as predicting the type of small hit and shooting the game ball in the direction corresponding to the prediction.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in the normal small hit and the V challenge small hit, the opening operation of the small hit attacker 6755a is common between the two seconds after the start of the small hit, for only 0.1 seconds Although it was configured to open the attacker 6755a, it is not limited to this, and as long as the small winning attacker 6755a is opened during the period when V winning is impossible (difficult), it is optional as a common operation mode may be set. For example, as a common operation mode, it may be configured to set the opening operation for 0.5 seconds from the time point of 0.8 seconds after the start of the small winning. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the common operation mode. can win prize balls.

In the tenth embodiment, in the lottery device 6755, the operation pattern of each part other than the small hit attacker 6755a is common regardless of the small hit type, but is not limited to this, depending on the small hit type. Therefore, the operation pattern of each part may be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation for each small hit type, so that the degree of freedom of the operation at the time of winning the small hit can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, when one or more game balls enter during the small hit, the small hit ends when the entered game ball is discharged, while the game ball In the case where the ball is not entered, the small winning is not finished until 8 seconds have elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the opening period of the attacker 6755a for the small hit in one small hit is completed, if the entering ball of the game ball is not detected, the small hit may be terminated at that time. By configuring in this way, even though the game ball did not enter the lottery device 6755 (that is, there is no possibility of V winning), the small hit is continued until 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the game is not terminated, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

<First Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a small win, the game ball enters one of the V winning openings provided inside the lottery device 6755. It was configured to win the jackpot. In addition, in the second special pattern small win, the degree of expectation for the time saving state after the big win is different depending on the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball enters. That is, when the second special pattern becomes a small hit and the game ball enters one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and wins the big hit, regardless of the small hit type, it is always time saving after the end of the big hit. While the state is set, when the ball enters the right V winning port 6755bV and wins the jackpot, the time saving state is set only at a rate of 39% (that is, when the small hit is H14 to J14). It was configured. That is, in the small hit of the second special symbol, the game ball reaching the distribution rotator 6755f is more pleasing to the player than entering the right V winning opening 6755bV. In addition, since the opening period of the small hit of the second special symbol is as short as 0.6 seconds, it is configured so that one game ball is entered at most.

On the other hand, in this modification, in a part of the small hit of the second special symbol, after the small hit attacker 6755a is released during the period in which the game balls are distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV, Also during the period in which the game ball is guided to the minute rotator 6755f, a special release pattern is set in which the small hit attacker 6755a is released again. In addition, a delay device 6755b3 for delaying the flow speed of the game ball is provided in the middle of the flow path leading to the right V winning opening 6755bV, and the game ball is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV in the special opening pattern. and the period during which the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f, the game ball is distributed to any of the ball entrances by the distribution rotor 6755f. The delay period by the delay device 6755b3 is set so that the game ball flows down to the right V winning opening 6755bV after being caught. As a result, if the player is not distributed to any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 by the distribution rotator 6755f (that is, if the player is distributed to any of the central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3) ), it is possible to recognize that the game ball will enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, which has a low expectation in the time saving state, so pay more attention to the type of ball entering hole distributed by the distribution rotator 6755f. You can play games. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, the configuration of the lottery device 6755 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is an enlarged front view around the guide channel 6755b2 of the lottery device 6755 in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 221, the guide flow path 6755b2 in the first modified example is between the lower opening/closing door 6755bD and the right V winning opening 6755bV. A delay device 6755b3 is provided for lengthening (delaying) the period until the gaming ball entering the lottery device 6755 during the % period reaches the right V winning opening 6755bV. This delay device 6755b3 is composed of known Kroon means. In other words, after passing through the lower opening/closing door 6755bD and entering from the left side of the delay device 6755b3, the game ball continues to circle the inner wall portion for about 8 seconds, and then enters the right V through the passage opening provided in the center. It is configured to drop towards mouth 6755bV. Note that, as shown in FIG. 221, the upper right side of the guide channel 6755b2 forms a downward slope toward the left side of the delay device 6755b3. As a result, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 and passed through the lower opening/closing door 6755bD during the 100% V winning rate period can be reliably dropped to the left of the delay device 6755b3. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the lower opening/closing door 6755bD from directly passing through the opening of the delay device 6755b3 (the downflow of the game ball cannot be delayed). As a result, a small win is executed in which a special opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the small winning attacker 6755a is opened during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period) is set, and the V winning rate is 100. When the player enters the game ball into the lottery device 6755 in both the % period and the V winning rate 50% period, the game ball is surely distributed by the distribution rotator 6755f. , the game ball can enter the right V winning port 6755bV. Therefore, when the special release pattern is set, it is possible to provide a game property that makes the user expect more strongly that the game balls are distributed to one of the V winning openings by the distribution rotor 6755f. That is, before entering the right V winning opening 6755bV, which has a low expectation of winning the time saving jackpot, the center V winning opening 6755fv1 ~ where the winning of the 16 round time saving jackpot (jackpot I14) is confirmed at the time of entering the ball. It is possible to realize the playability that makes the player strongly desire to enter the game ball into any one of 6755fv3. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game when the special release pattern is set.

It should be noted that the board surface configuration other than the guiding flow path 6755b2 is the same as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, details of the special open pattern in the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. This special open pattern is for a small hit when it becomes a special small hit selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1% of the small hit of the second special symbol) among the small hits of the second special symbol. It is set as an open pattern for the attacker 6755a. As shown in FIG. 222, when the special opening pattern is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state for 0.4 seconds from the start of the small hit, and 0 from the start of the small hit. When 4 seconds have passed, the small winning attacker 6755a is released. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed when 1 second has passed after the start of the small hit. This closed state continues until 2 seconds after the start of the small win. That is, the special opening pattern operates exactly the same as the above-described opening pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) for 2 seconds after the start of the small win. In other words, the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 during 0.4 seconds to 1 second after the start of the small hit flows down to the right V winning opening 6755bV at a rate of 1/3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222, in the special opening pattern, when 2 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small hit, the attacker 6755a for the small hit is opened for 0.5 seconds, and 2.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit. At that time, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed again. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period of 2 to 2.5 seconds after the start of the small win is set to the 50% V winning rate period. A game ball entering 6755 passes through the upper surface of the closed upper opening/closing door 6755bU and is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f. That is, at a rate of 50%, it is distributed to one of the center V winning openings, and the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot is won. In addition, as described above, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the 100% V winning rate period, the arrival at the right V winning opening 6755bV is delayed by the delay device 6755b3. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during both the V winning rate period of 100% and the V winning rate period of 50%, the distribution of the game ball by the distribution rotor 6755f is completed first. After that, the game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the center V winning opening by the distribution rotator 6755f, while winning the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot, it is distributed to the central out opening by the distribution rotator 6755f. In this case, a jackpot is won based on the entry of the ball into the right V winning port 6755bV, which has a low expectation that the time saving state is given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of the ball entrance sorted by the sorting rotator 6755f, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Thus, in the first modified example, in a part of the second special symbol small winning, the special winning attacker 6755a is opened during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period. An open pattern is set, and the V winning rate is set to 50% before the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 reaches the right V winning port 6755bV during the V winning rate 100% period. A game ball entered during the period is distributed to one of the entry holes. In other words, when a game ball enters both the V winning rate period of 100% and the V winning rate of 50% period, first, after the game ball is sorted by the sorting rotor 6755f, the right V winning rate is completed. It is configured such that the game ball enters the opening 6755bV. In other words, after the result of whether or not the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot is won (distributed to the central V winning opening by the distribution rotator 6755f) is obtained, the ball is entered into the right V winning opening 6755bV. It consists of The big hit based on the ball entering the right V winning opening 6755bV has a low expectation that the time saving state will be given (for example, the rate of 39%), so the player is given the center V winning opening by the distribution rotator 6755f. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes players play with a strong desire to be distributed to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first modification, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period in one small hit, the distribution rotation is performed first. After the game balls have been distributed by the body 6755f, the flow speed of the game balls toward the right V winning opening 6755bV is delayed so that the game balls reach the right V winning opening 6755bV. It doesn't have to be a small hit. While the game ball is delayed by the delay device 6755b3, the small win is terminated and the next variation and small win can be started, so that the right V winning opening 6755bV is reached across a plurality of small wins. An operation may be realized in which the sorting by the sorting rotor 6755f is completed before it is done. By configuring in this way, there is no need to provide a small win for which a special opening pattern is set (similarly by winning a small win for which opening pattern A is set after the small winning for which opening pattern B is set operation can be realized), the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the first modified example, the jackpot type is determined based on the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball first entered during the small hit valid period, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot type may be determined based on the type of the V winning hole into which the game ball entered last in one small hit valid period. By configuring in this way, even if the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f after entering the right V winning port 6755bV earlier during the effective period of one small hit, the distribution rotor 6755f distributes to the center V prize opening, so that the most advantageous 16-round short-time jackpot can be won. In other words, it is possible to realize the same gameplay as in the above-described first modification without providing the delay device 6755b3. As a result, the board configuration of the game board 13 can be simplified, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when a game ball entering the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate period of 50% is distributed to the central out port by the distribution rotator 6755f, There was no chance of winning the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the second modification, even when the game balls are distributed to the central out port by the distribution rotor 6755f, the jackpot can be won.

A second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223(a) is a top view showing a portion of the guide channel 6755b of the lottery device 6755 on the right side of the ball discharge door 6755c. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the guidance flow path 6755b in the second modification branches into a front side and a back side in a front view at a portion between the ball discharge door 6755c and the upper opening/closing door 6755bU. ing. Also, the branch point is provided with a distribution member 6755g for distributing game balls to either the front side flow path or the back side flow path in a front view. This distribution member 6755g is normally placed in a state that guides the game ball to the front side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 223(b)). For example, only for 0.1 seconds), it is configured to be variable to an arrangement (see FIG. 223(a)) that allows game balls to be distributed to the back channel.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 223(a), a V passage opening 6755h through which a game ball can pass is provided in the passage on the back side in the front view of the guide passage 6755b. This V passing port 6755h is configured to have the same functions as various V prize winning ports provided in the lottery device 6755 . Namely, when the game ball passes through the V passing port 6755h during the small winning effective period, the winning is won.

In this way, for a predetermined period of time during the V winning rate period of 50%, by configuring the game ball to pass through the channel on the side where the V passing port 6755h is provided, it is possible to pass through the V passing port 6755h. Even if it reaches the distribution rotator 6755f later and is distributed to the central out port, after the small prize is finished, the jackpot that has already been won by passing through the V passage port 6755h is started. can be done. That is, when the jackpot is distributed to the central outlet, the player can be made to think that he or she has not won the jackpot, and then the jackpot can be started, which brings great surprise and joy to the player. can hold Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that it is configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize which of the branched flow paths the game ball has passed through, for example, by decoration. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the jackpot has already been won by passing through the V passing port 6755h. Regardless, the player can be more surely surprised when the winning of the jackpot is announced. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Although not shown in the figure, when the game ball was distributed to the center out port after passing through the V passage port 6755h, it was once distributed to the out port, so it was said that the jackpot was not won. An effect to notify that is executed. After that, winning of a big win is reported by a so-called resurrection effect, and the big win is started. As a result, it is possible to expect that the resurrection performance will occur every time it is reported that the game ball is distributed to the central out port and the big win is not won. Therefore, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the big win for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment and its various modifications, a plurality of V winning openings are provided separately, and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters each V winning opening. is not limited to For example, a configuration is provided in which only one specific area is provided to win a jackpot when a game ball enters, and the game ball that enters each V winning port is finally flowed down to one specific area. may be By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide detection means such as a sensor for detecting an entering ball for each V winning hole, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the 10th embodiment and its various modifications, by varying the ease of entering the ball in the V winning rate 100% period according to the small winning type, the degree of expectation that V winning occurs according to the small winning type Although it was set as the structure which makes it different, it is not restricted to this. Instead of or in addition to this, by varying the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotator 6755f according to the small hit type, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the occurrence of V winning. Specifically, for example, by hitting to the right during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, a small hit type in which a maximum of one game ball can reach the distribution rotating body 6755f and a distribution It is good also as a structure which provides the small hit classification which can reach|attain two game balls at maximum to the rotating body 6755f. If two game balls can reach the distribution rotator 6755f, the percentage of V winning is 75% (the probability that two game balls cannot both win V is 50% x 50% = 25 %), the more game balls reach the distribution rotator 6755, the more the player's expectation for the V prize can be heightened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 256. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win, and any V prize is won during the validity period of the small win. A jackpot game is executed even when a game ball enters the mouth. The lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are configured to vary the probability of winning a small prize, and the lottery for the second special pattern has a high probability (9/10) of winning a small prize. On the other hand, in the lottery for the first special symbol, a configuration is adopted in which a small hit is won only at a relatively low probability (1/100). As a result, in the time-saving state of normal patterns, the lottery of the second special pattern is likely to be executed (probability of winning the normal pattern is high), it is relatively easy to win a small win (V prize is likely to occur). ), while it is advantageous for the player, it is relatively difficult to win a small win in the normal state of normal symbols in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbols (V winning is less likely to occur). ), which is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment adds various entertainment effects that can further improve the player's interest by executing it in the pachinko machine 10 with the specifications of the tenth embodiment. is doing. More specifically, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, an entertainment effect that is executed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win or a small win, and during the execution of the small win game in the time saving state, the distribution rotator Interesting effects and the like are added to suggest the ball entry timing at which the game ball is likely to be distributed to 6755f.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment in that the operation buttons 230 (Fig. 100) is provided, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed; and part of the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. . Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and other processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are as follows: It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the tenth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Note that the shape of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the shape of the operation button 230 in the first control example described above, so here, refer again to FIG. and explain. As shown in FIG. 100, the operation button 230 is arranged on the left side of the ball rental operation unit 40 when viewed from the front. The operation buttons 230 include an upper button UB arranged on the upper side when viewed from the front, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side when viewed from the front, a right button RB arranged on the right side when viewed from the front, and a left button LB arranged on the left side when viewed from the front. , and a central button CB arranged in the central portion of the operation button 230 . In the eleventh embodiment, the upper button UB and the lower button DB correspond to the brightness of various light-emitting members in the pachinko machine 10 (light emission brightness of the illumination parts 29 to 33, brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, etc.). , and the right button RB and left button LB are used as buttons for adjusting the volume of various sounds in the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, by operating the operation button 230, the brightness and volume can each be set to one of five levels. That is, each time the upper button UB is operated (depressed), the brightness of various light-emitting members can be set to increase by one level, while each time the lower button DB is operated (depressed), various light-emitting members are set. It is possible to set the brightness of the member to decrease by one step. Also, each time the right button RB is operated (pressed), the volume can be set to increase by one step, while the volume can be set to decrease by one step each time the left button LB is pressed. It becomes possible to Further, operation of the center button CB is prompted in a predetermined effect (for example, a button operation effect such as an operation support effect to be described later) that can be set during execution of the variable display effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 and the like, but in the operation support effect, every time the center button CB is pressed during execution of the effect, a display mode indicating the degree of expectation of a big win or the like is displayed. This allows the player to positively press the center button CB, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the brightness setting change and the volume setting change are basically always possible. That is, by pressing the operation button 230, the setting can be changed to the player's preference even during execution of the variable display effect or during execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved. In the eleventh embodiment, an upper button UB and a lower button DB for changing the brightness setting, and a right button RB and a left button LB for changing the volume setting are provided around the central button CB. It is That is, while an effect (for example, a button operation effect such as an operation support effect to be described later) is being executed to prompt the user to operate the center button CB, the player who tries to press the center button CB accidentally presses a different button. It has a relatively high button layout that is likely to happen. In other words, there is a possibility that the brightness setting is changed or the volume setting is changed even though the player who wants to participate in the button operation effect tries to press the center button CB. be.

Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, of the execution period of the variable display effect in which the button operation effect is set, at least during the operation valid period in which the operation of the center button CB is treated as valid, the setting change of the brightness or volume is performed. is configured to limit More specifically, various settings (brightness setting, volume setting, ) is configured to increase the number of operations of various buttons (non-effect buttons) required to change the above. More specifically, during normal operation, the setting is changed by one step each time the various buttons (non-rendering buttons) are operated (for example, each time the right button RB is pressed, the volume is changed by one). On the other hand, during the period from 1 second before the start of the operation valid period to 1 second after the end, the settings will not be changed unless the various buttons are operated twice. ing. With this configuration, when a player who tries to operate the center button CB during execution of the button operation effect accidentally presses the non-effect button, various settings can be made against the player's will. It is possible to suppress the change of the , and make the player recognize an operation error (wrong type of button to be pressed) by not displaying the performance mode corresponding to the operation. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the button operation effect. Here, the reason why the setting change based on the operation of the non-effect button is restricted not only during the operation effective period but also for one second before and after the operation effective period is that the button operation effect is started. To cope with the case where a player who perceives and starts button operation before the effective period of operation starts, or a player who continues to operate without noticing that the effective period of operation has ended performs an erroneous operation. is. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the settings are changed against the player's will. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the period from one second before the start of the valid operation period to one second after the end of the valid operation period will be referred to as a non-effect button restriction period.

In the eleventh embodiment, by pressing the non-effect button twice during the non-effect button restriction period, it is possible to change various settings by one step. The prescribed number of operations (number of presses) of is not limited to two, and any number of times can be set. Further, for example, the setting may not be changed unless the same non-rendering button is operated continuously for a prescribed number of operations. That is, each time a different button is operated, the prescribed number of operations may be reset. By configuring in this way, except when the non-effect button is operated with the intention of changing the setting during the non-effect button restriction period (for example, by roughly operating the center button CB, Since it is possible to suppress the setting from being changed when another button is operated about once, etc., it is possible to more reliably suppress the setting from being changed against the player's will. can do.

In the eleventh embodiment, the operation valid period of the center button CB and one second before and after the operation valid period are set as the non-effect button restriction period, but the non-effect button restriction period can be set arbitrarily. can. For example, during the variable period of the variable display effect in which the button operation effect is set, the non-effect button limit period may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed against the player's will when the player performs an erroneous operation. Further, for example, only the operation effective period may be set as the non-effect button restriction period. By constructing in this way, a player who intends to change the setting immediately before or after the valid operation period can be made to change the setting without imposing any restrictions, thus improving the convenience of the player. can be improved. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the non-effect button limit period is set only for the operation support effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which sets. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed against the player's will even in other button operation effects. In addition, by setting a non-effect button restriction period in other button operation effects, for example, it is possible to operate the non-effect button to determine whether or not a button operation effect that greatly increases the expectation of a big win when it appears will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize game characteristics that can be known in advance. More specifically, for example, in a part of the case of a big win, after stopping and displaying the missing symbol once, a button operation effect is generated, and the operation of the center button CB is performed during the effect period of the button operation effect. is performed (or a predetermined performance period has passed), a non-performance button limit period is set for the performance to be changed to a jackpot symbol. Then, for example, one second before the effective period (for example, when the winning symbol stops), the non-effect button restriction period is started. By configuring in this way, by operating the non-performance button when the winning symbol stops, the player can be made to perceive the execution of the button operation performance before the button operation performance is executed. can. Therefore, the player can be made to understand that a big win will occur before the start of the button operation effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, a non-effect button is arranged adjacent to other operation means different from the center button CB, and even in the variable display effect in which an effect prompting the operation of the operation means is executed, the non-effect It is also possible to set a button restriction period for use. In particular, by arranging a non-effect button in the vicinity of the operation means that prompts the operation only in the effect with a high expectation, the execution of the effect that prompts the operation of the operation means with a high expectation can be performed for the non-effect. By operating the button for non-performance during the button restriction period, it is possible to perceive it at an early stage, so when there is a possibility that the button for non-performance is restricted, the button for non-performance is pushed positively. Playability can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 224 to FIG. 226, an operation assisting effect, which is one type of button operation effect in the eleventh embodiment, will be described. This operation support effect is such that every time the player operates the center button CB during the effect period, the degree of expectation for the notification of the big win in the variable display being executed, or the degree of expectation higher than that in the variable display being executed. This is an effect for suggesting to the player the level of expectation for development to a high variable display mode (level of expectation for development to reach, level of expectation for development from normal reach to super reach, etc.). In the following description, as an example of the super ready-to-win effect, the operation support effect is executed while the character 811 imitating an adventurer and the character 812 imitating a monster are being executed. conduct.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), when the operation support effect is executed, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR11 is formed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Also, in areas other than the display area HR11, a super reach effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating an adventurer and a character 812 imitating a monster face each other. As shown in FIG. 224(a), a character 813 resembling a bird is displayed in the display area HR11, and below the character 813, the text "Push the button for support!" These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the operation of the operation button 230 will cause the character 230 to support the player.

As shown in FIG. 224(b), when the center button CB of the operation buttons 230 is operated (pressed) during execution of the operation support effect, a character image 814 imitating the characters "Ganbarre" appears in the display area HR11. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 225(a), the display area HR11 is configured so that a plurality of character images can be displayed. That is, every time the player presses the center button CB while the display area HR11 is being displayed (during the operation effective period of the center button CB), the character image is displayed. FIG. 225(a) is a diagram illustrating a case where two character images 814a and 814b are displayed in a normal (default) display mode (white character display mode).

FIG. 225(b) shows a high-expectation display mode (character mode) in which one of the two character images displayed in the display area HR11 develops into a highly anticipated reach effect. is set to . As shown in FIG. 225(b), in the eleventh embodiment, a striped character mode (character image 814c) is provided as a character mode that is highly expected to develop. By displaying the stripe-pattern character mode, the player can expect that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect will develop, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that in the eleventh embodiment, six types of character modes are provided for the character image 814 . Specifically, in addition to the above-described striped character mode, for example, it is easier to display during the execution of the variation display of the big win than during the execution of the variation display of the loss (that is, the expectation of the big win increases). A red character display mode (character mode) or the like is provided. During execution of the operation support performance, one character mode is determined by lottery from six types of character modes each time the central button CB is pressed, and a character image of the determined character mode is displayed. . Therefore, the central button CB is positively operated during execution of the operation cheering performance in anticipation of display of a character mode with a high expectation of a big win or a character mode with a high expectation of development. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character mode is varied according to the player's operation status (operation tendency). That is, it is possible to discriminate whether or not the player tends to actively operate the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect, and to vary the selection rate of each character mode according to the discrimination result. Configure. More specifically, when it is determined that a player who tends to actively press the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect is playing a game, a character mode with a high degree of expectation (a While the ratio of deciding the high red lettering character mode and the stripe pattern character mode with high expectations for development is relatively low, the frequency of pressing the center button CB during the execution of the operation support effect tends to be low. When it is determined that the player is playing a game, the determination ratio of the character mode with a high degree of expectation is relatively high.

Here, in the operation support effect, when the determination ratio of each character mode is set based only on the propriety of the variable display effect being executed and the development status, regardless of the player's tendency to press, the user actively presses down. Players who do (that is, the number of times of pressing in the operation support effect of 1) are likely to increase the number of times that the character mode is drawn by lottery, so the display ratio of the character mode with a relatively high degree of expectation increases. . In other words, there is a problem that the degree of expectation indicated by the operation support effect changes according to the player's tendency.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the determination ratio of each character mode is varied according to the pressing tendency of each player during execution of the operation support effect, and the player who actively presses down is compared. It is configured so that the difference in the reliability of the expectation suggested during the execution of the operation support presentation is small between the player who has pressed the target less times and the player. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately provide the degree of expectation of the character mode regardless of the player's pressing tendency.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the execution period of the operation support effect when the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is executed will be described. Note that FIG. 226 will be described by taking as an example the case where the operation support effect is set for the super reach variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds, see FIGS. 11(b) to 11(d)). conduct. As shown in FIG. 226, when the execution of the operation support effect is determined for the variation pattern of super reach, the operation support effect is set three times during one variation period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, 4 seconds (first effect period) from 5 seconds to 9 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, and from 24 seconds to 29 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. The operation support effect is executed for 4 seconds (second effect period) and for 4 seconds (third effect period) from the time when 55 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation to the time when 59 seconds have passed. That is, 4 seconds (first effect period) between 5 seconds and 1 second before the timing (when 10 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation) that develops into a reach effect (a reach occurs), and develops into a super reach. 4 seconds (second effect period) between 5 seconds and 1 second before the timing (30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), and 1 from 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop timing (60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) The operation support effect is executed for 4 seconds (third effect period) before the second. In other words, the operation support effect is executed every 5 seconds before developing to a ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation and every 5 seconds before the fluctuation stops.

Also, as shown in FIG. 226, the non-effect buttons (the up button UB for changing the brightness setting and the A non-effect button restriction period is set in which setting changes based on operations on the down button DB, and the right button RB and left button LB for changing volume settings are restricted. That is, the number of operations (presses) of various buttons (non-effect buttons) required to change various settings (brightness settings and volume settings) is increased (changed from 1 to 2 times). It is configured. With this configuration, when a player who tries to operate the center button CB during execution of the button operation effect accidentally presses the non-effect button, various settings can be made against the player's will. It is possible to suppress the change of the , and make the player recognize an operation error (wrong type of button to be pressed) by not displaying the performance mode corresponding to the operation. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the button operation effect. In addition, by setting one second before and after the operation effective period as the non-effect button restriction period, a player who perceives that the button operation effect will start and starts the button operation before the operation effective period starts, or a player who starts the button operation before the operation effective period starts. To prevent a setting change against a player's will from being made even when a player who continues to operate without noticing the end of a validity period performs an erroneous operation. can.

In this embodiment, before or after all the development is completed (in the case of the variation pattern of super reach, before and after development to super reach effect), the selection ratio of each character mode is configured to be variable. ing. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 226, before developing into super ready-to-win (the operation support effect executed in the first effect period and the second effect period), the character mode (for example, stripe pattern) with a high expectation of development character mode) is relatively high, while the selection rate of character modes (blue characters, green characters, red characters, etc.) suggesting the propriety of a big win is relatively low. On the other hand, after developing into super ready-to-win (the operation support effect executed in the third effect period), the selection ratio of the character mode indicating the degree of expectation for the development is low, while the character mode indicating the propriety of the big win. is relatively high. As a result, it is possible to change the type of character mode that the player expects to be displayed for each stage of development in the variable display. That is, basically, the higher the expected reach performance, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. ), the player can expect to see a character mode with a high expectation of development. On the other hand, after the game progresses to a stage where the expectation of a big win is high (for example, super ready-to-win), the player can be expected to display a character mode in which the expectation of a big win is high. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of character mode expected to be displayed according to the stage of development of the ready-to-win effect, even though the same display mode effect of the operation support effect is being executed. It is possible to realize a novel performance.

In addition, in FIG. 226, the case where the operation support effect is set for the variation pattern of super reach has been described as an example. In the variation pattern of , the operation support effect is executed only 5 seconds before the variation stops. That is, the operation support effect is executed only during the period in which the player pays attention to whether or not the ready-to-win effect develops. Further, when the operation cheering effect is set for the normal reach variation pattern, the operation cheering effect is executed 5 seconds before developing to the ready reach effect and 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop. That is, the operation support effect is executed during the period during which the player pays attention to whether or not the game will develop into the ready-to-win effect and the period in which the player pays attention to whether or not the game will develop to the super ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, when the operation support effect is set for the variation pattern of the special reach, 5 seconds before developing into the ready reach effect, 5 seconds before developing into the super reach effect, 5 seconds before developing into the special reach effect, And 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop, the operation support effect is executed respectively.

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, the timing at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed (the timing at which the ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation may develop). It is configured such that the operation support effect for 4 seconds is executed every 5 seconds before . In this operation support effect, every time the player presses the center button CB during the effect period of 4 seconds, the degree of expectation for the notification of the big win at the end of the variable display, and the degree of expectation after the end of the operation support effect The character mode of the character image 814 suggests the degree of expectation for developing into a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect. For this reason, players who want to more accurately predict whether or not they will win a big win by confirming as many suggestions as possible, and whether or not they will develop, are encouraged to proactively make predictions during the 4-second presentation period. can be made to operate the center button CB. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the operation support presentation can be improved, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character mode is varied according to the player's operation status (operation tendency). That is, it is possible to discriminate whether or not the player tends to actively operate the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect, and to vary the selection rate of each character mode according to the discrimination result. Configure. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference in the reliability of the degree of expectation suggested during the execution of the operation support effect between the player who actively presses and the player who presses relatively few times. It is possible to more appropriately provide the degree of expectation of the character mode regardless of the pressing tendency of the user.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, 5 seconds of the timing (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds) at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed Although the operation support effect is executed for four seconds, the execution timing of the operation support effect is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 of a type capable of executing an effect (a so-called pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is simulated a plurality of times during the effect period of one variable display effect, the following A configuration may be adopted in which the operation support effect is executed from a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) before the timing at which the pseudo variation can be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can expect different types of character modes to be displayed for each number of pseudo-runs. That is, as long as the number of pseudo-runs is small (one or two times), it is possible to expect that a character mode will be displayed in which the likelihood of developing the next pseudo-run is high. After the game progresses to the stage where the player can be informed of whether or not a big win has been achieved, it is possible to expect that a character mode will be displayed that increases the expectation of a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying more attention to the character mode of the character image 814 displayed during execution of the operation support effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, there is a possibility that the third symbol will be stopped and displayed (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds). Seconds elapsed), the operation support effect is executed every 5 seconds, but it is not necessary to execute the operation support effect at each timing. It is good also as composition which determines whether to perform support production. In this case, the lottery probability may be varied depending on whether or not a big win will occur, or whether or not the game will develop. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a game while paying attention to whether or not the operation support effect is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 232, the mini-character advance notice effect that can be executed during the variation period of the variable display effect in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This mini character preview effect is a effect in which the character (mini character) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 performs a predetermined action (action). (see (c))). In other words, an effect is executed in which the mini-character performs three stages of action at maximum during the variation period, and an effect is executed in which the V-challenge small prize is determined by performing up to the action of the third stage.

First, with reference to FIGS. 227(a) and 227(b), the action of the first stage (first action) in the mini character announcement effect will be described. When the action of the first stage in the mini-character advance notice effect is started during execution of the variable display, first, as shown in FIG. It appears in the lower center of the display screen. After that, the mini character MC appearing at the bottom of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 moves rightward in front view and fades out of the display screen as it is, as shown in FIG. 227(b).

Also, in the second stage action (second action) executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first stage action is completed and the mini character MC fades out of the screen, FIG. , the mini-character MC fades in from the right side of the display screen and jumps up from the right side of the screen to the upper left. In this second stage action, the mini-character jumps up to the upper left and fades out to the upper part of the display screen.

Furthermore, in the third stage action (third action) that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the second stage action is completed, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which the faded-out mini-character MC fades in from above into the display screen together with an image (V-challenge symbol) imitating a signboard on which the characters "V-challenge" are displayed. By executing the action of the third stage and displaying the V-challenge symbol, the player can easily understand that the V-challenge small win has been won. In addition, this third stage action (third action) is executed, and the third symbol is a combination of symbols indicating a V challenge small hit (in the example of FIG. 228 (b), "3", "V", combination of "3").

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the temporal change of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the mini character announcement effect is executed will be described. FIG. 229 is a diagram showing the temporal change of the display mode of the mini-character MC starting from the start of the mini-character advance notice effect when the mini-character MC performs up to the third action in the mini-character advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 229, when the mini-character preview effect is started, first, the mini-character MC appears at the bottom center of the display screen and moves to the right as the first action (see FIGS. 227(a) and (b)). )I do. This first action continues for 5 seconds, and when 5 seconds have passed, the mini character MC fades out of the screen. The period during which the mini-character MC fades out of the screen (mini-character absent period) continues for 5 to 10 seconds. The length of the absence period is determined by lottery according to the variation type (lottery result of special symbols, the length of the variation period, etc.).

Also, as shown in FIG. 229, when the set mini-character absence period has passed, the second action is executed in which the mini-character MC jumps up from the right side of the display screen to the upper left direction. This second action continues for 3 seconds, and when 3 seconds have passed, the mini character MC fades out of the screen. After the mini-character fades out, the mini-character absence period lasts for 4 to 9 seconds, and after the set mini-character absence period has passed, the mini-character MC falls into the display screen along with the V-challenge symbol, and the third action is executed. . By executing the third action, the winning of the V-challenge small prize is confirmed, so that every time the mini-character notice performance is started, the player can expect that the notice performance will continue until the third action. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, by varying the length of the mini-character absent period, the execution timings of various actions (first to third actions) performed by the mini-character MC are made different. Also, in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice performance is set, when the variable display ends without progressing to the third action, the timing of the variable stop is always set to be the mini-character absent period. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the end of the variable display while the mini character MC is performing an action on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more suitable display effect. In addition, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the end of the variable display while the mini-character MC is performing an action, depending on the timing of the start of the action of the mini-character MC, it is possible to develop a reach performance with a higher degree of expectation. , it is possible to provide a game property that can be known in advance before the performance related to the development is executed. That is, if the action of the mini character MC starts immediately before 10 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the variation that may develop into a ready-to-win effect, the action of the mini character MC will be 10 seconds after the start of the variation. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is likely to be executed over time. Crossing over 10 seconds means that the pattern will not stop and the variable display will not end when 10 seconds have passed, so when the action of the mini character MC occurs, it will develop into a ready-to-win effect. can be indirectly understood by the player. Therefore, not only the content of the action of the mini-character MC itself, but also the state of the variable display of the third pattern when the mini-character MC starts the action can be noticed in the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be further improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 230 to 231, the relationship between the status of variable display of the third symbol and the status of action of the mini character MC will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, three types of execution periods of low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation are set as the execution period of each action in the mini-character preview effect. That is, the actions of the mini-characters MC are the same, and only the duration of the action of the mini-characters MC is changed, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for the V-challenge small win. By configuring in this way, the image data required for the mini-character preview effect can be minimized, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

First, referring to FIG. 230(a), the relationship between the action period of the mini-character MC and the variation period of the third symbol when the mini-character announcement effect is set for the variation pattern that is not long will be described. do. As shown in FIG. 230(a), when the mini-character announcement effect is set for the long-lost variation pattern, the first action always starts 5 seconds after the start of the variation, and when the missing pattern stops. The first action is terminated. By adopting a configuration in which the first action can be executed in a variation pattern that is not long enough, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the V challenge small win even in a variation pattern that is not long.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230(b) to 231, the relationship between the change time and the action period of the mini character MC when the mini character advance notice effect is set for the change pattern of the normal reach will be described. FIG. 230(a) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character announcement effect with low-expectation action timing is set for a variation pattern of out of normal reach (including normal small hits). As shown in FIG. 230(b), when the low-expectation mini-character advance notice effect is set, the first action is executed when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. That is, as the execution period of the first action, the same execution period as the fluctuation pattern that is not long is set. Therefore, at the stage when the first action is executed, the player's sense of expectation is not greatly improved. Also, as shown in FIG. 230(b), the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. This second action lasts for 3 seconds, as described above. When the second action ends, the mini-character absence period is set until the lost symbols stop (the fluctuation period ends). This action timing with a low expectation is selected at a higher rate than the action timings with other expectations (middle expectation and high expectation) when a lottery result different from the V challenge small win is obtained. Therefore, the player who has confirmed the timing of the action can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation for the V challenge is not so high, so that the degree of expectation can be properly recognized.

Also, FIG. 230(c) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character advance notice effect with low-expectation action timing is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach small win (V challenge small win). As shown in FIG. 230(c), when the mini-character announcement effect with low-expectation action timing is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach corresponding to the lottery result of the V-challenge small prize, the first action and the second action are set. The action is executed in the same period as in the normal out of reach case (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the first action is executed when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 230(c), when 27 seconds have passed since the start of the variation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the third action is executed to announce the winning of the V challenge small hit. That is, until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, at least the action timings of the mini-characters MC are exactly the same. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach with a low-expectation mini character announcement effect set, or a variation pattern that is a small hit of normal reach. Therefore, when the V challenge small win is reported by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

FIG. 231(a) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character advance notice effect with action timing of medium expectation is set for a variation pattern of out of normal reach (including normal small hits). As shown in FIG. 231(a), when a mini-character announcement effect with medium expectation is set, the first action is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. That is, the first action is executed immediately after developing into the ready-to-win effect. This first action continues until 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation, and after 15 seconds has elapsed, the mini-character absence period begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 231(a), the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. The second action is executed until 23 seconds have elapsed after the start of the variation, after which the mini-character absent period is set until the end of the variation.

FIG. 231(b) is a diagram showing a case where the action timing of medium expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small win (limited to the V challenge small win). As shown in FIG. 231 (b), when the action timing of the middle expectation degree is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the first action and the second action are out of the normal reach (Fig. 231 (a)) is executed in the same period. That is, the first action is executed when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed when 20 seconds have passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 231(b), when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the third action is executed to announce the winning of the V challenge small hit. That is, like the low-expectation action timings, at least the action timings of the mini-characters MC are exactly the same until 27 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach with a medium-expectation mini character announcement effect set, or a fluctuation pattern that is a small hit of normal reach. Therefore, when the V challenge small win is reported by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

Also, when the action timing of medium expectation is set, the timing (after developing into the ready-to-win effect) is obviously different from the case where the mini-character announcement effect is set in an overly long variation pattern (see FIG. 230(a)). Since the first action is executed at , it is possible to make the player expect a highly expected variable display effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 231(c) is a diagram showing a case where the action timing for high expectations is set for the variation pattern of normal reach off (including normal small hits). As shown in FIG. 231(c), when the action timing for high expectations is set, the first action is started when 8 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation. That is, the first action is started at a timing later than the timing of the first action for the low expectation degree before developing into the ready-to-win effect. As a result, the player can be made to feel that an action timing different from the first action for low expectation, which is relatively likely to occur in normal times, has been set. Therefore, it is possible to heighten expectations for the V-challenge small win. Also, as described above, the first action lasts for 5 seconds, so the first action is executed across the timing at which the ready-to-win effect develops. Therefore, for the player who confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action and the variable display mode of the third symbol, the first action ends before the timing at which it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect occurs. It can make you feel that the timing is likely to be later. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end during the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible for a player who understands this specification and is playing a game to perceive that the ready-to-win effect will occur before the time to generate the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display and the progress of the action of the mini character MC.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231(c), the 7 seconds from the time when the first action ends 13 seconds after the start of the variation to the time when 20 seconds have passed after the start of the variation is set as the mini-character absent period. Then, when 20 seconds have passed after the start of the variation, the second action is executed for 3 seconds, and after that, the mini-character absent period is set until the end of the variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 231(d), when the mini character announcement effect of the action timing for high expectation is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach small win (V challenge small win), the first action and the second action are set. 2 actions are performed in the same period as the case of normal out of reach. That is, until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, at least the action timings of the mini-characters MC are exactly the same. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach with a low expectation mini character announcement effect set, or a variation pattern that is a small hit of normal reach. Therefore, when the V challenge small win is reported by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

The action timing for high expectations has a relatively high percentage set when it becomes a small V challenge in the special symbol lottery, and the percentage set when it is out is extremely low, so the mini character MC It is possible to make the player, who determines that the action is for high expectation from the timing of the action of (1), have a great expectation for the V challenge small win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the contents of the action of the mini-character MC but also to the timing at which the action is started.

Although not shown, the variation pattern of Super Reach with a variation time of 60 seconds and the variation pattern of Special Reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are also for low expectations, medium expectations, and high expectations. Action timing for is specified. In the case of Super Reach and Special Reach, it is basically the same as in the case of Normal Reach, and in the action timing of low expectations, the first action will end just before the last development timing in Reach production. It is configured. That is, if it is a variation pattern of super reach, the first action is executed so that the first action ends just before it develops into super reach (that is, when 30 seconds have elapsed after the start of variation), and in the variation pattern of special reach If there is, the first action is executed so that the first action ends immediately before developing into Special Reach (that is, when 60 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation). In addition, in the action timing for medium expectation, the first action is configured to start immediately after the last development timing in the ready-to-win production, and in the action timing for high expectation, the last development in the ready-to-win production It is configured such that the first action is executed across timings.

As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured to be able to execute the mini-character advance notice effect as a kind of effect suggesting the execution of the V-challenge. In this mini-character advance notice effect, the player is notified that the V-challenge will be executed when the mini-character MC completes all the first to third actions. In addition, the mini character preview effect has multiple types of expectations (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) with different expectations for the execution of the V challenge, and the content of the action itself of the mini character MC is the same. However, the timing at which the action is executed is configured differently for each degree of expectation. As a result, the image data itself used for displaying the action of the mini character MC can be shared, so that the memory capacity of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Furthermore, in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice performance is set, when the action timing for the high expectation is set, the first action is executed across the timing of developing to the ready-to-win performance with the higher expectation. Therefore, for the player who has confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action and the variable display mode of the third symbol, it is decided whether or not the ready-to-win effect develops with higher expectations. It can be made to feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end during the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible for a player who understands this specification and is playing a game to perceive that the performance will develop before the actual development timing comes. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display and the progress of the action of the mini character MC.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the central route suggestion effect executed in the time saving state of the normal symbols in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In this central route suggesting effect, basically, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755, there is a high possibility that it will be distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f (the game ball will flow down the central route) (distribution This is an effect suggesting a period (see FIG. 215) during which it is easier to be distributed to the rotating body 6755f. As described above, the game ball that reaches the central distribution rotator 6755f is provided in the distribution rotator 6755f. or) (see Figure 212). When a game ball enters one of the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 among these six ball-entering holes, the most advantageous "jackpot I14" is won. That is, since the number of rounds is large and the time-saving state of normal symbols is set again after the end of the big win, when the game ball enters the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the player feels great satisfaction. can hold On the other hand, as described above, when the ball is entered into the central out ports 6755fo1 to 6755fo3, the player is not given any benefits. Therefore, the period from when the game ball is distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f to when it is distributed to one of the ball entrances is one of the periods in which the player's sense of expectation is most heightened. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that suggests the timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotator 6755 by the central route suggesting effect (easily flowing down the central route), the game can be played while the central route suggesting effect is being executed. It is possible to realize a playability that makes the player wish to enter the ball into the lottery device 6755 . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIGS. 232(a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit is executed in the time saving state. FIG. 232(a) shows an example of a display mode while the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is open (V disabled period or V winning rate 100% period). is open (V disabled period or V win rate 100% period). As shown in FIG. 232(a), during execution of the small winning game in the time saving state, a boy character 710 is displayed in the small area Ds2, and in the small area Ds3, the character "Right hit!" , and an image resembling an arrow pointing to the right are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily inform the player that he/she can aim for the V prize by making the game ball enter the small winning attacker 6755a by hitting right during execution of the small winning game. can be understood. Also, in the main display area Dm, a stop symbol indicating a small win continues to be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the small winning game is being executed. It should be noted that the display contents of the small area Ds1 are the same as in the normal case. That is, since only reserved symbols are displayed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 232(b) shows an example of a display mode while the upper opening door 6755bU is closed (V win rate 50% period). As shown in FIG. 232(b), the surroundings of the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 are changed to appear to emit light (wearing an aura). By changing the display mode of the small area Ds2, game balls enter the lottery device 6755 and are distributed to the central route (the situation is such that the most advantageous jackpot I14 is won at a rate of 1/2). can be easily recognized. Therefore, in the case of a small hit in the time saving state, whether or not the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the boy character 710 is in the display mode with the aura (light emission) , the player can pay more attention to the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that, in the eleventh embodiment, there is a possibility that the central route suggesting effect will be executed even during a period in which there is no allocation to the central route. Specifically, in the case of any of the small hits H14 to J14 (that is, the small hit type that becomes a 10-round short-time jackpot when a V prize occurs), even in the V winning rate 100% period, a predetermined percentage (For example, at a rate of 40%), the central route suggestion effect is executed. As a result, although the game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion performance is occurring, the game ball is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV, and the time is reduced after the big hit. It is possible to realize an unusual behavior (behavior of being distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f) of continuing the state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a great surprise and joy, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

Here, as described above, the central route suggestion effect is a effect that is executed in synchronization with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period set within 1 second after the start of the small win, The rendering time is 0.2 seconds (see FIG. 215). Therefore, even if the game ball is shot after visually confirming that the central route suggesting effect has occurred, it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to reach the lottery device 6755 before the effect ends. . As a result, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, it is possible to make the irregular game method aiming to enter the game ball into the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is occurring, so that the hole can be eliminated. It is possible to suppress giving unforeseen disadvantages to In addition, even if the game ball is shot after visually recognizing the central route suggesting effect, the game ball cannot enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution period of the effect, so that the game ball has already been shot. At the timing when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is possible to realize a game property that makes one expect that the central route suggesting effect will occur. In other words, not only the downflow route of the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 but also the performance situation at the time of entering the lottery device 6755 can be noticed in the game. In other words, by comparing the state of occurrence of the central route suggestion effect and the timing at which the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is possible to realize novel gameplay that allows the player to grasp in advance the flow path of the game ball. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in the time-saving state of normal symbols, the V winning rate is 50% period (a period in which the game ball is easily guided to the distribution rotator 6755f). is configured to execute a central route suggestion effect for suggesting to the player. By configuring in this way, not only the flow path until the game ball entering the inside of the lottery device 6755 enters one of the ball entrances, but also the game ball The game can be played by paying attention to the presentation situation when the ball is entered into the 6755. That is, the timing at which the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 is compared with the situation of the central route suggestion effect executed in the small area Ds2, and the central route is flowed down (the game ball enters the distribution rotator 6755f. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player predicts the degree of expectation to be distributed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. From this behavior, the central route suggesting effect is that when a V prize is generated by a game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 during the effect, the time saving state after the big win is confirmed (the effect is not occurring) It can be said that it is easier to set a time saving state than when a V winning occurs due to a game ball entered in ).

In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball-entering timing at which there is a high possibility of being assigned to the central route is notified by the central route suggesting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types are provided in the display mode of the central route suggestive effect, and the degree of expectation to be assigned to the central route may be varied according to the display mode. By constructing in this manner, not only the period during which the central route suggesting effect is executed, but also the display mode of the central route suggesting effect can be noticed during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the central route suggestive effect is executed in synchronization with the V winning rate period of 50% or the V winning rate period of 100%, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is set in consideration of the time lag from when the ball enters the lottery device 6755 until the game ball reaches the upper opening/closing door 6755bU (lower opening/closing door 6755bD) (for example, , the execution period is set from 0.1 seconds before the period starts to 0.1 seconds before the period ends). By configuring in this way, even though the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball enters the distribution rotator 6755f (or the right V winning opening 6755bV). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball does not flow, making the player feel dissatisfied, or making it difficult to understand the meaning of the central route suggestion performance.

<Electrical Configuration of Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 233(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 233(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment (and the eighth embodiment) (see FIG. 195(a)). The difference is that a selection table 222fa, a mini character effect selection table 222fb, and a small win effect selection table 222fc are added.

The character mode selection table 222fa is used to determine the character mode of the character image 814 displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect (see FIG. 224(b)). data is defined in the data table. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235, but this character mode selection table 222fa shows that when the center button CB is operated during execution of the operation support effect, the special symbol lottery result and the player's 245).

The mini character effect selection table 222fb is a data table that defines data for determining the timing of actions to be executed by the mini character MC in the mini character preview effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, but this mini character effect selection table 222fb is referred to when setting the execution of the variable display based on the variable pattern command received from main controller 110, and the mini character announcement is made. Reference is made to determine the presence or absence of effects and the degree of expectation suggested by the advance notice effects (timing of action of mini character MC) (see S41307 in FIG. 254).

The effect selection table 222fc at the time of a small hit defines data for determining whether or not to execute a central route suggestive effect (see FIG. 232(b)) and the execution timing when a small win occurs in the time-saving state of normal symbols. It is a data table that is Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but this small hit time effect selection table 222fc is, at the start of the small hit (when receiving a small hit type command indicating the small hit type from the main controller 110) By referring to it, whether or not to execute the central route suggestion effect and the execution timing are determined according to the small hit type (see S41004 and S41005 in FIG. 250).

Next, details of the character mode selection table 222fa will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235. FIG. As described above, this character mode selection table 222fa includes characters of the character image 814 displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during execution of the operation support effect (see FIG. 224(b)). It is a data table referenced to determine aspects.

FIG. 234(a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the character mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 234(a), the character mode selection table 222fa shows that the variation display (variation effect) corresponding to the big win is being executed, and the operation executed before the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. A win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 that is referred to for selecting a character mode in the cheering effect, and a variable display (variable effect) corresponding to the big win is being executed, and from the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. A win (after completion of development) table 222fa2 that is referred to for selecting a character mode in an operation support effect executed later, and a variable display (variable effect) corresponding to a loss are being executed, and a ready-to-win effect is being executed. During the execution of a table 222fa3 for failure (before completion of development), which is referred to for selecting a character mode in the operation support effect executed before the last development timing in , and a variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the failure and a winning (after completion of development) table 222fa4 referred to for selecting the character mode in the operation support performance executed after the final development timing in the ready-to-win performance.

First, with reference to FIG. 234(b), the details of the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 will be described. FIG. 234(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1. As shown in FIG. 234(b), for each range of values of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 has six types of character modes that can be set in the character image 814 in the operation support effect. They are defined in association with each other. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in different ranges according to the player's operation status (participation status for the operation support effect). When a player with a low operation frequency is playing a game (when the average number of operations of each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which the operation support effect was set is 5 times or less), FIG. 234 (b ) refers to the stipulations corresponding to "low operation frequency", and a player with a moderate operation frequency is playing a game (operation of each operation support effect in the previous fluctuation display where the operation support effect was set When the average number of times is 6 times or more and 9 times or less), the defined contents corresponding to "medium operation frequency" in FIG. (when the average number of times of operation of each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which the operation support effect was set is 10 times or more), the defined content corresponding to "high frequency of operations" in Fig. 234(b) is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 234(b), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who operates less frequently, "white" is associated as the character mode with respect to the range of "0 to 199" of the effect lottery counter 223ea. (222fa1a in FIG. 234(b)). Since the effect lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values "0 to 999", in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the central button CB is pressed. When operated by the player, a white character image 814 is displayed at a rate of 20% (200/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "200 to 449" in association with "blue" as the character mode (FIG. 234(b)). 222fa1b). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, blue characters are displayed at a rate of 25% (250/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "450 to 479" in association with "green" as the character mode (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, green characters are displayed at a rate of 3% (30/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "480 to 499" in association with "red" as the character mode (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the central button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, red characters are displayed at a rate of 2% (20/1000). is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "500 to 949" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (see FIG. 234). 222fale in (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the black color is displayed at a rate of 45% (450/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "950 to 999" in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode (222fa1f in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the red color is displayed at a rate of 5% (50/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed.

In this way, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the operation frequency is low (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 5 times or less). When the user operates the center button CB, a black or red striped character mode is set at a ratio of 1/2, which increases the expectation of development. In addition, although the details will be described later, the type of character mode (green characters and red characters) with a high degree of expectation for winning is set at a higher rate than the case of losing. Therefore, when a character mode (black striped pattern or red striped pattern) with a high expectation of development is selected, the player can be expected to develop a ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation. . In addition, when a type of character mode (green characters or red characters) with a high expectation of winning is selected, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win. It should be noted that the red stripe pattern is configured so as not to be displayed in the operation support effect executed after the final development in the ready-to-win effect is completed. In other words, when the character image 814 with the red stripe pattern is displayed, it is confirmed that the stage of the current ready-to-win stage will develop into an effect with a higher degree of expectation.

On the other hand, as a stipulated content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium (the average number of operations in the operation support effect of 1 is 6 times or more and 9 times or less), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 579". The range is defined in association with "white" as the character mode (222fa1a in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, when the player operates the center button CB, white characters are displayed at a rate of 58% (580/1000). A character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined to correspond to the range of "580 to 779" with "blue" as the character mode (222fa1b in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the central button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, blue characters are displayed at a rate of 20% (200/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "780 to 791" in association with "green" as the character mode (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the rate is 1.2% (12/1000). A character image 814 of green characters is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "792 to 799" in association with "red" as the character mode (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, at a rate of 0.8% (8/1000) A character image 814 of red characters is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "800 to 979" in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (see FIG. 234). 222fale in (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the black color is displayed at a rate of 18% (180/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "980 to 999" in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode (222fa1f in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the central button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the red color is displayed at a rate of 2% (20/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed.

In this way, when the operation frequency is moderate (the average number of operations is 6 or more and 9 or less), the expectation of a big win is higher than when the operation frequency is low (the average number of operations is 5 or less). The selection ratios of high-quality character styles (green characters, red characters) and character styles with high expectations for development (black stripe pattern and red stripe pattern) are low. By constructing in this way, compared with the case where the selection ratio of each character mode is made common regardless of the operation tendency, even when a player who has a different tendency of the number of operations plays a game, one operation support effect is produced. It is possible to reduce the difference in the number of times the character modes with high expectations for the jackpot and development are displayed in the game. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect regardless of the tendency of the operation.

On the other hand, as a stipulated content corresponding to a player who operates frequently (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 10 times or more), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of “0 to 799”. "White" is associated and defined as a mode (222fa1a in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, when the player operates the center button CB, white characters are displayed at a rate of 80% (800/1000). A character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined to correspond to the range of "800 to 889" with "blue" as the character mode (222fa1b in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, blue characters are displayed at a rate of 19% (190/1000). is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "890 to 895" in association with "green" as the character mode (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the central button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the rate is 10.6% (6/1000). A character image 814 of green characters is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined to correspond to the range of "896 to 899" with "red" as the character mode (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, at a rate of 0.4% (4/1000) A character image 814 of red characters is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "900 to 989" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (FIG. 234). 222fale in (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the central button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the black color is displayed at a rate of 9% (90/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "990 to 999" in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode (222fa1f in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the last development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the red color is displayed at a rate of 1% (10/1000). A striped character image 814 is displayed.

In this way, when the operation frequency is high (average number of operations is 10 times or more), when the operation frequency is low (average number of operations is 5 times or less), when the operation frequency is medium (average number of operations is 6 times or more, 9 times or more) times or less), there is a higher selection rate for character patterns with high expectations for big wins (green letters, red letters) and character patterns with high expectations for development (black stripes and red stripes). is even lower. By constructing in this way, compared with the case where the selection ratio of each character mode is made common regardless of the operation tendency, even when a player who has a different tendency of the number of operations plays a game, one operation support effect is produced. It is possible to reduce the difference in the number of times a character mode with a high expectation of a big win and development is displayed in . Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect regardless of the tendency of the operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234(c), details of the above-described win (after completion of development) table 222fa2 will be described. As described above, the winning (after completion of development) table 222fa2 is in the process of executing the variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the big win, and the operation support effect executed after the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. 2 is a data table referred to when selecting a character mode in .

As shown in FIG. 234(c), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who has a low operation frequency, "white" is associated as the character mode with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 99". defined (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "100 to 199" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234(c)), and "200 to 699 " is defined in association with "green" as the character mode (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), and "red" is defined in association with the range of "700 to 949" as the character mode. (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "950 to 999" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as a character mode (see 222fa2e in FIG. 234(c) ). Also, "stripe (red)" is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (see 222fa2f in FIG. 234(c)). Therefore, even if the center button CB is pressed, the red stripe pattern is not set.

In this way, in the operation support effect executed after the last development in the ready-to-win effect is completed, the expectation of a big win is higher than in the operation support effect executed before the final development is completed. (The selection ratio of green characters increases from 22% to 50%, and the selection ratio of red characters increases from 2% to 25%). Therefore, by displaying a character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, it is possible to make the player strongly expect to be notified of a big win at the current stage of development. On the other hand, after the final development in reach production is completed, the selection ratio of character styles that indicate high expectations for development drops significantly (selection ratio of black stripes from 45% to 5%, red The selection ratio of the striped pattern will decrease from 5% to 0%), so there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be announced at the current stage of development so that the text format that indicates the high degree of expectation for development is not displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(c), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 399", and the character mode is "white". is defined in association (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)), and "blue" is defined in association with the range of "400 to 679" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234(c)), "Green" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "680 to 879" (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), and "Red" is defined as a character mode in the range of "880 to 979". "Stripe (black)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "980 to 999" (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)). Further, "stripe (red)" is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (pressing the center button CB does not set the red stripe pattern).

That is, even when a player whose operation frequency is medium is playing a game, the operation support effect executed after the final development in the ready-to-win effect is completed is executed before the final development is completed. Compared to the operation support presentation, the selection ratio of the character mode that indicates the high expectation of the big win increases (the selection ratio of green characters is 1.2% → 20%, and the selection ratio of red characters is 0.8%). % → 10%), and the selection ratio of character styles indicating high expectations for development decreased significantly (selection ratio of black stripes from 18% to 2%, selection of red stripes). ratio decreases from 2% to 0%). A player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that a lottery result of a special symbol will be reported at the current stage of development by making it difficult for the character mode to show that the degree of expectation for development is high. In addition, since the character mode indicating that the expectation of the big win is high is likely to appear, it is possible to improve the expectation of the big win at the current stage of development.

Also, as shown in FIG. 234(c), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 699", and the character mode corresponds to "white". (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "700 to 839" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234(c)), "840 ~ 939” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), and “red” is associated as the character mode in the range of “940 to 989”. (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)), "stripe (black)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "990 to 999". Further, "stripe (red)" is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (pressing the center button CB does not set the red stripe pattern).

That is, even when a player with a high operation frequency is playing a game, in the operation support effect executed after the final development in the ready-to-win effect is completed, the operation executed before the final development is completed. Compared to the cheering effect, the selection ratio of the character mode that indicates the high expectation of the jackpot increases (the selection ratio of green characters is 1.2% → 20%, and the selection ratio of red characters is 0.8% → 10%), and the selection ratio of character styles indicating high expectations for development drops significantly (selection ratio of black stripes from 18% to 2%, selection ratio of red stripes decreased from 18% to 2%) from 2% to 0%). A player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that a lottery result of a special symbol will be announced at the current stage of development by making it difficult for the character mode to show that the degree of expectation for development is high. In addition, since the character mode indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is likely to appear, it is possible to improve the expectation of a big win at the current stage of development.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235(a), details of the above-described deviation (before completion of development) table 222fa3 will be described. As described above, the table 222fa3 for loss (before completion of development) is in the process of executing the variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the loss, and the operation support executed before the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. It is a data table referred to when selecting a character mode in rendering.

As shown in FIG. 235(a), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who operates infrequently, "white" is associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 99" as the character mode. defined (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)), and the range of "100 to 479" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235(a)), and "480 to 494 ” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235(a)), and “red” is defined in association with the range of “495 to 499” as the character mode. (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)), and the range of "500 to 949" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235(a)), and "950 "Stripe (red)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of ".about.999" (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235(a)).

In this way, in the variable effect corresponding to the loss, when the operation support effect is executed before the last development is completed, the win (before development is completed) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234(b)) is referred to. The selection ratio of the character mode that indicates the high expectation of the jackpot is lower than in the case of ). On the other hand, the selection ratio of character modes indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is the same as when the win (before completion of development) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 235(b)) is referred to. To make the selection ratio of each character mode substantially common by making the selection ratio of the character modes indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high both in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss before the final development is completed. can be done. Therefore, regardless of whether it is a win or a win, until the final development is completed, it is difficult to select a character mode that indicates that the probability of winning is high. You can continue to have a sense of expectation for.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(a), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 599", and the character mode is "white". is defined in association (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)), and "blue" is defined in association with the range of "600 to 791" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235(a)), "Green" is defined as the character mode for the range of "792 to 797" (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235(a)), and "Red" is defined as the character mode for the range of "798,799". are defined in association (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)), and "stripe (black)" is defined in association with the range of "800 to 979" as the character mode (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235(a) ), and the range of “980 to 999” is defined in association with “stripe (red)” as a character mode (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235(a)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 235(a), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, "white" corresponds to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 799" as the character mode. (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)), and the range of "800 to 895" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235(a)), "896 ~ 898" is defined in association with "green" as a character mode (see 222fa3c in Fig. 235(a)), and "red" is defined in association with "899" as a character mode ( 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)), "stripe (black)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "900 to 989" (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235(a)), and "990 to 999 " is defined in association with "stripe (red)" as a character mode (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235(a)).

In this way, even in the losing (before completion of development) table 222fa3, the more frequently the player who operates the game is playing the game, the higher the expectation of the big win, and the higher the expectation of development. The selection ratio of the character mode indicating . As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from varying depending on the game method due to a large difference in the number of appearances of each character mode in one operation support effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235(b), the details of the aforementioned deviation (after completion of development) table 222fa4 will be described. As described above, the deviation (after completion of development) table 222fa4 is in the process of executing the variable display (variation effect) corresponding to the deviation, and the operation support effect executed after the last development timing in the ready-to-win effect. 2 is a data table referred to when selecting a character mode in .

As shown in FIG. 235(b), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who operates less frequently, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 254" is associated with "white" as the character mode. is defined (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "255 to 754" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235(b)), "755 to 944 ” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)), and “red” is defined in association with the range of “945 to 949” as the character mode. (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "950 to 999" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(a)). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222f4f in FIG. 235(b)).

In this way, in the variable effect corresponding to the loss, when the operation support effect is executed after the last development is completed, the win (after development is completed) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) is referred to. The selection ratio of the character mode, which indicates that the expectation of the jackpot is high, is lower than in the case (the selection ratio of green characters is reduced from 50% to 19%, and the selection ratio of red characters is reduced from 25% to 0.5%. ). On the other hand, the selection ratio of character modes indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is the same as when the win (after completion of development) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) is referred to, and the black stripe The pattern character mode is selected at a rate of 5%, and the red stripe pattern character mode is not selected. In other words, character modes with high expectations for development are rarely selected. After the final development is completed, the effect is achieved by setting the selection ratio of the character mode, which indicates that the expectation of development is high in both the case of a big hit and the case of a loss, to a common low probability (5% ratio). It is possible to make the player recognize that the game will not develop further (that is, that the lottery result of the special symbol will be notified at the current stage of development). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the combination of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(b), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player whose operation frequency is medium, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 699", and the character mode is "white". is defined in association (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)), and "blue" is defined in association with the range of "700 to 899" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235(b)), "Green" is defined as the character mode in association with the range of "900 to 977" (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)), and "Red" is defined as the character mode in the range of "978, 979". are defined in correspondence (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)), and "stripe (black)" is defined in association with the range of "980 to 999" as the character mode (in FIG. 235(b) 222fa4e). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222fa4f in FIG. 235(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(b), as a prescribed content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, "white" corresponds to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 849". (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "850 to 949" is defined in association with "blue" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235(b)), "950 ~ 988” is defined in association with “green” as the character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)), and “red” is defined in association with “989” as the character mode ( 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "990 to 999" is defined in association with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222fa4f in FIG. 235(b)).

Therefore, even in the losing (after completion of development) table 222fa4, the more frequently the player who operates the game is playing the game, the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher, and the degree of expectation for development is higher. The selection rate of character modes is low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from varying depending on the game method due to a large difference in the number of appearances of each character mode in one operation support effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the operation support effect is executed a plurality of times for the same variable effect (variable display). The selection ratio of the character mode displayed when the player presses the center button CB is variable depending on whether it is before or after. More specifically, in the operation support effect executed before all the developments are completed, the character mode (black stripe pattern, red stripe pattern, Patterns) are set at a high rate, while the rate at which characters are set to have a high expectation of a big win is extremely low. As a result, in the operation cheering performance executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the character mode displayed in the case of a big win or in the case of a loss, so at least the final development is completed. Until then, the player can play the game without spoiling the expectation for the big win. In addition, although the selection rate of the character mode that increases the expectation of a big win is low, when the character mode is selected, the expectation of a big win increases. is displayed, the center button CB can be pressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effect is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support effect is calculated. And, according to the average number of operations, the selection ratio of each character mode per pressing of the center button CB is made different. That is, when a player who presses less frequently is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is increased. When a player who frequently presses down is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is reduced. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to equalize the number of display times of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high in the operation support performance regardless of the tendency of the player's operation, so that a more suitable performance is realized. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, details of the above-described mini character effect selection table 222fb will be described. FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the mini character effect selection table 222fb. As shown in FIG. 236(a), the mini character effect selection table 222fb is for the V challenge small win, which is referred to for determining whether or not the mini character advance notice effect can be executed and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the V challenge small win. A table 222fb1, a normal small win table 222fb2 referred to for determining whether or not to execute a mini character announcement performance and action timing in the variable display corresponding to the normal small win, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery results other than the small win. is composed of at least three data tables, ie, whether or not to execute the mini character announcement effect, and a non-small win table 222fb3 that is referred to for determining action timing.

First, with reference to FIG. 236(b), details of the V challenge small winning table 222fb1 will be described. As described above, the V-challenge small win table 222fb1 is a data table that defines data for determining whether or not to execute the mini-character advance notice effect and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the V-challenge small win. As shown in FIG. 236(b), the V challenge small winning table 222fb1 defines, for each variation type, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea and the effect mode of the mini character preview effect in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236(b), for the variation type (variation pattern) of normal reach, there is no mini-character announcement effect for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea of "0 to 99". 222fb1a in FIG. 236(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character preview effect (see FIG. 230(c)) is defined in association with the range of "100 to 399" (see FIG. 236). (see 222fb1b in (b)), and the range of "400 to 699" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see Fig. 231(b)) (see 222fb1c in Fig. 236(b)), A highly anticipated mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(d)) is defined in association with the range of "700 to 999" (see 222fb1d in FIG. 236(b)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 236(b), with respect to the variation type (variation pattern) of super reach and special reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 99". None is defined in association (see 222fb1e in FIG. 236(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character preview effect (see FIG. 230(c)) is defined in association with the range of "100 to 149" ( 222fb1f in FIG. 236(b)), and the range of "150 to 649" is stipulated in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(b)) (see 222fb1g in FIG. 236(b)). ), and the range of "650 to 999" is defined in association with a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(d)) (see 222fb1h in FIG. 236(b)).

That is, it is configured such that the mini-character advance notice effect with high expectation is more likely to be selected for the variation type that develops reach with higher expectation. In particular, by increasing the selection ratio of the high-anticipation mini character announcement effect in the high-expectation reach effect, it is possible to set the high-expectation action timing in the development stage with high expectations. can be higher. As described above, when the high-expectation first action is set, the mini-character MC performs the first action across the timing of development to a higher-expectation ready-to-win effect. Each action of the mini character MC is configured so as not to be interrupted in the middle (that is, the action is set so that the variable time does not elapse in the middle of the action of the mini character MC). Therefore, the player who understands the specification and plays the game can be made aware of the development before the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect develops. However, even if the first action with high expectations is executed in the development stage with relatively low expectations and the development can be detected, it is possible that the lottery result of the special symbol will be announced at the development stage with low expectations. Therefore, expectations for the V-challenge small win cannot be raised so much. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, a variation type with a high degree of expectation is configured to increase the ratio of execution of actions with a high degree of expectation. This allows the player to perceive in advance that the ready-to-win effect develops to a stage of development with a high degree of expectation and that it will develop into a performance with a higher degree of expectation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237(a), details of the normal small winning table 222fb2 described above will be described. FIG. 237(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal small winning table 222fb2. As described above, the normal small win table 222fb2 is a data table that defines data for determining whether or not to execute the mini character advance notice effect and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the normal small win.

As shown in FIG. 237(a), for the variation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "0 to 499" with no mini character notice effect. (Refer to 222fb2a in FIG. 237(a)), and the range of "500 to 899" is stipulated in association with a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 230(b)) (222fb2b in FIG. 237(a)). ), and the range of "900 to 989" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see Fig. 231(a)) (see 222fb2c in Fig. 237(a)), "990 to 999". A high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(c)) is defined in association with the range of (see 222fb2d in FIG. 237(a)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 237(a), for the variation type (variation pattern) of Super Reach and Special Reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 99". None is defined in association (see 222fb2e in FIG. 237(a)), and a low-expectation mini-character preview effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "100 to 799" (see FIG. 230(b)). (See 222fb2f in Fig. 237(a)), and the range of "800 to 949" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (See Fig. 231(a)) (See 222fb2g in Fig. 237(a). ), and the range of "950 to 999" is defined in association with a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(c)) (see 222fb2h in FIG. 237(a)).

Therefore, when the variation type of normal reach is selected as a normal small win, the execution ratio of the mini character notice effect is lower than in the case of the V challenge small win (90% → 50%), and furthermore, it is executed. Even if it is, almost, a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect is decided. Therefore, when a mini-character announcement effect with medium or high expectations is executed in the variation pattern of the normal reach, the player's sense of expectation for the V challenge small win can be improved. In addition, when the fluctuation type of super reach or special reach is selected as a normal small hit, the execution ratio of the mini character notice effect itself is the same, but the selection ratio of medium and high expectation mini character notice effects becomes lower. Therefore, when the mini-character announcement effect with medium or high expectation is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the V challenge small win can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.237(b), the detail of table 222fb3 for non-small hits mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this non-small winning table 222fb3. As described above, the non-small win table 222fb3 is a data table that defines data for determining whether or not to execute the mini character advance notice effect and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the lottery result other than the small win. .

As shown in FIG. 237(b), with respect to the fluctuation type (variation pattern) that is not long, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined to correspond to the range of "0 to 949" with no mini character notice effect. (see 222fb3a in FIG. 237(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "950 to 999" (see FIG. 237(b) ) at 222fb3b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 237(b), with respect to the variation type (variation pattern) of normal reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 599", and no mini character notice effect is associated. (see 222fb3c in FIG. 237(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "600 to 949" (see FIG. 237(b) (See 222fb3d of ), and the range of "950 to 998" is defined in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see Fig. 231(a)) (see 222fb3e of Fig. 237(b)), and "999". 231(c)) is defined in association with (see 222fb3f in FIG. 237(b)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 237(b), for the variation type (variation pattern) of Super Reach and Special Reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 399". None is defined in association (see 222fb3g in FIG. 237(b)), and a low-expectation mini-character preview effect (see FIG. 230(b)) is defined in association with the range of "400 to 899" ( 222fb3h in FIG. 237(b)), and the range of "900 to 979" is stipulated in association with a medium-expected mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(a)) (see 222fb3i in FIG. 237(b)). ), and the range of "980 to 999" is defined in association with a high-expectation mini-character announcement effect (see FIG. 231(c)) (see 222fb3j in FIG. 237(b)).

Therefore, when the lottery results are other than small wins, the execution ratio of mini character notice effects is lower than in the case of normal small wins, and the ratio of selecting mini character notice effects for medium and high expectations is also high. lower. As a result, at the time when the mini character announcement effect is executed, the possibility that the lottery result is at least a small win (V challenge small win or normal small win) is high, so the mini character announcement effect is executed. Thus, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player for the small winning game.

In the eleventh embodiment, only in the case of a small V-challenge win, up to the third action (see FIG. 228(b)) is executed in the mini-character announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third action is configured to be executed even with a normal small win, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is a display mode in which only a small win is confirmed (for example, the characters "small win" are displayed. An action in which the mini character MC falls together with the symbol) may be set. With this configuration, when the mini-character MC performs up to the third action, it is possible to realize a playability of predicting whether it is a V challenge small win or a normal small win from the contents of the action. That is, similar to the selection effect (see FIG. 216) in the tenth embodiment described above, it is possible to predict the type of small win and realize a novel game property in which the shooting direction is switched according to the prediction result. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, details of the above-described small winning effect selection table 222fc will be described. FIG. 238(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the small winning effect selection table 222fc. As shown in FIG. 238, the small hit time production selection table 222fc is whether or not the middle route suggestion production (see FIG. 232 (b)) can be executed when any of the small hits H14 to J14 occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol. , and a small hit H14 to J14 table 222fc1 for selecting the execution timing, and a central route suggestion production (see FIG. 232 (b)) when one of the small hits K14 to M14 occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol. , and a table 222fc2 for small hits K14 to M14 for selecting execution timing.

First, with reference to FIG. 238(b), details of the table 222fc1 for small hits H14 to J14 will be described. FIG. 238(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 222fc1 for small hits H14 to J14. As shown in FIG. 238(b), the small hit table 222fc1 for H14 to J14 defines the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea corresponding to each execution timing of the central route suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 599" is associated with the "V win rate 50% period" as the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect. (see 222fc1a in FIG. 238(b)). Since the effect lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", when it becomes one of the small hits H14 to J14, during the V winning rate 50% period (that is, to the lottery device 6755 The ratio (probability) of executing the central route suggesting effect only during the period in which the entered game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f is 60% (600/1000).

Also, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "600 to 749" is associated with "V win rate 100% period" as the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect. (see 222fc1b in FIG. 238(b)). Therefore, when it becomes one of the small hits H14 to J14, during the V winning rate 100% period (that is, the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 is easily distributed to the right V winning port 6755bV during the period) The ratio (probability) of executing only the central route suggesting effect is 15% (150/1000). That is, when the small hits H14 to J14 are won, the center route suggestion production that suggests the timing at which the game ball becomes easier to flow down to the distribution rotator 6755f (easier to flow down the center route) basically It is configured so that it can be executed even when the route cannot flow down. This is because when the small hits H14 to J14 are reached, both when the ball enters the center V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and when the ball enters the right V prize opening 6755bV, the time-saving jackpot is achieved. In other words, even though the ball entered the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggesting effect, the degree of expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f is deviated from the basic production rule and will be in a time saving state. When a game ball enters the right V winning port 6755bV with a low (only 39% rate of time saving state), conversely, the time saving state after the end of the big win is established. can be done. Therefore, when a game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggestive effect enters the right V winning opening 6755bV (that is, behavior that deviates from the basic production rules of the central route suggestive effect) If it occurs), the player can be convinced that the time saving state will be provided, so the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 238(b), when the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "750 to 799", the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is "both periods" (V winning rate 50% period). , and V win rate 100% period) are defined in association with each other (see 222fc1c in FIG. 238(b)). Therefore, when any of the small hits H14 to J14 occurs, the ratio (probability) of executing the central route suggestion effect in both the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period is 5%. (50/1000). By executing the central route suggesting effect in both periods, the player can be made to think that the chances of being in a time-saving state are increasing more than usual. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "800 to 999" in association with "non-execution". Therefore, when any of the small hits H14 to J14 is achieved, the ratio (probability) of not executing the central route suggesting effect is 20% (200/1000). Even if a small win is won, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggesting performance is not being executed by providing a case where the central route suggesting performance is not executed, the ball is shaken. A game ball may flow down to the minute rotating body 6755f, or an event may occur in which a ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV and a time saving state is given. Therefore, even when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in a state in which the central route suggestion performance is not executed, the time-saving state can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 238(c), the details of the table 222fc2 for small wins K14 to M14 will be described. FIG. 238(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 222fc2 for small wins K14 to M14. As shown in FIG. 238(c), in the table 222fc2 for small hits K14 to M14, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 949", and the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is set to "V 50% win rate period” is defined in correspondence (see 222fc2a in FIG. 238(c)). Since the effect lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", when it becomes one of the small hits K14 to M14, during the V winning rate 50% period (that is, to the lottery device 6755 The ratio (probability) of executing the central route suggestion effect only during the period in which the entered game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f is 95% (950/1000).

As shown in FIG. 238(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in the range of "950 to 999" in association with "non-execution". Therefore, when any one of the small winnings K14 to M14 is achieved, the ratio (probability) of not executing the central route suggesting effect is 5% (50/1000). Even if a small win is won, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggesting performance is not being executed by providing a case where the central route suggesting performance is not executed, the ball is shaken. A game ball may flow down to the minute rotating body 6755f, or an event may occur in which a ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV and a time saving state is given. Therefore, even when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in a state in which the central route suggestion performance is not executed, the time-saving state can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, in synchronization with the V winning rate of 50% period or the V winning rate of 100% period of the type of small hit that becomes a time-saving jackpot due to the occurrence of V winning, the central route suggestion production was configured to execute With this configuration, if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggestion performance, it is distributed to the distribution rotator 6755f and becomes a 16-round time-saving jackpot at a ratio of 1/2. Alternatively, since the ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV and becomes a time-saving jackpot, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the lottery device 6755 during execution of the central route suggestion performance. . Therefore, by comparing the entry timing of the game ball to the lottery device 6755 and the execution status of the central route suggestion effect (display mode of the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to predict whether or not the time saving state will occur. Since it can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233(b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 233(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 196) in that an effect timing storage area 223fa and an operation valid period flag 223fb, a cheering effect flag 223fc, a development completion flag 223fd, a press count counter 223fe, an operation frequency flag 223ff, a mini character flag 223fg, an action timing storage area 223fh, an action counter 223fi, and a limited period flag 223fj. , and a limited period counter 223fk are added.

The performance timing storage area 223fa temporarily stores data indicating the execution timing of the central route suggestive performance determined at the start of the small win in the time-saving state of the normal symbols at least until the central route suggestive performance is actually started. This is a storage area for storing This effect timing storage area 223fa is allocated with a storage area of, for example, 1 byte, and indicates that the center route suggestion effect is not executed when "00H" is stored as data, and "01H" is stored. indicates that the central route suggesting effect is to be executed only during the V winning rate period of 50% when "02H" is stored, and that the central route suggesting effect is executed only during the V winning rate of 100% period. It shows that when "03H" is stored, the central route suggestion effect is executed in both the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period. The initial value of the production timing storage area 223fa is set to "00H", and when the small winning starts (when the small winning type command is received), the production timing corresponding to the small winning type is selected for the small winning production. Based on the determination from the table 222fc, data corresponding to the determined rendering timing is stored (see S41006 in FIG. 250). Also, it is reset to "00H" at the end of the small winning.

The operation valid period flag 223fb is a flag indicating whether or not the operation valid period of the center button CB is in progress. If the operation valid period flag 223fb is ON, it means that the operation valid period is in progress. That is, when the player depresses the center button CB, a character mode is drawn using the character mode selection table 222fa, and the character image 814 of the character mode determined by lottery is displayed. The operation valid period flag 223fb has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the start of the execution period of each operation support effect in the variable effect (variable display) in which the operation support effect is set (Fig. 243, S40405). Also, it is set to OFF at the end timing of the operation support effect (see S40408 in FIG. 243).

The support effect flag 223fc is a flag indicating whether or not the variable effect (variable display) in which the operation support effect is set is being executed. If it is on, the variable effect in which the operation support effect is set is being executed. indicates that This support effect flag 223fc is set to ON when the variable display effect accompanied by the operation support effect is determined (see S41201 in FIG. 252). Also, it is set to OFF when fluctuation stops.

The development completion flag 223fd is a flag indicating whether or not the development up to the final stage in the variable display has been completed. That is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, it indicates whether it has developed to normal reach, if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern, it indicates whether it has developed to super reach, and if it is a special reach fluctuation pattern , indicates whether it has developed to special reach or not. If this development completion flag 223fd is on, it means that the development to the final stage in the variable display has been completed, and if it is off, it means that the development to the final stage in the variable display has not been completed. do. The development completion flag 223fd has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the timing when the final stage of each variable performance is developed (see S40504 and S40508 in FIG. 244). Also, it is set to OFF when fluctuation stops. When the center button CB is pressed during execution of the operation support effect, the development completion flag 223fd is referenced to determine whether or not the development is completed. Any one of the four data tables is determined as the table for selecting the character mode (see S40604, S40605, S40607 and S40608 in FIG. 245).

The number-of-presses counter 223fe is a counter that counts the number of presses of the center button CB in one variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set. The number-of-presses counter 223fe has an initial value of 0, and each time the center button CB is pressed (pressing is detected) during the operation valid period of the operation support presentation, the value is incremented by one. It is updated (see S40601 in FIG. 245). The value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is held until the execution of the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is next set, and based on the held counter value, the tendency of the previous player's operation (1 253), the value is reset to 0 (see S41209 in FIG. 253). The tendency of the player's operation determined based on the number-of-presses counter 223fe is set as the state (one of "00H" to "02H") of an operation frequency flag 223ff, which will be described later. When determining the character mode based on the player's operation of the central button CB in the operation support effect, the data table corresponding to the player's operation frequency indicated by the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is selected from the character mode selection table 222fa. Then, the selected table is used to determine the character mode (see S40609 in FIG. 245).

The operation frequency flag 223ff is a flag to which data indicating the player's operation tendency (operation frequency) is set. The operation frequency flag 223ff is composed of 1 byte. If it is "00H", it indicates that a player with high operation frequency is playing a game. "02H" indicates that a player with a low operation frequency is playing a game. The initial setting of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "00H", and the player's pressing tendency (average number of times of operation), the state is set (see S41205, S41207, and S41208 in FIG. 253).

The mini character flag 223fg is a flag that indicates whether or not the variable display effect with the mini character advance notice effect set is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the variable display effect with the mini character advance notice effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the mini character preview effect is not set. This mini character flag 223fg is set to ON when execution of the mini character announcement effect is determined by lottery using the mini character effect selection table 222fb (see FIG. 236(a)) at the start of the variable display effect (see FIG. 254). S41309). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the variable display in which the mini character announcement effect is set.

The action timing storage area 223fh is a storage area for storing data indicating the execution timing of each action in the mini-character advance notice effect. In this action timing storage area 223fh, when execution of a mini character announcement effect is decided based on the mini character effect selection table 222fb (see FIG. Data indicating the corresponding execution timing is stored (see S41310 in FIG. 254). During execution of the variable display effect in which the mini character preview effect is set, the execution timing of each action is determined based on the data stored in the action timing storage area 223fh, and the execution of each action is set (Fig. 246 S40705).

The action counter 223fi is a counter in which a value indicating the action stage of the mini-character announcement effect is set. The value of the action counter 223fi is incremented by 1 every time the action step advances by one step in the mini-character announcement effect (see S40704 in FIG. 246). When it is time to start a new action in the mini-character preview effect, an action is set according to the counter value of the action counter 223fi (see S40705 in FIG. 246).

The restricted period flag 223fj is a flag indicating whether or not it is a non-effect button restricted period (a period from one second before the start of the valid operation period to one second after the end of the valid operation period). While indicating that it is the non-effect button limit period, if it is off, it indicates that it is not the non-effect button limit period. This restricted period flag 223fj is set to ON at a timing one second before the start of each operation support effect (operation effective period) in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set (see S40905 in FIG. 248). ), and is set to OFF when one second has elapsed after the end of the operation support effect (see S40903 in FIG. 248). While the restricted period flag 223fj is on, even if a non-rendering button is operated, the setting change corresponding to the operated button is restricted. As a result, when a player who tries to operate the central button CB during the execution of the operation support performance erroneously presses the non-performance button, various settings are changed against the player's will. In addition, since the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize an operation error (wrong type of button to be pressed). Therefore, the operation support effect can be executed more preferably. Here, the reason why the setting change based on the operation of the non-effect button is restricted not only during the operation effective period but also for one second before and after the operation effective period is that the operation effective period starts. A player who perceives and starts button operation before the effective period of operation starts, or a player who continues to operate without noticing the expiration of the effective period of operation performs an erroneous operation. This is to deal with As a result, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the settings are changed against the player's will.

The restricted period counter 223fk is a counter for counting the number of times the non-effect button is pressed (operated) during one non-effect button restricted period. In the eleventh embodiment, unless the non-effect button is operated twice or more during the non-effect button restriction period, the setting corresponding to the pressed button type is not changed. In other words, when the value of the counter 223fk is 1 or less during the restricted period, setting changes of the light intensity or volume of the pachinko machine 10 are avoided (restricted). By configuring in this way, during the operation effective period and the period of 1 second before and after that, the player who tried to participate in the operation support effect by pressing the center button CB will be in the vicinity of the center button CB (predetermined distance). It is possible to prevent the setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed against the player's will when the non-rendering button arranged within the range) is erroneously pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate more on the operation support effect, so that a suitable effect mode can be realized.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 239, small winning start processing 14 (S271) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This small hit start process 14 (S271) is a process executed instead of the small hit start process (see FIG. 199) in the tenth embodiment, and the small hit start process (see FIG. 199) in the tenth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the start of the small hit when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit.

Among the small hitting start processing 14 (see FIG. 239) in the eleventh embodiment, in each processing of S1501 to S1503, each processing of S1501 to S1503 of the small hitting start processing in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 199) The same processing is performed. In addition, in the small hit start processing 14 (see FIG. 239) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S1503 ends, a small hit type command indicating the type of the small hit to be started this time is set, and this processing ends. The small hit type command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S1001) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201), It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit type command in the time saving state of the normal pattern, it determines whether or not the central route suggestion performance can be executed and the execution timing according to the small hit type notified by the command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the small winning control process 14 (S1081) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This small hit control process 14 (S1081) is a process executed instead of the small hit control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the tenth embodiment, and the small hit control process 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 203 ), is a process for executing various controls during the small winning game.

Of the small hit control processing 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S1301 to S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326, the small hit control processing 13 in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 203 See), the same processes as those of S1301 to S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326 are executed.

Further, in the small hit control process 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is ON (S1304: Yes), then the lottery device 6755 It is determined whether it is the operation timing of each operating member (small hitting attacker 6755a, upper opening/closing door 6755bU, lower opening/closing door 6755bD) (S1331), and it is determined that it is the operation timing of any operating member (S1331: Yes), sets an operation content command indicating the type and movable position (operation content) of the operating member to be operated (S1332), and terminates this process. The operation content command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 201) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the operation content command is received in a state in which execution of the central route suggesting effect is determined, the voice lamp control device 113 compares the operation content with the determined execution timing of the central route suggesting effect, and performs the central route suggesting effect. determines whether or not to start

By executing this small hit control process 14 (see FIG. 240), it is possible to accurately grasp the operation timing of each operation member, so the closing timing of the upper opening and closing door 6755bU (V winning rate 50% period start timing ) or the opening timing of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD (the start timing of the V winning rate 100% period), and the central route suggestion effect can be executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 241 to 255, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 241, main processing 14 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and first embodiment).

Of the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, each of the processing of S4101 to S4110 and S4114 to S4118 is the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and first embodiment). The same processes as those of S4101 to S4110 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. In addition, in the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S4110 ends, instead of the rendering update processing (see FIG. 35) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) Update processing 14 is executed (S4191). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 242, but this effect update process 14 is a process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

In addition, in the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, when the rendering update processing 14 (S4191) is completed, then the operation ( Pressing) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, various setting button input monitoring processing for changing settings according to the type of button operated is executed (S4192). Details of the various setting button input monitoring processing (S4192) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the various setting button input monitoring processing (S4192) ends, next, instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), command determination processing 14 is executed (S4193). ), thereafter, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the variable display setting process 14 is executed (S4194), and the process proceeds to S4114. Details of the variable display setting process 14 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, details of the effect update process 14 (S4191) described above will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing effect update processing 14 (S4191). This effect update process 14 is, as described above, a process for updating the effect modes of various effects. As shown in FIG. 242, when the effect update process 14 (S4191) is executed, the operation support effect process is executed for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set (S40301), and then, A mini-character setting process is executed to update the effect mode in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice effect is set (S40302), and this process ends. The details of the operation support rendering process (S40301) and mini character setting process (S40302) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245 and 246, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, details of the above-described operation support effect processing (S40301) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing operation support effect processing. This operation support effect processing (S40301) is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set.

When the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the support effect flag 223fc is on (S40401). Since the variable display for which is set is not being executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S40401, if it is determined that the cheering effect flag 223fc is ON (S40401: Yes), then the development determination process for determining the development status of the variable effect being executed is executed (S40402). . The details of this development determination process (S40402) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S40402 ends, it is next determined whether or not the operation valid period flag 223fb is on (S40403). (S40403: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the valid period of operation (S40404). In the processing of S40404, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the operation effective period (that is, the start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: Yes), the operation effective period flag 223fb is set to ON (S40405), and the operation The start of the cheering effect (see FIG. 224) is set (S40406), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S40404, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the operation effective period (the start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: No), the processing of S40405 and S40406 is skipped, and the present processing ends as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S40403, if it is determined that the operation valid period flag 223fb is ON (that is, the operation support effect is being executed) (S40403: Yes), the operation valid period end timing ( That is, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the operation support effect (S40407). In the process of S40407, if it is determined that it is time to end the operation valid period (S40407: Yes), the operation valid period flag 223fb is set to OFF (S40408), and the end of the operation support effect is set (S40409). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40407 that it is not the end timing of the effective period of operation (S40407: No), it is determined whether or not pressing (operation) on the center button CB has been detected (S40410), and the center button CB is detected (S40410: Yes), depending on whether the special symbol is appropriate and the operation status of the player, the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Character mode setting processing is executed (S40411), and this processing ends. The details of this character mode setting process (S40411) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40410 that the depression of the center button CB has not been detected (S40410: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the details of the development determination process (S40402) described above will be described. This development determination process (S40402) is, as described above, a process for determining the development status of the variable effect being executed. When this development determination process (S40402) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the development completion flag 223fd is on (S40501). ), and since the stage of the ready-to-win effect will not develop any further in the variable effect that is currently being executed, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40501, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is off (S40501: No), then the timing at which reach occurs (develops into normal reach effect) (that is, at 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) timing) (S40502), and if it is determined that it is the timing of reach generation (S40502: Yes), then the variation type being executed is the normal reach variation type (variation pattern) (S40503). In the process of S40503, if it is determined that the variation type (variation pattern) is normal reach (S40503), it means that the development to normal reach is the last development in the variation display, so the development completion flag 223fd is turned on. After setting (S40504), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S40503, if it is determined that it is not the normal reach variation type (S40503: No), the development to normal reach is not the last development (development to super reach and special reach remains) Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40502, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the reach occurs (develops into the normal reach effect) (S40502: No), then the timing to develop into the super reach effect (that is, the start of fluctuation 30 seconds later) (S40505), and if it is determined that it is time to develop a super ready-to-win effect (S40505: Yes), the variation type currently being executed is a super ready-to-win variation. It is determined whether or not it is a type (S40506). In the processing of S40506, if it is determined that the variation type is super reach, it means that the development to super reach is the last development in the variation display, so the development completion flag 223fd is set to ON (S40508 ), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40505, if it is determined that it is not the variation type of super reach (S40505: No), it means that the development to super reach is not the last development (development to special reach remains). Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40505, if it is determined that it is not the development timing to the super reach production (S40505: No), then the development timing to the special reach production (that is, the timing after 60 seconds have passed after the start of the fluctuation) (S40507), and if it is determined that it is time to develop into a special ready-to-win effect (S40507: Yes), the development completion flag 223fd is set to ON (S40508), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S40507, if it is determined that it is not the time to develop into a special reach (S40507: No), this process ends.

By executing this development determination process, the development completion flag 223fd can be suitably updated according to the development status of the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, in the operation support presentation, the character mode can be preferably set using the development status indicated by the development completion flag 223fd.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the details of the character mode setting process (S40411) described above will be described. As described above, this character mode setting process (S40411) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to whether the special symbol is appropriate and the player's operation status when the central button CB is pressed in the operation support effect. This is processing for determining the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed.

When the character mode setting process (S40411) is executed, first, the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is updated by adding 1 (S40601), and then it is determined whether or not the development completion flag 223fd is on. (S40602). In the processing of S40602, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is off (S40602: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation display corresponding to the big win is being executed (S40603), If it is determined that the variable display is being executed (S40603: Yes), the character mode is determined (lottery) from the winning (before completion of development) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234(b)) of the character mode selection table 222fa. (S40604), and the process proceeds to S40609. On the other hand, in the processing of S40603, if it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the big win is not being executed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the loss is being executed) (S40603: No), the character mode selection table 222fa The deviation (before completion of development) table 222fa3 (see FIG. 235(a)) is read out as a data table for determining (lottery) the character mode (S40604), and the process proceeds to S40609.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40602, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is ON (S40602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation display corresponding to the big win is being executed (S40606), If it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the big win is being executed (S40606: Yes), the character mode selection table 222fa (after completion of development) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) is changed to the character mode. Read as a data table for determination (lottery) (S40607, the process moves to S40609. On the other hand, in S40606 processing, the variation display corresponding to the big hit is not being executed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the loss is being executed) (S40606No), data for determining (lottery) the character mode selection table 222fa4 (see FIG. 235(c)) for deviation (after completion of development) of the character mode selection table 222fa. It is read as a table (S40608), and the process proceeds to S40609.

In the process of S40609, which is executed after the processes of S40604, S40605, S40607, and S40608 are completed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff are changed from the data table read out in the immediately preceding process. The character mode is specified according to the corresponding operation frequency (S40609), the display of the dialogue (character image 814) of the specified character mode is set (S40610), and this process is terminated.

By executing this character mode setting process (see FIG. 245) each time the center button CB is pressed while the operation support effect is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol, the development status of the variable display, and the game An appropriate character mode can be set according to the frequency of operation by the user.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, details of the above-described mini character setting process (S40302) will be described. This mini character setting process (S40302) is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the mini character announcement effect is set. When this mini character setting process (S40302) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the mini character flag 223fg is on (S40701). S40701: No) This means that the variable display for which the mini-character advance notice effect is set is not being executed, and there is no possibility of updating the effect mode related to the mini-character advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40701 that the mini character flag 223fg is ON (S40701: Yes), the data in the action timing storage area 223fh is read (S40702), and the action timing specified based on the read data It is determined whether or not (S40703). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation (the value of the fluctuation time counter 223f) matches the action timing corresponding to the data read in the process of S40702.

In the process of S40703, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the action of the mini character MC (S40703), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40703, if it is determined that it is time to start a new action for the mini character MC (S40703: Yes), the value of the action counter 223fi is updated by adding 1 (S40704), and the action after the addition is made. A display action command indicating an action corresponding to the value of the counter 223fi is set (S40705), and this processing is terminated.

The display action command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing 14 (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives this display action command, it performs display control so that the mini character MC executes the action corresponding to the command.

By executing this mini-character setting process (see FIG. 246), each action can be started accurately at each action timing of the mini-character advance notice effect determined at the start of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to accurately suggest the degree of expectation for the V challenge small win in each mini-character advance notice effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 247, details of the above-described various button input monitoring processing (S4192) will be described. As described above, the various button input monitoring process (S4192) is one process in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241), and the operation of the non-effect buttons (buttons for changing the volume and light intensity settings) is performed. This is a process for monitoring (pressing) and, when an operation is detected, changing the setting according to the type of button operated.

In the various setting button input monitoring processing (see FIG. 247), first, pressing (operation) of any of the non-rendering buttons (up button UB, down button DB, right button RB, left button LB) is detected. (S40801), and if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the non-effect button is not detected (S40801: No), then it is determined whether or not the support effect flag 223fc is on. It discriminates (S40802). In the process of S40802, if it is determined that the cheering effect flag 223fc is ON (S40802: Yes), it means that the variable display in which the operation cheering effect is set is being executed. A limited period setting process for setting a non-effect button limited period according to time is executed (S40803), and this process ends. Details of this limited period setting process (S40803) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40802 that the cheering effect flag 223fc is not on (it is off) (S40802: No), it means that the variable display in which the operation cheering effect is set is not being executed. , since there is no possibility of setting and ending the non-effect button restriction period, this processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S40801 that any non-rendering button has been pressed (S40801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the restricted period flag 223fj is ON (S40804). ), if it is determined that the restricted period flag 223fj is off (S40804: No), the process proceeds to S40808. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40801 that the during-restriction period flag 223fj is ON (S40804: Yes), the value of the during-restriction period counter 223fk is updated by adding 1 (S40805). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223fk during the restricted period after the update has become 2 (that is, whether the player has pressed the non-effect button twice or more during the non-effect button restricted period). (S40806) If it is determined that the post-update counter value is not 2 (that is, it is 1) (S40806: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40806, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223fk during the restricted period after updating is 2 (that is, the non-effect button has been pressed twice or more during the non-effect button restricted period). (S40806: Yes), the value of the limited period counter 223fk is reset to 0 (S40807), and the process proceeds to S40808. In the process of S40808, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is updated according to the type of non-effect button whose operation is detected (S40808), and this process ends. Specifically, when the upper button UB is pressed, the setting of the light amount (brightness) is increased by one step, and when the lower button DB is pressed, the setting of the light amount is decreased by one step. Further, when the right button RB is pressed, the volume setting is increased by one step, and when the left button LB is pressed, the volume setting is decreased by one step.

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, the various settings (volume and light amount settings) of the pachinko machine 10 are not changed unless the non-effect button is pressed twice or more during the non-effect button restriction period. It consists of As a result, even if a player who tries to operate the central button CB during the execution of the operation support operation effect accidentally presses the non-effect button, various settings are changed against the player's will. In addition, since the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize an operation error (wrong type of button to be pressed). Therefore, the operation support effect can be executed more preferably. In addition, during the non-performance button restriction period, the setting can be changed by pressing the non-performance button twice, so that the player who wants to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 during the execution of the operation support performance. can meet the demands of Therefore, since it is possible to meet the needs of various players, it is possible to further improve the convenience of the players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, details of the above-described limited period setting process (S40803) will be described. This restriction period setting process (S40803) is, as described above, a process for setting the non-effect button restriction period according to the elapsed time after the start of variation. In the restricted period setting process (S40803), first, it is determined whether or not the restricted period flag 223fj is ON (S40901), and if it is determined that the restricted period flag 223fj is ON (S40901: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the non-effect button limitation period (that is, the timing when one second has elapsed after the end of the operation support effect) (S40902).

In the process of S40902, if it is determined that it is time to end the non-effect button limit period (S40902: Yes), the value of the limit period counter 223fk is reset to 0 (S40903), and the limit period flag 223fj is turned off. (S40904), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40902, if it is determined that the timing of the non-effect button restriction period is not the end (timing of one second after the end of the operation support effect) (S40902: No), the processes of S40903 and S40904 are executed. Skip and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S40901, if it is determined that the restricted period flag 223fj is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S40901: No), the start timing of the non-effect button restriction period (that is, the operation support (S40905), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the non-production button restriction period (that is, the timing one second before the operation support production is started). If so (S40905: Yes), the restricted period flag 223fj is set to ON (S40906), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40905, if it is determined that the start timing of the button restriction period for non-effect (that is, the timing one second before the start of the operation support effect) is not reached (S40905), the process of S40905 is skipped. , the processing ends.

By executing this restriction period setting process (see FIG. 248), the non-effect button restriction can be accurately performed from one second before the operation support effect is started to one second after the end of the operation support effect. Can be set for a period. Therefore, even if the player who tries to operate the central button CB during the execution of the operation support operation performance accidentally presses the non-performance button, various settings are changed against the player's will. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, details of the winning-related process 14 (S43011) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 14 (S43011) is executed in place of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment in the command determination process 14 (S4193) in the eleventh embodiment. , similar to the win-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment, this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of win-related command. Note that the command determination process 14 in the eleventh embodiment is unchanged except that the hit-related process 14 (S43011) is executed instead of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment. A detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Of the hit-related processing 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes of S4404, S4405, S4407-S4410, and S44001-S44004, the hit-related processing 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 205) , S4404, S4405, S4407 to S4410, and S44001 to S44004 are executed.

In addition, in the winning related processing 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processing of S44001, it is determined that the opening command for small winning is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 When (S44001: No), then, it is determined whether or not the small hit type command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S44011). In the process of S44011, if it is determined that the small per type command is included in the unprocessed command (S44011: Yes), the small for executing the control according to the small per type notified by the command Hit match type command processing is executed (S44012), and this processing ends. The details of this small hit type command process (S44012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S44011, if it is determined that the small hit type command is not included in the unprocessed command (S44011: No), then in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not an operation content command is included (S44013), and if it is determined that an operation content command is included (S44013: Yes), control is executed according to the operation content indicated by the received command. (S44014), and the process ends. The details of this operation content command process (S44014) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S44013 that the unprocessed commands do not include an operation content command (S44013: No), the process proceeds to S44003.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, details of the small hit type command processing (S44011) described above will be described. Figure 250 is the flowchart which shows this small hit classification command processing (S44011). This small hit type command process (S44011) is one process in the hit related process 14 (see FIG. 249), and as described above, the process for executing the control according to the small hit type notified by the command is.

In the small hit type command process (see FIG. 250), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223i is read (S41001), and whether or not the read data is the data indicating the time saving state of the normal symbol It is determined (S41002). In the process of S41002, if it is determined that the data indicating the game state different from the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) is read (S41002: No), central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b) ) is not likely to be executed, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S41002, if it is determined that the data indicating the time saving state is read (S41002: Yes), then the small hit type notified by the small hit type command is any of the small hit H14-J14 It is determined whether or not (S41003), and if it is determined that it is one of the small hits H14 to J14 (S41003: Yes), the central route suggestion production with reference to the table 222fc1 for the small hits H14 to J14 (See FIG. 232(b)) is determined (S41004), and the process proceeds to S41006.

On the other hand, in the process of S41003, if it is determined that the small per type notified by the command is not a small per H14 ~ J14 (one of the small per K14 ~ M14) (S41003: No), the small per K14 ~ The table 222fc2 for M14 is referred to determine whether or not to execute the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232(b)) and the execution timing (S41004), and the process proceeds to S41006.

In the process of S41006 executed after the process of either S41004 or S41005, data indicating the effect timing determined by the process of S41004 or S41005 is stored in the effect timing storage area 223fa (S41006), and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 251, details of the operation content command processing (S44014) described above will be described. This operation content command process (S44014) is one process in the win-related process 14 (see FIG. 249), and as described above, is a process for executing control according to the operation content indicated by the received command. . In this operation content command process (S44014), first, the data in the effect timing storage area 223fa is read (S41101), and the start timing of the suggestive effect corresponding to the read data is the operating member notified by the current operation content command. (S41102). In the process of S41102, when an operation content command indicating closing of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is received in a state in which the V winning rate period of 50% is set as the effect timing, and when the V winning rate period of 100% is received as the effect timing. In the set state, when an operation content command indicating opening of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is received, it is determined that the production timing is matched.

In the processing of S41102, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command and the start timing of the suggestive effect match (S41102: Yes), the execution of the suggestive effect is set (S41103), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S41102, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command and the start timing of the suggestive effect do not match (S41102: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, details of the variable display setting process 14 (S4194) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 14 (S4194) is one process in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241). (see reference). Of the variable display setting process 14 (S4194) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S4501 to S4509 corresponds to S4501 to S4501 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as each processing of S4509 is executed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 252) in the eleventh embodiment, after the process of S4504 is completed, the variable pattern (variable display effect) set in the process of S4504 is changed to include the operation support effect. It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern (S4541), and if it is determined that it is a variation pattern accompanied by an operation support effect (S4541: Yes), a support effect setting process for setting the operation support effect is executed. (S4542), the process proceeds to S4543. Details of the support effect setting process (S4542) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4541, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not involve the operation support effect (S4541: No), the process of S4542 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4543.

In the process of S4543, an action timing determination process is executed to determine whether or not the mini character announcement effect can be executed and the execution timing by lottery (S4543), and the process proceeds to S4505. The details of this action timing determination process (S4543) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, details of the cheering effect setting process (S4542) described above will be described. This support effect setting process (S4542) is, as described above, a process for setting the operation support effect. In this operation support effect processing (S4542), first, the support effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S41201), and then the value of the pressing frequency counter 223fe is read (S41202). Then, from the read value of the pressing number counter 223fe, the average pressing number (A) of one operation support effect in the variable display for which the previous operation support effect was set is calculated (S41203). Here, the operation support effect is executed two to four times during one variation period according to the variation type. Specifically, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it is executed twice before developing into normal reach and after developing into normal reach, and in the super reach fluctuation pattern, before developing into normal reach, after developing into normal reach, and super It is executed 3 times after developing into Reach, and in the variation pattern of Special Reach, it is executed 4 times before developing into Normal Reach, after developing into Normal Reach, after developing into Super Reach, and after developing into Special Reach. . In the process of S41203, if the variation type of the variable display accompanied by the operation cheering effect executed last time is normal reach, the value obtained by dividing the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe by 2 is calculated as the average number of operations (A). In the case of reach, the average number of operations (A) is calculated by dividing the value by 3. In the case of special reach, the value of the press number counter 223fe is divided by 4, and the average number of operations (A) is calculated. .

When the processing of S41203 ends, next, the average number of operations (A) calculated in the processing of S41203 is a value of 5 or less (that is, the average number of operations of the player in the previous operation support effect is 5 or less). (S41204), and if it is determined to be 5 or less (S41204: Yes), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "02H" indicating "low operation frequency" (S41205). , the process proceeds to S41209. On the other hand, in the processing of S41204, if it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is a value greater than 5 (S41204: No), then the average number of operations (A) is a value of 9 or less. It is determined whether or not (S41206).

In the process of S41206, if it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is a value of 9 or less, the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "01H" indicating "moderate operation frequency" (S4107), and the process is continued. The process proceeds to S41209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41206 that the average number of operations (A) is a value of 10 or more (S41206: No), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "00H" indicating "frequent operations". (S41208), the process proceeds to S41209. In the process of S41209, the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is reset to 0 (S41209), and the process ends.

By executing this cheering effect setting process (see FIG. 253), the operation frequency flag 223ff can be updated based on the player's pressing tendency in the variable display accompanied by the previous operation cheering effect. Therefore, when the operation support effect is actually started and the center button CB is pressed, the character mode can be appropriately set according to the tendency of the operation.

In the eleventh embodiment, the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is held until the start timing of the variable display at which the operation support effect is executed next, and the value of the number-of-presses counter 223fe is held. , the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set at the start of the variable display in which the operation support effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the end of the variable display in which the operation support effect is set, the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set based on the value of the pressing number counter 223fe, and only the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is changed to the next operation support effect. may be held until the variable display for which is set is executed. By configuring in this way, the processing load at the start of fluctuation can be reduced. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the center button CB is pressed during the valid period of operation is simply counted to discriminate the tendency of the player's number of times of operation. is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, it is determined whether there is a high tendency to press the center button CB in the first half of the operation effective period, a high tendency to press the center button CB in the latter half, or a tendency to press the center button CB evenly. Alternatively, the determination ratio of the character mode with a high expectation of development or a big win may be switched between a period during which it is determined that the player tends to press the key and a period during which this is not the case. By increasing the determination ratio of the character mode with high expectation during the period when the pressing tendency is high, it is possible to set an appropriate display mode according to the tendency of each player. Conversely, by increasing the determination ratio of the character mode with high expectation during a period when the player has a low tendency to press, the player can be encouraged to try a different pressing method. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the action timing determination process (S4543) described above will be described. As described above, this action timing determination process is a process for determining whether or not the mini character announcement effect can be executed, and the execution timing. In this action timing determination process (S4543), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a small per variation pattern (S41301), and if it is determined that it is not a small per variation pattern (S41301: No ), and then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is out of short (S41302). In the process of S41302, when it is determined that the variation pattern is short or short (S41302: Yes), the variation pattern has no possibility of executing the mini-character advance notice effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S41302, if it is determined that the variation pattern is not short or short (S41302: No), the non-small win table 222fb3 is used as a data table for determining the effect mode (action timing) of the mini character preview effect. (See FIG. 237(b)) is read out (S41303), and the process proceeds to S41307.

On the other hand, in the process of S41301, if it is determined that the variation pattern to be executed this time is a variation pattern for a small hit (S41301: Yes), it is determined whether it is a variation pattern corresponding to a small V challenge. (S41304), if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the V challenge small win (S41304: Yes), the data table for determining the effect mode (action timing) of the mini character preview effect is used for the V challenge small win. The table 222fb1 (see FIG. 236(b)) is read out (S41305), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S41304, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern corresponding to the V challenge small win (S41304: No), data for determining the effect mode (action timing) of the mini character preview effect As a table, the normal small winning table 222fb2 (see FIG. 237(a)) is read (S41306), and the process proceeds to S41307.

In the process of S41307, from the table read out by the process of any of S41303, S41305, or S41306, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea (whether or not the mini character announcement effect can be executed, and the action timing when it is executed) is determined. ) is specified (S41307), and then it is determined whether execution of the mini-character announcement effect is specified in the processing of S41307 (S41308). In the process of S41308, if it is determined that execution of the mini character preview effect is specified (S41308: Yes), the mini character flag 223fg is set to ON (S41309), and the action timing corresponding to the effect mode specified in the process of S41307 is set. The indicated data is stored in the action timing storage area 223fh (S41310), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S41308, if it is determined that execution of the mini character announcement effect is not specified (no mini character announcement effect is executed) (S41308), the processes of S41309 and S41310 are skipped and the main process is performed. exit. By executing this action timing determination process (see FIG. 254), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG. First, the command determination process 14 (S6311) of the display control device 114 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 14 (S6311) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and first embodiment). ) is for executing control according to the type of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, similar to the command determination processing (see FIG. 42).

Of the command determination process 14 (S6311) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S6401 to S6420 corresponds to each of S6401 to S6420 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as each processing is executed. Further, in the command determination process 14 (S6311) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S6418 that the unprocessed command received from the sound lamp control device 113 does not include an error command, (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a display action command (S6431). In the processing of S6431, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include the error command for display (S6431: Yes), action command processing for displaying the action of the mini character MC indicated by the action command for display. is executed (S6432), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6431 that the unprocessed commands do not include a display action command (S6431: No), the process proceeds to S6420. Details of this action command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing action command processing (S6432). In this action command process (S6432), first, the action data corresponding to the action notified by the display action command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is read from the action data table (S8001), and the read action data is read. , the current value of the pointer 233f is added to the data already stored in the display data table buffer 233d (S8002).

When the processing of S8002 ends, the transfer action data table corresponding to the set action data (display data table) is determined, and the contents specified in the determined transfer action data table are stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. On the other hand, the value of the current pointer 233f is added as the starting point (S8003), and this processing ends.

By executing this action command process (see FIG. 256). Display data for displaying the action notified by the display action command can be accurately added to the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. A mini-character announcement effect can be preferably executed without affecting the display mode of the effect.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to be capable of executing various entertainment effects such as an operation support effect, a mini character advance notice effect, and a central route suggestion effect. The operation support effect is a effect in which a character image indicating various expectations is displayed in a display mode each time a specific condition is satisfied (the player presses the center button CB) during the effect period. By executing this operation support effect, the player who wants to know various expectations in the variable effect being executed is made to play the game so that the specific conditions are likely to be established (positive center button CB can be pressed (operated), it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game. In addition, the operation support effect is configured to be executed multiple times for the same variable effect (variable display), and the timing at which the operation support effect is executed (before all developments are completed or after The selection ratio of the character mode to be displayed when the player presses the center button CB is varied depending on whether there is any. More specifically, in the operation support effect executed before all the developments are completed, the character mode (black stripe pattern, red stripe pattern, Patterns) are set at a high rate, while the rate at which characters are set to have a high expectation of a big win is extremely low. As a result, in the operation cheering performance executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the character mode displayed in the case of a big win or in the case of a loss, so at least the final development is completed. Until then, the player can play the game without spoiling the expectation for the big win. In addition, although the selection rate of the character mode that increases the expectation of a big win is low, when the character mode is selected, the expectation of a big win increases. is displayed, the center button CB can be pressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effect is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support effect is calculated. And, according to the average number of operations, the selection ratio of each character mode per pressing of the center button CB is made different. That is, when a player who presses less frequently is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is increased. When a player who frequently presses down is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is high and the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is reduced. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to equalize the number of times of display of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high in the operation support performance regardless of the tendency of the player's operation, so that a more suitable performance is realized. be able to. Furthermore, by playing a game method in which the player intentionally changes the tendency of the operation for each variable display, unique game characteristics can be realized. That is, when it is determined that the degree of expectation for a big win is low from the aspect of the variable display effect until the operation support effect is executed, the game method of not participating in the operation support effect is selected, while the expectation for the big win is selected. By selecting the game method of participating in the operation support effect only when it is determined that the degree of operation support effect is likely to be high, when the player participates in the operation support effect, it is determined that the player has a low operation frequency. The possibility that the character mode will be drawn by lottery increases. In other words, when the player participates in the operation support presentation, it is possible to form a state in which, with a high probability, it is easy for the player to select a highly anticipated character mode in the event of a big win, so that the player evenly participates in the operation support presentation. It is possible to increase the display probability of a character mode with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to provide game characteristics that allow more accurate prediction of whether or not a big win will occur.

Also, the mini-character preview effect is a kind of effect suggesting execution of the V-challenge. In this mini-character advance notice effect, the player is notified that the V-challenge will be executed when the mini-character MC completes all the first to third actions. In addition, the mini character preview effect has multiple types of expectations (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) with different expectations for the execution of the V challenge, and the content of the action itself of the mini character MC is the same. However, the timing at which the action is executed is configured differently for each degree of expectation. As a result, the image data itself used for displaying the action of the mini character MC can be shared, so that the memory capacity of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Furthermore, in the variable display in which the mini-character advance notice performance is set, when the action timing for the high expectation is set, the first action is executed across the timing of developing to the ready-to-win performance with the higher expectation. Therefore, for the player who has confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action and the variable display mode of the third symbol, it is decided whether or not the ready-to-win effect develops with higher expectations. It can be made to feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the action timing is set so that the variable display does not end during the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible for a player who understands this specification and is playing a game to perceive that the performance will develop before the actual development timing comes. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display and the progress of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the central route suggesting performance is performed in synchronization with a V winning rate of 50% period or a V winning rate of 100% period in a small winning type that becomes a time-saving jackpot when a V winning occurs. In other words, the game ball entering the lottery device 6755, the period during which it becomes easier to flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f, or the period during which it is distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV, and the time saving state is easily given It is a production that suggests By executing this center route suggesting effect, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the center route suggesting effect. Therefore, by comparing the entry timing of the game ball to the lottery device 6755 and the execution status of the central route suggestion effect (display mode of the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to predict whether or not the time saving state will occur. Since it can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the frequency of operations on the center button CB is determined in units of variable display and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is updated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the frequency of operations is determined for each operation support presentation and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is updated. As a result, the player's pressing tendency can be determined more accurately, so that the selection ratio of each character mode can be set more favorably.

In the eleventh embodiment, the same data table is read every time from the character mode selection table 222fa if the special symbol lottery result (whether or not it is a big hit) and the state of the development completion flag 223fd are the same. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of tables may be defined for each combination of the special symbol lottery result and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, and one table may be selected by lottery. That is, a table in which green characters and red characters are less likely to be selected as a character mode is selected despite being a hit, and a table in which green characters and red characters are relatively easy to be selected despite being a loser is selected. It is good also as a structure which can be carried out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation. In addition, instead of changing the table only according to the combination of the special pattern lottery result and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, for example, a different table is referred to according to the variation pattern or the mode of the selected variation display effect. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the character mode is determined by Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as the state of the development completion flag 223fd, only two states, that is, whether or not all development has been completed, are possible. It is good also as a structure which switches.

In the eleventh embodiment, the table selected from the character mode selection table 222fa is different depending on whether it is a hit or a miss. A configuration in which different tables are selected may be used. In this case, it is also possible to provide a character mode (for example, yellow characters) that is easier to set in the case of a V challenge small win than in the case of a hit or a miss. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to predict whether the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Interest can be improved. Further, it is also possible to change the selection ratio of the character mode in accordance with the V winning rate in the case of a small V challenge win.

In the eleventh embodiment, in the case of the V challenge small win, the action timing of the mini character announcement effect is determined by referring to a common table regardless of the small win type, but this is not the only option. is not. For example, the action timing may be selected in consideration of not only whether or not the V challenge small win is won, but also the small win type (V winning rate) of the V challenge small win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize predictable playability from the timing of the action of the mini character MC to the type of the V challenge small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the execution period of the operation support effect (remaining time until the operation support effect ends) is not suggested (notified) to the player, but the execution period of the operation support effect is set by a timer. The configuration may be such that the player is suggested (notified) by display, indicator display, or the like. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the execution period of the operation support effect, so that the player's convenience can be improved. In this case, the execution period of the operation support effect may be displayed by the character image 814 . Specifically, for example, it is configured to determine the remaining effect period of the operation support effect at the time when the depression of the center button CB is detected, and display a character image 814 imitating characters corresponding to the remaining effect period. good too. That is, when the center button CB is pressed with 1.2 seconds remaining, a character image simulating the characters "1.2" may be displayed in a character mode determined by lottery when the button is pressed. good. Further, for example, as the remaining time becomes shorter, the appearance of the character 813 resembling a bird becomes transparent, and when the execution period of the operation support effect elapses, the character 813 becomes completely transparent and disappears. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation support effect. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 265. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above, every time the player presses the center button CB, the character mode of the character image 814 that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win or the degree of expectation for development is displayed in the operation support presentation. was configured to display During the period from 1 second before the start of the execution period of the operation support effect to 1 second after the end, the operation of the non-effect buttons arranged around the center button CB is restricted (twice (The settings corresponding to the button whose pressing is detected are not changed unless the button is pressed.)

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, during the execution period of the operation support effect, the player is instructed by operating the operation button 230 whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the setting of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured so that it can be selected. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed unintentionally due to an erroneous operation by a player who is about to participate in the operation support presentation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth to eleventh embodiments described above, after one or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 in the small win, all the entered game balls are discharged. Alternatively, when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning, the condition for ending the small winning game is established, and the small winning is terminated. However, in this configuration, for example, there is a possibility that a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 may be fraudulently guided to an advantageous flow path (central route) using a magnet or the like. be. That is, by attracting the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 from the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the glass unit 16) by the attractive force of the magnet, the game ball is floated with respect to the guide flow path 6755b, and opened and closed upward. Regardless of the open/close status of the door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of passing over these doors and guiding them to the sorting rotor 6755f may be performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are installed in order to suppress fraudulent acts of attracting game balls from the front side of the game board 13 using magnets or the like. The arrangement is such that it is less likely to be affected by the attractive force due to the magnetic force emitted from the front side of the glass unit 16. - 特許庁In addition, a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is forcibly guided to the flow path on the side of the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like. A configuration is adopted in which the small winning effective period is set so that the small winning is finished before the ball enters the mouth. In other words, even if all the gaming balls that entered the lottery device 6755 did not reach any ball entrance (remained in the lottery device 6755), a specific period from the start of the small hit (for example, 6.5 seconds) has passed, the small winning is terminated. In other words, the game ball that has flowed down in the lottery device 6755 without the intervention of an external force such as magnetic force (only by gravity or the inclination of the guide channel 6755b) can be easily entered into one of the ball entrances. , a configuration for setting an effective period during which it is difficult for a game ball guided in a direction different from its original direction to reach any of the ball entrances by forcibly (forcibly) changing the flowing direction with a magnet or the like. did.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the internal structure of the lottery device 6755 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the sound lamp control device 114 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in 11th It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 257, the internal structure of the lottery device 6755 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. 257 is a top view of the guiding channel 6755b of the lottery device 6755. FIG. As shown in FIG. 257, of the guiding flow path 6755b in the twelfth embodiment, the opening/closing door 6755bU, the ball discharge door 6755c (and the discharge area 6755d provided below it), and the ball stopper 6755e are It is provided on the back side in the front view compared to other portions of the guide channel 6755b. Therefore, when trying to guide a game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like from the front side of the glass unit 16 on the game board 13, the game ball reaches the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c. The distance to the glass unit 16 can be lengthened before and after this. That is, in a state in which the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are opened by a magnet or the like (a state in which the distribution rotor 6755f cannot be reached in a regular game method), the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f. In this case, the distance between the magnet and the game ball can be set to the maximum when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c in the open state is reached. In other words, when the game ball reaches the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c in the open state, the magnetic force acting on the game ball can be weakened most, so the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c in the open state It can be configured so that the game ball can be easily dropped to the right out port 6755bO or the discharge area 6755d via. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts of illegally reaching the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like, so that fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unforeseen disadvantages from being given to the hole due to dishonesty. In addition, since the guide flow path 6755b is not straight but has a meandering shape, when a game ball is to be guided by a magnet or the like, the period required to guide it to the distribution rotor 6755f is lengthened. be able to. Therefore, the small winning game can be terminated before the game ball guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by fraud is guided to any ball entrance. Therefore, the effect of deterring fraud can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259, the display mode of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 258(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 258(a), when the operation cheering effect in the twelfth embodiment is executed, a cheering button image 815a in which the characters "cheering" are displayed below a bird-shaped character 813, A volume setting button image 815b is displayed below the cheering button image 815a and displays the characters "volume setting", and a volume setting button image 815b is displayed between the cheering button image 815a and the volume setting button image 815b, and has an upward substantially equilateral triangular shape. An upper button image 815c and a lower button image 815d that is displayed below the upper button image 815c and has a substantially equilateral triangular shape facing downward are displayed. In addition, the cheering button image 815a is set to look like it emits light. According to these display contents, it is possible to select the item "support" by pressing the upper button UB (that is, to select to participate in the operation support presentation), and to press the lower button DB. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that the item "volume setting" can be selected (that is, the volume setting can be changed). In addition, by setting the cheering button image 815a to a glowing display mode, the player can intuitively understand that the item "cheering" is selected.

In the twelfth embodiment, not only the character mode of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11, but also the display mode (luminescent color) of the cheering button image 815a can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. configured as possible. Although the details will be described later, the display mode of the support button image 815a is more likely to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a player who does not perform any operation is playing a game (the expectation is higher in the case of a big win). The ratio of setting to a high intensity luminescent color is increased). As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win even to a player who does not participate in the operation support presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 258(b) shows the third symbol display when the player further presses the up button UB while the item "cheering" is selected (the cheering button image 815a is set to have a glowing appearance). 8 is a diagram showing a display mode of the device 81; FIG. As shown in FIG. 258(b), when the player presses the up button UB with the item "cheering" selected, the character mode is determined by lottery using the character mode selection table 222fa, and the decision is made. A character image 814 in the selected character mode is displayed. That is, each time the player presses the upper button UB with the item "cheering" selected, the degree of expectation for a big win or development is suggested, similar to the case where the center button CB is pressed in the eleventh embodiment. You can display a character image that By setting the setting at the start of the operation support effect to a state in which the item "support" is selected, the same operability as in the above-described eleventh embodiment (a specific button ( It is possible to realize the operability that a character image can be displayed each time the upper button UB) is pressed. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 259(a), when the player presses the down button DB in the state where the item "cheering" is selected, the cheering button image 815a is changed from a glowing appearance to an unlit appearance. , the appearance of the volume setting button image 815b is changed from being extinguished to being illuminated. That is, the item "volume setting" is changed to the selected state. Further, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area 816 is formed on the right side of the display area HR11 when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 259(a), this display area 816 displays an image showing the current volume setting. That is, an image simulating a speaker is displayed, and a volume bar SB displaying the current volume setting in five levels according to the length of the bar is displayed below the image simulating the speaker. In the volume bar SB, the number of hatched bars increases as the volume is set higher, and the number of hatched bars decreases as the volume is set lower. In FIG. 259(a), of the five bars that make up the volume bar SB, the three bars from the left are set in a shaded display mode, so the volume setting is three out of five. is set to . The volume setting indicated by the volume bar SB (the number of hatched bars) is left-aligned, so that the number of hatched bars can be decreased by pressing the left button LB; This allows the player to easily understand that the number of hatched bars can be increased by pressing the RIGHT button RB. Therefore, the player can easily understand how to change the volume setting.

FIG. 259(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the right button RB while the item "volume setting" is selected. As shown in FIG. 259(b), when the player presses the right button RB with the item "volume setting" selected, the number of hatched bars increases by one. That is, one additional hatched bar is displayed on the right side of the three hatched bars that were displayed immediately before the button was pressed. This change in display mode allows the player to easily understand that the volume setting has been changed normally.

As described above, in the operation support effect in the eleventh embodiment, the player selects the item "support" and the item "volume setting" according to the operation (pressing) of the up button UB and the down button DB. It is configured to allow When the item "support" is selected, each time the upper button UB corresponding to "support" is pressed, the character image 814 is displayed, while the right button corresponding to "volume setting" is set. Even if RB or left button LB is pressed, no setting change is made. On the other hand, when the item "volume setting" is selected, the volume setting can be changed by pressing the right button RB or the left button LB. It is configured so that the image 814 is not displayed. With such a configuration, even if a player who tries to participate in the operation support performance accidentally presses the right button RB or the left button LB, the setting change against the player's will is executed. can be suppressed. In addition, even if the player who tries to set the volume accidentally presses the up button UB or the down button DB, it is possible to prevent the character image 814 from being displayed against the player's will. can. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, even if the down button DB is pressed while the item "volume setting" is selected, the display mode and settings are not changed. It is not limited to this. For example, under a specific condition, it may be configured such that the character mode of the character image 814 is drawn and displayed even when pressing of the down button DB is detected. More specifically, for example, when the down button DB is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more in a state where the item "volume setting" is selected, the player selects a method of participating in the operation support effect. It may be determined that the character image 814 is erroneously recognized (the user misunderstands that the character image 814 is displayed by pressing the down button DB), and the character mode of the character image 814 is selected by lottery and displayed. . By constructing in this manner, even a player who has continuously pressed down the down button DB due to misunderstanding or the like can be made to participate in the operation support presentation, so that the player's convenience is further improved. be able to. In this case, after detecting that the lower button DB has been pressed a predetermined number of times or more, the display mode of the volume setting button image 815b may be changed to have the same appearance as the cheering button image 815a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the unnatural appearance of the character image 814 being displayed despite the fact that "volume setting" is selected, so that the display mode can be made more suitable. Can be set.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, when a special symbol lottery in the twelfth embodiment results in a small win, upper opening/closing door 6755bU, lower opening/closing door 6755bD, ball stopper 6755e, and ball ejection door 6755c Operation patterns will be described. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, when a small hit is won, only the opening and closing operation mode (open pattern) of the small hit attacker 6755a is changed according to the small hit type. Other operating modes (upper opening/closing door 6755bU, lower opening/closing door 6755bD, ball stopper 6755e, and ball discharge door 6755c operating pattern) are configured to be common regardless of the small hit type. In FIG. 260, the operation mode of parts other than the small hit attacker 6755a, which is common regardless of the small hit type, will be described.

FIG. 260 shows changes over time (operation patterns) in the opening and closing states of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c during execution of the small winning game of the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 260, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is set to an open state as an initial state, and switches to a closed state simultaneously with the start of the small hit. This closed state (50% V winning rate period) continues for one second (that is, continues until one second elapses from the start of the small win), and switches to the open state when one second elapses after switching to the closed state. After that, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is maintained in an open state until 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit, and is closed again from the time of 1.2 seconds to the time of 1.4 seconds (V winning rate 50 % period). Then, when 1.4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the state is switched to the open state again, and the open state is maintained until the end of the small win. In other words, game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 during the period from immediately after the start of the small winning to the time when 1 second has passed and from the time when 1.2 seconds have passed until the time when 1.4 seconds have passed are closed. The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and flows down to the distribution rotor 6755f side (see FIG. 211 (a)), and enters the lottery device 6755 in the other period is the guidance flow path 6755b2. 211(b) and (c)). That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the 50% V prize winning rate period ends earlier than in the eleventh embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, even if game balls remain in the lottery device 6755 when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the small win is forcibly terminated. . As a result, in the event of a fraudulent act that takes a relatively long time, such as forcibly changing the course of the game ball with a magnet or the like to guide the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f, the distribution rotor With 6755f, it is possible to forcibly terminate the small hit before the game ball is distributed to any of the entrances. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 260, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is set to a closed state as an initial state, and the closed state is maintained for 1.6 seconds from the start of the small win. Then, when 1.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the state is switched to the open state (V win rate 100% period). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the guide channel 6755b2 can enter the right V winning port 6755bV. The open state of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds, and switches to the closed state after 1.8 seconds from the start of the small win. Thereafter, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is kept closed until 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win, and is switched to the open state (V winning rate 100% period) at the time of 2 seconds. This open state continues for one second. That is, the open state continues until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and the state is switched to the closed state at the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. After that, the closed state is maintained until the small winning ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 260, the ball stopping portion 6755e is maintained in a closed state until 2.9 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and at the time of 2.9 seconds (second V winning rate After the 50% period has elapsed, it is switched to an open state (a state in which the guidance channel 6755b can flow down) from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed) to the end of the small hit, and again at the end of the small hit, to the closed state. can be switched. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6755c is kept closed until 2.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and when 2.4 seconds have passed (the second V winning rate 50% period has passed) After that, it is switched to the open state from the time point of 1 second) to the end of the small win, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small win. That is, for 2.4 seconds after the start of the small win, both the ball stopping portion 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are closed. All game balls that enter the ball and pass through the upper surface of the closed upper opening/closing door 6755bU are stopped in the guiding flow path 6755b by the ball stopper 6755e.

In addition, when 2.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stop portion 6755e closed, so that the ball is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stop portion 6755e. All game balls other than the one game ball that is present fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if a plurality of game balls flowed into the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate period of 50%, after the ball discharge door 6755e was opened, the game stopped inside the lottery device 6755. It is possible to have only one ball at maximum. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball ejection door 6755c is opened, the ball stop portion 6755e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 is directed toward the distribution rotor 6755f. flow down By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then opening the ball stop part 6755e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, Also, the second and subsequent game balls can be ejected to the outside from the ejection area 6755d until the ball stop portion 6755e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotor 6755f in one small hit can be limited to one at most, the game balls entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period. The V winning rate in each case can be fixed (50%) each time.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting timing of the 50% V winning rate period is set earlier than in the tenth and eleventh embodiments. As a result, the operation timing of the ball discharge door 6755c and the ball stop portion 6755e can be made earlier than in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, so that the end timing of the small win can be made earlier. Therefore, the game balls entered into the lottery device 6755 during the V non-performing period set after the V winning rate period of 50% and the V winning rate of 100% period are illegally distributed to the rotating body 6755f by a magnet or the like. Even if it tries to induce, it is possible to end the small hit before the guided game ball is distributed to any ball entrance by the distribution rotor 6755f. In other words, even if a game ball is illegally entered into the V winning hole, it is difficult to execute a big win. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring fraud. Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the timing when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit (V winning rate 50% period) The ball entered the lottery device 6755 and flowed down to the distribution rotator 6755f It is configured to forcibly complete the small winning game in a period of sufficient length that the game ball can be distributed to one of the ball entrances. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress cheating using a magnet or the like without affecting a player who plays a game in a regular game method. That is, when trying to reach the distribution rotating body 6755f by forcibly changing the flow path by attracting the game ball with a magnet or the like, the game ball flows down only by the normal operation (inclination and gravity action) ) to reach the distribution rotor 6755f, the period until the distribution rotor 6755f is reached is longer. During the period of 6.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, game balls that have reached the distribution rotor 6755f in normal operation can be distributed to any of the ball entrances without problems. It consists of a period in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by the action to be distributed to any of the entrances. As a result, even if a magnet or the like is used to forcibly guide the game balls flowing into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotor 6755f, the game balls are distributed to any of the ball entrances. Since the small winning can be ended before the winning is done, the fraudulent act can be prevented from being established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unforeseen disadvantages from being given to the hole due to fraud.

<Electrical Configuration in the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 261(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 261(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 233) in that a button mode selection table 222ga is added. are different. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 (see FIG. 233) in the eleventh embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The button mode selection table 222ga is a data table referred to when selecting the display mode (light emission color) of the cheering button image 815a (see FIG. 258(a)) displayed in the operation cheering effect. At the start of the operation support effect, this button mode selection table 222ga is referred to, and one display mode is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the player's operation status, and the like. The details of this button mode selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263. FIG.

FIG. 262(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 262(a), the button mode selection table 222ga in the twelfth embodiment has a variation corresponding to a big win in a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support presentation is playing a game. A winning (non-operation) table 222ga1 for selecting the emission color (button color) of the cheering button image 815a in the operation support effect to be set for display, and a player who tends to operate in the operation support effect play the game. In the current situation, a win (operation) table 222ga2 for selecting the emission color (button color) of the cheering button image 815a in the operation cheering effect set for the variable display corresponding to the big win, and the operation cheering effect In a situation where a player who tends not to operate at all is playing a game, an error for selecting the emission color (button color) of the support button image 815a in the operation support effect set for the variable display corresponding to the error. In the situation where the (non-operation) table 222ga3 and the player who tends to operate in the operation support effect are playing the game, the light emission of the support button image 815a in the operation support effect set for the variable display corresponding to the loss. and a win (operation) table 222ga4 for selecting a color (button color).

First, the details of the win (non-operation) table 222ga1 will be described with reference to FIG. 262(b). FIG. 262(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the win (non-operation) table 222ga1. As shown in FIG. 262(b), in the win (non-operation) table 222ga1, button colors are defined in association with each value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 262(b), when the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 199", "white" is selected as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). are defined in association with each other (see 222ga1a in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "white" is 200, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "white" as the button color when a special symbol lottery is a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 20% (200/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "200 to 599" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga1b in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" is 400, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "blue" as the button color when a special symbol lottery is a big win and an operation support effect is executed is 40% (400/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "600 to 899" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga1c in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "green" is 300, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state where a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "green" as the button color when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 30% (300/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "900 to 999" is associated with "red" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga1d in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random values (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the button color "red" is 100, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of setting "red" as the button color when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and an operation support effect is executed is 10% (100/1000). ).

In this way, under a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation at all is playing a game, when the operation support effect is executed during the variation of the big win, the expectation of the big win is low at a rate of 80%. is set to a button color other than , and 40% of the button colors are set to ``green'' and ``red,'' which are highly expected to win big. That is, when a player who tends not to perform any operation at all is playing a game, the ratio of selecting a button color with a high degree of expectation for a big win in the event of a big win is relatively high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately suggest the degree of expectation for a big win even to a player who does not participate in the operation support effect, so that there is a tendency not to perform the operation (not to participate in the operation support effect). The player can also be entertained with the operation support presentation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262(c), the details of the hit (operation) table 222ga2, which is a kind of data table constituting the button mode selection table 222ga, will be described. FIG. 262(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the win (operation) table 222ga2. As shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 499" is defined in association with "white" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga2a in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1,000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 500 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "white". In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "white" as the button color when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 50% (500/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "500 to 899" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga2b in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 400 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "blue". In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "blue" as the button color when the player wins big in the lottery of the special symbols and the operation support effect is executed is 40% (400/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "900 to 979" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga2c in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 80 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "green", so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "green" as the button color when a special pattern lottery wins a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 8% (80/1000). be.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "980 to 999" is associated with "red" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga2d in FIG. 262(c)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "red", so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) that "red" is set as the button color when the special pattern lottery is a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 2% (20/1000). be.

In this way, when a player who tends to perform operations during the execution of the operation support effect is playing a game, the variation of the big win is greater than when a player who does not perform any operations is playing a game. Even during execution, the ratio of selecting "white", which has the lowest degree of expectation, is high, and the selection ratio of the button color with the highest degree of expectation is greatly reduced to 10%. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the degree of expectation for a big win from the button color. can make you think. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263(a), the details of the release (non-operation) table 222ga3 will be described. FIG. 263(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the detachment (non-operation) table 222ga3. As shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 799" is defined in association with "white" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga3a in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "white" is 800, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the rate (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 80% (800/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "800 to 949" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga3b in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" is 150, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the rate (probability) that "blue" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 15% (150/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "950 to 998" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga3c in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "green" is 49, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the rate (probability) that "green" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 4.9% (49%). /1000).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea of "999" is defined in association with "red" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga3d in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random values (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the random value (counter value) associated with the button color "red" is 1, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In a state in which a player with a tendency is playing a game, the rate (probability) that "red" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 0.1% (1 /1000).

In this way, when a player who does not participate in the operation support effect (does not operate the button) is playing a game and loses in the special symbol lottery, the button color "white" is selected at a high rate. On the other hand, the selection ratio of “green” and “red”, which have high expectations, will drop significantly. Therefore, it is possible to provide the playability of predicting the degree of expectation for a big win from the button color.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263(b), the details of the disengagement (operation) table 222ga4 will be described. FIG. 263(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the disengagement (operation) table 222ga4. As shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 599" is defined in association with "white" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (See 222ga4a in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1,000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 600 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "white". In the state where the player is playing the game, the rate (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 60% (600/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "600 to 949" is associated with "blue" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga4b in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1,000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 350 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "blue". In the state where the player is playing the game, the rate (probability) of setting "blue" as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 35% (350/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "950 to 997" is associated with "green" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga4c in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, 48 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "green", so there is a tendency to operate in the operation support effect. While the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "green" as the button color when the special symbol lottery is lost and the operation support effect is executed is 4.8% (48/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "998, 999" is associated with "red" as the button color (display mode of the cheering button image 815a). (see 222ga4d in FIG. 263(b)). Of the 1,000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "red" is two. In the state where the player is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of setting "red" as the button color when a special pattern lottery is a big win and the operation support effect is executed is 0.2% (2/1000). ).

In this way, even under a situation where a player who participates in the operation support effect (operates the button) is playing a game, it is better to select the button color "white" when the special symbol lottery is lost. While the ratio is high, the selection ratio of “green” and “red”, which have high expectations, is low. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the degree of expectation for a big win from the button color, although the difference between the big win and the big win is smaller than when a player who does not operate at all plays the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 261(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has a cursor position storage area 223ga added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 233(b)). There is a difference. Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The cursor position storage area 223ga is a storage area for storing information indicating an item (cursor position) selected by the player during execution of the operation support effect. When "00H" is stored in this cursor position storage area 223ga, it indicates that the item "support" is selected, and when "01H" is stored, the item "volume setting" is selected. Indicates the selected state. This cursor position storage area 223ga is updated with data corresponding to the item each time the player selects a different item during execution of the operation support effect.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 to 267, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 264, operation support effect processing 15 (S40301) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This operation support effect process 15 (S40301) is a process executed instead of the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment, and is similar to the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set.

Of the operation support effect processing 15 (see FIG. 264) in the twelfth embodiment, each process of S40401 to S40409 is the same as each process of S40401 to S40409 of the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment. The same processing is performed. In addition, in the operation support effect processing 15 (see FIG. 264) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S40405 is completed, the lottery result of this special symbol and the operation of the player are selected from the button mode selection table 222ga. A table corresponding to the situation (the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff) is read (S40421), and from the read table, the button color corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is specified (S40422). When the processing of S40422 ends, the processing moves to S40406. In the twelfth embodiment, a state (“03H”) indicating that no operation is performed is added as the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff. In the process of S40421, depending on whether or not the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is "03H", whether to select a non-operation table (hit (non-operation) table 222ga1 or loss (non-operation) table 222ga3) is selected. Whether or not is variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, details of various setting button input monitoring processing 15 (S4195) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The various setting button input monitoring process 15 (S4195) in the twelfth embodiment is a process executed instead of the various setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247) in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247), the operation (pressing) of the non-rendering button (the button for changing the settings of volume and light intensity) is monitored, and if the operation is detected, the operation is detected. This is a process for changing settings according to the type of button that has been performed.

In the processing of S40801 and S40808 of the various setting button input monitoring processing 15 (see FIG. 265) in the twelfth embodiment, S40801 and S40808 of the various setting button input monitoring processing (see FIG. 247) in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. and S40808 are executed. Further, in the various setting button input monitoring process 15 (see FIG. 265) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S40801 that pressing of any non-effect button is detected (S40801), then It is determined whether or not the operation valid period flag 223fb is ON (S40811). If it is determined in the process of S40811 that the operation valid period flag 223fb is off (S40811: No), the process proceeds to S40808. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40811 that the valid period flag 223fb is ON, then it is determined whether or not pressing of the up button UB or the down button DB was detected in the process of S40801. (S40812).

In the processing of S40812, if it is determined that pressing of the up button UB or down button DB has been detected (S40812: Yes), the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing and the type of button whose pressing was detected Up/down button press processing for executing control according to the above is executed (S40813), and this processing ends. The details of this up/down button pressing process (S40813) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40812 that neither the up button UB nor the down button DB has been pressed this time (S40812: No), then it is determined whether the pressing of the right button RB or the left button LB has been detected. Determine (S40814).

In the processing of S40814, if it is determined that the pressing of the right button RB or the left button LB is detected (S40814: Yes), the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing and the type of button whose pressing is detected. The left and right button pressing processing for executing the control corresponding to is executed (S40815), and the present processing ends. The details of the left/right button pressing process (S40815) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40814 that neither the right button RB nor the left button LB has been pressed this time (S40814: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the details of the process when the up/down button is pressed (S40813) will be described. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing the process when the up/down button is pressed (S40813). As described above, this up/down button pressing process (S40813) is performed when either the up button UB or the down button DB is pressed in the operation support effect, and the cursor position (selected item) when the button is pressed is displayed. , and the type of button whose depression is detected.

In the up/down button pressing process (see FIG. 266), first, the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is read (S41401), and the read data indicates the upper cursor position (the "support" item is selected). (that is, "00H") (S41402). In the process of S41402, if it is determined that the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is the data indicating the upper cursor position (S41402), then it is determined whether or not the up button UB has been pressed. (S41403).

In the processing of S41403, if it is determined that the up button UB has been pressed (S41403: Yes), then character mode setting processing (see FIG. 245) is executed to draw a lottery for the character mode corresponding to the pressing. At the same time, the display of the character image 814 in the character mode determined by lottery is set (S41404), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41403 that the up button UB was not pressed (that is, the down button DB was pressed) (S41403: No), the volume setting button image 815b is set to the light emission mode (S41405). , the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is updated to "01H" (S41406), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41402 that the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is not the data indicating the upper cursor position (the data indicates the lower cursor position) (S41402: No), next, it is determined whether or not pressing of the up button UB has been detected (S41407). If it is determined in the process of S41407 that the up button UB has been pressed (S41407: Yes), then the support button image 815a is set to the light emitting mode (S41408), and the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is set to " 00H" (S41409), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41407 that the up button UB has not been pressed (that is, the down button DB has been pressed) (S41407: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the details of the processing when the left and right buttons are pressed (S40815) will be described. As described above, this left/right button pressing process (S40815) is performed when either the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed in the operation support effect. , and the type of button whose depression is detected.

In this left/right button pressing process (see FIG. 267), first, the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is read (S41501), and the read data is displayed at the lower cursor position ("volume setting" item). It is determined whether or not the data (that is, "01H") indicates the selected state (S41502). In the processing of S41502, if it is determined that the data (“01H”) indicating the lower cursor position has been read (S41502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not pressing of the right button RB has been detected ( S41503).

In the process of S41503, when it is determined that the pressing of the right button RB is detected (S41503: Yes), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is increased by one level, and the volume bar displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The number (the number of hatched bars) is incremented by 1 (S41504), and the process ends. If the volume setting is at the maximum value (five steps) at the time the right button RB is pressed, the process of S41504 is skipped because the volume setting cannot be increased any more. On the other hand, in the process of S41503, when it is determined that the pressing of the left button LB is detected (S41503: No), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is decreased by one level, and the volume displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The number of bars is decremented by 1 (S41505), and this processing ends. If the volume setting is at the minimum value (one step) at the time the left button LB is pressed, the processing of S41505 is skipped because the volume setting cannot be decreased any further.

On the other hand, in the processing of S41502, if it is determined that the data (“00H”) indicating the upper cursor position has been read (S41502: No), the “support” item is selected. This means that the right button RB or the left button LB has been pressed (an operation corresponding to changing the volume setting has been performed in a state in which the volume setting cannot be changed). This process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 is determined by operating the operation button 230 during the execution period of the operation support effect. It is configured so that the person can choose. Specifically, during execution of the operation support effect, the item "support" (support button image 815a) and the item "volume setting" (volume setting button image 815b) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is displayed, and the player can select any item by operating the up button UB and the down button DB. More specifically, each time the upper button UB is pressed with the item "support" selected, a character image 814 suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win or development is displayed, while the "volume setting is selected, the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by pressing the right button RB or the left button LB. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, even if an operation corresponding to another item is performed in a state where item 1 is selected, control corresponding to the other item is avoided. Configure. That is, even if the right button RB or the left button RB is pressed while the item "support" is selected, the control for changing the volume setting is avoided (restricted). Further, even if the up button UB is pressed while the item "volume setting" is selected, the item "support" is simply selected. That is, control to display the character image 814 is avoided (restricted). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed unintentionally by the player who is going to participate in the operation support presentation to make a mistake in the operation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, in addition to the character mode of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11 during execution of the operation support effect, the display mode (luminescent color) of the support button image 815a , is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit. In addition, the display mode of the cheering button image 815a is more likely to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a player who does not perform any operation is playing a game (in the case of a big win, the light emission color with a high degree of expectation is used). set ratio is higher). As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win even to a player who does not participate in the operation support presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are replaced with a glass unit in order to suppress fraudulent acts of attracting game balls from the front side of the game board 13 using magnets or the like. 16 (arrangement on the far side in front view relative to the other part of the guide flow path 6755b). As a result, even if a fraudulent act is performed to guide the game ball to the sorting rotor 6755f with a magnet or the like, the influence of the magnetic force can be weakened directly above the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c. , It becomes easy for the game ball to flow down to the guide channel 6755b2 directly below the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the discharge area 6755d directly under the ball discharge door 6755c. That is, since it becomes difficult to guide the game ball toward the distribution rotator 6755f, it is possible to suppress cheating using a magnet or the like. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is forcibly guided to the flow path of the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like, and the game ball is distributed and rotated. A configuration is adopted in which the small winning effective period is set so that the small winning is completed before the ball is entered into one of the ball entrances by the body 6755.例文帳に追加In other words, even if all the game balls that entered the lottery device 6755 did not reach any ball entrance (remained in the lottery device 6755), a specific period from the start of the small hit (for example, 6.5 seconds) has passed, the small winning is terminated. In other words, a game ball that has flowed down in the lottery device 6755 without an external force such as magnetic force (only by gravity or the inclination of the guide channel 6755b) can easily enter any of the ball entrances. , a configuration in which the effective period is set during which it is difficult for a game ball guided in a direction different from its original direction to reach any of the ball entrances by forcibly (forcibly) changing the flowing direction with a magnet or the like. did. By configuring in this way, even if a cheater tries to guide the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like, the game ball is pushed by the distribution rotor 6755f. To eliminate merits of cheating because a small winning effective period can be terminated before the ball is distributed to any entrance (even if the ball enters the V winning entrance, the big winning is not started). can be done. Therefore, the effect of deterring fraud can be further enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the emission color of the cheering button image 815a displayed during execution of the operation support effect is used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. Expectations are not limited. Instead of or in addition to the expectation level of the big win, it may be configured to indicate the level of expectation for development or the level of expectation for the small V challenge win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the luminescent color (display mode) of the cheering button image 815a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the emission color of the cheering button image 815a is set independently of the data table selected from the character mode selection table 222fa, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the luminescent color of the cheering button image 815a may be configured to indicate which of the character mode selection tables 222fa is used for lottery of character modes. In other words, when a table is set in which a highly anticipated character mode is selected at a high rate, a highly anticipated emission color may be set for the support button image 815a. By configuring in this way, when a highly anticipated light emission color is set, it is possible to have the player more actively participate in the operation support presentation.

In the twelfth embodiment, by forcibly ending the small winning when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, cheating using a magnet or the like is made impossible (difficult). However, the method of deterring fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to detect whether or not the game ball is in contact with the ceiling portion in a predetermined range of the guidance flow path 6755b (for example, the range where the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are provided). A configuration may be adopted in which sensor means is provided, and an error is notified when the period of contact with the sensor means exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). When trying to guide the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f using a magnet or the like, it is necessary to float the game ball with respect to the guidance flow path 6755bU at least when passing through the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c. . In other words, game balls are likely to come into contact with the ceiling portion in the range where these are arranged. Therefore, when it is detected that the user is in contact with the ceiling for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) or more, it almost means that a fraudulent act using a magnet or the like is being performed. By adopting a configuration that notifies the user, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like.

<Modified Example of the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a modification of the twelfth embodiment described above will be described. In the twelfth embodiment described above, during execution of the operation support effect, the support button image 815a indicating the item "support" and the volume setting button image indicating the item "volume setting" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. 815b is displayed, and an item (whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the volume setting) can be selected by the player's operation. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting of the light amount cannot be changed during execution of the operation support effect.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the item "light amount setting" (light amount setting button 815g). That is, according to the operation of the operation button 230 by the player, the item "support", the item "volume setting", and the item "light amount" can be selected. As a result, not only the player's desire to change the volume setting during execution of the operation support effect but also the player's desire to change the light amount setting can be fulfilled. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the operation support effect in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268, in this modification, in addition to a support button image 815a, a volume setting button image 815b, an up button image 815c, and a down button image 815d, a A left button image 815e in the shape of a left-pointing substantially equilateral triangle, a right button image 815f in the shape of a right-pointing substantially equilateral triangle displayed on the right side of the left button image 815e, and a substantially horizontally long button image 815f displayed on the right side of the right button image 815f. A rectangular light amount setting button image 815g is displayed. This light amount setting button 815g can be operated by pressing the right button RB in a state where the item "volume setting" is selected (in a display mode in which the volume setting image 815b emits light). can be selected. That is, the volume setting image 815b appears to be turned off, and the light amount setting image 815g appears to emit light (see FIG. 268). Further, when the left button LB is pressed while the item "light amount setting" is selected, the item "volume setting" is selected. On the other hand, if the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed while the "support" item is selected, the "support" item remains selected (the "light amount setting" item remains selected). not be done).

In this way, not only the volume setting but also the light intensity setting can be changed during execution of the operation support performance, thereby satisfying the desire of the player who wants to change the settings during the execution of the operation support performance. can be done. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

It should be noted that, in this modified example, by pressing the right button RB while the item "volume setting" is selected, the item "light amount setting" can be selected. The correspondence with the items to be displayed can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, when the right button RB is pressed with the item "support" selected, the item "light amount setting" is selected, while the item "light amount setting" is selected. It may be configured such that when the left button LB is pressed, the item "Support" is selected. By configuring in this way, both when the item "volume setting" is selected and when the item "light amount setting" is selected, the state where the item "support" is selected (that is, the initial state in the operation support effect) Since the selection can be made only by pressing one button in the state), the player's convenience can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, by performing an operation corresponding to the selected item while one of the items is selected during execution of the operation support effect, control corresponding to the selected item is performed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, by performing a predetermined decision operation (for example, an operation of pressing the center button CB) while any item is selected, the selection of the corresponding item may be confirmed. In this case, it may be configured such that it becomes impossible (difficult) to select other items after the decision operation. With this configuration, the player can concentrate on the item selected by the player.

In the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment, the character mode is determined by lottery every time the display condition of the character image 814 is satisfied during execution of the operation support effect. is not. For example, a configuration in which the character mode steps up (progresses from white to blue to green to red) according to the number of operations performed by the player may be adopted. In this case, for example, it is possible to step up to red in the case of a big win, but it may be impossible (difficult) to step up to red in the case of a loss. Then, the specified number of times of step-up operation for each color may be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the tendency of the player's operation (participation in the operation support effect). By adopting this configuration, the character mode with the lowest expectation is always displayed unless the operation is performed more than a certain number of times (for example, twice). can be operated more positively. In addition, the step-up condition is not limited to the number of operations. For example, it is possible to draw a lottery whether to step-up or not with a probability according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the tendency of the player's operation. good. Even when configured in this way, the player can be made to actively participate in the operation support presentation. Furthermore, in this case, the configuration may be such that the likelihood of step-up occurrence is indicated in advance. Specifically, for example, the color of the character 813 that imitates a bird may be used as a suggestion. By configuring in this manner, even a player who tends not to perform operations will be encouraged to participate in the operation support presentation when the character 813 is displayed in a state in which the degree of expectation for occurrence of a step-up is high. Since it is possible to make the player think, it is possible to further improve the willingness of the player to participate in the operation support presentation.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right variable winning device 65 is provided as a configuration for awarding a prize ball by entering a game ball when a big win or a small win is achieved, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, it may be configured to be used in a type of gaming machine (so-called two types and one type and two types) in which a jackpot starts when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65 . By configuring in this way, the more game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the more game balls enter the right specific winning hole 65a, so that the game balls enter the specific area. I can make you think it's easy. Therefore, it is possible for the player to judge the degree of expectation for a big win from the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, two types of specific winning openings (right specific winning opening 65a, left specific winning opening 650a) with different closing conditions are provided, and according to the number of rounds, etc. Although it is configured to switch the type of the specific winning opening to be opened, it is not limited to this. Only the right specific winning port 65a may be provided, and the closing condition (maximum number of winnings) may be switched by determining the number of rounds. By configuring in this way, the left variable winning device 650 can be omitted, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, by firing the game ball with the maximum firing intensity (firing speed), the operating winning opening (the operating winning opening 660 in the first to third embodiments, It is configured so that a game ball can always enter the right operation winning opening 661 and the left operation winning opening 662) in the fourth embodiment, and it is determined that the ball entering the operation winning opening is valid only during the jackpot standby state. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the jackpot standby state, it may be configured such that it is physically impossible to enter the ball into the operation winning hole. Specifically, for example, it is configured to provide an electric role that can close the flow path for the operation winning opening, and the electric role is provided only during the time from the big hit standby state until the game ball enters the operation winning opening. It is good also as a structure which opens an object. Also in this configuration, the big win can be started based on the detection of the entry of the ball into the operation winning hole in the big win standby state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the sound lamp control device 113 side controls the start timing of the presentation mode such as the waiting state presentation and the right-handed expectation indication presentation, and the update process of the mode, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 may be configured to control the mode of presentation. As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, passage detection sensor 228 may be electrically connected to main controller 110 or display controller 114 . As a result, even if the control related to the mode of presentation is transferred to another control device, it is possible to accurately update the mode of the chance meter CM, update the mode of the physical fitness gauge LG, and the like.

In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the passing detection sensor 228 for detecting the number of game balls passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during execution of the standby state effect is provided. By varying the mode of the chance meter CM according to the detection result, the player can grasp the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known photographing means (for example, a video camera, etc.) for photographing the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is provided, and during the jackpot standby state, at least a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is photographed. An image or video taken by means may be displayed. This allows the player to more accurately grasp the situation on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a zigzag-shaped flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 so that the traveling direction of the game ball can be varied multiple times, so that when the game ball is continuously hit to the right, a jackpot of 1 can be obtained. Although the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number in the round is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the same time, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of forming a serpentine flow path on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, the width of the opening/closing door 65f1 (and the right specific winning hole 65a) is simply widened to allow the game ball to pass over the opening/closing door 65f1. By lengthening the distance, a configuration may be adopted in which a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of winning prizes in the first round can flow down at the same time. Also, in this case, the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the same time when the player continues to hit to the right does not have to exceed the upper limit winning number in the first round. For example, the width (path length) of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 may be configured to exceed the length obtained by multiplying the diameter of the game ball by the upper limit number of winning prizes in the first round. With this configuration, for example, when a ball jam or the like occurs and the game ball on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 cannot flow down to the lower side of the game board 13, the first round is performed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 by striking to the right. Only by allowing game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number to reach in advance, game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number can be simultaneously entered in the first round when the next big win occurs. A shielding member or the like may be provided to prevent the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 from flowing down below the game board 13 during normal times. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 may be configured to remain on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 until a big hit is achieved. In the case of such a configuration, just by striking the game ball to the right before the big win occurs, it is possible to easily over-win when the next big win occurs.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is won, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until multiple (for example, 2 or 3) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepachi, mamball, slot machine, and so-called game machine combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to have a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then confirms and displays the identification information. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated, the aspect of the chance meter CM is updated so as to have the gauge number corresponding to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be adapted to the actual state of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can also be applied to other embodiments in a similar manner.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (configuration that tends to intentionally cause over-winning)
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, a specific channel in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a flow path has a first position at which it is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass the predetermined section, and a first position to pass the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that becomes easier, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and when the operation content for the operation means becomes the first operation content, the game ball is moved to the specific flow path. When the game ball is shot at a first shooting speed that makes it easier to reach, and a second operation content different from the first operation content is obtained, a second shooting speed different from the first shooting speed A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball at a speed, and when the game ball is shot at the second shooting speed by the shooting means, it is more effective than when the game ball is shot at the first shooting speed. determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that is easy to establish has been established; and based on the fact that the determining means has determined that the specific condition has been established, the variable means moves from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time. and variable control means for performing variable control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the game value that can be obtained is almost constant for each winning type, it becomes like an operation to obtain the game value according to the winning type, and the game is played during the winning state. was sometimes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is configured to be variable to a second position at which it is easier to pass through. When the operation content of the operation means operable by the player becomes the first operation content, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a first shooting speed at which the game ball easily reaches the specific flow path. . On the other hand, when a second operation content different from the first operation content is obtained, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a second shooting speed different from the first shooting speed. When the game ball is shot at the second shooting speed by the shooting means, the determining means determines whether or not a specific condition that is more likely to be established than when the game ball is shot at the first shooting speed is established, and the determining means determines whether the game ball is shot at the second shooting speed. When it is determined that the specific condition is met, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time.

As a result, the operation means can be operated in anticipation that the specific condition will be established while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section.

In the gaming machine A1, the variable control means causes the variable means to vary from the first position to the second position based on the fact that a first number of game balls enter the specific area. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow simultaneously in a state in which the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it has a

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the first number of game balls enter the specific area. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be made to exceed the first number, and then the operation means can be operated by devising to establish the specific condition, so that the player's interest in the game is enhanced. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine A2, the shooting means can shoot game balls at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction at the predetermined intervals in the predetermined section. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it allows game balls to pass through as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot the game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In the predetermined section, in a state in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. Between, the game ball is configured to pass so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who desires to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the variable means is configured to be able to guide all game balls flowing down the predetermined section to the specific area when the variable means is varied to the first position. A game machine A4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, when the game machine is changed to the first position, all the game balls flowing down the predetermined section are guided to the specific area. Since the variable means is configured in , by confirming the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, it is possible to know the number of game balls guided to the specific area when the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter is provided, and the determination means determines that the specific condition is established when the game ball enters the ball entering means. A game machine A5 characterized in that it

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A4, when the game ball enters the ball entry means in which the game ball can enter, the determination means satisfies the specific condition. Therefore, by shooting a game ball aiming at the ball-entering means, there is an effect that the specific condition can be easily established at the player's favorite timing.

A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a gaming machine A6 is provided with decelerating means for decelerating the flowing speed of the game ball flowing in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the deceleration means, so that the game ball can be directed toward the specific flow path. When the balls are continuously shot, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is established.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, display means capable of displaying an effect mode, advantage determination means for determining the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied, and a suggestive effect executing means for executing, on the display means, a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determining means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the advantage determination means determines the degree of advantage when the specific condition is established until the specific condition is established. Since the suggestive effect suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the discriminating means is executed on the display means by the suggestive effect executing means, by confirming the suggestive effect displayed on the display means, it is possible to determine the degree of advantage when a specific condition is satisfied. has the effect of making it easier to understand

In the gaming machine A7, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestive effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A game machine A8 characterized in that a suggestive effect is executed as the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the advantage discriminating means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means is executed as a suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means.

Thus, there is an effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls entering the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied by confirming the suggestive effect.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, a specific lottery result is obtained by a ball entry means for entering a game ball, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery by the lottery means. a valid state setting means for setting a valid state in which the ball entering means is valid, and the determination means determines whether a game ball enters the ball entering means during the valid state. The variable control means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the ball is entered, and the variable control means causes the variable means to change the second A gaming machine A9 characterized by executing a variable game in which a position is varied from a position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and based on a specific lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means, the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter is validated. is set by the valid state setting means. When the ball is entered into the ball entering means during the valid state, the determining means determines that the specific condition is established. A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable control means when the determination means determines that the specific condition is established.

Thus, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of a specific lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means.

In the gaming machine A9, a plurality of positions including at least a first operating position in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means and a second operating position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first operating position A game machine A10, comprising: an operation means capable of moving to an operation position; and an operation control means for moving the operation position of the operation means to a corresponding operation position according to the elapsed time.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it operates to a plurality of operating positions including at least a first operating position where it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball entering means and a second operating position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first operating position. Means are operably configured. The operation position of the operation means is moved to the operation position according to the elapsed time by the operation control means.

Thus, in order to establish the specific condition, it is necessary to shoot the game ball toward the ball entering means aiming at the timing when the operation position of the operation means becomes the first operation position, so the game ball is shot at good timing. There is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of playing.

<Feature B group> (Provide a jackpot that can aim for over winning and a jackpot that cannot be aimed)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a game ball is moved to the variable ball entry means. Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a ball, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball-entering means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times; and a condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition that is likely to be established when a specific operation is executed is established; A first variable game in which the variable game is started when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means after a specific determination result is obtained, and whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is independent of the first variable game. A gaming machine B1, comprising a type determining means for determining one type out of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game from which the variable game is started.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the large opening to which prize balls are awarded by winning a game ball. There is an attempt to improve the interest in winning by making the values different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is varied by varying the opening pattern of the large opening in each round. Some have different degrees of advantage.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each winning type, so it becomes like a work to obtain a game value according to the winning type, and the player is in a winning state. There was a case where the game became monotonous. Moreover, since it is necessary to vary the control according to the type of winning during the winning state, there is a problem that the processing load increases during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the variable ball entry means is varied between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. , a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. The variable game executed is executed by the variable game executing means. The condition determination means determines whether or not a specific condition, which is likely to be satisfied when a specific operation is performed on an operation means that can be operated by the player, has been established. As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable game is started when the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is established after the determination by the determining means results in a specific determination result. One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the first variable game and the second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether or not the specific condition is established.

Thereby, there is an effect that the timing at which the variable game is started can be varied according to the type of the variable game.

In the game machine B1, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in a direction corresponding to an operation on the operation means, and a first ball shooting means arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means can enter. A ball entering means, a second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a ball entry determination means for determining whether or not a ball is entered, wherein the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the first ball entry means; The second variable game is based on the determination that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the ball entry determination means after the determination by the determination means has resulted in the specific determination result. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is started by

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the game ball is shot by the shooting means in the direction corresponding to the operation of the operating means, and the game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means enters. A first ball entering means is arranged at a possible position. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is discriminated by the entering ball discriminating means. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. A second variable game is started based on determination that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the ball entry determination means after a specific determination result has been obtained in the determination by the determination means.

As a result, since the ball entry means that is the starting condition differs according to the type of the variable game, it is possible to shoot the game ball in different directions according to the type of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the direction in which the game ball is shot.

In the game machine B2, a third ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and a first channel through which the game ball launched in the second direction can flow down. a variable means capable of moving between a first position capable of holding at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path and a second position where the game ball is less likely to be held than at the first position; switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on a specific determination result in determination by the determination means, wherein the determination means is the third ball-entered ball. The determination is performed based on the game ball entering the means, and the second ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball passing through the first flow path can enter. A gaming machine B3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A first position capable of holding at least one game ball that has flowed into a first flow path in which game balls shot in a second direction can flow down; The position and the variable means are varied. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter.

Accordingly, since it is necessary to shoot the game ball in the second direction in order to execute the determination by the determination means, the game ball is allowed to flow into the first flow path until a specific determination result is obtained. can be done. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball held in the first flow path can be immediately entered into the second ball entering means. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined, there is an effect that the second variable game can be started even if the player does not shoot the game ball.

In the gaming machine B3, the second ball entering means has a period until the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second ball entering means, the game ball launched in the first direction. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where the period until the ball enters the variable ball entering means is shorter than the period.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the period until the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means is the game ball launched in the first direction. Since the second ball-entering means is arranged at a position where the period is shorter than the period until the ball enters the variable ball-entering means, the variable game is immediately started when the second variable game is determined. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, a specific channel is provided through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow, and the first state is a game ball that is flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific channel. However, it is a state in which it is easier to be guided to the variable ball entry means than to pass through the predetermined section, and the second state is that the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is guided to the variable ball entry means. The game machine B5 is characterized in that it is in a state in which it is easier for the game machine to pass through the predetermined section than it is to go through.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first state, the game ball that is flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path in which the game ball shot in the first direction can flow down is guided to the variable ball entry means rather than passing through the predetermined section. On the other hand, in the second state, the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is more likely to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the variable milk ball means.

As a result, the more game balls passing through the predetermined section at the time of entering the first ball entering means, the more game balls can be guided to the variable grade entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide the playability of shooting a game ball in a direction.

In the gaming machine B5, the variable game executing means performs a first number of games to the variable ball entering means when the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state at least for the first time in one of the variable games. The variable ball-entering means is controlled to be varied to the second position based on the entry of the ball, and the variable ball-entering means is varied to the second position in the predetermined section. A game machine B6 characterized by having a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down simultaneously in a state where the second number of game balls flows down at the same time.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state at least for the first time in one variable game, the variable ball entry means is based on the fact that the first number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. is controlled by the variable game execution means so as to vary to the second position. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be made to exceed the first number, and then the operation means can be operated by devising to establish the specific condition, so that the player's interest in the game is enhanced. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine B6, the shooting means can shoot game balls at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction at the predetermined intervals in the predetermined section. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A game machine B7 is characterized by allowing game balls to pass through as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the shooting means is configured to shoot game balls at intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In a state in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals in the second direction, after one game ball reaches a predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section, a second The predetermined section is configured such that the game balls pass through such that two game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

A gaming machine B8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the gaming machine B8 is characterized by comprising deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the game ball flowing in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B5 to B7, the speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the deceleration means, so that the game ball can be directed toward the specific flow path. When the balls are continuously shot, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, more game balls are guided to the variable ball entering means.

In any one of game machines B5 to B8, display means capable of displaying an effect mode, number determination means for determining the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and game balls determined by the number determination means a suggesting effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect suggesting the number of , on the display means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the number discriminating means, and the suggesting effect suggesting the number of the game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is executed on the display means by the suggesting effect executing means. .

As a result, the player can easily know the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entering means when the game balls enter the first ball entering means by confirming the suggestive performance. There is

In the gaming machine B9, while the suggestive effect is being executed, it is determined at regular intervals whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are different. A discriminating difference discriminating means, and discriminating by the discriminating means that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect is different from the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means. a suggestive effect updating means for updating the mode of the suggestive effect to a mode suggesting the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means based on the above.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, during the execution of the suggestive effect, the difference discriminating means discriminates whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are different for each predetermined period. be. Based on the fact that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are discriminated by the difference discriminating means, the aspect of the suggestive performance is: The suggestion effect update means updates the number of game balls determined by the number determination means to suggest the number.

As a result, it is possible to update the mode of suggestive performance every predetermined period in correspondence with the number determined by the number determining means, so that when the ball is made to enter the first ball entering means, it is guided to the variable entering means. There is an effect that the player can more easily know the number of game balls to be played.

a third ball entry means provided in a game machine B2 at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and satisfying the determination condition based on the entry of the game ball; and an effect mode. a display means capable of displaying , a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect on the display means based on the determination by the determining means, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. As an effect mode, when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result, and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means, the first mode is determined, and the determination by the determination means is performed. When the determination result is different from the specific determination result, and when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result, and when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, the second A game machine B11 characterized by comprising a performance mode determining means capable of determining a second mode different from the first mode.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is provided a third ball entry means that satisfies a determination condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. In the display means capable of displaying an effect mode, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the determining means. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, the first mode by the effect mode determination means when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means. is determined. On the other hand, when the determination by the determination means results in a different determination result from the specific determination result, and when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, and when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means , the second mode different from the first mode is determined as the effect mode of the specific effect by the effect mode determining means.

Thereby, when the second variable game is determined, the player can be made to think that the specific determination result is not obtained. Therefore, even after the specific effect of the second mode is executed, the game ball can be continuously shot in the second direction in order to make the discrimination by the discriminating means, so that the user is aware of the specific discrimination result. The game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means before it is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the second variable game has suddenly started, so that there is an effect that the player can be surprised and delighted.

In the gaming machine B11, the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the determination by the determination means resulting in the specific determination result and the second variable game being determined by the type determination means. During the period from the end to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means, a pseudo specific effect that is difficult to distinguish from the specific effect of the second mode can be executed. A gaming machine B12 characterized by comprising execution means.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B11, the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, and the second variable game is executed based on the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means. During the period from the end of the specific performance of the mode to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means, a pseudo specific performance of a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific performance of the second mode is executed. Since it is executed by means, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a specific determination result has been obtained.

In the gaming machine B12, an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means, identification information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit; erasing means for erasing the identification information used for identification by the identification means from the identification information storage means; information number image display means for causing the display means to display an information number image suggesting the number of information in the discrimination information; and discrimination by the discrimination means provides the specific discrimination result, and the second During the period from the end of the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the determination of the variable game until the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the pseudo and image updating means for updating the information count image to an image corresponding to the information count with the information count reduced by one each time the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the acquisition means acquires the determination information used for determination by the determination means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. The determination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Determination information used for determination by the determination means is erased from the determination information storage means by the deletion means. An information number image indicating the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is displayed on the display means by the information number image display means. After the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result and the second variable game is determined by the type determination means is completed, the process proceeds to the second ball entry means. In the period between and until the game ball enters, the information count image is updated to an image corresponding to the information count with the information count reduced by one by the image updating means every time the pseudo specific performance is executed.

As a result, the information number image is updated by the image updating means, so that the player can be made to think that the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is decreasing. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, the player who wants to continue the determination by the determination means can play the game ball in the second variable game even after a specific determination result is obtained. It has the effect of being able to keep firing in the direction.

<Characteristic group C> (In an advantageous game state, over winning navigation is performed when a small win is won)
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, a specific channel in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a flow path has a first position at which it is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass the predetermined section, and a first position to pass the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a specific determination result based on the determination by the determination means. is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time and variable game execution means for executing a variable game; A game machine C1 characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect before being varied to the first position.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be awarded after that by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that are being done.

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, it is already decided whether or not the player will be advantageous when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started. does not affect Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to the second position where it is easier to pass through. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of determination conditions, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. A variable game is executed by variable game executing means. When the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect before the variable means is varied to the first position.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to change to the first position by confirming whether or not the specific effect has been executed, so there is an effect that the effect can attract attention.

In the game machine C1, the specific effect executing means provides, as the specific effect, an effect suggesting a launch timing at which the variable means may be varied to the first position while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it executes

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, as the specific effect, the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section, and the effect suggests the launch timing. is executed by the specific effect executing means, there is an effect that the specific effect can attract attention.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the predetermined period is a period from when a game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, the shot game ball stays in the specific flow path for a predetermined period of time. Since it is constructed so as to be shorter than the period until reaching the point, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a predetermined privilege unless the game ball is shot when the specific performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the variable means changes from the second position to the first position based on a second determination result different from the specific determination result in determination by the determination means. A second variable game execution means for executing a second variable game that is varied a specific number of times, and a period in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position in the second variable game, A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it tends to be longer than the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a specific number of times based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is the second variable game. 2 It is executed by variable game executing means. The period during which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position in the second variable game is configured to be likely to be longer than the predetermined period.

Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of execution of the second variable game.

In the game machine C4, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means; a first variable game in which a period from the end of target display until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a first period; and the variable game after the dynamic display of the identification information ends. A second variable game in which a period until the means is varied to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period, and a type of one variable game is determined from among a plurality of at least. and a type determination means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means operates during a period after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means ends until the variable means is varied to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it executes the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means. a first variable game in which a period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means to the time the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period as the type of the variable game; a second variable game in which a period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information until the variable means is varied to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period; The type of variable game from 1 is determined by the type determining means. The suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means ends and before the variable means is changed to the first position.

As a result, when the first variable game is determined, more game balls can reach the predetermined section than when the second variable game is determined. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine C5, the first period is a period from when a game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. The second period is a period from when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the period is shorter than the period of .

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first period after the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged is longer than the period until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. It is On the other hand, the second period is a period shorter than the period from when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. It is

As a result, when the second variable game is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the specific flow path, so that it is possible to strongly expect that the first variable game is determined. There is

In the gaming machine C1, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means; First type determination for determining one specific performance out of a plurality of types including at least a first performance and a second performance different from the first performance as the type of the specific performance executed by the specific performance executing means. and execution of a second specific effect for executing the specific effect during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, based on the fact that the determination by the determining means results in an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result. means, and a second type for determining one specific effect from among a plurality of types including at least the first effect and the second effect as types of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means. determining means, wherein the first effect has a higher ratio determined by the first type determining means than the ratio determined by the second type determining means, and the second effect is a gaming machine C7 characterized in that the percentage determined by said first type determining means is lower than the percentage determined by said second type determining means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means. At least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect are included as types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. One specific effect is determined from among a plurality of effects by the first type determining means. A specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means during execution of dynamic display of the identification information based on the fact that the determination by the determining means results in a different determination result from the specific determination result. As the type of the specific performance to be executed by the second specific performance execution means, one specific performance is determined by the second type determination means from among a plurality of at least the first performance and the second performance. The first effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the first type determination means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determination means. On the other hand, the second effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the second type determination means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determination means.

As a result, there is an effect that the degree of expectation for execution of the variable game can be varied according to the content of the specific effect.

In the game machine C7, the specific flow path is arranged during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the change of the variable means to the first position. is shorter than the period between when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the game ball is shot and when the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path, and the predetermined period is when the specific flow path is A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the period from when a game ball is shot in the direction in which it is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path is shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball moves in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. It is configured to be shorter than the period from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the specific flow path. The predetermined period is configured to be shorter than the period from when the game ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. there is

As a result, the game ball cannot reach the predetermined section unless the game ball is shot toward the specific flow path during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that the content of the specific performance results in a specific determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to make a more serious prediction as to whether or not

In the game machine C7 or C8, the first type determination means is configured to be able to determine a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect at a predetermined ratio, and the second type The game machine C9 is characterized in that the determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7 or C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third effect, which is different from the first effect and the second effect, is determined by the first type determination means at a predetermined rate. The second type determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

As a result, when the third effect is executed, it is determined that a specific determination result has been obtained at that time, so there is an effect that the player can be pleased.

<Characteristic group D> (The likelihood of over-winning is variable by varying the length of the closing period during the jackpot)
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, a specific channel in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a flow path has a first position at which it is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass the predetermined section, and a first position to pass the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier; determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of determination conditions; variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times; and a first control as a control method for the variable means during execution of the variable game; 1 control method from among a plurality of control methods including at least a second control in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is likely to be larger than that in the first control at the timing when is changed to the first position and a control method determining means for determining the game machine D1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the large opening to which prize balls are awarded by winning a game ball. There is an attempt to improve the interest in winning by making the values different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is varied by varying the opening pattern of the large opening in each round. Some have different degrees of advantage.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each winning type, so it becomes like a work to obtain a game value according to the winning type, and the player is in a winning state. There was a case where the game became monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to the second position where it becomes easier to pass through the section. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. A variable game is executed by variable game executing means. As a control method of the variable means during execution of the variable game, a first control and a second control in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the variable means is changed to the first position tends to increase more than the first control. One control method is determined by the control method determining means from among a plurality of control methods including at least and.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that the variable means will be controlled by the second control when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the second control is controlled by the first control for at least one period among a plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is controlled to be longer than.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the second control is such that at least one of the plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game is the first control. Since it is configured to be longer than when controlled by control, the second control can cause more game balls to reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the variable means will be controlled by the second control.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means, and the first control includes the identification information indicating the specific determination result. is controlled so that a period from the end of the dynamic display to the time the variable means is varied to the first position is the first period, and the second control is the specific determination Control is performed so that the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result to the time the variable means is varied to the first position is a second period longer than the first period. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means. In the first control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time the variable means is varied to the first position is controlled to be the first period. In the second control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time the variable means is changed to the first position is the second period longer than the first period. controlled by

Thus, when the game balls continue to be shot toward the specific flow path after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, the second control allows more game balls to reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can enter the specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, while the variable means is being varied to the first position, the variable means is based on a first number or more of game balls entering the specific area. is variable to the second position, and the predetermined section includes a second number, which is larger than the first number, in a state in which the variable means is varied to the second position. The game machine D4 is characterized by having a path length that allows game balls to flow down simultaneously.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the variable means is variable to the first position, the variable means is variable to the second position by the variable control means based on the fact that the first number or more game balls enter the specific area. controlled as The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number or more of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the variable means will be varied to the first position after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. be.

The gaming machine D4 comprises an operating means operable by a player, and a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a shooting speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means. , in the predetermined section, in a state in which game balls are continuously shot at the predetermined interval in the second direction, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball The game machine D5 is characterized in that the game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the shooting means shoots the game ball into the game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a shooting speed corresponding to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. Fired by In the predetermined section, in a state in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. During this time, the game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

In the gaming machine D5, the second control is such that, of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game, a specific period, which is at least one period, is fired by the firing means. at least the first number or more of the game balls are controlled to reach the predetermined section, and the first control is such that the specific period is the firing means A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is controlled to have a length of time during which it is difficult for the game balls shot by to reach the predetermined section in the number equal to or greater than the first number.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second control, among a plurality of periods in which the variable means is varied to the second position in one variable game, the specific period, which is at least one period, is at least the first number or more fired by the firing means. It is controlled to have a length that allows the game ball to reach a predetermined section. In the first control, the specific period is controlled so as to have a length that makes it difficult for the game balls shot by the shooting means to reach the predetermined section in the first number or more.

As a result, when the variable means is controlled by the second control, there is an effect that the first number or more of game balls can enter the specific area by continuously shooting the game balls during the specific period. .

A gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine D7 is characterized by comprising deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the game ball that is flowing in the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the speed of the game balls flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the decelerating means, so that the game balls are continuously directed toward the specific flow path. It is possible to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section when the ball is shot. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the variable means is varied to the first position.

The game machine D8 is characterized in that, in the game machine D7, the deceleration means is composed of a meandering flow path.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D7, the deceleration means is configured by a zigzag-shaped flow path, so that the direction in which the game ball flows down can be changed multiple times in a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the speed of the game ball can be reduced more reliably.

In the game machine D7, the speed reducer increases the dynamic frictional force between the game ball and the predetermined section higher than that at other locations in the specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the dynamic frictional force between the game ball and the predetermined section is made higher than other locations in the specific flow path by the deceleration means, so that the game ball flows down in the predetermined section. There is an effect that the speed can be reduced more reliably.

<Characteristic group E> (Production that suggests the degree of advantage when the jackpot starts)
A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination based on the establishment of the specific condition after the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and when the execution of the privilege game is started in a predetermined period from the specific determination result to the establishment of the specific condition. A game machine E1 comprising a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect to suggest a degree of advantage to a player on the display means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be awarded after that by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that are being done.

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, it is already decided whether or not the player will be advantageous when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started. does not affect Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition. After a specific determination result is obtained in determination by the determination means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on establishment of a specific condition. In a predetermined period from when a specific discrimination result is obtained until when a specific condition is established, a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the degree of advantage when execution of a privilege game is started is displayed by a suggestive effect execution means by a display means. is executed in

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the suggestive effect.

In the gaming machine E1, there are an operating means operable by a player, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball at a shooting speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means, and a game ball shot by the shooting means can enter. and ball-entering means, wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball enters the ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a shooting speed according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. A specific condition is established when a game ball shot by the shooting means enters a ball entering means that can enter the game ball.

As a result, there is an effect that the timing of shooting the game ball can be adjusted according to the contents suggested by the suggestion performance.

In a gaming machine E1 or E2, a specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege imparting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and a game ball into which the game ball can flow. A specific flow path, a first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and more than being guided to the specific area variable means that can be changed to a second position at which the player can easily pass through the predetermined section, and the privilege game execution means changes the variable means to the second position based on the establishment of the specific condition. to the first position a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to the second position where it becomes easier to pass through the section. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times by the privilege game executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the specific condition is established.

In the gaming machine E3, when the variable means is changed to the first position and the first number of game balls enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the variable means A variable control means is provided for controlling to vary from the first position to the second position, and the predetermined section is greater than the first number in a state where the variable means is varied to the second position. A gaming machine E4 characterized by having a path length that allows the second number of game balls to flow simultaneously.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the first number of game balls enter the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position. is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down without hesitation when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

The gaming machine E4 comprises an operating means operable by a player, and a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a shooting speed corresponding to the content of operation of the operating means, and the predetermined interval is a state in which game balls are continuously shot at the predetermined intervals toward the specific flow path, and after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball passes the predetermined section. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the game balls are allowed to pass through so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval by the shooting means at a shooting speed according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. In the predetermined section, the game ball passes through the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section in a state in which the game balls are continuously shot toward the specific flow path at predetermined intervals. The game balls are made to flow down so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot game balls at predetermined intervals.

In any one of the game machines E3 to E5, a number determining means for determining the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is provided, and the suggestive effect executing means determines the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. The game machine E6 is characterized in that a suggestive effect is executed as the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the number discriminating means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is executed as a suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means.

This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the number of game balls to be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is established, depending on the content of the suggestive effect, so that it is possible to specify the number while the larger number is suggested. There is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that the condition will be satisfied.

In the game machine E6, during execution of the suggestive effect, effect mode updating means for updating the effect mode of the suggestive effect in accordance with the number of game balls determined by the number determining means every predetermined period; When updating the effect mode of the suggestive effect by the mode updating means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive effect and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means match. It is determined that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect by the match determination means for determining each period and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means match. an update avoiding means for avoiding updating of the presentation mode by the presentation mode updating means when the game machine E7 is a game machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during execution of the suggestive effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect is updated by the effect mode updating means every predetermined period according to the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. When the performance mode of the suggestive performance is updated by the performance mode updating means, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. It is determined by the means every predetermined period. When the coincidence determining means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested performance and the number of game balls determined by the number determining means match, the performance updating means updates the performance mode. is avoided by the update avoidance means.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the presentation mode is updated, so there is an effect that the processing load required for updating the presentation mode can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the predetermined section has a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of game balls arranged at a plurality of locations, and the number determination means includes the plurality of passage detection means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the number of the passage detection means detecting the passage of the game ball is determined as the number of the game balls passing through the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of game balls are arranged at a plurality of locations in the predetermined section. Among the plurality of passage detection means, the number of passage detection means detecting passage of game balls is determined as the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section by the number determination means.

As a result, it is possible to accurately determine the number of game balls that are passing through the predetermined section.

<Characteristic group F> (Production indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous when hitting right)
A ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, a judgment means for executing judgment based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the judgment. Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the means. display means capable of displaying identification information; dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means; A specific effect capable of executing a specific effect suggesting an expectation level of whether or not an advantageous game state will occur when the game ball is shot in the second direction while the information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising: execution means;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be awarded after that by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that are being done.

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, it is already decided whether or not the player will be advantageous when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started. does not affect Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

According to the gaming machine F1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. . Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means has resulted in a specific discrimination result, the advantageous state setting means sets an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction. set. Dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is performed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. A specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not an advantageous game state will occur when a game ball is shot in a second direction while dynamic display of identification information is being executed by a dynamic display executing means. is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the player can judge whether or not it is better to shoot the game ball in the second direction according to the suggestive content of the specific performance, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the specific performance. There is

In the gaming machine F1, the advantageous state is determined by starting the shooting of the game ball in the second direction during the specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. This is more advantageous to the player than starting the shooting of the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed, and the specific effect executing means includes: When the specific effect is executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed in a performance period including at least part of the specific period. A gaming machine F2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the advantageous state is reached, it is better to start shooting the game ball in the second direction during the specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. This tends to be more advantageous to the player than starting the shooting of the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the information ends. When the specific effect is executed during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect during the effect period including at least a part of the specific period.

Thus, it is possible for the player to judge whether or not to start shooting the game ball in the second direction during the performance period of the specific performance from the contents of the suggestion of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying more attention to the content of suggestion of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine F2, the advantageous state is such that the earlier the shooting of the game ball in the second direction is started during the specific period, the more advantageous the player is likely to be. Game machine F3 to play.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, in an advantageous state, it is easier for the player to start shooting game balls in the second direction earlier during the specific period. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the player can be made to decide whether or not to shoot the game ball in the second direction as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the game more tense during execution of the specific effect.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means is determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed. A first specific effect in which the ratio is high, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed is lower than that of the first specific effect. A game machine F4 characterized by comprising performance type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least .

According to the game machine F4, in any one of the game machines F1 to F3, as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed A first specific effect in which the ratio of determination is higher, and a second specific effect in which the ratio of determination is lower when dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result is executed than in the first specific effect. Since one type is determined by the effect type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least and, whether or not it is dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result is determined from the effect type of the specific effect. You can let the player guess. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the specific effect.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a specific region into which a game ball can enter; a privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific region; A specific flow path provided at a position where a game ball fired in a direction can flow in, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path enters the specific area rather than passing through the predetermined section. variable means that can be changed between a first position at which it is easier to be guided and a second position at which it is easier to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the specific area; As a state, the control for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied is executed one or more times. It is better to start shooting the game ball in the second direction than to start shooting the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed. The game machine F5 is characterized in that the number of game balls guided to the specific area tends to increase until the specific condition is established.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area where the game ball can enter. A game ball that is flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific channel provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can flow in is more likely to be guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section. The variable means is varied between a position and a second position where it is easier for the vehicle to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the specific area. As an advantageous state, the advantageous state setting means executes control for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied one or more times. In the advantageous state, it is better to start shooting the game ball in the second direction during the specific period, and then shoot the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed. The number of game balls guided to the specific area tends to increase until the specific condition is established, rather than starting.

As a result, a player who wants to obtain a greater number of predetermined benefits can be made to make a more serious decision as to whether or not to start shooting the game ball in the second direction based on the suggested content of the specific effect. effective.

In the gaming machine F5, the specific condition is established when the number of game balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position becomes the first number, The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at least simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position. A game machine F6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific condition is established when the number of game balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position reaches the first number. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, to flow down at least simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that the predetermined section will be changed to the first position in a state where the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. There is

The gaming machine F6 is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting game balls at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and the predetermined section is a state in which the game balls are continuously shot at the predetermined intervals in the second direction. , so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine F7 characterized by allowing game balls to pass through.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, game balls are shot by the shooting means at time intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. The predetermined section is played so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. It is configured so that a sphere can pass through it.

As a result, the game ball is shot in the second direction at a predetermined interval, which is the shortest interval, to the player who determines that the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is based on the suggestive contents of the specific performance. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F7, the specific period is a period of a length that allows at least the second number of game balls to be shot when the game balls are successively shot in the second direction at the predetermined intervals. A gaming machine F8, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, at least the second number of game balls can be shot when the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction at predetermined intervals during the specific period. Since it is composed of a period of a certain length, there is a possibility that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section by shooting the game balls in the second direction during the specific period. , the player can make a more serious decision as to whether or not to shoot the game ball in the second direction.

In the game machine F7 or F8, as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, there is a first advantageous state, and after shifting to the advantageous state from the first advantageous state, the variable means shifts to the second position. A game machine F9, characterized by comprising a state determining means for determining one state from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state having a long period until it is changed.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7 or F8, the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means is the first advantageous state, and after shifting to a more advantageous state than the first advantageous state One state is determined by the state determining means from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state in which the period until the variable means is changed to the second position is long.

As a result, the number of game balls that can be shot before the variable means is changed to the second position increases in the second advantageous state, so more game balls are more likely to be guided to the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played expecting that the second advantageous state will be determined.

In the gaming machine F9, the first advantageous state continues at the predetermined interval in the second direction as a period from transition to the advantageous state until the variable means is varied to the second position. A gaming machine F10 is characterized in that a period is set for a length in which game balls exceeding the first number cannot be shot when the game balls are shot.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, in the first advantageous state, the period from the transition to the advantageous state to the time when the variable means is changed to the second position is in the 23rd direction. When game balls are continuously shot with a predetermined feeling, a period of length in which game balls exceeding the first number cannot be shot is set, so the first advantageous state is determined. In this case, there is an effect that the game ball can be shot in the second direction during the specific period for the player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits.

<Characteristic group G> (Let the player choose between a jackpot that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot that cannot aim for over-winning)
A first area through which a game ball can pass; a second area different from the first area; first detection means capable of detecting passage of a game ball through the first area; and a game ball passing through the second area. a second detection means capable of detecting the passage of a ball; a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; Alternatively, in a gaming machine provided with a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means, the game ball can be entered. A first specific area, a second specific area different from the first specific area, and a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the first specific area or the second specific area. A privilege granting means, a specific channel through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific channel are more likely to be guided to the first specific region than passing through the predetermined section. A first variable means that can be changed between a first position and a second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section rather than being guided to the first specific area, and a game ball entering the second specific area. a second variable means that can be varied between a third position where it is possible and a fourth position where it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the third position; As the type, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means after the determination by the determination means has resulted in the specific determination result, the first variable means changes from the second position to the second position. A first privilege game that is varied a predetermined number of times to one position is determined, and when passage of a game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second variable means moves from the fourth position to the third position. and a type determining means for determining a second privilege game that is varied a predetermined number of times.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the large opening to which prize balls are awarded by winning a game ball. There is an attempt to improve the interest in winning by making the values different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, the winning state is not started only by winning the lottery result, and the winning state is started when one of the plurality of operating winning holes provided on the game board wins. Some are started. In this conventional gaming machine, different types of winning games are started in accordance with the type of the actuated winning hole that the player wins.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the winning type is determined, the amount of game value obtained during winning becomes a substantially constant amount corresponding to the winning type. In some cases, the game becomes monotonous during the winning state. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, there are provided a first specific area into which a game ball can enter, and a second specific area different from the first specific area. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first specific area or the second specific area. A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific channel through which the game ball can flow down is guided to a first position where it is more likely to be guided to the first specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and to the first specific area. The first variable means is variably configured to a second position where it is easier to pass through the predetermined section. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second specific region and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. ing. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, after the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the first variable means A first privilege game that is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determining means. On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second privilege game in which the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determination means. be.

As a result, the type of the privilege game can be changed according to whether the game ball passes through the first area or the second area, so that the area through which the game ball passes can be focused. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine G1 is provided with passing means through which game balls can pass, and distributing means capable of distributing the game balls that have passed through the passing means to either the first area or the second area. A gaming machine G2 characterized by:

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the game balls that have passed through the passage means through which the game balls can pass are distributed to either the first area or the second area by the distribution means. Therefore, the type of privilege game is variable according to the area distributed by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the area to be distributed.

In the gaming machine G2, the state of the sorting means is changed to the first area after at least a specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the determination means and before the execution of the privilege game is started. and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area at predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the status of the sorting means is changed at least during the period from when the determination by the determination means gives a specific determination result to when the privilege game is started. , the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area and the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area are switched at predetermined intervals by the state switching means. By confirming the distribution state and passing through the passing means, there is an effect that the type of privilege game that the player likes can be determined.

The game machine G3 is characterized by comprising display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and effect execution means for executing a distribution state suggesting effect suggesting the distribution state of the distribution means on the display means. Gaming machine G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the distribution state suggesting performance suggesting the distribution state of the distribution means is executed on the display means by the performance execution means, so the display means is confirmed. There is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize the timing at which the player's favorite privilege game is determined only by this.

In the gaming machine G4, the effect executing means produces a first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. Execution of a second distribution state suggestive effect suggesting the second distribution state based on the fact that the distribution state switching means switches to the second distribution state. and a second suggestive effect execution means, wherein the gaming machine comprises an advantage determination means capable of determining the degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first area, the first suggestive effect execution means comprising: The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the first distribution state suggesting effect can suggest the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determining means.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the effect execution means, the first suggestion effect execution means performs the first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. While being executed, a second distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the second distribution state is executed based on the switching to the second distribution state. The degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first area is discriminated by the advantage discriminating means. In the first distribution state suggesting effect, the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determining means is suggested by the first suggesting effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the timing of passing through the first area can be determined according to the degree of advantage suggested in the first suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine G5, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the first suggestive effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A gaming machine G6 characterized in that an effect suggesting the number can be suggested in the first distribution state suggesting effect.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is discriminated by the advantage discriminating means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means is suggested by the first suggesting effect executing means in the first distribution state suggesting effect.

As a result, by confirming the first suggestive effect, it is possible to easily understand the number of game balls guided to the first specific area when passing through the first area.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the privilege game executing means is the game in which the ball enters the first specific area after the first variable means is first changed to the first position in the first privilege game. The first variable means is varied to the second position based on the number of balls becoming equal to or greater than the first number, and the predetermined section is a period in which the first variable means is varied to the second position. A gaming machine G7 characterized by having a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down simultaneously.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first privilege game, after the first variable means is first changed to the first position, the number of game balls entering the first specific area becomes the first number or more, and the first variable means is changed. It is changed to the second position by the privilege game executing means. The predetermined section has a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the first variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be set to exceed the first number, and then the game balls can be shot by devising to pass through the first area. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine G7, the privilege game executing means is configured such that the game ball entering the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second privilege game A game machine characterized in that the second variable means is varied to the fourth position based on a third number or more which is more than one and less than the second number. G8.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the game ball entering the second specific region after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second privilege game Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the privilege game executing means based on the third number, which is larger than the number and smaller than the second number, the second area is passed. Then, the third number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, can stably enter the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind while the second privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic group H> (Rearrange the order of the selection menu according to the player's operation history)
display means capable of displaying an image; operation means operable by a player; and display on the display means of an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means based on the establishment of a first condition. and when the second condition is satisfied while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means, the linked image is displayed on the display means. Effect executing means for executing a type of effect, and one mode is determined from a plurality of modes as the mode of the interlocking image first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized by comprising mode determining means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period of time during a normal game, and are capable of reproducing music within the predetermined period of time. There are also those configured so that the type can be selected by the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, as the number of songs set in the game machine becomes more diverse, it becomes more difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, when the first condition is established, the interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate is displayed on the display means by the interlocking image display means. Is displayed. Based on the establishment of the second condition while the interlocked image is displayed by the interlocked image display means, the production execution means executes a type of production corresponding to the aspect of the interlocked image displayed on the display means. . The mode determining means determines one of a plurality of modes as the mode of the linked image to be displayed first by the linked image display means when the first condition is satisfied.

As a result, when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the interlocking image that is displayed first, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine H1, the game machine H2 is characterized in that the mode determining means determines one mode according to at least the type of the effect executed last time by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine H2, since the mode determining means determines one mode according to at least the type of the effect executed last time by the effect executing means, the mode of the interlocking image can be diversified. has the effect of

The gaming machine H1 or H2 includes audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and can be set as the linked image. The plurality of modes are composed of images of modes showing different musical pieces, and the effect executing means renders the audio data of the music corresponding to the mode of the linked image as the effect, the audio data reproducing means. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it reproduces the

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio output means outputs audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. A plurality of modes that can be set as linked images are composed of images of modes showing different songs. The audio data of the music piece corresponding to the form of the linked image is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means as an effect by the effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to combine the visual presentation and the auditory presentation, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the aspect determining means determines, as the aspect of the interlocking image, that one of the plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of the effect is a specific one. The interlocking image display means provides an effect of displaying in the specific mode in a predetermined order each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. The corresponding image is variable, and the effect executing means performs a type of effect according to the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific mode when the second condition is satisfied. A game machine H4 characterized in that it is executed based on.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the following effects are produced. That is, as the mode of the interlocking image, the mode determining means determines the mode in which one of the plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of effect is displayed in a specific mode. Each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is varied in a predetermined order by the interlocking image display means. A type of effect corresponding to information indicated in the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific manner is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of the second condition.

As a result, the player can easily understand the type of effect executed by the effect executing means only by confirming the information shown in the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific mode, thereby improving the game performance. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated so that the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of effect desired by the person is displayed in a specific manner.

In the gaming machine H4, the mode determination means includes one of the effect-corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode, and the effect-corresponding image to be changed to the specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. A gaming machine H5, characterized in that it determines at least the order of images.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, one effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode and an effect that is changed to a specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. Since the order of the corresponding images is determined at least by the mode determining means, the order of the effect-corresponding images to be varied in a specific mode can be determined in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode can be specified earlier when the operation means is actually operated.

The gaming machine H5 includes counting means for counting the number of executions of the effects executed by the effect executing means for each type of effect, and the mode determining means determines in advance the number of times of execution counted by the counting means. The order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect that is the number of times that the specified condition is satisfied is determined to be the order of being changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content less than or equal to the specific number of times. A gaming machine H6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times of execution of the effects executed by the effect executing means is counted by the counting means for each type of effect. A first operation content in which the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect in which the number of executions counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined specific condition is equal to or less than the specific number of times by the mode determining means. is determined in the order that is varied in a specific manner by the operation of .

As a result, the performance of the type of the number of times of execution satisfying the specific condition can be changed to a specific mode with the number of operations equal to or less than the specific number of times, so that the performance of the type of the number of times of execution satisfying the specific condition can be easily selected. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine H6, the mode determining means determines the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects in descending order of the number of times of execution counted by the counting means, according to the first operation equal to or less than the specific number of times. The game machine H7 is characterized in that the order in which the contents are changed to the specific mode is determined by the operation of the contents.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machine H6, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects in descending order of the number of times of execution counted by the counting means is determined by the mode determining means a specific number of times. Since the order of changing to the specific mode is determined by the operation of the following first operation content, the number of times that it has been changed to the specific mode is relatively large, and the player can change to the specific mode this time as well. An effect-corresponding image that is highly likely to be desired to be changed can be changed to a specific mode with a small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine H7, the mode determining means changes the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the first number of effects respectively to the specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. The game machine H8 is characterized in that the number of operations of the first operation content up to the point is determined so as to decrease.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machine H7, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects is changed in a specific manner as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. Since it is determined by the mode determining means so as to reduce the number of operations of the first operation content until it is performed, the effect-corresponding image with a higher possibility that the player wants to change to a specific mode is selected. Since it is possible to change to a specific mode with a smaller number of operations, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines H6 to H8, when the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied, the first operation after the first condition is satisfied The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in a specific mode in the displayed interlocking image is changed to a specific mode by the second or more operations of the first operation content at least in the next determination by the mode determining means. A game machine H9 characterized by comprising a setting means for setting the order to be changed.

According to the game machine H9, the first condition is satisfied when the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied in any of the game machines H6 to H8. The order of the effect-corresponding images that have been displayed in a specific manner in the interlocking image that is first displayed from the beginning is changed to the specific manner in at least the next determination by the manner determining means, by the operation of the first operation content for the second number of times or more is set by the setting means so as to be determined in the order variable to . As for the effect-corresponding image that has been changed from a specific mode within a predetermined period, it is considered unlikely that the player will want to change it to a specific mode even when the linked image is displayed next time. By setting such an effect-corresponding image in an order in which it is changed to a specific mode with a relatively large number of operations equal to or greater than the second number of operations, the player is highly likely to want to change the effect to a specific mode. The images can be set in an order that is varied in a particular manner with relatively few manipulations. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

A game machine H10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H9, the second condition is established when the operation content of the operation means becomes a specific operation content.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operation means becomes a specific operation content. On the other hand, by performing an operation with specific operation content, it is possible to execute a type of effect corresponding to the aspect of the linked image displayed at that time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself/herself can select the effect that the player likes.

<Characteristic group I> (Varying the playback position of the music according to the circumstances in which the music was decided)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined effects, and as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, based on the establishment of a first condition, A first selecting means for selecting one effect from a plurality of effects, and a effect executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, among the plurality of effects. a second selection means for selecting one effect from among the plurality of effects, a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects, and a second start position different from the first start position; The first start position is set as the start position of the effect selected by the first selection means, and the second start position is set as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection means. and start position setting means for setting the start position of the gaming machine I1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, among such conventional game machines, one song is randomly selected from a plurality of songs preset in the game machine as a kind of auditory presentation during a predetermined period of time during a normal game. There are some that can be played back. In addition to reproducing randomly selected music during a predetermined period of time, some games are configured so that the player can select the type of music to be reproduced within the predetermined period of time.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there are cases where the player does not listen to the randomly selected music very well for a predetermined period of time and changes the music to the player's favorite music. There was a problem that most of the songs that were played may not be played.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means , based on the establishment of the first condition, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selection means. On the other hand, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the second selecting means as the effect to be executed by the effect executing means. by a first selection means among a plurality of start positions including at least a first start position and a second start position different from the first start position set for each of a plurality of effects A first start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the selected effect. On the other hand, the second start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection means.

As a result, since the performance can be started from a different start position depending on whether the performance is selected by the first selection means or the performance is selected by the second selection means, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine I1, operation means operable by the player, operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means. wherein the first selection means selects an effect in accordance with the operation content of the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period; The game machine I2 is characterized in that the means selects one effect from the plurality of effects based on the setting of the selection period by the selection period setting means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. A selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect executing means is set by the selection period setting means. During the selection period, the first selection means selects an effect corresponding to the operation content for the operation means detected by the operation detection means. One effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the second selection means based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means.

As a result, the starting position of the performance can be changed depending on whether or not the performance is selected by the player's operation on the operating means, so that there is an effect that the performance mode can be diversified.

The gaming machine I1 or I2 comprises audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, wherein the effect execution means is 2. A game machine I3, characterized in that the audio data corresponding to one of a plurality of mutually different songs is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means as the effect.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data reproducing means reproduces the audio data, and the audio output means outputs the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. Audio data corresponding to one of a plurality of songs different from each other is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means as an effect by the effect executing means.

As a result, the reproduction start position of the music can be changed according to whether the music is selected by the first selection means or the music is selected by the second selection means. has the effect of being able to improve

In the game machine I3, the sound data is composed of a data group that becomes one piece of music by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order, and the start position setting means setting such that when a piece of music is selected by the first selection means, reproduction is started from the first data among the plurality of data constituting the data group corresponding to the selected piece of music; The game machine I4 is characterized in that it is set so that when a piece of music is selected by the selecting means, reproduction is started from second data different from the first data.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one piece of music by reproducing a plurality of pieces of data in a predetermined specific order. set by the start position setting means such that, when a piece of music is selected by the first selection means, reproduction is started from the first data among a plurality of data constituting a data group corresponding to the selected piece of music; be. On the other hand, when a piece of music is selected by the second selection means, the start position setting means sets so that the reproduction is started from the second data different from the first data.

Thus, by simply selecting one piece of data corresponding to the type of the selection means from among the data group as the data for starting reproduction, the reproduction start position of the music can be changed, so the reproduction start position is set. There is an effect that the processing load at the time can be reduced.

In the gaming machine I4, an operation means operable by a player, an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and a selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting music to be executed by the effect execution means. wherein the first selection means selects one piece of music according to the operation content of the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period; means for selecting one song from among the plurality of songs based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means, wherein the first data are arranged in the specific order; The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the data is set in the first order among them.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. A selection period setting means sets a selection period for selecting a music piece to be executed by the effect executing means. One piece of music is selected by the first selection means according to the content of the operation on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period. One song is selected from the plurality of songs by the second selection means based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means. The first data is composed of data set in the first order among specific orders.

As a result, the music selected by the player by operating the operating means can be played back from the beginning of the music, so that the player can carefully listen to the music selected voluntarily from the beginning. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who listens to the music can be given a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the game machine I5, the game machine I6 is characterized in that the second selection means randomly selects one song from the plurality of songs.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, one song is randomly selected from a plurality of songs by the second selection means, so that the songs set in the gaming machine can be reproduced without waste. It has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine I7 characterized in that in the gaming machine I5 or I6, the second data comprises data including at least the most characteristic melody of the music.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of the game machine I5 or I6, the second data is composed of data including at least the most characteristic melody of the music, so when the selection period starts In addition, there is an effect that the player can decide whether or not to reproduce other music by operating the operation means after listening to at least the most characteristic melody among the music selected by the second selection means.

In the gaming machine I3, the audio data consists of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced, and the plurality of start positions are set for the audio data corresponding to each piece of music. A gaming machine I8 characterized by having a plurality of playback positions set in advance.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced. A plurality of start positions are composed of a plurality of playback positions preset for audio data corresponding to each piece of music.

This has the effect of making the audio data the simplest format.

<Feature J Group> (Recombine the data of the song being played according to the progress of the game)
Based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, a performance execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined performances and one performance to be executed by the performance execution means are determined from among the plurality of performances. effect data group storage means for storing, for each type of the plurality of effects, a effect data group composed of a plurality of data used by the effect execution means to execute one effect; a performance data group selection means for selecting a performance data group corresponding to the type of performance determined by the performance data group storage means from the performance data group storage means; and the performance data group selected by the performance data group selection means. data setting means for setting the plurality of data constituting the a game machine J1 characterized by comprising an order changing means capable of changing an order different from the specific order.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to reproduce music as a kind of auditory presentation during a predetermined period of time during a normal game.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period will end before the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the song, is played, and the playback of the song will end. there were. Therefore, there is a problem that a player who cannot listen to the chorus may be dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. One performance to be executed by a performance executing means is determined from a plurality of performances by a performance determining means. A performance data group composed of a plurality of data, which is used by a performance executing means to execute one performance, is stored for each of a plurality of performance types by a performance data storage means. A performance data group corresponding to the type of performance determined by the performance determination means is selected from the performance data group storage means by the performance data group selection means. The data setting means sets a plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selection means so as to be used by the effect execution means in a predetermined specific order. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means to a different order from the specific order according to the progress of the game.

Thereby, there is an effect that the effect can be preferably executed.

In the gaming machine J1, the data setting means sets the first order data in the specific order to the effect execution means based on the completion of the execution of the effect using the last order data in the specific order. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it is set to be used by.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, based on the completion of the performance using the data of the last order in the specific order, the data of the first order in the specific order is produced. Since it is set by the data setting means so as to be used by the execution means, when the execution of one performance is completed by the performance execution means, the performance can be executed again from the beginning of the performance. Therefore, even if the execution of the performance using the data of the last order is finished, it is possible to prevent the period from becoming a non-performance period, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1 or J2, a determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. and a privilege game execution means for executing the performance, wherein the performance execution means executes one of the plurality of performances during execution of the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means executes determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and the privilege game execution means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. be done. During execution of the privilege game, one of a plurality of effects is executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the effect can be favorably executed while the privilege game is being executed.

In the gaming machine J3, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of types of effects includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each type of effect, and the first data. and at least second data different from the order variable means, wherein the first data is used by the effect execution means at least once until the privilege game ends. , the game machine J4 is characterized in that the order in which the plurality of data are used is variable.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of types of effects includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each type of effect and second data different from the first data. data and at least The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used by the effect execution means at least once before the privilege game is finished.

As a result, there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed at least once during execution of the privilege game.

In the gaming machine J4, the order changing means changes the plurality of data so that the first data is used by the effect executing means during a predetermined specific period in the bonus game. A game machine J5 characterized in that the order of use is variable.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J4, a plurality of data are generated so that the first data is used by the effect executing means during a predetermined specific period of the privilege game. Since the order in which is used is changed by the order changing means, there is an effect that the game can be played during the execution of the privilege game as one of the pleasures of entering the specific period.

any one of game machines J1 to J5, comprising audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means; The effect executing means causes the audio data reproducing means to reproduce one of a plurality of predetermined music pieces, and the effect data group includes a plurality of sounds for reproducing one piece of music. A gaming machine J6 characterized by being composed of data.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output as audio. Output by means. One of a plurality of music pieces determined in advance is reproduced by the effect executing means for the audio data reproducing means. A performance data group is composed of a plurality of audio data for reproducing one piece of music.

As a result, since it is possible to execute an auditory effect by reproducing music, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J6, the effect data group is composed of voice data for each part constituting one piece of music.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine J6, since the effect data group is composed of voice data for each part constituting one piece of music, the plurality of data are used by the order changing means. Even if the order is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to make the transition of the voice mode less uncomfortable.

In the game machine J7, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. and game execution means, wherein the effect execution means causes the audio data reproduction means to reproduce any one of the plurality of songs during execution of the privilege game, and the types of the plurality of songs. The effect data group provided for each includes first data for reproducing a specific part set for each type of music, and second data for reproducing a part different from the specific part. and the order changing means is configured so that the first data is used by the effect execution means at least once until the privilege game ends. A game machine J8 characterized in that the order in which the data of is used is variable.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, the privilege game execution means performs a privilege game advantageous to the player. executed. During execution of the privilege game, one of a plurality of songs is reproduced by the performance execution means for the audio data reproduction means. The effect data group provided for each type of a plurality of music pieces includes first data for reproducing a specific part set for each type of music piece, and for reproducing a part different from the specific part. 2nd data and at least. The order in which the plurality of data are used is varied by the order varying means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the privilege game is finished.

As a result, the specific part can be reproduced at least once before the privilege game ends, so that there is an effect that the player who is looking forward to the specific part and listening to the music can be satisfied. .

The gaming machine J8 is characterized by comprising operation means operable by the player, and wherein the performance determination means determines one song from among the plurality of songs in accordance with the operation content of the operation means. Gaming machine J9.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effects of the game machine J8, one song is determined by the effect determination means from among a plurality of songs in accordance with the operation details of the operation means that the player can operate. , there is an effect that a specific part of a song voluntarily selected by the player can be played back at least once before the bonus game ends.

<Characteristics K group> (When ending the playback of music, play until the playback position of the break and then end)
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a first condition predetermined while the first effect is being executed by the first effect executing means. is established, a progress determining means for determining the progress of the first effect being executed by the effect executing means, and the progress determined by the progress determining means are determined in advance. a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect when the second condition is satisfied; and the progress determined by the progress determining means satisfies the second condition is not satisfied, suppressing means for suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to reproduce music as a kind of auditory presentation during a predetermined period of time during a normal game.

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period will end during the reproduction of the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, and the chorus part will be cut off halfway. . For this reason, there is a problem that the player who cannot fully listen to the chorus may feel dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first effect executing means executes the first effect based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and the first effect executing means executes the first effect. The progress determining means determines the progress of the first effect being executed by the effect executing means based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied during the period. When the progress discriminated by the progress discriminating means satisfies a predetermined second condition, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means. When the progress determined by the progress determining means does not satisfy the second condition, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

Thereby, there is an effect that the first effect can be preferably executed.

In the gaming machine K1, the suppressing means suppresses execution of at least the second effect until the progress satisfies the second condition.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the suppression means suppresses execution of at least the second presentation until the progress satisfies the second condition, so the first presentation is suppressed. There is an effect that it can be executed more suitably.

In the game machine K2, whether the progress satisfies the second condition based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is equal to or longer than a predetermined first period. A game machine K3, further comprising execution control means for controlling the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means regardless of whether or not the second effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the progress status is changed based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is longer than or equal to the predetermined first period. Regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed because the execution control means controls the second effect means to start the execution of the second effect. becomes too long and the period for executing the second effect becomes excessively short.

A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, in any one of the game machines K1 to K3; Determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the variable ball entry means being predetermined from the second state to the first state based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game whose number of times is variable, wherein the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on the start of the variable game; The second effect execution means executes the second effect in a period from the end of the last variable to the first state in the one variable game to the elapse of a predetermined second period. A game machine K4 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the specific determination result obtained in the determination by the determination means. A variable game is executed by the variable game executing means. A first effect execution means executes a first effect based on the start of the variable game. The second effect executing means executes the second effect during the period from the end of the last variable to the first state in one variable game to the elapse of a predetermined second period.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect that has been executed while the change to the first state is being performed a predetermined number of times from being interrupted halfway due to the start of the second effect. be.

In the gaming machine K4, the first effect includes at least a specific effect period in which a specific effect mode is executed in the effect period, and the suppressing means is configured to perform the progress status determination. A gaming machine K5 characterized by suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means when the means determines that the specific effect period is in effect.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect period of the first effect includes at least a specific effect period during which a specific effect mode is executed. When the progress determining means determines that it is the specific effect period, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be executed for a longer time.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, period determining means for determining a period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means, and based on the period determined by the period determining means, as the second effect A game machine K6 comprising a second effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode to end before the second period elapses from among a plurality of executable effect modes.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K4 or K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period determining means determines the period during which the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect. Based on the period discriminated by the period discriminating means, one of the plurality of presentation modes executable as the second presentation is selected by the second presentation mode selecting means to end before the second period elapses. selected by

As a result, there is an effect that the second effect can be reliably ended before the second period elapses.

any one of game machines K1 to K6, comprising audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means; The first effect executing means executes the first effect by causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce a predetermined music, and the suppressing means causes the progress status determining means to reproduce the predetermined music. A game machine K7 characterized by suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means when it is determined that the specific reproduction range is being reproduced in the game machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data reproducing means reproduces the audio data, and the audio output means outputs audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. The first effect executing means executes the first effect by causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce the predetermined music. When the progress determining means determines that the specific reproduction range of the predetermined music is being reproduced, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second effect while reproducing the specific reproduction range of the music, and the reproduction of the specific reproduction range to be discontinued, so that the player who wishes to listen to the specific reproduction range can be satisfied. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine K7, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the first effect executing means selects one song from a plurality of predetermined songs according to the operation content of the operating means. A gaming machine K8 characterized in that it is to be played back by audio data playback means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, one of a plurality of predetermined musical pieces according to the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate is executed as the first effect. Since the means causes the audio data reproducing means to reproduce the music, the specific reproduction range of the music voluntarily selected by the player can be reproduced for a longer period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who selects the music can be given a greater sense of satisfaction.

A game machine K9, wherein the specific reproduction range of the game machine K7 or K8 includes at least part of the chorus of the music.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7 or K8, the specific reproduction range is configured to include at least a part of the chorus of the song, so that the part that is generally the most exciting in the song is reproduced. A chorus can be played longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied.

<Characteristic group L> (Provide songs that can only be selected by random selection)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied as a performance execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined performances and a performance to be executed by the performance execution means. The specific condition is satisfied as an effect to be executed by the first selection means capable of selecting one effect from the plurality of effects and the effect execution means based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in the state where the specific condition is satisfied. a second selection means capable of selecting one performance from among the plurality of performances excluding at least a specific performance, based on the fact that the execution condition is established in a state in which the game is not running. game machine L1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, during a predetermined period during a normal game, the player is allowed to select one song from a plurality of songs preset in the gaming machine, and the player selects one song. There exists a system that is configured to be able to reproduce a musical piece as a kind of auditory presentation. In addition, among the options selectable by the player, in addition to the item indicating the name of the song to be played back, there are also items indicating that the song is determined at random. It is configured to meet the maximum.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since there is little merit in randomly determining songs, most players select their favorite songs, and the selection frequency of items in which songs are randomly determined is low. There was a problem that it became low.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. As the performance to be executed by the performance execution means, one performance is selected from a plurality of performances by the first selection means based on the fulfillment of the execution condition in a state where the predetermined specific condition is established. . On the other hand, as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, the second selection means selects at least a specific effect from among a plurality of effects, excluding at least a specific effect, based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied. 1 effect is selected.

As a result, whether or not the specific performance is executed can be varied depending on whether or not the specific condition is established, so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, display means capable of displaying an image, operation means operable by a player, and an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means based on establishment of a predetermined display condition. and a linked image display means for displaying on the display means, the first selection means, as the specific condition, in a state where the linked image in a specific mode is displayed on the display means and the execution condition is One effect is selected from the plurality of effects based on the establishment of the effect, and the second selection means displays the linked image in a mode different from the specific mode on the display means. A gaming machine L2, characterized in that an effect corresponding to the aspect of the interlocking image is selected based on the fulfillment of the execution condition in a state where the game machine L2 is in a state where the game machine L2 is on.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition, an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operating means is displayed on the display means by the interlocking image display means. As a specific condition, one performance is selected by a first selection means from among a plurality of performances based on establishment of an execution condition in a state in which an interlocking image of a specific mode is displayed on a display means. The second selecting means selects an effect corresponding to the mode of the interlocking image based on the fulfillment of the execution condition while the interlocking image of a mode different from the specific mode is being displayed on the display means.

Thus, by operating the operation means, the player can select whether the first selection means selects the effect or the second selection means selects the effect. There is an effect that the player himself/herself can select the selection method of the effect.

The gaming machine L2 includes audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and is set as the linked image. The plurality of modes to be obtained are composed of images of modes showing different songs, and the second selection means selects a song corresponding to the mode of the linked image. Game machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. A plurality of modes that can be set as linked images are composed of images of modes showing different songs. A piece of music corresponding to the aspect of the linked image is selected by the second selection means.

Thus, by operating the operation means and selecting the interlocking image showing the desired music, the music desired by the player can be played back, so that the sound mode suitable for each player can be selected. There is an effect of being able to provide

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, a determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and an advantage advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. and advantageous setting means for setting a game state, wherein the effect executing means executes one of the plurality of effects based on the determination by the determining means. The 1 selection means selects one effect from the plurality of effects when the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, and the determination by the determination means is the first determination result. A game machine L4, characterized in that one performance is selected from among the plurality of performances excluding at least a specific performance when a different second determination result is obtained.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the following effects are produced. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the advantage setting means sets a profitable gaming state advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. be done. One of the plurality of effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the execution of the determination by the determination means. When the determination by the determination means results in a first determination result, the first selection means selects one effect from a plurality of effects, while the determination by the determination means differs from the first determination result. When the second determination result is obtained, one effect is selected by the first selection means from among the plurality of effects except at least the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that an advantageous game state is set when a specific performance is selected by the first selection means, so attention is paid to the type of performance selected by the first selection means. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine L4 is provided with a notification performance executing means for executing a notification performance for reporting whether or not the advantageous game state is set, and the execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification performance is executed. A gaming machine L5 characterized by:

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the notification effect executing means executes the notification effect for notifying whether or not the game state is set. An execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification performance is executed.

As a result, if the specific performance is selected by the first selection means, it is confirmed that the advantageous game state will be established before the notification performance is confirmed, so whether or not the advantageous game state is set can be determined early. There is an effect that the player who wants to know can play the game expecting that the first selection means will select an effect.

In the gaming machine L5, when the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result or the second determination result, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player; a disadvantageous setting means for setting a disadvantageous game state more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the determination result of is obtained, and the advantageous setting The means sets the advantageous game state as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the first determination result is completed, and the effect executing means sets the privilege. The game machine L6 is characterized by executing an effect during execution of a game.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the first discriminating result or the second discriminating result, the privilege game executing means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player. A disadvantageous game state more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state is set by the disadvantageous setting means as the game state after the privilege game executed based on the second determination result is completed. An advantageous game state is set by the advantage setting means as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the first determination result is completed. The performance is executed by the performance executing means during execution of the privilege game.

As a result, when the specific performance is executed, the privilege game is executed, which is advantageous to the player, and furthermore, the game state after the privilege game ends becomes the advantageous game state. is also determined, there is an effect that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine L6 comprises display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means on the display means. As a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the first determination result in determination, a first mode of a mode in which the first identification information is displayed in a stopped state, and a second identification a first mode determining means for determining one of the modes in which the information is statically displayed and the second mode; and a second mode determining means for determining the first mode as the dynamic display mode of the gaming machine L7.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of the game machine L6, the following effects are produced. Namely, dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is performed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. As a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the determination by the determination means having the first determination result, a first mode in which the first identification information is statically displayed, and a second mode. Either the second mode of the modes in which the identification information is displayed in a stopped state is determined by the first mode determining means. The second mode determination means determines the first mode as the dynamic display mode of the identification information to be executed based on the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to whether or not a specific effect is selected by the first selection means.

In the gaming machine L7, the first selection means determines the first determination result by determination by the determination means, and performs the determination by the determination means rather than dynamically displaying the identification information in the second mode. is the first determination result, and the ratio of selecting the specific effect is higher when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode. A gaming machine L8 characterized by:

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machine L7, the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, and the determination by the determination means is performed rather than the dynamic display of the identification information in the second mode. When the identification information is displayed dynamically in the first mode, the first determination result is the first determination result. When the dynamic display is executed, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the specific effect will be selected by the first selection means.

<M group of features> (The range of the history area is varied according to the number of accumulated history information)
storage means comprising at least a display means capable of displaying an image, a first storage area capable of storing game-related data, and a second storage area different from the first storage area; storage control means for controlling a plurality of predetermined data to be stored in the storage control means; and an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area by the storage control means. display control means for controlling display on a display means; and specific data among the plurality of data that satisfies a predetermined specific condition as data stored in the first storage area by the storage control means. and one or more data out of the plurality of data different from the specific data as data to be stored in the second storage area by the storage control means and data stored in the first storage area by the storage control means when the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than a predetermined specific number and additional data setting means for setting one or more data out of data different from the specific data in addition to the data set by the first data setting means. Machine M1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period of time during a normal game, and are capable of reproducing music within the predetermined period of time. There are also those configured so that the type can be selected by the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, as the number of songs set in the game machine becomes more diverse, it becomes more difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the storage means is composed of a first storage area capable of storing game-related data and a second storage area different from the first storage area. The storage control means controls such that a plurality of predetermined data are stored in the storage means. The display control means controls such that an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area by the storage control means is displayed on the display means. Specific data that satisfies a predetermined specific condition among the plurality of data is set by the first data setting means as data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means. As the data to be stored in the second storage area by the storage control means, one or a plurality of data out of the plurality of data different from the specific data is set by the second data setting means. When the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the predetermined specific number, the data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means is one or A plurality of data are set by the additional data setting means in addition to the data set by the first data setting means.

Thus, even when the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the additional data setting means can additionally set the data, so that the data can be preferably set. has the effect of

In the game machine M1, the display control means displays an image according to the order of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the display control means displays an image according to the arrangement order of the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area. Images can be made different according to the order of arrangement. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode can be diversified.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the additional data setting means additionally sets data to be stored in the first storage area so that the number of data stored in the first storage area is a specific number. A gaming machine M3 characterized by:

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the data to be stored in the first storage area is set by the additional data setting means so that the number of data stored in the first storage area becomes the specific number. Even if the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the number of data to be set in the first storage area is surely set to the specific number. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the data can be set more appropriately.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the additional data setting means selects data to be stored in the first storage area in descending order of preset priority among data different from the specific data. A gaming machine M4 characterized by being additionally set.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines M1 to M3, among the data different from the specific data, the data different from the specific data are set to the first data by the additional data setting means in descending order of preset priority. Since the data to be stored in the storage area is additionally set, when the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the data is set more preferably in the first storage area. It has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines M1 to M4 includes operation means operable by a player and operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, wherein the display control means comprises the first storage area and the When the operation detection means detects an operation to the operation means while an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the second storage area is being displayed, the A gaming machine M5 characterized in that the aspect of an image is variable.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. When the operation detecting means detects an operation on the operating means while an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is being displayed, it is interlocked with the details of the operation on the operating means. Then, the mode of the image is changed by the display control means.

As a result, the display mode can be changed in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means by the player, so that the operation means can be operated until the display mode desired by the player is obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the enjoyment of selecting the display mode can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine M5, the display control means displays on the display means an image group composed of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area. In the image group, an image corresponding to one data among the plurality of data is displayed in a first mode, and the other images are displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. The game machine M6 is characterized in that the display control means changes the image displayed in the first mode in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M5, the following effects are produced. That is, an image group composed of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed on the display means by the display control means. An image corresponding to one data among the plurality of data is displayed in a first mode, and other images are displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. The image displayed in the first mode is changed by the display control means in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means.

As a result, the image displayed in the first mode can be changed in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means by the player, so that the player can select the image to be displayed in the first mode. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine M6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area can be changed to the first mode when the number of times the operating means is operated is within a predetermined specific number of times. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of the game machine M6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area can be changed within a predetermined specific number of times when the operation means is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player who wants to change the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area to the first mode can be improved.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, when a predetermined specific condition is established while the group of images is being displayed, a specific effect in a mode corresponding to the image changed to the first mode is executed. A game machine M8 characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a game.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effect of the game machine M6 or M7, the image is changed to the first mode based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition while the image group is being displayed. Since the specific effect of the mode corresponding to is executed by the specific effect executing means, there is an effect that the player can select the mode of the specific effect.

The gaming machine M8 comprises audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, wherein the specific effect executing means The game machine M9 is characterized in that, as the specific effect, the audio data reproducing means reproduces audio data for outputting music corresponding to the image that is changed to the first mode.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. The audio output means outputs audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. As the specific effect, audio data for outputting music corresponding to the image changed to the first mode is reproduced by the specific effect executing means to the audio data reproducing means.

As a result, the player can select the music to be reproduced, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<N Group of Features> (Choose whether to match the voice mode with the actual number of rounds or the number of rounds in the production)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of either a predetermined first condition or a second condition different from the first condition, and based on the establishment of the second condition, Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the establishment of the first condition at least before the specific effect is executed; and the specific effect executed based on the establishment of the first condition a first mode setting means for setting a first mode as a mode; and a first mode setting means for setting the first mode as the mode of the specific effect when the second condition is satisfied and the suggestive effect execution means does not execute the suggestive effect. a second mode setting means for setting a second mode different from the first mode; A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising third mode setting means for setting either the first mode or the second mode.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, whether or not a winning game is given, and whether or not a state that is advantageous to the player after the winning game is completed (for example, a variable probability state). It is also known that it can be suggested by In this conventional gaming machine, it is possible to make the player play the game by paying attention to whether or not the effect of suggestive content that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the player will be in an advantageous state, an effect with contents suggesting that the player will be disadvantaged is executed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed. There are also those that execute an effect (so-called reverse effect) that suggests that it will be in a state.

However, for the player who wants to know early whether or not the state will shift to an advantageous state, the execution of the reversal effect delays the timing of knowing the result of whether or not the state will shift to an advantageous state. , there is a problem that the player may be dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the establishment of either a predetermined first condition or a second condition different from the first condition. be. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the suggestive effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the establishment of the first condition at least before the specific effect is executed. The first mode is set by the first mode setting means as the mode of the specific effect executed based on the establishment of the first condition. When the second condition is established and the suggestive performance executing means does not execute the suggestive performance, the second mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode as the mode of the specific performance. When the second condition is satisfied and the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect, either the first mode or the second mode is set by the third mode setting means as the mode of the specific effect. be.

As a result, when the second mode is set by the third mode setting means, the player can perceive that the second condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

In a game machine N1, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the privilege game type executed by means and the privilege game execution means and a type determining means for determining one type from, the first condition is satisfied when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, and the second condition is The game machine N2 is characterized in that it is established when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game execution means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. . As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means, a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are selected by the category determination means. 1 type is determined. The first condition is satisfied when the type determination means determines the first privilege game, while the second condition is satisfied when the type determination means determines the second privilege game.

As a result, when the second mode is set by the third mode setting means, the player can perceive that a more advantageous second privilege game has been determined, so that more attention is paid to the mode of the specific effect. There is an effect that a game can be played by

In the gaming machine N2, based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination means, a first notification effect is executed for informing a first degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the first privilege game. A first notification effect execution means, and a second notification effect for notifying a second advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the second privilege game based on the fact that the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. and a second notification effect execution means for executing, wherein the suggestive effect execution means executes an effect that is difficult to distinguish from the first information effect as the suggestive effect. Machine N3.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination means, the first notification effect for notifying the first degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the first privilege game is executed by the first notification effect execution means. be done. Based on the determination of the second privilege game by the type determining means, the second notification performance executing means executes the second notification performance for informing the second advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the second privilege game. . As the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect executing means executes an effect that is difficult to distinguish from the first notification effect.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize the type of the privilege game according to the type of the notification effect to be executed, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the notification effect. .

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, variable ball entry means for changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball can be entered during execution of the privilege game, and the variable ball entry means. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the second state, wherein the second privilege game is more likely than the first privilege game when the variable ball entering means is in the second state , the specific effect is to execute a specific effect mode at least once in one effect period, and the first mode is when the execution of the specific effect is started. A game machine N4 characterized in that a period from when the game is played to when the specific effect mode is executed is shorter than that of the second mode.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the variable ball entry means changes from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball can enter during execution of the privilege game. is variable. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entering means. The number of times the variable ball entering means is changed to the second state in the second privilege game is greater than in the first privilege game. A specific performance mode is executed at least once in the performance period of one specific performance. A period from the start of execution of the specific effect to the execution of the specific effect mode is shorter in the first mode than in the second mode.

As a result, when the number of times of changing to the second state is small and the period until the end of the privilege game becomes the first privilege game, which tends to be short, the period until the specific performance mode is executed is shortened. Therefore, regardless of the type of the privilege game, there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed more reliably until the privilege game is finished.

The gaming machine N4 includes audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, wherein the specific effect executing means The specific effect is to cause the audio data reproducing means to reproduce audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music, and the specific effect mode is output when a specific reproduction range of the specific piece of music is reproduced. wherein the first mode setting means sets such that the audio data corresponding to the specific music is started to be reproduced from a first reproduction position; and the second mode setting means The audio data corresponding to the specific music piece is reproduced from the second reproduction position where the period until the reproduction of the specific reproduction range is started is longer than that at the first reproduction position. A game machine N5 characterized in that it is set to .

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. As the specific effect, the specific effect executing means reproduces the audio data corresponding to the specific music for the audio data reproducing means. A specific rendering mode is output when a specific reproduction range of a specific piece of music is reproduced. The first mode setting means sets so that the audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music is started to be played back from the first playback position. A second mode is set so that audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music is played back from a second playback position at which a period until playback of a specific playback range is started is longer than at the first playback position. set by means.

As a result, regardless of the type of the privilege game, there is an effect that the specific reproduction range can be played until the privilege game is finished.

A game machine N6, wherein in the game machine N5, the specific reproduction range is a reproduction range including the most characteristic melody of the music.

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effects of the game machine N5, since the specific reproduction range is a reproduction range including the most characteristic melody of the music, the characteristic melody part that the player is likely to want to listen to can be reproduced. There is an effect that the privilege game can be reproduced more surely until the end of the privilege game.

In the gaming machine N5 or N6, the audio data corresponding to the specific music piece is composed of a data group that enables reproduction of one specific music piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. wherein the first mode setting means sets such that reproduction is started from the first data in the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music piece, The second mode setting means selects, from among the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music, the second data that precedes the first data in the specific order. A game machine N7 characterized in that it is set so that reproduction is started.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N5 or N6, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music is composed of a data group that enables reproduction of one specific piece of music by reproducing a plurality of pieces of data in a predetermined specific order. The first mode setting means sets so that the reproduction is started from the first data among the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music. second mode setting means for starting reproduction from the second data that precedes the first data in a specific order in the group of data constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music piece; set by

As a result, the playback position can be changed by a simple process of selecting and playing back one piece of data in the data group, so the playback position can be set with a small processing load when starting playback of a song. effective.

In any one of the gaming machines N2 to N7, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the execution of the privilege game is started, and the specific effect executing means is the privilege game. A game machine N8 characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a predetermined specific condition is established during the execution of the above.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines N2 to N7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the execution of the privilege game is started. A privilege game is executed by a specified effect execution means when a predetermined specific condition is established during execution of the privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the first privilege game is decided or the second privilege game is decided until the specific condition is established when the suggestive performance is executed, so that the specific condition is established. There is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be continued until the game is played.

<Characteristic group O> (preferentially arranging songs used during normal games in menu positions where it is easy to select)
display means capable of displaying an image; operation means operable by the player; and display on the display means of an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means based on the establishment of a first condition. and when the second condition is satisfied while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means, the linked image displayed on the display means is displayed. A first effect executing means for executing a first effect of a type according to a mode, a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and A type determining means for determining the type of the second effect to be executed by the second effect executing means from among a plurality of types, and first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine O1, characterized by comprising a mode setting means capable of setting, as a mode of the linked image, a mode according to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are equipped with a sound output device such as a speaker, and by configuring not only visual effects but also auditory effects to be executable, the mode of effects can be changed. By diversifying, it was intended to improve interest (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of such conventional game machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period of time during a normal game, and are capable of reproducing music within the predetermined period of time. There are also those configured so that the type can be selected by the player.

However, in such a conventional game machine, as the number of songs set in the game machine becomes more diverse, it becomes more difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, based on the establishment of the first condition, an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operating means is displayed on the display means by the interlocking image display means. Based on the fact that the second condition is met while the interlocking image is being displayed by the interlocking image display means, a first effect of a type corresponding to the form of the interlocking image displayed on the display means is executed by the first effect execution means. Executed by A second effect different from the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and the type of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is determined by the type determining means. Determined from among multiple types. The mode setting means can set a mode corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means as the mode of the interlocking image first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied. ing.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the modes of linked images.

In the gaming machine O1, the interlocking image is composed of a plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating different types of the first effect, and the mode setting means selects one of the interlocking images as the mode of the interlocking image. A display mode in which the effect-corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode is set, and the linked image display means displays the specified image in a predetermined order each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. and the effect executing means changes the first effect of the type indicated by the effect-corresponding image displayed in the specific mode to the second condition A game machine O2 characterized in that it is executed based on the establishment of

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the linked image is composed of a plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating different types of the first effect. As the mode of the linked image, a display mode in which one effect-corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode is set by the mode setting means. Each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific manner by the interlocked image display means is changed in a predetermined order. A specific effect of the type indicated by the effect corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of the second condition.

As a result, the player who visually recognizes the effect-corresponding image changed to a specific mode can easily understand the type of the first effect to be executed based on the establishment of the second condition. can be made Therefore, by operating the operation means, there is an effect that the player can select the type of the first effect of the desired type.

In the gaming machine O2, the mode setting means includes one of the effect-corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode, and the effect-corresponding image to be changed to the specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. A game machine O3 characterized in that it sets at least the order of images.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, one effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific manner and an effect-corresponding image changed to a specific manner when the first operation content is repeated. is set by at least the mode setting means, there is an effect that when the operating means is actually operated, the performance corresponding image to be displayed in the specified mode can be specified earlier.

In the game machine O2 or O3, the mode setting means causes the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means to be specified by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times. The game machine O4 is characterized in that the aspect of the interlocking image can be set so as to be variable to the aspect of the game machine O4.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine O2 or O3, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determination means is specified by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times. Since the aspect of the interlocking image is set by the aspect setting means so as to be variable to the aspect, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means can be specified with a small number of operations. It can be changed in any aspect. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

The game machine O4 comprises counting means for counting the number of times of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means for each type of the second effect, and the mode setting means counts the number of times the second effect is executed by the counting means. The effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of a type that satisfies a specific condition in which the number of times the second effect is performed is changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times. The game machine O5 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to set the aspect of the interlocking image as described above.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is counted by the counting means for each type of the second effect. An effect-corresponding image corresponding to a second effect of a type that satisfies a specific condition in which the number of times counted by the counting means is predetermined is changed to a specific mode by the operation of the first operation content within the specific number of times. , the mode of the linked image is set by the mode setting means.

As a result, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type whose number of times of execution satisfies the specific condition can be changed to a specific mode with a relatively small number of operations, thereby increasing convenience for the player. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine O5, the mode setting means causes the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type with the larger number of times counted by the counting means to perform the specified operation of the first operation content the smaller number of times. A gaming machine O6 characterized in that the mode of the interlocking image is set so as to be variable to the mode of .

According to the game machine O6, in addition to the effects of the game machine O5, the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type with the larger number of times counted by the counting means is specified by the operation of the first operation content the smaller number of times. Since the mode of the interlocking image is set by the mode setting means so as to be variable to the mode of (1), there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be further improved.

A gaming machine O7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operating means is the second operation content.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the second condition is established when the operation content for the operating means becomes the second operation content, so the player can arbitrarily There is an effect that the first effect executing means can be caused to execute the first effect at the timing of .

<Feature P group> (Based on the determination of the specific jackpot type, a state is formed in which the specific jackpot type is likely to be determined when the next jackpot is won)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period; and the identification information by the dynamic display means. In the dynamic display, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the stationary display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game. As the type of the privilege game to be played, one of the plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is selected. A privilege game type setting means to be set, a first state in which the second privilege game is set at a first ratio by the privilege game type setting means, and a second privilege game higher than the first ratio a second state that can be set at a ratio of 2; A game machine P1 characterized in that it is changed when a predetermined specific condition is established between the time when the bonus game is displayed and the time when the bonus game is finished.

Here, some game machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a win that is advantageous to the player when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. There are also those that aim to improve interest by providing a difference in degree.

Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines determine the type of winning (the number of rounds) at the timing when the game ball passes through a predetermined area after winning the winning.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, since the types of winnings are determined by lottery at a certain rate, the game may become monotonous, and it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game. There was a fear that

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for a predetermined period. In the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the stationary display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. One privilege game among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the privilege game type executed by the privilege game execution means. is set by the privilege game type setting means. A first state in which the second privilege game is set at a first ratio by the privilege game type setting means, a second state in which the second privilege game can be set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio, is varied by the state varying means. Triggered by establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the period from when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stop-displayed in the first state to when the privilege game is completed, the state is changed to the second state. .

As a result, the second privilege game is set at a high rate by entering the second state, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state in the game machine P1. wherein the state varying means is configured to, when the specific condition is satisfied during the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state until the end of the privilege game A game machine P2, characterized in that the game machine P2 is changed to the second state at least before the game state after the bonus game is set by the game state setting means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. When a specific condition is satisfied during a period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state to when the privilege game is completed, at least the game after the privilege game is completed by the game state setting means. Before the state is set, the state is changed to the second state by the state changing means.

As a result, the player can recognize at different timings whether to change to the second state and whether to set to the advantageous second game state, thereby making the game monotonous during execution of the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent it from becoming.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. wherein the predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition, and the state changing means comprises the first The gaming machine is characterized in that the game machine is changed to the second state on the basis that the second execution condition is established after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the state. P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The predetermined execution conditions include at least a first execution condition and a 22nd execution condition different from the first execution condition. After the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state, the state is changed to the second state by the state changing means based on the establishment of the second execution condition.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of the fulfillment of the second execution condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P3, the privilege game type setting means sets the second privilege game based on the establishment of the second execution condition.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the establishment of the second execution condition. It is possible to strongly expect that the execution condition 2 is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the predetermined execution condition is the first execution condition, the second execution condition, and a third execution condition different from any of the first execution condition and the second execution condition. and, in the second state, the third execution condition is more likely to be established after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed than in the first state. and wherein the privilege game type setting means sets the second privilege game based on the establishment of the third execution condition.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition, a second execution condition, and a third execution condition different from the first execution condition and the second execution condition. In the second state, the third execution condition is more likely to be satisfied after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed than in the first state. The second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the establishment of the third execution condition.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of the second state in which the third execution condition is likely to be satisfied.

In the game machine P5, the state changing means changes the state to the first state based on the establishment of the third execution condition in the second state.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5, when the third execution condition is established in the second state, the state changes from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it becomes excessively advantageous for the person.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P6, a first ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area, the first ball entry area, and the second ball entry area Distributing means for distributing game balls to one of two ball-entering areas and distributing game balls to the second ball-entering area at the first ratio; A third ball entry area different from any of the two ball entry areas, a first position where a game ball can enter the third ball entry area, and a game ball more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position and a variable means that can be changed to a second position, wherein the privilege game type setting means moves to the first ball entry area after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The first privilege game is set based on the game ball entering, the second privilege game is set based on the game ball entering the second ball entering area, and the third entering The second privilege game is set based on the game ball entering the ball area, and the state changing means changes the second ball entering state in the state where the variable means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the variable means is varied to the first position based on the entry of a game ball into the area.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P6, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is distributed by the distribution means to either the first ball entry area into which the game ball can enter or the second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area. Game balls are distributed to the second area at a first rate. A first position where a game ball can enter a third ball entry area different from the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is configured to be variable between two positions. While the first privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry area after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed , the second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area or the third ball entry area. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the state variable means based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area while the variable means is variable to the second position.

As a result, the player can easily check the type of the privilege game set by the privilege game type setting means and whether or not the variable means is changed to the first position by simply confirming the ball entry area into which the game ball enters. There is an effect that it can be understood by

In the gaming machine P7, the first ball entry area, the second ball entry area, and the distribution means are provided at least inside, and a ball entry means configured so that a game ball can be entered; It is variable between a first ball-entering position where a game ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second ball-entering position where it is more difficult to enter the ball-entering means than the first ball-entering position. a second variable means, and the second variable means is variable from the second ball-entering position to the first ball-entering position on the basis that the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine P8 characterized by comprising: variable control means for causing the game machine P8 to

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering area, the second ball-entering area, and the sorting means are provided inside the ball-entering means. A second variable means is provided at a first ball-entering position where a game ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second ball-entering position where it is more difficult to enter the ball into the ball-entering means than at the first ball-entering position. It is configured to be variable. The second variable means is varied from the second ball-entering position to the first ball-entering position by the variable control means based on the fact that the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is low index.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball-entering means even though the specific determination result is not obtained, so that the variable means can be varied to the first position in the normal state. can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

The game machine P8 comprises a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the ball entering means is shot in the first direction. It is provided at a position where a game ball can enter, and the third ball entry area is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A gaming machine P9 characterized by:

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects of the game machine P8, the following effects are produced. That is, the shooting means is configured to shoot game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, while a third ball entry area is located at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. is provided.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game can be reliably transferred to the third ball entry area simply by shooting the game ball in the second direction. You can enter the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine P9, a first ball entering means that allows a game ball launched in the first direction to enter, a first variable position that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and A third variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position, and a second ball entry means that can enter the game ball shot in the second direction. , a first game state, and a second game state in which the third variable means is more easily variable to the first variable position than in the first game state. a game state setting means for setting the determination condition, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and when a game ball enters the second ball entering means; A game machine P10 characterized by at least being established.

According to the game machine P10, in addition to the effects of the game machine P9, the following effects are produced. That is, the first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. A third variable means is variable between a first variable position at which a game ball can be entered into the first ball entering means and a second variable position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. is configured to A second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. One game is played by a game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the third variable means is more easily variable to the first variable position than the first game state. State is set. A determination condition is established at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and when a game ball enters the second ball entering means.

Thereby, when the second game state is set in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the variable means is maintained at the first position simply by continuing to shoot the game ball in the first direction. , the discrimination condition can be established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the variable device from changing to the second position before a specific determination result is obtained after changing the variable device to the first position.

<Feature Q group> (In the time saving of 1 type and 2 types, there is a state in which one type is more advantageous and a state in which 2 types are more advantageous)
A privilege game advantageous to a player is performed based on establishment of any one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition. A privilege game executing means to be executed, and at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. One game out of a plurality of game states including at least a type setting means for setting one type out of a plurality of types, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. a game state setting means capable of setting a state; and at least in the second game state, when the second execution condition is satisfied rather than the first execution condition, the second privilege game is set by the type setting means. and a second state in which the second privilege game is more likely to be set by the type setting means when the first execution condition is satisfied rather than the second execution condition. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by comprising state switching means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. be. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. There are also those that aim to improve interest by providing a difference in degree.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, a winning game is also executed when a game ball enters a specific area provided on the board surface, in addition to the lottery based on winning to the start winning opening. something exists. In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is a difference in the percentage of advantageous winning types between when winning by lottery based on starting winnings and when winning by entering a specific area. There are also things that let you.

However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, the ratio of advantageous winning types is fixed for each chance of winning, so there are cases where the game becomes monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, when any one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition is established. Based on this, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. A game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. One game state is set by the setting means. At least in the second game state, when the second execution condition is satisfied rather than the first execution condition, the second privilege game is more likely to be set by the type setting means. The state switching means switches between a second state in which the second privilege game is more likely to be set by the type setting means when the execution condition 1 is satisfied.

Thereby, in the second game state, depending on whether it is the first state or the second state, the establishment of the first execution condition makes it easier to set the second privilege game, or the second game state. Whether or not the second privilege game is likely to be set depends on whether the execution condition is established, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine Q1 is characterized in that it comprises a specific area into which a game ball can enter, and the first execution condition is established based on the game ball entering the specific area. Game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the first execution condition is established based on the game ball entering the specific area. Since the player can easily determine whether or not the privilege game is to be executed simply by confirming whether or not to play, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the game machine Q2, the specific area is provided inside, and a ball entry means configured to allow a game ball to enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than the first position, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and determination by the determination means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result being the first determination result; The gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that the second execution condition is established when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific area is provided inside the ball entering means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. there is A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period is executed by the variable game execution means based on the determination result by the determination means becoming the first determination result. A second execution condition is satisfied when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result.

As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means.

In the gaming machine Q3, the ball-entering means has at least a first specific area and a second specific area provided therein as the specific areas, and the state switching means has the first state. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that the game machine Q4 is switched to the second state based on the fact that a game ball enters the second specific area in the above.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a first specific area and a second specific area are provided as specific areas inside the ball entering means. When the game ball enters the second specific area in the first state, the state is switched to the second state by the state switching means.

As a result, the player can easily determine whether or not the state is switched to the second state simply by confirming whether or not the game ball enters the second specific area, which is convenient for the player. has the effect of being able to improve

The game machine Q4 comprises a distribution means for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to one of a plurality of areas including at least the first specific area and the second specific area. , The type setting means sets the first privilege game based on the game ball entering the first specific area, and the second privilege game based on the ball entering the second specific area A gaming machine Q5 characterized by setting a privilege game.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed by the distribution means to one of a plurality of regions including at least the first specific region and the second specific region. While the first privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the game ball entering the first specific area, the second privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the ball entering the second specific area. A privilege game is set.

As a result, the player can easily determine the type of the privilege game to be executed only by confirming the type of the specific area into which the game ball enters, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. has the effect of

In a gaming machine Q4 or Q5, a second ball entering means configured to allow a game ball to enter and a third specific area provided therein as the specific area, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a second variable means capable of changing between a third position where ball entry is possible and a fourth position where ball entry into the second ball entry means is more difficult than the third position; is for setting the second privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third specific area, the first state is the second variable means is variable to the fourth position and the second state is a state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third specific area is provided as the specific area inside the second ball entering means. The second variable means is variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where the ball entering the second ball entering means is more difficult than the third position. is configured to A second privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the game ball entering the third specific area. The first state is obtained by changing the second variable device to the fourth position, and the second state is obtained by changing the second variable device to the third position.

As a result, by confirming the state of the second variable means, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the state is the first state or the second state.

In the gaming machine Q6, the second variable means changes the position to the fourth position based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means while the position is changed to the third position. A gaming machine Q7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q6, the second Since the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, it is possible to prevent the state in which the second variable means is arranged at the third position from continuing for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

In the gaming machine Q6 or Q7, the type setting means, at least in the second game state, determines the second game at a first rate based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result. A privilege game is set, and the ball-entering means is configured so that the entered game ball enters the second specific area at a second rate lower than the first rate. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by:

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q6 or Q7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least in the second game state, the second privilege game is set at the first rate by the type setting means based on the determination result by the determination means being the second determination result. The ball-entering means is configured so that the entered game ball enters the second specific area at a second rate lower than the first rate.

As a result, in the first state, the ratio of setting the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, so the determination by the determination means does not result in a specific determination result. Also, the game can be played in anticipation of the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the determination result by the determination means.

In any one of gaming machines Q6 to Q8, a shooting means is provided capable of shooting a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the ball entering means It is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can be entered and a game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter, and the second ball entering means is , a game ball launched in the second direction can be entered, and a game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter. Machine Q9.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q6 to Q8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball shot in the first direction can be entered and a game ball shot in the second direction is difficult to enter. A second ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter and a game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter.

As a result, it is possible to easily change the type of the ball-entering means for entering the game ball according to the direction in which the game ball is launched.

<Characteristic R group> (As a special 1 V challenge, multiple types with different V winning expectations are provided)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be varied, a first flow path configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can flow down, a second flow path that is different from the first flow path, and the ball entering means Distributing means for distributing a game ball entered into one of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path, and the distribution means distributes the game ball to the first flow path A position where the distributed game balls can enter at a first rate and the game balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at a second rate higher than the first rate. A special area provided, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that a game ball enters the specified area, and a judgment is executed based on establishment of a judgment condition. A variable game for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on determination means and a determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. As the type of the variable game executed by the execution means and the variable game execution means, a first variable game and a game ball that has entered the ball entry means from the first variable game is transferred to the second flow path. A gaming machine R1 characterized by comprising a type setting means for setting one type of variable game out of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game which is easily sorted.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory. A game ball entered into a V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the V winning device is provided in the V winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that allows a special game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by passing through a specific area (such as a winning switch), which is intended to increase the interest of the player ( For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not the privilege game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is of an advantageous type. There are also those configured to allow In such a conventional type gaming machine, when it is suggested that the degree of expectation of a privilege game of an advantageous type is high, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of passing through the specific area.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when a specific game is executed, the rate at which game balls pass through the specific area is common, so it has been suggested that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous type. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, the variable means is variable between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. configured as possible. any one of a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path through which a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, The game balls entering the ball entering means are distributed by the distribution means. The game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are used at a first rate, and the game balls distributed to the second flow path have a second rate higher than the first rate. A specific area is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of determination by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. A variable game is executed by the variable game executing means. As types of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, a first variable game and a second variable game in which a game ball entering the ball entering means is more likely to be distributed to the second flow path than the first variable game. , and one variable game type is set by the type setting means from among a plurality of types including at least .

As a result, when the second variable game is set, the percentage of balls entering the specific area is higher than when the first variable game is set. It is possible to strongly expect that the second variable game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the first variable game is configured such that it is difficult for the game ball entering the ball entering means to flow into the second flow path, and the second variable game is , the game ball entering the ball entering means is configured to be difficult to flow into the first flow path, and the type setting means comprises the first variable game and the second variable game One variable game out of a plurality of types including at least a game and a third variable game in which a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow into both the first channel and the second channel. A game machine R2 characterized in that it sets the type of.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first variable game, it is difficult for the game ball that has entered the ball entering means to flow into the second flow path, while in the second variable game, the game ball that has entered the ball entering means is It becomes difficult to flow into the first channel. A plurality of types of games including at least a first variable game, a second variable game, and a third variable game in which a game ball entering the ball entering means can flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path. One type of variable game is set by the type setting means from among them.

As a result, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific area can be varied according to the type of variable game set by the type setting means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the specific areas include a first specific area provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at the first rate, and the second specific area. A gaming machine R3 characterized by comprising at least a second specific area provided at a position where game balls distributed to the flow path can be entered at the second rate.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2, the first specific region is provided as the specific region at a position where the game balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at a first rate. On the other hand, the second specific area is provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at the second rate, so it corresponds to the type of the distributed flow path. By confirming the specific area to be played, the player can easily grasp whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine R3, the first flow path is provided with passing means through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game execution means performs the above-described The gaming machine R4 is characterized by executing a privilege game.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R3, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the game ball passing through the passing means provided in the first flow path. , there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the privilege game when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path.

In the gaming machine R4, the first flow path comprises at least a first path provided with the passing means and a second path not provided with the passing means. The gaming machine R5 is characterized in that both the game balls that have passed through the first path and the game balls that have passed through the second path enter the first specific area at the first rate.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the first flow path is composed of at least a first path provided with passage means and a second path not provided with passage means. A game ball that has passed through the first path and a game ball that has passed through the second path are both configured to enter the first specific area at a first rate.

As a result, the player can play the game in anticipation of passing through the first route, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the gaming machine R5 comprises shielding means for making it difficult to visually recognize whether a game ball flowing into the first flow path has passed through the first path or the second path. .

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects of the game machine R5, it is made difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball flowing into the first flow path has passed through the first path or the second path by the shielding means. Therefore, even when the player has passed through the second route, the player can expect that the player has passed through the first route. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R6, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating whether a game ball has entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game based on the execution of the variable game. In addition, when the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area, the specific effect executing means, regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing means, The game machine R7 is characterized in that it executes the specific effect in the effect mode indicating that the ball has not entered the specific area.

According to the game machine R7, in addition to the effects of the game machine R6, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the execution of the variable game, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect indicating whether the game ball entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. When the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area, it does not enter the specific area by the specific performance executing means regardless of whether or not it has passed through the passing means. A specific effect of the effect mode indicating that is executed.

As a result, it is possible to make it unclear for a longer period of time whether or not the privilege game will be executed after passing through the passing means, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be maintained for a longer period of time. be.

In the gaming machine R7, when the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area, after the specific effect is completed, the privilege A gaming machine R8 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means for executing a second effect indicating that a game is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R7, when the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area, the specified After the effect is finished, the second effect indicating that the privilege game is to be executed is executed by the second effect executing means, so that the game ball flowing into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area. In this case, the player can play the game expecting that the second effect will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R8, the type setting means controls the first variable game, the second variable game, and the game ball that has entered the ball entering means to enter the first flow path as well. A game machine R9 characterized in that one type of variable game is set from among a plurality of types including at least a fourth variable game that cannot flow into the second channel.

According to the game machine R9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines R1 to R8, the first variable game, the second variable game, and the game ball that has entered the ball entering means also enter the first flow path. Since one variable game type is set by the type setting means from among a plurality of types including at least a fourth variable game that cannot flow into the second flow path, the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination. When a result is obtained, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong hope that the fourth variable game will not be executed.

<Feature S Group> (Even if a game ball is distributed to the route on the side of the V winning port with a low expectation of time saving, the game ball that enters after that can enter the V winning port with a high expectation of time saving)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Variable means that can be varied, determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the A gaming machine having variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to a first position for a predetermined period of time, a first flow path through which a game ball entered into the ball entry means flows down; A second flow path different from the first flow path, a first specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path A game ball enters one of a plurality of specific areas including at least a second specific area provided at a position where the ball can be entered, the first specific area, and the second specific area and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on, and the gaming machine continues until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area A game characterized in that the period between the Machine S1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the interior of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed based on the There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by passing through it, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -010741).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of specific areas are provided on the board surface, and the degree of advantage of the privilege game given when passing through the specific area during a specific game is determined according to the type of the specific area. There are also those configured to be variable by

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is only one specific area where the game ball enters in one specific game, and when the game ball progresses toward a specific area with a low degree of advantage, the game ball However, there is a problem that the expectation of the person is remarkably lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the variable means can be changed between the first position where the game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. is variably configured. A variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time is executed by the variable game execution means based on the result of determination by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. A first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided at a position where a game ball entering the ball-entering means can flow down. A first specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a second specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. It is A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the game ball entering one of a plurality of specific regions including at least the first specific region and the second specific region. be. The period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is the period until the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path enters the second specific area. It is configured so that it can easily be longer than

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area. It is possible to make the player expect for a longer period of time that the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S1, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided as types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. The privilege game executing means executes the second privilege game at a first rate when the game ball enters the first specific area, and the ball enters the second specific area. A gaming machine S2 characterized in that it is configured to execute the second privilege game at a second rate higher than the first rate when the second bonus game is played.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects of the game machine S1, the following effects are produced. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game executing means, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided. While the second privilege game is executed at the first rate by the privilege game execution means when the game ball enters the first specific area, the second privilege game is executed at the first rate when the ball enters the second specified area. A second privilege game is executed at a second rate higher than.

As a result, it is possible to make the player strongly expect the game balls to flow into the second flow path, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. distribution means configured to be variable to a plurality of distribution states including at least; distribution control means for varying the distribution state of the distribution means according to a predetermined variable pattern during execution of the variable game; As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first period in which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and a second period in which the distribution means is in the second distribution state. and a specific type setting means capable of setting a specific variable game in which at least the variable means is changed to the first position, and the gaming machine is provided with one specific variable game during the first period Game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the second specific area during the second period than the timing at which the game ball distributed to the first flow path enters the first specific area The game machine S3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the timing of entering the ball tends to be earlier.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distributing means has a plurality of states including at least a first distributing state in which the game ball that entered the ball entering means is distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. It is configured to be variable in the distribution state. During execution of the variable game, the distribution state of the distribution means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the distribution control means. As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, at least the variable means has a first period in which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and a second period in which the distribution means is in the second distribution state. A specific variable game that is variable to the first position is set by the specific type setting means. A game distributed to a second flow path during a second period before the timing at which the game ball distributed to the first flow path during the first period in one specific variable game enters the first specific area. The timing at which the ball enters the second specific area is likely to be earlier.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in both the first period and the second period, after the result of whether or not the ball enters the second specified area is obtained, the first specified area is entered. Since it becomes clear whether the ball will enter the area or not, it is possible to suppress the player from being confused as to whether the player should pay attention to the second specific area or the first specific area. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine S3, the game balls distributed to the first channel enter the first specific region at a first ball-entering rate, and are distributed to the second channel. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that game balls enter the second specific region at a second ball-entering rate lower than the first ball-entering rate.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of the game machine S3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first flow path is configured such that game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the first specific area at a first ball-entering rate. The second flow path is configured such that game balls distributed to the second flow path enter the second specific area at a second ball-entering rate lower than the first ball-entering rate.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in both the first period and the second period, first, whether or not the game ball enters the second specific region with a low percentage of ball entering. After it is clarified, it becomes clear whether or not the game ball enters the first specific area where the percentage of entering balls is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the privilege game will be executed as the variable game progresses, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided as types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. The privilege game executing means executes the second privilege game at a first rate when the game ball enters the first specific area, and moves to the second specific area. The second privilege game is executed at a second rate higher than the first rate when the ball is entered, and the privilege game execution means is executing one variable game. When the game ball enters the second specific area after that, regardless of whether or not the ball enters the first specific area after that, the second privilege game is executed at the second rate. A gaming machine S5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game executing means, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided. While the second privilege game is executed at the first rate by the privilege game execution means when the game ball enters the first specific area, the second privilege game is executed at the first rate when the ball enters the second specified area. A second privilege game is executed at a second rate higher than. When the game ball enters the second specific area during the execution of the variable game of 1, regardless of whether or not the ball enters the first specific area after that, the privilege game executing means sets the second rate. , the second privilege game is executed.

As a result, the game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first period and the second period, and when the game ball enters the second specific area, the game ball enters the first specific area after that. Even if the ball enters the ball, the second privilege game is executed at a high rate, so there is an effect that the player can be relieved when the game ball enters the second specific area.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is the A gaming machine S6 comprising a delay means for delaying the flow rate of the game ball flowing into the second flow path so as to be longer than the period until the ball enters the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is extended to the second flow path. Since the delay means delays the flow speed of the game ball flowing into the second flow path so as to make the period longer than the period until the game ball enters the second specific area, the second specific area can be ensured. There is an effect that it is possible to realize the operation of clarifying whether or not the game ball will enter the first specific area after it is clarified whether the game ball will enter the second specific area. be.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S6, the privilege game executing means enables the privilege game to be executed based on the result of determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine S7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines S1 to S6, the special game execution means performs a Since the privilege game is executed, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S7, at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state are provided as game states after execution of the privilege game is completed. game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, wherein the first game state has a higher probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result than the second game state. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being low.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S7, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state setting means selects from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the effect of the privilege game is completed. 1 game state is set by . The first game state is configured such that the probability that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is lower than that in the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, it is expected that the determination by the determination means will result in the second determination result, while in the second game state, the determination by the determination means can be expected to result in a specific determination result. can be made Therefore, since the game can be sharpened according to the game state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic T group> (Make it difficult to understand whether it is a small hit without V challenge)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Advantageous to the player based on variable variable means, a specific area provided at a position through which the game ball entering the ball entering means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area. privilege game execution means for executing a special privilege game, determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, the variable means is predetermined A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is varied in a variable pattern, and a game ball passing through the specific area during one variable pattern as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means. A first variable game in which the variable means is varied in a first variable pattern in which at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to be set is set, and a game ball is easier to pass through the specific area than the first variable pattern, and A type that sets one type out of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the variable means is varied in a second variable pattern in which the specific variable mode is set between one variable pattern. A gaming machine T1 comprising: setting means;

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the interior of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed based on the There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by passing through it, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -010741).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, as specific game types, a type in which a game ball can enter a specific area and a type in which it is difficult to enter a specific area are provided. Some exist.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in a specific game type in which it is difficult to enter a specific area, the operation is clearly different from that in which it is possible to enter a ball. In some cases, the player could understand whether or not the type of ball would make the ball difficult. Therefore, if the player understands that it is a type that makes it difficult to enter the specific area, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the game machine T1, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. configured as possible. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the passage of the game ball through a specific area provided at a position through which the game ball entering the ball entering means can pass. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition, and the variable game is a variable game in which the variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern based on the judging result by the judging means becoming a specific judging result. Executed by execution means. As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the variable means is varied with a first variable pattern in which at least a specific variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area during one variable pattern is set. and a second variable pattern in which the game ball passes through the specific area more easily than the first variable pattern, and a specific variable mode is set between the one variable patterns. One type is set by the type setting means from among a plurality of types including at least a variable second variable game.

As a result, a plurality of different types of variable games can be set by the type setting means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine T1, the second variable pattern includes the specific variable mode and the second variable mode in which the game ball passes through the specific area more easily than the specific variable mode during one variable pattern. , is set at least.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, in the second variable pattern, a specific variable aspect during one variable pattern and a game ball passing through a specific area rather than the specific variable aspect. Since at least the second variable mode that makes it easier is set, a specific variable mode is set for both the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, there is an effect that the expectation for the second variable pattern can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In the game machine T2, the second variable pattern is a game characterized in that the second variable mode is set after the specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern. Machine T3.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effects of the game machine T2, in the second variable pattern, the second variable mode is set after the specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, at least until the specific variable mode is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation for the second variable pattern can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means is provided, and the variable game execution means comprises: The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the variable game is terminated based on the fact that a specific number or more of game balls enter the ball entering means during execution of the variable game.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined game value is imparted by the game value imparting means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Since the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is terminated based on the fact that a specific number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, is it the first variable pattern? It is possible to realize a novel game property by predicting whether it is the second variable pattern and allowing the player to select whether or not to enter the game ball into the ball entering means during execution of the specific variable mode. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T4, the second variable pattern makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific region than the specific variable mode after the specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern. A second variable mode is set, and at least during execution of the specific variable mode, the game determines whether the game ball is allowed to enter the ball entering means or the ball entering the ball entering means is avoided. The game machine T5 is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of the effect mode selected by the player.

According to the game machine T5, in addition to the effects of the game machine T4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second variable pattern, after a specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern, a second variable mode is set in which the game ball passes through the specific region more easily than the specific variable mode. be. The specific effect of the effect mode that allows the player to select whether to allow the game ball to enter the ball entering means or avoid the ball entering the ball entering means during execution of at least the specific variable mode is the specific effect executing means. Executed by

As a result, the player can easily understand that it is sufficient to select whether to let the game ball enter the ball entering means or to avoid it by the specific performance, so that the easy-to-understand game property is realized. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine T5, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at least during execution of the specific variable mode regardless of the type of the variable game set by the type setting means. Characterized game machine T6.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effects of the game machine T5, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means at least during execution of the specific variable mode regardless of the type of variable game set by the type setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the type of variable game.

In the gaming machine T5 or T6, the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means includes at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. An effect mode determination means is provided for determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode determination means determines the effect mode rather than the second effect mode when the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means. A ratio of determining the first effect mode is increased, and when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, a ratio of determining the second effect mode is higher than that of the first effect mode. A game machine T7 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T5 or T6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the effect mode is determined from a plurality of effects including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that is different from the first effect mode. One effect mode is determined by the means. When the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the rate at which the first effect mode is determined is higher than the rate at which the second effect mode is determined by the effect mode determination means. On the other hand, when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the ratio of determining the second effect mode is higher than the ratio of determining the first effect mode by the effect mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to predict the type of the variable game according to the effect mode of the specific effect, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines T1 to T7, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine T8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the game machine T8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines T1 to T7, the privilege game is executed based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result different from the specific determination result. Since the privilege game is executed by the means, the player can play the game while paying attention to the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T8, as game states after execution of the bonus game is completed, at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, wherein the first game state has a higher probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result than the second game state. A gaming machine T9 characterized by being low.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. 1 game state is set by . The first game state is configured such that the probability that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is lower than that in the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, it is expected that the determination by the determination means will result in the second determination result, while in the second game state, the determination by the determination means can be expected to result in a specific determination result. can be made Therefore, since the game can be sharpened according to the game state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic U group> (The role of the display mode displayed at the time of button operation is changed according to the player's operation status)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in a predetermined effect period, and a first specific effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. and a second specific effect suggesting that the game is more advantageous to the player than the first specific effect; As the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined, one ratio is selected from a plurality of ratios including at least a first ratio and a second ratio higher than the first ratio according to the game situation. A gaming machine U1 characterized by comprising a setting ratio setting means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and every time the operation means is operated during the execution of the entertainment performance, the expectation of winning a game is suggested. There are also things that can perform production.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, depending on whether the player tends to perform operations positively or the player tends not to perform operations, suggestive effects with a high degree of expectation are given between the first interest effects. Since the number of times that is executed varies, there is a problem that the degree of expectation of the entertainment effect also varies depending on the tendency of the player's operation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition during a predetermined effect period. A plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect suggesting that the player is more advantageous than the first specific effect as the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. One type is determined from among them by the type determining means. As a rate at which the second specific effect is determined by the type determination means, the rate setting means selects from a plurality of rates including at least a first rate and a second rate higher than the first rate. A ratio of 1 is set according to the situation.

As a result, the rate at which the second specific effect is determined can be changed according to the game situation, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A game machine U2 characterized in that, in the game machine U1, the specific condition can be satisfied a plurality of times in one of the presentation periods.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1, since it is configured so that the specific condition can be satisfied a plurality of times in one presentation period, the game is played with the expectation that the specific condition will be satisfied as many times as possible. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the gaming machine U1 or U2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is established when the operating means is operated during the presentation period.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the specific condition is established when the operation means is operated by the player during the presentation period. Since the player who wants to play the game can be made to operate the operating means positively, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3, at least one of the game machines U1 to U3 includes satisfaction status determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied in at least one of the performance periods, and information corresponding to the determination result by the satisfaction status determining means is provided at least next to the above-mentioned and holding means capable of holding until a specific effect is executed, wherein the ratio setting means selects one of the plurality of ratios according to the information held by the holding means. A gaming machine U4 characterized by setting a ratio.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machines U1 to U3, the following effects are produced. That is, the fulfillment status of the specific condition in at least one effect period is determined by the fulfillment status determining means, and the information corresponding to the determination result by the fulfillment status determining means is held by the holding means at least until the next specific effect is executed. held by According to the information held by the holding means, a ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means out of the plurality of ratios.

As a result, it is possible to vary the rate at which the second specific effect is determined when the specific condition is satisfied during the current effect period according to the establishment of the specific condition during the previous effect period. There is an effect that the ratio can be preferably set according to the tendency of the establishment of the specific condition.

In the gaming machine U4, the establishment status determination means is configured to be able to determine at least whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in one of the performance periods is equal to or greater than a specific number of times, and the ratio setting is performed. The means sets the first ratio when the establishment status determination means determines that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, and sets the first ratio when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is determined to be less than the specific number of times. A game machine U5 characterized by setting a second ratio.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the establishment status determining means whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in one performance period is equal to or greater than the specific number of times. When the number of times the specific condition is met is determined by the establishment status determining means to be equal to or greater than the specified number of times, and the first rate is set by the rate setting means while it is determined to be less than the specified number of times. is set to a second percentage.

Thus, when the number of times the specific condition is established is relatively small, the ratio of determining the second specific performance in the next performance period can be increased, so the second specific performance is determined within one performance period. can be evened out. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable presentation can be realized.

In any one of game machines U1 to U4, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. Suggestion performance execution means for executing a determination result suggestion performance indicating the determination result of the determination means in the predetermined performance period based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed, wherein the type determining means is arranged to have a performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the specific discrimination result rather than a performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect showing a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that the ratio of determining the second specific effect increases when the specific condition is established.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines U1 to U4, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. Based on execution of determination by the determining means, a determination result suggesting effect indicating the determination result of the determining means is executed in a predetermined effect period by the suggesting effect executing means. When a specific condition is satisfied, the type determination means determines that the performance period of the discrimination result suggestion presentation indicating the specific discrimination result is more than the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion presentation showing the discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. It is configured such that the ratio of determining the second specific effect is high.

As a result, the game can be played with the expectation that the second specific effect will be executed each time the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine U5, the ratio setting means sets the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined to the first ratio, the second ratio, and a third ratio lower than the first ratio. , and a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio, and the ratio setting means sets one ratio out of a plurality of ratios including at least one of: the discrimination result indicating the specific discrimination result; Either the first ratio or the second ratio is set according to the game situation in the effect period of the suggestive effect, and in the effect period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the result of the discrepancy, A gaming machine U6 characterized in that it is constructed such that either the third ratio or the fourth ratio can be set according to the game situation.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratios at which the second specific effect is determined are the first ratio, the second ratio, the third ratio lower than the first ratio, and the fourth ratio lower than the second ratio. A ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means from among a plurality of ratios including at least . Either the first ratio or the second ratio is set according to the game situation by the ratio setting means in the performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the specific discrimination result, while the outlier discrimination result is set. Either the third ratio or the fourth ratio is set according to the game situation by the ratio setting means in the production period of the discrimination result suggestive production shown.

As a result, there is an effect that the expectation of the player for the privilege game can be improved when the second specific effect is executed.

In the gaming machine U6, the ratio setting means sets the first ratio when the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result is present and the game situation is the first game situation. is set, and when it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result, and the game situation is a second game situation different from the first game situation, the second Set the ratio of, when it is the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the outlier discrimination result, and when the game situation is the first game situation, the third ratio is set, and the outlier A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth ratio is set when it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggestive effect indicating the discrimination result and the game situation is the second game situation. U7.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result and the game situation is the first game situation, the first ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the specific discrimination result is displayed. and the game situation is a second game situation different from the first game situation, the second ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the deviation is determined When it is the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the result and the game situation is the first game situation, the third ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the failure discrimination result. and the game situation is the second game situation, the fourth ratio is set by the ratio setting means, so that there is an effect that the production mode can be diversified.

In any one of the game machines U5 to U7, one of a plurality of periods including at least a first effect period and a second effect period longer than the first effect period as the effect period of the discrimination result suggesting effect. wherein the type determining means includes the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and a third specific effect different from any of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. , wherein one type can be determined from a plurality of types including at least a performance, and the third specific performance is performed during the second performance period rather than the first performance period. A gaming machine U8 characterized in that the percentage determined when a condition is established is high.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines U5 to U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the performance period of the discrimination result suggesting performance, one period is set by the performance period setting means from among a plurality of periods including at least a first performance period and a second performance period longer than the first performance period. be done. The type of one specific performance is selected by a type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a first specific performance, a second specific performance, and a third specific performance different from any of the first specific performance and the second specific performance. is determined. The ratio of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is established in the second effect period is higher than that in the first effect period.

As a result, when the third specific effect is executed, there is an effect that it is possible to heighten the expectation that the second effect period is set.

In the gaming machine U8, the third specific effect is performed when the specific condition is established during a period of time equal to or less than the length of the first effect period after the start of the second effect period. The game machine U9 is characterized in that the ratio of determination is higher than when the specific condition is established in the first presentation period.

According to the gaming machine U9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U8, when the specific condition is established during the period from the start of the second presentation period to the elapse of a period equal to or less than the length of the first presentation period. , since the ratio of determination of the third specific effect becomes higher than when the specific condition is satisfied in the first effect period, the determination result suggesting effect is performed beyond the first effect period by executing the third specific effect. There is an effect that the expectation for the continuation can be increased.

In the game machine U8 or U9, the effect period setting means sets a higher ratio of setting the second effect period than the first effect period as the effect period of the discrimination result suggesting effect indicating the specific discrimination result. A game machine U10 characterized in that it is configured to be.

According to the gaming machine U10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U8 or U9, the ratio of setting the second rendering period is higher than the first rendering period as the rendering period of the discrimination result suggesting rendering showing the specific discrimination result. Since the effect period setting means is configured such that the third specific effect is executed, there is an effect that the expectation of the player for the privilege game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines U8 to U10, the specific effect executing means performs a period from when the discrimination result suggesting effect in the second effect period is started until a period of the same length as the first effect period elapses. The specific effect can be executed in a first period set between and in a second period set after a period of the same length as the first effect period has passed. The type determining means has a higher rate of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type determining means The determining means determines the third specific effect in the first period at a common specific ratio regardless of whether or not the discrimination result suggestive effect indicates the specific discrimination result. Gaming machine U11.

According to the gaming machine U11, the first period set between the start of the discrimination result suggestive effect of the second effect period and the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period, and the first effect A specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means in a second period which is set after a period of the same length as the period has passed. When the specific condition is satisfied in the first period, the determination ratio of the third specific effect by the type determining means is higher than in the second period. The third specific effect is determined in the first period at a common specific ratio by the type determining means, regardless of whether or not it is a discrimination result suggestive effect indicating a specific discrimination result.

As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the specific performance of the type indicating the discrimination result during the first period, so there is an effect that the expectation for the specified discrimination result can be maintained until the second period.

<Feature V group> (varies the effective number of button operations according to the effect)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, and a specific effect mode executing means for executing a specific effect mode based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition in a specific period included in the execution period of the specific effect. and specific control execution means capable of executing a predetermined specific control based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, wherein the specific control execution means performs the second A game characterized in that the specific control is more difficult to execute when a condition is satisfied during the specific period than when the condition is satisfied during a period different from the specific period. Machine V1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, an operation means that a player can operate is provided, and a suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning a game by operating the operation means during the execution of an interesting effect. There are also those that can execute

Furthermore, in such conventional gaming machines, there are those in which various settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the operating means while the suggestive effect is not being executed.

However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that the setting of the gaming machine may be changed against the player's will due to an operation mistake during execution of the suggestive effect.

On the other hand, the gaming machine V1 has the following effects. That is, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. A specific effect mode is executed by the specific effect mode executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition during a specific period included in the execution period of the specific effect. A predetermined specific control is executed by the specific control executing means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. It is more difficult for the specific control executing means to execute the specific control when the second condition is satisfied during the specific period than when the second condition is satisfied during a period different from the specific period.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being preoccupied with the specific control due to the execution of the specific control in the specific period, so that the player can concentrate on the specific effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more preferably.

The gaming machine V1 is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first condition is established based on the operation of the first operation content being performed on the operation means during the specific period of time. and the second condition is satisfied when an operation of a second operation content different from the first operation content is executed on the operating means. Gaming machine V2.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is established based on the fact that the operation having the first operation content is performed on the operation means during the specific period. The second condition is established based on the fact that an operation having a second operation content different from the first operation content has been performed on the operating means.

As a result, when a player who wants to display a specific effect mode during a specific period of time erroneously operates the second operation content while trying to operate the first operation content, Since execution of specific control is restricted, there is an effect that it is possible to concentrate on specific effects.

In the gaming machine V2, the specific control executing means executes the specific control each time the operation of the second operation content is executed during a period different from the specific period, and performs the second control during the specific period. The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the specific control is executed based on the fact that the operation of the operation content has been established for a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V2, the specific control executing means can execute the specific control each time the operation of the second operation content is executed in a period different from the specific period. Then, the specific control execution means executes specific control based on the fact that the second operation content has been established for a predetermined specific number of times during the specific period. It is possible to fulfill the desire of the player who thinks that. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the game machine V2 or V3, the operating means is composed of at least a first operating means and a second operating means provided adjacent to the first operating means. The operation of the operation content of (1) is an operation to the first operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is an operation to the second operation means.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V2 or V3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operating means is composed of at least the first operating means and the second operating means provided adjacent to the first operating means. An operation of the first operation content is an operation on the first operation means, and an operation of the second operation content is an operation on the second operation means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the second control from being executed against the player's will when the second operating means is erroneously operated while trying to operate the first operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more preferably.

A gaming machine V5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific control is control for changing a predetermined setting of the gaming machine from a first setting to a second setting.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, when specific control is executed, the predetermined setting of the gaming machine is changed from the first setting to the second setting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the game machine from being changed during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be concentrated by the specific effect.

In any one of game machines V1 to V5, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. and a first mode as the type of the specific effect mode executed by the specific effect mode execution means, and a second mode different from the first mode. mode type determination means for determining one type from among the When the first condition is established in the execution period of the specific effect indicating the specific determination result, the ratio of determining the second mode is higher than that of the first mode. A gaming machine V6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination by the determination means is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. be. As the type of the specific effect mode to be executed by the specific effect mode execution means, one type is selected by the mode type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. It is determined. The specific effect is composed of an effect for indicating the determination result of the determining means. When the first condition is established in the execution period of the specific effect indicating the specific determination result, the determination ratio of the first mode by the mode type determining means becomes higher than the determination rate of the second mode.

As a result, the player can expect that the second mode will be determined each time the first condition is satisfied, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V2, an allowable state in which execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is permitted when the second condition is satisfied during the specific period, and when the second condition is satisfied, The game machine V7 is characterized by comprising state switching means for switching between a restricted state in which execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is restricted and a restricted state.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V2, the allowable state in which the specific control executing means is allowed to execute the specific control when the second condition is satisfied during the specific period, and the second condition Since the state switching means switches between a restricted state in which the execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is restricted when the is established, the player wants the specific control to be executed during the specific period. can fulfill your wishes. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine V7, a limit state setting means for setting the limit state based on the start of the specific period is provided, and the state switching means controls the operation means during the limit state. The game machine V8 is characterized in that it is switched to the allowable state based on the execution of the operation of the operation content.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the restricted state is set by the restricted state setting means based on the start of the specific period. The state switching means switches to the allowable state based on the operation of the third operation content being performed on the operating means during the restricted state.

As a result, it is possible to easily fulfill the desire of the player who dares to execute the specific control during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the game machine V8, the state switching means controls the restriction based on the fact that an operation of a fourth operation content different from the third operation content is executed on the operation means during the allowable state. A gaming machine V9 characterized by switching to a state.

According to the gaming machine V9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V8, based on the execution of the operation of the fourth operation content different from the third operation content on the operating means during the allowable state, Since it is possible to switch to the restricted state by the state switching means, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be further improved.

The gaming machine V10 of the gaming machine V9, wherein the specific effect mode executing means restricts the execution of the specific effect mode when the first condition is satisfied in the allowable state.

According to the gaming machine V10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V9, when the first condition is satisfied in the allowable state, execution of the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode executing means is restricted. can concentrate on controlling the Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

In the game machine V10, the game machine V11 is characterized in that the operation of the fourth operation content is the same as the operation of the first operation content.

According to the game machine V11, in addition to the effects of the game machine V10, since the operation of the fourth operation content and the operation of the first operation content are the same, switching from the allowable state to the restricted state and the specified can be realized by the operation of the same operation content. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation can be simplified.

In any one of the gaming machines U8 to U10, the specific effect executing means performs a period from when the discrimination result suggesting effect in the second effect period is started until a period of the same length as the first effect period elapses. The specific effect can be executed in a first period set between and in a second period set after a period of the same length as the first effect period has passed. The type determining means has a higher rate of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type determining means The determining means determines the third specific effect in the first period at a common specific ratio regardless of whether or not the discrimination result suggestive effect indicates the specific discrimination result. Gaming machine U11.

According to the gaming machine U11, the first period set between the start of the discrimination result suggestive effect of the second effect period and the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period, and the first effect A specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means in a second period which is set after a period of the same length as the period has passed. The type determination means determines a third specific effect with a higher percentage when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period. Irrespective of at least whether or not it is a discrimination result suggestive effect indicating a specific discrimination result, the third specific effect is determined by the type determining means at a common rate when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period.

As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the specific performance of the type indicating the discrimination result during the first period, so there is an effect that the expectation for the specified discrimination result can be maintained until the second period.

<Feature W group> (A configuration in which the degree of expectation varies even with the same action according to the appearance timing of the mini character)
A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a display to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing an advantageous privilege game, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating the determination result of the determining means, and a predetermined effect for the display means during execution of the specific effect. display control means capable of displaying a specific display mode; a first timing included in the effect period of the specific effect as a timing at which the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means; and a display timing determining means for determining one display timing from among a plurality of display timings including at least a second timing different from the timing, wherein the second timing is a second determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine W1 characterized in that the ratio of determining the specific effect indicating the specific determination result is higher than the specific effect indicating the specific determination result.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional game machines, apart from the interest effect related to the variable display of symbols, there is a further interest by making a character perform a predetermined action to indicate a predetermined degree of expectation. There are also some that are trying to improve

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it sometimes becomes difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the variable display of symbols and the action of the character.

On the other hand, the game machine W1 has the following effects. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game execution means provides a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A game is executed. A specific effect indicating the determination result by the determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means. During execution of the specific effect, a predetermined specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Display timing is determined from a plurality of timings including at least a first timing included in the performance period of the specific performance and a second timing different from the first timing as the timing at which the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. The display timing of 1 is determined by means. The second timing is configured such that a specific effect indicating a specific determination result is determined more frequently than a specific effect indicating a second determination result different from the specific determination result.

As a result, the player can play the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W1, an effect mode executing means capable of executing at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be executed after the first effect mode is finished as the effect mode during execution of the specific effect. In the second effect mode, the ratio of execution of the specific effect indicating the specific determination result is higher than the specific effect indicating the second determination result, and the specific effect The game machine W2 is characterized in that the display mode is configured to at least suggest that the second effect mode will be performed by being performed at the second timing.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the effect mode during execution of the specific effect, at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be executed after the first effect mode is completed are configured to be executable by the effect mode executing means. there is The second effect mode is configured such that the specific effect indicating the specific determination result is executed at a higher rate than the specific effect indicating the second determination result. The specific display mode is configured to be able to at least suggest that the second rendering mode will be performed by being performed at the second timing.

As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which a game is played by comparing a specific effect with a specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, the display timing determining means determines the second timing in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is executed more frequently than in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is not executed. A game machine W3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W2, the second timing is determined by the display timing determining means in the specific performance in which the second performance mode is executed rather than in the specific performance in which the second performance mode is not executed. Since the ratio is high, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect that the display timing of the specific display mode will be the second timing.

In the game machine W2 or W3, the specific effect is to notify the determination result of the determination means at the end of the first effect mode when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode execution means, The gaming machine W4 is characterized in that the second timing is composed of display timings at which the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W2 or W3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode executing means, the determination result of the determining means is notified by the specific effect at the end of the first effect mode. When the specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode.

Thus, by comparing the progress of the first effect mode and the display timing of the specific display mode, the player can determine that the second effect mode will start before the second effect mode is executed. can be understood. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine W4, the first timing is a display timing at which the display of the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first presentation mode.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W4, when the specific display mode is displayed at the first timing, the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first presentation mode. It can be difficult to predict from a specific display mode whether or not the second rendering mode will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation for the execution of the second effect mode.

In any one of gaming machines W1 to W5, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball, a value imparting means that imparts a predetermined value based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and a ball entering means. A second privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered can be entered, and the game ball has entered the specific area. 2 privilege game execution means, wherein the privilege game execution means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period as the privilege game. Machine W6.

According to the game machine W6, in addition to the effects of the game machines W1 to W5, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. do. A predetermined valuable value is imparted by the value imparting means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter. A second privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the game ball entering the specific area. As a privilege game, the variable means is changed from the second value to the first position for a predetermined period by the privilege game executing means.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific area, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In a gaming machine W6, a distribution means for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to either the specific area or a second area different from the specific area, and the privilege game execution means As the type of the privilege game to be executed, the variable means is varied to the first position during a period during which the game ball entered into the ball entering means is likely to be sorted to the specific area by the sorting means. A plurality of privilege game types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the distribution means easily distributes to the second area. and a privilege game type determination means for determining one type of the above, wherein the privilege game type determination means determines the first privilege game based on the specific determination result, and the second The game machine W7 is characterized in that the second privilege game is determined based on the determination result.

According to the game machine W7, in addition to the effects of the game machine W6, the following effects are produced. Namely, the game ball that entered the ball entering means is distributed by the distribution means to either the specific area or the second area different from the specific area. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable means is varied to the first position during the period in which the game ball entered into the ball entry means is easily sorted to the specific area by the sorting means. One type of a plurality of types of privilege games including at least one privilege game and a second privilege game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the distribution means easily distributes to the second area. is determined by the privilege game type determining means. While the first privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means based on the specific determination result, the second privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means based on the second determination result. It is determined.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can be strongly expected to obtain a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine W7, the second timing is the specific effect indicating the second determination result rather than the specific effect indicating the result of determination that the privilege game is not executed by the privilege game executing means. The gaming machine W8 is characterized in that it is configured such that the ratio of the determination of the is higher.

According to the gaming machine W8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W7, the method of the specific performance indicating the second determination result rather than the specific performance indicating the failure determination result in which the privilege game is not executed by the privilege game executing means Since the second timing is determined at a higher rate, when a specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, there is an effect that expectations for execution of the privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W8, the second privilege game execution means determines that the determination result of the determination means is a third determination result different from any of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the out-of-range determination result. The second privilege game can be executed based on the display timing determination means, the specific effect indicating the result of the determination of the deviation, and the specific effect indicating the result of the third determination. , a gaming machine W9 characterized in that it is configured such that a ratio for determining the second timing is common.

According to the game machine W9, in addition to the effects of the game machine W8, the following effects are produced. That is, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the third discrimination result different from any of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the outlier discrimination result. be done. A ratio of determining the second timing by the display timing determination means is made common between the specific effect indicating the result of the determination of the failure and the specific effect indicating the result of the third determination.

As a result, even when the specific display mode is not displayed at the second timing, there is an effect that it is possible to maintain the expectation of the specific effect indicating the third determination result.

<Characteristic X group> (During the small win, the production that suggests the expectation that it is switched to the route that is easy to be guided to the V prize mouth with high expectations for time saving is executed at a timing that is not in time even if you see it and hit it)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. a variable variable means;
A first flow path configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball-entering means can flow down, a second flow path that is different from the first flow path, and a game ball that has entered the ball-entering means. a distribution means for distributing the game ball to any one of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path; a specific area, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and a discrimination for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. means and variable game execution for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. means, a first distribution state in which a game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed to the first flow path based on the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means; Distribution control means for controlling the distribution means such that a plurality of distribution states including at least a second distribution state to be distributed to a second flow path are switched in a specific switching pattern; and execution of the variable game. A gaming machine X1 characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect suggesting that the game machine is in the first distribution state.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the state of the distribution member, and it is difficult to grasp to which area the game ball entering the V winning device is distributed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine X1, there is a first position where a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means into which a game ball can be entered, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means is configured to be variable between the second position and the second position. A first flow path and a second flow path are provided at positions where a game ball entering the ball entering means can flow down. A game ball entered into the ball-entering means is distributed to any one of a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path by the distribution means. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area. A game is executed. Determination by the determination means is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period by the variable game execution means. A variable game that is variable in position is executed. Based on the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means, the game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed to the first flow path, and the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. The distribution control means controls the distribution means such that a plurality of distribution states including at least the second distribution state are switched in a predetermined switching pattern. During the execution of the variable game, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect suggesting that the player is in the first distribution state.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the specific performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is

In the gaming machine X1, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls is provided, and the specific switching pattern is set so that the game balls shot by the shooting means are in the first distribution state after the specific effect is started. A gaming machine X2 characterized in that the length of the period for switching to the first distribution state is set so that it is difficult to reach the ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1, the specific switching pattern is such that after the specific effect is started, the game ball shot by the shooting means is in the first distribution state. Since the length of the period of switching to the first distribution state is set so that it is difficult to reach the , it realizes a game that makes you expect that the specific performance will be executed luckily at the timing when the game ball enters. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a third flow path different from either the first flow path or the second flow path, and a third flow path configured such that a game ball that has entered the ball-entering means can flow down. and a second specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the path can enter, and the sorting means distributes the game ball that has entered the ball entering means to the first flow path. , the second flow path, or the third flow path, and the distribution control means comprises the first distribution state, the second distribution state, and the ball-entering means. and a third distribution state in which the game ball entered into the third flow path is distributed to the third flow path, and the distribution means is controlled so as to switch according to the specific switching pattern, and the privilege game execution means The gaming machine X3 executes the privilege game based on a game ball entering at least one of the specific area and the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1 or X2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second specific area is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the third flow path that the game ball that has entered the ball-entering means can flow down can enter. A game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed to any one of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. A first distribution state, a second distribution state, and a third distribution state in which a game ball entering the ball entering means is distributed to the third flow path are switched in a specific switching pattern, The distribution control means controls the distribution means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the game ball entering at least one of the specific area and the second specific area.

Thereby, even if the game ball does not enter the ball-entering means during execution of the specific performance, the special performance is executed by the game ball entering the ball during the third distribution state. Even when the game ball enters the ball-entering means at a timing different from that during the execution of , there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be maintained.

In the gaming machine X3, as the game state after the privilege game is finished, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state. game state setting means for setting the game state setting means, the game ball enters the specific area than when the game ball enters the second specific area and the privilege game is executed; The gaming machine X4 is characterized in that the second game state is set at a higher rate when the bonus game is executed.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, as the game state after the privilege game ends. is set. When a game ball enters the second specific area and the privilege game is executed, the second specific area by the game state setting means is higher than when the game ball enters the second specific area and the privilege game is executed. The setting ratio of the game state increases.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect that the game ball will enter the ball entering means during execution of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine X4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game, and the privilege game is executed. one of a plurality of at least a first variable game type in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means and a second variable game type in which the second game state is set when the game state setting means and a variable game type determination means for determining the type of the first variable game type is configured so that the proportion determined by the variable game type determination means is higher than that of the second variable game type. A gaming machine X5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, when a game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game and the privilege game is executed, the game state setting means One type is determined by the variable game type determination means from among a plurality of at least including a first variable game type in which the first game state is set by and a second variable game type in which the second game state is set by be. The first variable game type is configured to have a higher percentage determined by the variable game type determining means than the second variable game type.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to expect that the second variable game type is determined when the game ball enters the second specific area.

The gaming machine X5 is provided with a second specific effect executing means for executing a second specific effect suggesting that the third allocation state is established during execution of the variable game of the second variable game type. Characteristic game machine X6.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X5, during execution of the variable game of the second variable game type, the second specific effect suggesting that the third distribution state is reached is the second specific effect. Since it is executed by the effect executing means, the player can be made to recognize that the second variable game type is set when the second specific effect is executed in the third distribution state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can strongly expect to enter the game ball into the ball entering means during execution of the second specific effect.

In the gaming machine X5 or X6, the game state setting means determines the type of the variable game determined by the variable game type determining means when the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed. The game machine X7 is characterized in that the second game state is set as the game state after the privilege game is finished, regardless of whether the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X5 or X6, when the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed, the variable game type determined by the variable game type determining means Since the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the privilege game is completed regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the specific effect There is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation.

In any one of the game machines X4 to X7, the game machine X8 is characterized in that the second game state is a game state in which the determination result of the determination means is more likely to be a specific determination result than the first game state. .

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines X4 to X7, in the second gaming state, the discrimination result of the discrimination means is more likely to be a specific discrimination result than in the first gaming state. On the other hand, there is an effect that the second game state can be strongly expected.

In the gaming machine X8, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means are provided, and the discrimination means is connected to the first ball-entering means. a first determination means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball, and a second determination means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry means; At least, the determination by the first determination means is configured to have a lower probability of obtaining the specific determination result than the determination by the second determination means, and the first game The gaming machine X9 is characterized in that the state is configured such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than in the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine X9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there are provided a first ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means. While discrimination is executed by the first discriminating means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, second discrimination is carried out based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Determination is performed by the means. The determination by the first determination means is configured to have a lower probability of obtaining a specific determination result than the determination by the second determination means. In the first game state, it becomes more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means than in the second game state.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly anticipate that the variable game will be executed when the determination by the second determination means is performed.

In the gaming machine X9, a second position that can be changed between a third position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. A gaming machine X10 comprising variable means, wherein said first game state is configured such that said second variable means is more difficult to change to said third position than said second game state. .

According to the game machine X10, in addition to the effects of the game machine X9, the following effects are produced. That is, a second variable means is provided which is variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. It is In the first game state, the second variable means is more difficult to change to the third position than in the second game state.

As a result, the superiority of the second game state can be further enhanced, so there is an effect that the second game state can be expected more strongly.

<Feature Y group> (small winning open control that suppresses magnet goto without affecting normal game)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be varied, a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter, and the variable means is predetermined based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied from the second position to the first position for a period; a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player; a discharging means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entering means to the outside of the ball entering means; and execution of the variable game. Based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period from the start of the variable game, regardless of whether or not all the game balls entered into the ball entry means have been discharged by the discharge means. A gaming machine Y1 characterized by comprising variable game ending means capable of ending the game.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entry opening that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entry opening. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed by There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a privilege game (such as a winning game) that is advantageous to the player by playing, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2011-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sorting member that sorts a game ball entered inside the V winning device into either a specified area or a non-specified area. , the player's interest in the game is enhanced by making the player pay attention to how the game is distributed by the distribution member.

However, in such a conventional game machine, if a game ball is forcibly guided to a specific area regardless of the state of the distribution member due to cheating using a magnet or the like, the cheater There was a problem that it was unfairly advantageous.

On the other hand, the gaming machine Y1 has the following effects. That is, the variable means is changed between the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter. A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition is executed by the variable game executing means. Based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area during the execution period of the variable game, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting means. The game ball entering the ball entering means is discharged to the outside of the ball entering means by the discharging means. Based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period from the start of execution of the variable game, regardless of whether or not all the game balls entered into the ball entry means are discharged by the discharge means, the variable game The variable game is ended by the ending means.

As a result, there is an effect that the variable game can be ended more favorably.

In the gaming machine Y1, a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can pass; a second distribution state for distributing to a second region different from the specific region; and a distribution means that can be varied between the first distribution state and the second distribution state based on the establishment of the specific condition. and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution means to switch in a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the specific period, the specific flow path during the second distribution state A game ball that has passed through and flowed down toward the specific area has a length that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. Characteristic game machine Y2.

According to the game machine Y2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Y1, the following effects are produced. That is, a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass is distributed to a specific region, and a second distribution state that is different from the specific region. The second distribution state and the distribution means are configured to be variable. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched according to a predetermined specific switching pattern. During the specific period, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the specific channel during the second distribution state and flowed down toward the specific area to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. consists of periods of length

As a result, in the event of an unnatural movement in which the ball flows down into the specific area even though it has passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state, the ball can be changed before entering the specific area. You can end the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the act of forcibly causing the game ball to flow down to the specific area due to fraud.

In the gaming machine Y2, during the specific period, a game ball that has passed through the specific flow path during the first distribution state and flowed down toward the specific area is A gaming machine Y3 characterized by comprising a period of a length in which a ball can be easily entered into the specific area.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y2, during the specific period, during the first distribution state, the game ball that passed through the specific flow path and flowed down toward the specific area Since it is composed of a period of time during which the ball can easily enter the specific area during the execution period, if the ball enters the specific area with a natural action, the predetermined privilege will be given normally. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating without affecting ordinary players.

In the game machine Y2 or Y3, the distribution means is variable to the first distribution state to close the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path to allow game balls to pass through the specific range, and A game machine Y4 characterized in that the bottom surface of the specific range is opened by changing to the second distribution state, and game balls that have reached the specific range are dropped toward the second area.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y2 or Y3, the distribution means is changed to the first distribution state, so that the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path is closed and the specific range is released. can pass through, while the distribution means is changed to the second distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range is opened, and the game ball that has reached the specific range is dropped toward the second area. In the case where the game ball flows down to the specific area even though it passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state, the game ball is forcibly guided to the specific area by floating the game ball against the specific flow path with a magnet or the like. can be limited to cases where serious misconduct has been committed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating without affecting players who are playing games legally.

The gaming machine Y4 includes shielding means for shielding the game area so as to make it difficult for the player to touch the game area, and the specific range is a distance from the shielding means that is greater than other ranges in the specific flow path. A game machine Y5 characterized in that it is configured such that the

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game area is shielded by the shielding means so as to make it difficult for the player to touch the game area. The specific range is configured to be farther from the shielding means than other ranges in the specific channel.

As a result, even if an attempt is made to cheat by guiding the game ball with a magnet or the like, the influence of the magnetic force on the game ball can be weakened in the specific range, so that it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Any one of the game machines Y1 to Y5 is provided with determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and the variable game execution means is based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. A game machine Y6 characterized in that the variable game is executed by pressing the variable game.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Y1 to Y5, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game is executed by the variable game execution means when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

In the gaming machine Y6, a first game state in which the discrimination result of the discriminating means is unlikely to be the specific discrimination result, and the first game state, as game states after the granting of the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting means is completed. and game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the specific determination result is more likely to occur than the second game state.

According to the gaming machine Y7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y6, the first game state in which the discrimination result of the discriminating means is unlikely to be a specific discrimination result as the game state after the granting of the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting means is completed. and a second game state in which a specific determination result is more likely to occur than the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the game will be played.

In the gaming machine Y7, a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can pass; a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered the specific channel is distributed to the specific area; a second distribution state for distributing to a second region different from the specific region; and a distribution means that can be varied between the first distribution state and the second distribution state based on the establishment of the specific condition. and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution means to switch in a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the privilege provision means includes at least one of the specific region and the second region a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed as the predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and the game state setting means, when the game ball has entered the specific area When the ball enters the second area, the ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is lower than that. A gaming machine Y8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Y8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered a specific channel through which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass is distributed to a specific region, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to a second region that is different from the specific region. Two distribution states and a distribution means are configured to be variable. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched according to a predetermined specific switching pattern. Based on the entry of the game ball into at least one of the specific area and the second area, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege giving means as a predetermined privilege. The second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed when the game ball enters the second area rather than when the game ball enters the specific area. lower percentage.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the specific area.

Gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8, M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P10, Q1 to Q9, R1 to R9, S1 to S8, T1 to T8, U1 to U11, V1 to V11, W1 to W9, X1 to X10, Y1 to A game machine Z1 in any one of Y8, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8, M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P10, Q1 to Q9, R1 to R9, S1 to S8, T1 to T8, U1 to U11, V1 to V11, W1 to W9, X1 to X10, Y1 to A game machine Z2 in any one of Y8, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8, M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P10, Q1 to Q9, R1 to R9, S1 to S8, T1 to T8, U1 to U11, V1 to V11, W1 to W9, X1 to X10, Y1 to A game machine Z3 according to any one of Y8, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and execution is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) passing through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device A pachinko machine has been proposed that makes it possible to provide a privilege game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2011-010741 A publication).
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that a fraudulent act of fraudulently passing through a specific area using a magnet or the like is excessively advantageous to the fraudulent person.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing cheating.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and the first A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and a specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the ball entering means can be entered. variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition; and a period during which the variable game is executed. a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball entered the specific area during the period; Ejecting means for ejecting to the outside of the means, and based on the passage of a predetermined specific period from the start of execution of the variable game, all game balls entered into the entering means and variable game end means capable of ending the variable game regardless of whether or not the game is discharged by the discharge means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which a specific flow path through which a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can pass, and a game ball that has entered the specific flow path. A first distribution state for distributing to the specific region and a second distribution state for distributing to a second region different from the specific region, and based on the establishment of the specific condition, distribution control means for controlling the distribution means such that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched according to a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the specific period is A game ball passing through the specific flow path during the second distribution state and flowing down toward the specific area may enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. Consists of lengthy periods of difficulty.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein during the specific period, during the first allocation state, the game passes through the specific flow path and flows down toward the specific area. The game ball is configured to have a length of time during which the game ball can easily enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the distribution means changes the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path to the first distribution state. By closing the specific range so that game balls can pass through and changing the state to the second distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range is opened and the game balls that have reached the specific range are directed toward the second area. to drop it.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, comprises shielding means for shielding the game area so that it is difficult for the player to touch the game area, and the specific range is the specific The distance to the shielding means is configured to be greater than other areas in the flow path.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a ball to enter, and a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter. Variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the specified game during the execution period of the variable game. a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the area; and discharging means for discharging all game balls entered into said ball entering means by said discharging means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period from the start of execution of said variable game and variable game ending means capable of ending the variable game regardless of whether or not the variable game is played.
As a result, there is an effect that fraud can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, a specific flow path through which a game ball entering the ball entering means can pass, and the specific flow path a first distribution state in which a game ball that has landed is distributed to the specific area and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to a second area different from the specific area; distribution control means for controlling the distribution means such that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched according to a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the establishment of a condition; In the specific period, the game ball passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state and flowed down toward the specific area is in the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. It consists of periods of length during which it becomes difficult to enter the ball.
As a result, in the event of an unnatural movement that is highly likely to be fraudulent, such as flowing down to the specific area despite passing through the specific flow path during the second distribution state, the user will not be able to move to the specific area. A variable game can be ended before entering a ball. Therefore, there is an effect that fraud can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the specific period passes through the specific flow path during the first distribution state, and Since the game ball flowing down toward the specific area has a length of time during which the game ball can easily enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game, the game ball is first swung. When the ball passes through the specific channel and enters the specific area during the minute state, a predetermined privilege can be given normally. Therefore, there is an effect that cheating can be suppressed without affecting the game of normal players who are not cheating.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 or 3, the distribution means changes the first distribution state so that the specific flow By closing the bottom surface of the specific range on the path to allow the game ball to pass through the specific range, and by varying the second distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range is opened and the game ball reaches the specific range. is dropped toward the second area, a case in which it flows down to the specific area even though it passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state is prevented from falling to the specific flow path by a magnet or the like. It can be limited to the case where a fraudulent act such as floating a game ball and forcibly guiding it to a specific area is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that cheating can be suppressed without affecting the game of normal players who are not cheating.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, it is equipped with shielding means for shielding the game area so that it is difficult for the player to touch the game area, The specific range is configured to be farther from the shielding means than other ranges in the specific channel.
As a result, even if an attempt is made to cheat a game ball by using a magnet or the like to guide a game ball to a specific area, the influence of the magnetic force on the game ball can be weakened in the specific range, so that the game ball cannot be guided to the specific area. can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that fraud can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
223fe press count counter (part of holding means)
223ff operation frequency flag (part of holding means)
S264 Bonus game executing means in eleventh and twelfth embodiments
S305, S322 Determination means in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments
S4504 First effect executing means in eleventh and twelfth embodiments
S40406 Second effect executing means and third effect executing means in eleventh and twelfth embodiments
S40603 to S40608 ratio setting means
S40609 First rendering mode determining means and second rendering mode determining means in eleventh and twelfth embodiments
S40610 First specific effect executing means and second specific effect executing means in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments
S41203 establishment status determination means
CB center button (operation means)

Claims (1)

a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result,
a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the determining means;
a second effect executing means for executing a second effect including at least a predetermined specific aspect in a predetermined first effect period included in the execution period of the first effect;
a first specific effect execution means for executing a first specific effect during execution of the second effect based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition;
As the effect modes of the first specific effect executed by the first specific effect executing means, there are a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can suggest that the player is more advantageous than the first effect mode. a first effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least
During a second performance period, which is a period included in the execution period of the first performance and after the first performance period, a third performance including at least the specific aspect is executed. a third effect execution means for
a second specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect during execution of the third effect based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition;
A second effect mode for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode as the effect mode of the second specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means. and a production mode determining means,
The third effect execution means executes the one first effect when the first specific effect executed during the execution period of the one first effect is the first effect mode. The third effect can be executed in the second effect period included in the period,
The game machine is
a first situation in which the second effect is executed but the third effect is not executed until the first effect is completed when the first effect for indicating the specific determination result is executed; , and a second situation in which both the second effect and the third effect are executed by the time the first effect ends.
The ratio of the second effect mode determined by the first effect mode determination means in the first effect that is the first effect for indicating the specific determination result and in which the first situation is established is It is higher than the ratio of the second performance mode determined by the first performance mode determination means in the first performance for indicating a specific determination result and in which the second situation is established. is the configuration ,
The first effect in which both the second effect and the third effect are executed is more suitable than the first effect in which the second effect is executed but the third effect is not executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a configuration in which the degree of expectation that a discrimination result is shown is high .

Images